Alcatel-Lucent GSM

9100 BTS Hardware Description

BTS Document Sub-System Description Release B10

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

BLANK PAGE BREAK

Status Short title

RELEASED 9100 BTS HW Desc.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent.

2 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

Contents

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.1 Modularity and Common Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.2.1 Cabinet Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.2.2 Cabinet Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.3 Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 1.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 1.3.2 Subrack Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 1.4 Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 1.4.2 Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 1.5 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Configurations - Rack Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 2.1 Naming Conventions for the BTS Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 2.2 Indoor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 2.2.1 Indoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 2.2.2 Indoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 2.2.3 Indoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 2.2.4 Indoor Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 2.2.5 Indoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 2.2.6 Indoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 2.2.7 AC Indoor Configurations GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 2.3 9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 2.3.1 G3 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 2.3.2 G3 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 2.3.3 G3 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 2.3.4 G3 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 2.3.5 G3 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 2.3.6 G3 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 2.4 9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.4.1 G4 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.4.2 G4 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 2.4.3 G4 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 2.4.4 G4 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 2.4.5 G4 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.4.6 G4 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 2.5 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.5.1 MBI Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 850/900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.5.2 MBI Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 2.5.3 MBI Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 2.5.4 MBI Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 2.5.5 MBI Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 . . . 116 2.5.6 MBI Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 2.6 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI3 Cabinet) . . . . 134 2.6.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 2.6.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 2.6.3 Multiband & MB Cell MBI3 - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 139 2.6.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 2.6.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 2.6.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 2.6.7 Extended Cell MBI3 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

2

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3 / 914

Contents

2.7

2.8

2.9

2.10

2.11

2.12

2.13

Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for Outer Cell MBI3 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 2.6.9 Mixed High Power/Twin-TRX Configurations - Extended Cell - MBI3 - Extended Cell with mixed HP/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 2.7.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 2.7.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 2.7.3 Multiband & MB Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 2.7.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 2.7.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 2.7.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 2.7.7 Extended Cell MBI5 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 2.7.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell MBI5 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 2.8.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 2.8.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 2.8.3 Multiband & MB Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 2.8.4 Multiband Configurations Capacity Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 2.8.5 Multiband Configurations Coverage Mode with TX Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 2.8.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 2.8.7 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 2.8.8 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 2.8.9 Extended Cell MBI5 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 2.8.10 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell MBI5 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AA and AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 2.9.1 MBI3 - 1 sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 2.9.2 MBI3 - 2 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 2.9.3 MBI3 - 3 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 2.9.4 MBI5 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 2.9.5 MBI5 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 2.9.6 MBI5 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX (Only in MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 2.10.1 MBI5 AB variant - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . 210 2.10.2 MBI5 AB variant - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 211 2.10.3 MBI5 AB variant - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 212 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed High Power/Twin-TRX Configurations (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 2.11.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 2.11.2 Configurations Extended Cell - MBI5 - Extended Cell with mixed HP/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant Equipped with Three Subracks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 2.12.1 MBI53 - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 2.12.2 MBI53 - 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 2.12.3 MBI53 - 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 2.12.4 MBI53 - 4 Sectors with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Outdoor Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 2.13.1 Outdoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 2.13.2 Outdoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 2.13.3 Outdoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 2.13.4 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

2.6.8

4 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

Contents

2.14 2.15

2.16

2.17

2.18

2.19

2.20

2.21

2.13.5 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRX in 9100 BTS Outdoor Compact (CPT2) . . . . . . . . . 266 Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 2.15.1 Capacity Mode Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 2.15.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 2.15.3 Multiband Configurations - CBO - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX . . . . 270 2.15.4 Coverage Mode TX Diversity Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 2.15.5 Coverage Mode with TX Diversity Low Loss Configurations - CBO - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 2.15.6 Coverage Mode TX-Diversity 4 RX Configurations - CBO - 1 Sector TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 2.16.1 CBO 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 2.16.2 CBO 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 2.16.3 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 2.16.4 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 2.17.1 MBO Standard Configurations - GSM 850/900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 2.17.2 MBO Low Losses Configurations - GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 2.17.3 MBO High Power Configurations - GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 2.17.4 MBO Multiband BTS Configurations - GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 . . 291 2.17.5 MBO Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 2.17.6 MBO Multiband BTS, Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM 850/1800/1900 303 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX . 305 2.18.1 MBO1 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 2.18.2 MBO1 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 2.18.3 MBO1 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 2.18.4 MBO2 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 2.18.5 MBO2 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 2.18.6 MBO2 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . 311 2.19.1 9100 MBO1E 1 Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 2.19.2 9100 MBO1E 2 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 2.19.3 9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 2.19.4 9100 MBO2E 2 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 2.19.5 9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 2.19.6 9100 MBO2 4 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 2.19.7 9100 MBO2 6 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 2.20.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 2.20.2 MBO1E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 2.20.3 MBO1E - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 2.20.4 MBO2E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 2.20.5 MBO2E - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Configurations with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . 320 2.21.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 2.21.2 Transceiver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 2.21.3 Cabling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 2.21.4 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 2.21.5 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 2.21.6 Multiband & Multiband Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 2.21.7 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 2.21.8 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 2.21.9 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 2.21.10 Extended Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 2.21.11 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

5 / 914

Contents

3

4

Indoor Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 CIMI/CIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Interconnection Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 CIMI/CIDI Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.4 CIMI/CIDI DC Supplies Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.5 CIMI/CIDI Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.6 CIMI/CIDI Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.7 CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 CIMA/CIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 DC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 AC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Interconnection Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 CIMA/CIDE Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 CIMA/CIDE External Power Supply Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.7 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.8 CIMA/CIDE Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.9 CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Multistandard Base Station Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 DC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 AC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 MBI Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4 MBI3/MBI5 Cabinet Interconnection Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5 MBI Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.6 MBI External Power Supply Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.7 MBI Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.8 MBI Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.9 MBI Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Outdoor Cabinets General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 COME/COMI/COEP with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 CODE/CODI/COEP with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 CPT2 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4 MBO1 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5 MBO1DC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.6 MBO1E with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7 MBO1EDC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8 MBO1T with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.9 MBO2 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.10 MBO2E with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.11 MBO2DC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.12 MBO2EDC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.13 COBO with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.14 Side Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.15 BTS Compartment 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.16 BTS Compartment 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.17 MBO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.18 MBO1DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.19 MBO1T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.20 MBO1E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.21 MBOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.22 MBOEDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.23 MBOEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.24 CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Outdoor Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

365 366 367 370 371 376 377 379 383 384 385 385 386 389 391 391 393 398 403 404 405 405 406 410 412 416 417 424 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 443 445 446 447 448 448 449 450 451 451 451 454

6 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

Contents

5

6

7

4.2.1 COME/COMI/CODI/CODE Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 CPT2 Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 CBO Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6 Outdoor Cabinet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection Panel COMI/COME/CODI/CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Interconnection Panel - COME/COMI COAR Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Interconnection Panel - CODE/CODI COAR Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Interconnection Panel - 9100 BTS Outdoor Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Outdoor Cabinet Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 XIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 External Clock Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Miscellaneous Connections Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Outdoor Control Board CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/ MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Connection Area (COAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 BTSRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 XIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 RIBAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 COME/COMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 CODE/CODI/CPT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 MBO1/MBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4 MBO1DC/MBO2DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.5 MBO1T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.6 MBO1E/MBO2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.7 CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.8 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Outdoor Cabinet Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Outdoor Cabinet Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Outdoor Cabinet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 Outdoor Cabinet DC Power and Alarm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.2 Outdoor Cabinet Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 External Indoor Battery Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 External Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Battery Cabinet External Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 External Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Auxiliary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Telecommunications Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 STASR General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 STASR Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 STASR Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Power Supplies and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 Connectors and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 SRACDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

454 455 456 457 459 459 463 464 465 466 467 467 471 471 471 472 474 477 478 480 481 481 484 486 487 488 489 491 493 494 495 495 512 513 513 520 527 528 530 532 532 534 535 538 539 541 545 546 546 547 547 547 548 549 550

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

7 / 914

Contents

8

9

10

7.1.1 SRACDC Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 SRACDC Subrack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.3 SRACDC Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 ACSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 ACSR Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 ACSR Subrack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.3 ACSR Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 ASIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 ASIB Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 ASIB Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3 ASIB Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station Unit Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Introduction to Station Unit Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Transmission and Clock Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Transmission and Clock Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.3 Station Unit Module Clock Generation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 Q1 Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Base Station Internal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Operations and Maintenance Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 BTS Control Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 OMU Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 Glue Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Station Unit Module Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Station Unit Module Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 Station Unit Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.1 SUMP/SUMA LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.2 SUMX LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Single Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1 Introduction to Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.2 Digital Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3 Analog Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.4 TRE Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.5 Transceiver Equipment LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.6 Transceiver Equipment Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 TWIN Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Introduction to TWIN TRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.2 Digital Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.3 Analog Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.4 TWIN TRA Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.5 Transceiver Equipments Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.6 Transceiver Equipments LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.7 Transceiver Equipments Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 ANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 AN Downlink Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.2 AN Uplink Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.3 BTS Control Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.4 Antenna Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.5 AN Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.6 ANX LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.7 ANX Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.8 ANX Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 ANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

550 551 551 553 553 554 554 557 557 558 558 561 562 565 566 567 567 568 569 570 571 571 571 572 573 575 578 578 580 583 584 584 585 597 603 605 607 609 609 610 613 615 617 618 619 621 622 623 624 625 626 628 630 632 633 635

8 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

Contents

11

10.2.1 ANY Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 ANY Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.3 ANY Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 ANC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 ANC Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 ANC Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.3 ANC Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.4 ANC LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.5 ANC Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.6 ANC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.1 AGC Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.2 AGC Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.3 AGC Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.4 Antenna Network Geran Combiner Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.5 AGC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.6 AGC LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.7 AGC Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.8 AGC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 ANB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.1 ANB Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.2 ANB Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.3 ANB Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.4 ANB LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.5 ANB Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.6 ANB Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 GSM/UMTS Co-Siting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.1 Diplexer Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.2 Diplexer Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.3 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.4 EMC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.1 Fan Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.2 Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.3 Top Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 HEX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 LED(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.2 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.3 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 HEX3/HEX4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 HEX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

636 638 640 642 642 643 644 645 646 648 652 652 653 654 655 660 662 663 667 670 670 671 672 673 673 674 677 678 679 680 680 681 682 683 685 688 689 690 690 691 691 692 693 693 693 693 693 694 694 695 696 697 697 697 697 697 698

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

9 / 914

Contents

12

11.4.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 HEX8/HEX9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 DAC8/DAC9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.3 Filter Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.4 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.5 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.6 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.7 RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.8 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.9 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.10 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 HEAT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 HEAT3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 HEAT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10 HEATDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supplies and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 ACIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 LPFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 LPFMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 LPFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 LPFU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 ACDUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6.1 Technical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6.2 ACDUE Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 ACMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 ACMUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 ACSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 ACUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 APOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.12 PM08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.12.1 PM08 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.12.2 PM08 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.12.3 PM08 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13 PM11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

698 699 700 701 701 701 701 701 702 702 703 704 705 705 705 705 705 705 706 706 707 707 708 709 710 711 712 712 713 714 714 715 716 716 717 718 719 719 720 721 722 724 725 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 732 733 733 734 736 737

10 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

Contents

12.14

12.15

12.16

12.17

12.18

12.19

12.20

12.21

12.22

12.23

12.24

12.25

12.26

12.13.1 PM11 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13.2 PM11 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13.3 PM11 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13.4 PM11 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14.1 PM12 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14.2 PM12 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14.3 PM12 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14.4 PM12 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15.1 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15.2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15.3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15.4 Protection and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15.5 PM18 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15.6 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCU1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.16.1 BCU1 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.16.2 BCU1 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.16.3 BCU1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17.1 BCU2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17.2 BCU2 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17.3 BCU2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17.4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.20.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.20.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.21.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.21.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.21.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.22.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.22.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.22.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.23.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.23.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.23.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BU41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24.4 BU41 Mounted in MBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BU100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.25.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.25.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.25.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BU101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.26.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

737 738 740 740 741 741 743 745 745 746 746 747 749 749 750 751 752 752 754 756 756 756 759 762 762 763 764 764 765 766 766 767 768 768 769 770 771 771 772 773 774 774 775 776 777 777 778 779 779 780 781 782 783 784 784 785 786

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

11 / 914

Contents

13

14

15

12.26.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.26.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.27 BU102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.27.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.27.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.27.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28 BATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28.1 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28.2 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28.3 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28.4 RIBATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28.5 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28.6 Battery Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28.7 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 RIBAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29.3 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29.4 XBCB Bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30 DCDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30.1 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30.3 Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.31 DCDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.31.1 Front and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.31.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.32 DCDUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.33 DCMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.34 DCUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.34.1 Front and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.34.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 ACRI Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 ACRI LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 ACRI Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Lightning Protector Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.1 Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.3 Lightning Power Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.4 Quarter-Wave Stub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 Lightning Protector Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 Lightning Protector Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tower-Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Introduction to TMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.1 Tower Mounted Amplifier with External Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.2 Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 Tower-Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2 Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.2 Switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.3 Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

787 787 788 788 789 789 790 790 791 791 792 792 792 792 793 793 794 795 795 796 797 798 798 799 800 801 802 803 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 814 814 815 816 817 817 819 820 822 822 823 824 824 825 826 827 827 829 829

12 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

Contents

16

15.4.4 Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.5 PDU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 Bias T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6.1 Indoor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6.2 Outdoor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7 TMA Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7.1 Indoor/Outdoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7.2 Indoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7.3 Outdoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.1 ANCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.2 ANIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.3 ANLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.4 ANOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.5 BOBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.6 BOMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.7 BOMUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.8 BOMUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.9 BOSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.10 BTSRI3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.11 BTSRI5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.12 BTSRIMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.13 BTSRIMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.14 BTSRIOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.15 BUMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.16 BUMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.17 CA12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.18 CA-2MMC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.19 CA-ABIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.20 CA-ACB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.21 CA-ACSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.22 CA-ADABM, CA-ADABP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.23 CA-ADACM, CA-ADACP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.24 CA-ADCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.25 CA-ALPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.26 CA-APC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.27 CA-ASMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.28 CA-BABRM, CA-BABRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.29 CA-BRCM, CA-BRCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.30 CA-BTSCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.31 CA-CSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.32 CA-DFUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.33 CA-GCMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.34 CA-Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.35 CA-Ground1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.36 CA-Ground2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.37 CA-H2PC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.38 CA-H2PC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.39 CA-H2PC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.40 CA-HOAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.41 CA-MLBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.42 CA-MXBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.43 CA-OHAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.44 CA-ONCCx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.45 CA-OSCP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

829 829 830 832 832 833 835 835 836 837 839 840 840 840 841 841 842 847 849 851 853 857 857 858 858 859 860 861 862 862 863 863 864 864 865 865 866 867 868 868 868 869 869 870 871 871 871 872 872 873 874 874 875 875 876 877 880

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

13 / 914

Contents

17

16.1.46 CA-OSCP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.47 CA-OSCP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.48 CA-OSPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.49 CA-PCAN, CA-PCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.50 CA-PCOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.51 CA-PDCM, CA-PDCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.52 CA-RFMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.53 CA-RIBCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.54 CA-RICPT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.55 CA-RICPT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.56 CA-RIMO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.57 CA-RIMO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.58 CA-SENSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.59 CA-XBCBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.60 CA-XIOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.61 CA-XIOPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.62 CIMA Bus Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.63 CIMI Bus Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.64 RXRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.65 TXRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2 External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.1 CA01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.2 CA02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.3 CA03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.4 CA04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.5 CA-CBTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.6 CA-GC35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.7 CA-GND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.8 CA-PC2W16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.9 CA-PC35BK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.10 CA-PC35BL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.11 CA-PCEBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.12 CA-PCEBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.13 CA-RIBEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.14 CA-RIBEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.15 OCC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.16 OCC33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.17 SCG2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.18 SCG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.19 SCM1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.20 SCM2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Indoor Climatic and Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.2 Operational Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.3 Transportation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.4 Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 Outdoor Climatic and Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.2 Operational Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.3 Transportation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.4 Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.1 EMC Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.2 Transient Bursts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3.3 Spurious Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

881 881 882 882 882 883 883 883 884 884 885 885 886 886 887 887 888 889 890 890 891 891 892 892 893 893 894 894 894 895 895 895 896 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 905 906 906 906 907 908 909 909 909 910 911 912 912 913 913 914

14 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

Contents

17.5

Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

15 / 914

Contents

16 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

Preface

Preface
Purpose
The 9100 BTS Hardware Description describes the cabinets, subracks, modules and cables of the 9100 BTS. All equipment, features and functions described in this document may not be available on your system.

What’s New

In Edition 14
Description improvement in Station Unit Modules (Section 8).

In Edition 13
Description improvement in: MBO1E (Section 4.1.20) Service Light/AC Power Socket (Section 4.2.6.15) MBO1E/MBO2E (Section 4.6.6) ACDUE (Section 12.6).

In Edition 12
Section Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRX in 9100 BTS Outdoor Compact (CPT2) (Section 2.14) was added for 9100 BTS Outdoor Compact (CPT2) configurations with Twin TRE.

In Edition 11
Section describing the Range Extension Kit was removed. Part numbers for TMA have been removed from Tower-Mounted Amplifier (Section 15.3). Additional information concerning external alarms was added in: CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Interconnection Panel (Section 3.2.4) MBI3/MBI5 Cabinet Interconnection Panels (Section 3.3.4) External Alarm Inputs (Section 4.4.1.3) External Inputs/Outputs (Section 4.5.1.3).

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

17 / 914

Preface

Description improvement in: Indoor Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 (Section 2.2.4) MBI Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 (Section 2.5.4) XIO (Section 4.4.1). Figure 347 was updated.

In Edition 10
Description improvement in SUMX LEDs (Section 8.8.2).

In Edition 09
Section Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant Equipped with Three Subracks) (Section 2.12) was added. Description improvement in: MBI Cabinet Access and Features (Section 3.3.3) MBI3/MBI5 Cabinet Interconnection Panels (Section 3.3.4) MBI Signal Interfaces (Section 3.3.5) MBI External Power Supply Interfaces (Section 3.3.6) MBI Power Supply and Grounding (Section 3.3.7)

In Edition 08
Following sections have been added: Mixed High Power/Twin-TRX Configurations - Extended Cell - MBI3 Extended Cell with mixed HP/Twin-TRX (Section 2.6.9) Multiband Configurations Capacity Low Loss (Section 2.8.4) Multiband Configurations Coverage Mode with TX Diversity (Section 2.8.5) Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed High Power/Twin-TRX Configurations (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) (Section 2.11) Configurations with TWIN TRE for indoor BTS were split in following sections: Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI3 Cabinet) (Section 2.6) Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AA) (Section 2.7) Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) (Section 2.8) Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AA and AB) (Section 2.9) Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX (Only in MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) (Section 2.10). Position of AC modules was updated for configurations using MBI5 cabinet.

18 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3) General Performance Characteristics (Section 10. In Edition 06 Description improvement in: Transceiver Module (Section 2.7. The following sections were added: Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant ’B’ (Section 10. Description improvement for filter attenuation in: ANC Performance Characteristics (Section 10.7.4. In Edition 03 Section AGCL9P was removed.2) was added. In Edition 02 The following sections were added: Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant ’B’ (Section 10.7. Section Station Unit Modules (Section 8) was updated for SUMX.1).7.4.4.4.5) General Performance Characteristics (Section 10.14 19 / 914 .4.2) Introduction to TWIN TRA (Section 9.2.2) Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant ’C’ (Section 10.5) 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.2) was added.4.3.2.7. Description improvement for filter attenuation in: ANC Performance Characteristics (Section 10.3). Section DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11. In Edition 05 Section Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support (Section 15.3.1) AGC Description (Section 10.3). Reference to AGCL9P was removed from the document.1).7. Description improvement in Transceiver Equipments LEDs (Section 9.2.6) was added.2) Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant ’C’ (Section 10. Information about AGX and AGCL9P modules was removed.Preface In Edition 07 Attention was added for the configurations supported only in MBI5 cabinet variant AB. Update with the new equipment naming.6). In Edition 04 Section Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support (Section 15.21.4.

14 . terminology and BTS functions.4. 20 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Information about AGX module was removed.7. Audience This manual is for: Commissioning personnel System support engineers Training department (for reference use) Any other personnel interested in the 9100 BTS hardware.Preface General Performance Characteristics (Section 10.1). In Edition 01 First release of the document. Assumed Knowledge The reader must have a general knowledge of telecommunications systems.

for the presentation to the customer and site planning.1 Overview 1 Overview This Overview gives information needed for project managers and foremen.14 21 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

sectorized and multiband configurations. Configurations are built from a small range of primary components. Additional cabinet equipment is required. ACSR. This allows BTS installations to be tailored to suit different situations and applications. achieved with back-to-back. The arrangement of the subracks in the cabinets takes into account the requirements for: Thermal cooling. and ASIB house the AC/DC power modules. STASR houses the telecommunications modules and AC/DC power modules A number of telecommunications modules Power supply modules Modules for temperature control. power supplies. heat exchangers. such as fans. 22 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. back-to-wall or side-to-side cabinet installations Ease of access and maintenance. The basic building blocks of a 9100 BTS installation are: Cabinets for indoor and outdoor installations Four types of subrack: the SRACDC. achieved with forced-air cooling Minimization of floor space.1 Modularity and Common Information The 9100 BTS’s modular design allows for omni-directional. from the front of the cabinets Future system expansion.1 Overview 1. optional batteries and cables.14 .

45 mm (1.75 inches) 1 WU = 5. such as the availability of an indoor or outdoor site and climate. All 9100 BTS equipment operates in a temperature-controlled environment. Equipment cabinets must be connected to a suitable external system ground at the installation site. The internal temperature of enclosures is regulated with a combination of heaters. prETS300. as described in Configurations . The bus bar complies with European standard EN60950 V2. 9100 BTS equipment installations are grounded throughout.14 23 / 914 . Metric and imperial equivalents for the TEP units are as follows: 1 HU = 44. depending on the type of installation required.08 mm (0. Operating Temperatures Grounding Units of Measurement Standards All 9100 BTS equipment complies with the following ETSs: ETS 300 342-2 EMC for European Digital Cellular Telecommunications Systems GSM Recommendation for Base Station Equipment 11. heat exchangers and cooling fans. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. via a distributed earthing system which interconnects all metallic parts with the cabinet ground.21. Standard TEP units of measurement apply for 9100 BTS equipment.20 inches).Rack Layouts (Section 2) . Environmental conditions. are taken into consideration when planning an installation. A cabinet bus bar (or a cableform equivalent) is an important part of this earthing system.1 Overview Configurations These building blocks are used to assemble all possible 9100 BTS configurations.

2.five STASRs.two STASRs CIMA . 1.1 Overview 1.1 Cabinet Overview The type of cabinet used depends on a number of different items required for a particular installation.two STASRs CIDI .five STASRs. or two STASRs and a battery area for BU101s MBI5 .three STASRs. are: CIMI .1 Indoor Cabinets The available indoor cabinets. and the number of subracks they can contain. or three STASRs and one ASIB CIDE . The following sections describe the cabinet types and requirements for: Indoor cabinets Outdoor cabinets Configurations Indoor power requirements Outdoor power requirements Cabling.2 Cabinets 1.2.five STASRs. or four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s MBI3 . or four STASRs and a battery area for BU101s.14 .1. 24 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

3 Indoor Power Requirements The CIMI/CIDI.1.2 Outdoor Cabinets The available outdoor cabinets. is required when upgrading a COMI to the functionality of a COME.1.25) respectively.six STASRs and an optional area for microwave CBO .two STASRs and one SRACDC or ACSR and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and MV area COME .four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and MV area CODE . 230 VAC 1 ø The AC input is converted to 0/ -48 VDC nom.three STASRs and an MW area MBO1E . CIMA/CIDE.three STASRs and an optional area for microwave MBO2 . power supplies subrack and an optional area for batteries or microwave MBO2EDC .six STASRs and a MW area MBO2E .seven STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and MV area CPT2 . COEP. For more information about the BU41 and BU100. CIMA/CIDE and MBI3/MBI5 AC external supply variant. An additional cabinet. and MBI3/MBI5 cabinets are designed to operate from the following external supply voltages: CIMI and CIMA DC external supply variant: 0/ -48 VDC 0/ -60 VDC. for use within the cabinets.2.eight STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU101s MBO2DC .24) and BU100 (Section 12. refer to BU41 (Section 12. In the event of a mains failure.2) .five STASRs and one SRACDC or ACSR and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and MV area CODI . respectively. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. an optional battery backup unit BU41 or BU100 can be used to provide the DC supply voltage.1 Overview 1.six STASRs. 1.two STASRs with a MW area and optional BATS for the AC variant. are: COMI .four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU101s MBO1DC . and the number of subracks they can contain. power supplies subrack and an optional area for batteries or microwave MBO1EDC .three STASRs and an MW area MBO1T . For more information about the CIMI/CIDI and CIMA/CIDE. or when upgrading a CODI to the functionality of a CODE. refer to CIMI/CIDI (Section 3.1) and CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.five STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s MBO1 .2.three STASRs.14 25 / 914 .

refer to Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) .26) respectively. refer to BU41 (Section 12. The 0/ -48 VDC nom.1.4 Outdoor Power Requirements The COMI/CODI. CBO and MBO1/MBO2. an optional battery backup unit.1.2. 26 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. COME/CODE. CPT2. For more information about the COMI/CODI.25) and BU101 (Section 12. and MBO1/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2E cabinets are designed to operate from external AC mains supplies: 230 VAC 1ø 400 VAC 3ø. The CBO and MBO1T cabinet are designed to operate from external AC mains supplies 230 VAC 1ø. for use within the cabinets. CPT2. The CBO DC and MBO1DC/MBO2DC cabinets are designed to operate from external DC mains supplies. The AC input is converted to 0/ -48 VDC nom.5 Cabling The cable sets supplied with the 9100 BTS fall into the following categories: Power Abis links Internal interconnection. For more information about the BU41. In the event of a mains failure.24) . input is distributed for use within the cabinets. COME/CODE. BU100 and BU101. BU41 or BU100. BU100 (Section 12. 1.1 Overview 1.14 . can be used to provide the DC supply voltage.2.

2. Height Overall/ Usable 920 mm/ 16 HU Width Overall/ Usable 600 mm/ 84 WU Cabinet CIMI/CIDI Depth 450 mm 450 mm 700 mm Weight 115 kg fully equipped CIMA/CIDE 1940 mm/ 38 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 270 kg fully equipped (AC and DC) 200 kg empty (except for HEX2 and HEAT2) COMI/CODI (side compartment) 1500 mm/ 24 HU 24 HU = 17 HU for equipment + 7 HU for battery 1500 mm/ 24 HU 24 HU = 17 HU for equipment + 7 HU for batteries 1500 mm/ 24 HU 1200 mm/ 2 x 84 WU COME/CODE (compartment 1 and 2) (side compartment) 1800 mm/ 3 x 84 WU 700 mm 295 kg empty (except for HEX2 and HEAT2) COEP 600 mm/ 84 WU 700 mm 700 mm 450 mm 450 mm 750 mm 750 mm 750 mm 750 mm 700 mm 95 kg empty (except for HEX2 and HEAT2) 380 kg fully equipped w/ o battery 170 kg fully equipped (AC and DC) 270 kg fully equipped (AC and DC) 95 kg not equipped w/ o battery 90 kg for empty cabinet CPT2 1500 mm/ 24 HU 1200 mm/ 2 x 84 WU MBI3 1300 mm/ 23 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU MBI5 1940 mm/ 38 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T 1500 mm/ 24 HU 825 mm/ 162 WU MBO1E 1610 mm/26 HU 940 mm/ 185 WU MBO2/MBO2DC 1500 mm/ 24 HU 1500 mm/ 295 WU 175 kg not equipped w/ o battery 150 kg for empty cabinet MBO2E 1610 mm/26 HU 1550 mm/ 305 WU CBO/CBO DC 900 mm/ 18 HU 720 mm/ 84 WU 150 kg fully equipped Table 1: Cabinets.1 Overview 1.14 27 / 914 . Dimensions and Weight 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Cabinet Dimensions and Weight The following table shows the overall dimensions and the weight of all cabinets.

There are four types of subrack: STASR The STASR is the basic subrack used for all indoor and outdoor applications. The subrack plug-in modules are electrically connected by inserting them into the backplane connectors along plastic guide rails.3 Subracks 1. refer to Standard Telecommunications Subrack (Section 6) .5 (= 6 HU for modules + 1 HU for fans) Table 2: Subracks. refer to SRACDC (Section 7.3) . SRACDC The SRACDC is an AC power supply subrack for 9100 BTS outdoor configurations.4 28 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The connectors have guide-pins which ensure the module and subrack connectors mate together.1) . ACSR and ASIB.3. The plug-in modules are secured in the subrack with Camloc quarter-turn fasteners. 1. The subracks conform to ETSI standard IEC297-3 for 19 inch telecommunications equipment practice. For more information about the SRACDC. the FANU and FACB. It can contain a mixture of telecommunications and power supply plug-in modules. Attached to the frame box are the backplane module and FANU guide rails. For more information about the ACSR. The subrack is equipped with six integral lugs which enable it to be fixed to the equipment rack with self-tapping screws. and other components such as a ground connector.1 Overview The subracks are constructed from two steel side plates and five metal extrusions which form a frame box. Dimensions Width (TEP/ mm) 84 WU/ 431. refer to ACSR (Section 7. For more information about the ASIB. They are the same for the STASR. When the subrack contains TREs additional components. ASIB The ASIB is only used for indoor applications. are attached to the subrack.14 . without the risk of bending the connector pins. refer to ASIB (Section 7.2 Subrack Dimensions The following table shows the overall dimensions of all the subracks. For more information about the STASR.8 Depth (mm) 304.1 Overview 1. ACSR The ACSR is an AC power supply subrack used for 9100 BTS outdoor configurations.2) . Height (TEP/ mm) 7 HU/ 311. SRACDC.3.

1) CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.1.1 Overview 1. 2 Doors MBOE Extension Outdoor Cabinet Multistandard MBOEE/MBOEEDC Extension Outdoor Evolution Cabinet Multistandard MBO1DC MBO2DC MBOEDC Multistandard BTS DC Outdoor.1 Overview of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment The following tables list the cabinet-mounted equipment and modules available for the 9100 BTS. 2 Doors Multistandard BTS Outdoor. 1 Door Multistandard BTS DC Outdoor. 1 Door Multistandard BTS Indoor.. The tables also provide a reference to the sections that describe each item.2) ASIB (Section 7.1 Available Cabinets and Subracks The following table list the cabinet and subracks available for the 9100 BTS.3) CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.14 29 / 914 . 3BK 08712 3BK 08676 3BK 25098 3BK 25099 3BK 07181 3BK 07605 3BK 25100 3BK 25101 3BK 07979 3BK 07606 3BK 07607 3BK 25468 3BK 25964 3BK 25965 3BK 25673 3BK 27263 3BK 25675 3BK 27264 3BK 25677 3BK 27265 3BK 26612 3BK 26614 3BK 26616 For More Information.3) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) MBO1E/MBO1EDC Multistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor. 1 Door Part No. 2 Doors Extension Outdoor DC Cabinet Multistandard 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 2 Doors Multistandard BTS Indoor. 1.3) Multistandard Base Station Indoor (Section 3. 2 Doors MBO2E/MBO2EDC Multistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor. ACSR (Section 7.4.. Mnemonic ACSR ASIB CIDE CIDI CIMA CIMI CODE CODI COEP COME COMI CPT2 MBI3 MBI5 MBO1 Description AC Subrack for PM11 AC/DC Subrack Individual Battery Cabinet Indoor Medi Cabinet Indoor Mini Cabinet Indoor Medi Cabinet Indoor Mini Cabinet Outdoor Medi Cabinet Outdoor Mini Cabinet Outdoor Expanding Part Cabinet Outdoor Medi Cabinet Outdoor Mini Compact Outdoor.2) CIMI/CIDI (Section 3.4 Cabinet-Mounted Equipment 1.1) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Multistandard Base Station Indoor (Section 3. 1 Door MBO2 Multistandard BTS Outdoor.4.2) CIMI/CIDI (Section 3.

.1. 1 Door AC/DC Subrack Outdoor Standard Communications Subrack Compact BTS Outdoor Compact BTS Outdoor DC powered Part No.1) Standard Telecommunications Subrack (Section 6) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) Table 3: Cabinet and Subrack Part Numbers 1.2.14 .20) ACDUE (Section 12.9) ACUC (Section 12.3) ANCD Antenna Network Combined GSM 1800 Module Antenna Network Combined GSM 900 Module Antenna Network Combined GSM 850 Module 3BK 08995 ANCG 3BK 08993 ANC (Section 10. 3BK 27138 3BK 07987 3BK 07193 3BK 26320 3BK 27013 For More Information.10) ADAM (Section 12.23) CIMA/CIDE Power Supply and Grounding (Section 3. 3BK 08673 3BK 27266 3BK 07989 3BK 07941 3BK 25785 3BK 27140 3BK 25126 3BK 26323 3BK 25025 3BK 25475 3BK 25997 3BK 08674 For More Information.7) ANC (Section 10.3) ANCL 3BK 25900 ANC (Section 10.21) ADAM2 (Section 12..1) ACRI (Section 13) ACMU (Section 12.4.1 Overview Mnemonic MBO1T SRACDC STASR CBO CBO DC Description Multistandard BTS Outdoor Tropical.. Mnemonic ABAC ACDUE ACIB ACRI ACMU ACMUT ACSU ACUC ADAM ADAM2 ADAM4 AFIP Description AC Indoor Battery Control Unit AC Distribution Unit Evolution AC Interface Box AC Remote Inventory AC Switch Unit Multistandard AC Distribution Unit Tropical AC Switch Unit AC Connection Unit Compact Adapter Module Adapter Module 2 Adapter Module 4 AC Indoor Filter Panel Part No.8) ACSU (Section 12.6) ACIB (Section 12.3) 30 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. ABAC (Section 12..22) ADAM4 (Section 12.2 Available Cabinet-Mounted Equipment / Modules The following table list the cabinet-mounted equipment and modules available for the 9100 BTS. Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) SRACDC (Section 7.7) ACMUT (Section 12.

2) ANY (Section 10.1) ANY (Section 10.1 Overview Mnemonic ANCP Description Antenna Network Combined GSM 1900 Module Antenna Network X GSM 1800 Module Antenna Network X GSM 900 Module Antenna Network GSM 1900 Module Antenna Network Y GSM 1800 Module Antenna Network Y GSM 900 Module Antenna Network Y GSM 850 Module Antenna Network Y GSM 1900 Module AC Indoor Power Distribution Panel Battery Connection Box Part No.28) BCU1 (Section 12.2) ANY (Section 10.18) BAC2 Battery Connection Box BAC2 (Section 12. ANC (Section 10.31) DCDUE (Section 12.32) DCMU (Section 12.2) APOD (Section 12.2) ANY (Section 10.17) BU41 (Section 12.34) Cooling System (Section 11.33) DCUC (Section 12.25) BU101 (Section 12.3) ANXD ANXG ANXP ANYD ANYG ANYL ANYP APOD BACO 3BK 07241 3BK 07232 3BK 08459 3BK 07245 3BK 07237 3BK 25903 3BK 08465 3BK 08675 3BK 07988 AA 3BK 07988 AB 3BK 25848 3BK 06784 3BK 08714 3BK 08035 3BK 08932 3BK 25854 3BK 27794 3BK 27795 3BK 07990 3BK 27015 3BK 27267 3BK 26618 3BK 26324 3BK 07202 3BK 07205 ANX (Section 10.1) 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.11) BACO (Section 12.6) DCDP (Section 12.16) BCU2 (Section 12.26) DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.1) ANX (Section 10.30) DCDU (Section 12.14 31 / 914 .24) BU100 (Section 12..6) DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11. 3BK 25393 For More Information.1) Cooling System (Section 11.1) ANX (Section 10.19) BATS BCU1 BCU2 BU41 BU100 BU101 DAC8 DAC9 DCDP DCDU DCDUE DCMU DCUC FACB FANU Small Battery Unit Battery Control Unit 1 Battery Control Unit 2 Battery Unit 40 Ah Battery Unit 100 Ah Battery Unit 100 Ah for using in MBO Direct Air Cooling 8 used in MBOEE Direct Air Cooling 9 used in MBO1E DC Distribution Panel DC Distribution Unit DC Distribution Unit Evolution DC Connection Unit Multistandard DC Distribution Unit Compact Fan Control Board Fan Unit BATS (Section 12..

3) HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11..4) LPFU PM08 PM11 PM12 PM18 RIBAT SUMA 3BK 25157 3BK 06783 3BK 08713 3BK 25024 3BK 27198 3BK 25134 3BK 08925 LPFU (Section 12.14 .15) RIBAT (Section 12.4) HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.29) Station Unit Modules (Section 8) Station Unit Modules (Section 8) Station Unit Modules (Section 8) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) SUMP Station Unit Module PCM 3BK 07224 SUMX Station Unit Module Type X 3BK 27656 TADH Transceiver Module GSM 1800 High Power 3BK 25373 TAGH Transceiver Module GSM 900 High Power 3BK 26154 TRAD Transceiver Module GSM 1800 Medium Power 3BK 08980 32 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 3BK 08075 3BK 26343 3BK 26619 3BK 07978 3BK 25659 3BK 25660 3BK 26325 3BK 27148 3BK 27149 3BK 26322 For More Information.10) HEX2 (Section 11.7) HEAT3 (Section 11.2) LPFMT LPFM 3BK 27141 3BK 25786 LPFMT (Section 12.13) PM12 (Section 12.1 Overview Mnemonic HEAT2 HEAT3 HEATDC HEX2 HEX3 HEX4 HEX5 HEX8 HEX9 LPFC Description Heating Unit 2 Heating Unit 3 Heating Unit DC Heat Exchanger 2 Heat Exchanger 3 for using in MBOE Heat Exchanger 4 for using in MBO1 Heat Exchanger 5 for using in CBO Heat Exchanger 8 for using in MBOEE Heat Exchanger 9 for using in MBO1E Lightning Protection and Filter Unit Compact Lightning Protection and Filter Unit Tropical Lightning Protection and Filter Unit Multistandard Lightning Protection and Filter Unit Power Module 800 W Power Module 1100 W Power Module 1200 W Power Module 1800 W Remote Inventory Battery Station Unit Module Advanced Part No. HEAT2 (Section 11.5) HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.3) LPFM (Section 12.12) PM11 (Section 12.8) HEATDC (Section 11.2) HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3) HEX5 (Section 11.5) LPFC (Section 12.5) PM08 (Section 12..14) PM18 (Section 12.

2 Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment The following table shows the overall dimensions and weight of heavy cabinet-mounted equipment.14 33 / 914 . see the 9100 BTS/9110 Micro BTS Corrective Maintenance Handbook .1.4. 3BK 26526 For More Information..4.6 -/237 -/217 6 WU/ 30 -/ 150 Depth mm 285 285 127 125 285 146 Weight - 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Height Module ABAC ACIB ACMU ACMUT ACRI ACUC TEP/ mm 3 HU/ 128 3 HU/ 128 -/172 -/172 3 HU/ 128 -/ 135 Width TEP/ mm 44 WU/ 223 28 WU/ 141. 1.3 Module Replacement For detailed information on how to replace modules in the 9100 BTS..1 Overview Mnemonic TRADE Description Transceiver Module GSM 1800 Medium Power Enhanced 8-PSK power Transceiver Module GSM 900 Medium Power Transceiver Module GSM 900 Medium Power Enhanced 8-PSK power Transceiver Module GSM 850 Medium Power Transceiver Module GSM 1900 Medium Power Transceiver Module GSM 1800 High Power Part No. Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) TRAG 3BK 08967 TRAGE 3BK 26525 TRAL 3BK 25894 TRAP 3BK 25825 TRDH 3BK 07723 TRDM Transceiver Module GSM 1800 Medium Power Transceiver Module GSM 900 Medium Power Transceiver Module GSM 1900 3BK 07372 TRGM 3BK 07206 TRPM 3BK 08556 Table 4: Equipment and Module Part Numbers 1.

7 10 WU/ 51 -/ 250 -/ 250 -/ 250 95 WU/ 482.1 Overview Height Module ADAM ADAM2 ADAM4 ANC ANX ANY APOD BACO BAC2 BATS BCU1 BCU2 BU41 BU100 BU101 DCDP DCDU DCDUE DCMU DCUC FACB FANU HEAT HEAT3 HEAT4 HEATDC HEX2 -/ 172 -/ 135 -/ 95 1 HU/ 44 -/ 80 1 HU/ 44 -/60 -/ 101 -/ 1045 TEP/ mm -/ 39 -/ 39 -/ 39 6 HU/ 265 6 HU/ 265 6 HU/ 265 3 HU/ 128 3 HU/ 128 6 HU/ 265 6 HU/ 265 3 HU/ 128 6 HU/ 265 -/ 200 -/ 234 -/ 234 2 HU/ 89 -/227 Width TEP/ mm 42 WU/ 213 28 WU/ 142 56 WU/ 284 28 WU/ 142 31 WU/ 160 10 WU/ 52 34 WU/ 172 50 WU/ 253 14 WU/ 71 28 WU/ 142 9 WU/ 45.6 -/120 Depth mm 280 280 280 298 298 298 285 285 285 280 280 280 200 400 400 152.14 .5 147 Weight 15 kg 50 kg 120 kg 120 kg - -/ 237 -/ 150 -/ 55 26 WU/ 133 -/ 234.5 19 WU/ 482 -/445 -/ 170 -/ 440 125 146 298 140 350 350 -/ 145 152 24 kg 34 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

Dimensions and Weight 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 Overview Height Module HEX3 HEX4 HEX5 LPFM LPFMT LPQD LPQG LPQM LPQP PM08 PM11 PM12 SUMP SUMA SUMX TRE TEP/ mm -/ 1150 -/ 1150 -/ 770 -/261 -/261 n/a n/a n/a n/a 3 HU/ 128 6 HU/ 265 -/ 240 6 HU/ 265 6 HU/ 265 6 HU/ 265 6 HU/ 265 6 HU/ 265 Width TEP/ mm -/ 450 -/ 600 -/ 450 -/181 -/181 n/a n/a n/a n/a 15 WU/ 76 15 WU/ 76 14 WU/ 71 10 WU/ 52 10 WU/ 52 10 WU/ 52 21 WU/ 106 28 WU/ 142 Depth mm 150 150 130 75 75 n/a n/a n/a n/a 280 280 280 298 298 298 298 298 Weight 24 kg 28 kg 16 kg - Table 5: Cabinet-Mounted Equipment.14 35 / 914 .

The number of standard RF cables that are used varies according to the configuration. The cabling consists of both: Discrete cables. The 9100 BTS cables are categorized as internal and external cables.5 Cables Most 9100 BTS cables are common to both the mini and medi cabinets. which have the designation CS. Internal Cables These are the cables and cable sets that are internal to the BTS. which have the designation CA Cable sets.14 .1 Overview 1. They interconnect the various modules and are necessary for all configurations. External Cables These are the cables that connect the 9100 BTS to: The customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board The customer’s 0/ -48 V DC power source and ground point (indoor 9100 BTSs) The BTS Terminal Another BTS for clock synchronization. 36 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The grouping of certain cables into cable sets can provide advantages in terms of ease of installation or manufacturing.

14 37 / 914 .Rack Layouts This chapter shows all possible configurations of the rack layouts for the following BTS types. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2 Configurations .2 Configurations .

2 Configurations .): TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Connection Area The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs S U M A IDU 1 IDU 2 ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 1: Indoor MINI .2/ 1x1.14 ...2) Table 6: Naming Conventions Used for the BTS Configurations 2.1 Indoor MINI .1 Naming Conventions for the BTS Configurations In the following sections all possible configurations are listed in figures.Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 The following configurations are valid for GSM 900/1800/1900 unless otherwise stated..2 1x1..1...2 Means 1 sector with up to 4 TREs Means 3 sectors with up to 2 TRXs per sector Means Multiband configuration.1x1.2 Indoor Configurations 2. 1x1.2/ ..1x1. sorted by the different types of BTSs... 2..2. with 1 sector and up to 2 TREs in each band 1x(.4 configuration. and 1 sector and up to 2 TREs in Band 2 Means Multiband configuration...4 3x1....1 Indoor Configurations .1x1. Top Stage FANU FANU FANU SUM ANY ANX − The BTS has n TREs − If no ANY (2 TREs max.Rack Layouts 2. with 1 sector and up to 2 TREs in Band 1.4 Configuration 38 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed... The naming conventions used for the BTS configurations are listed in the following table..2.4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI .

3 Indoor MINI ..1x1..2 Configurations .2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI .2 configuration.2x1..1.2 Configuration 2.2.1x1.3 + 1x1 configuration.Rack Layouts 2..14 39 / 914 .1x1.. Top Stage FANU FANU FANU SUM ANX ( Sector 2 ) ANX ( Sector 1 ) − Sector 1 has n TREs − Sector 2 has p TREs TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Connection Area The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) IDU 1 S U M A ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site) Figure 2: Indoor MINI ...2x1..3 + 1x1 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MINI ..2x1.2 Indoor MINI . Connection Area The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs (p=1) ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 3 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) IDU 1 S U M A Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space TRE1 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site) Figure 3: Indoor MINI .1..3 + 1x1 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...2.

2 Configurations .1.Rack Layouts 2.3x1 Configuration 40 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Indoor MINI . FANU FANU FANU SUM ANX ( Sector 2 ) TRE TRE FANU FANU FANU ANX ( Sector 3 ) ANX ( Sector 1 ) TRE The BTS has 3 TREs.2. one per sector AIR Connection Area The BTS has 3 sectors with 1 TRE each ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) a b ANC 1 TRE 1 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 a b ANC 3 TRE 1 ANC 3 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) S U M A TRE1 FANU FANU TRE1 TRE1 FANU Empty space On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site) Figure 4: Indoor MINI .3x1 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI .14 .3x1 configuration.

5 Indoor MEDI ..1..2 Configurations .8 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX − If ANY2 only: ANY2 is connected to ANX TRE8 (TRE6) TRE7 (TRE5) TRE6 TRE5 − ANY filling order: ANY2 then ANY1 then ANY3 − If the BTS has 6 TREs max.1x1. Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUM ANY 3 ANY 1 ANY 2 ANX Dummy Panels TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area The BTS has n TREs Stage 3 a IDU 1 IDU 2 b ANC ANY 2 5 6 7 8 ANY 1 TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7 TRE 1 2 3 4 Stage 2 S U M A FANU FANU FANU If no ANY (4 TREs maximum). (The ANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800)....1x1..14 41 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.8 configuration.8 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .1x1.).2. Top Stage FANU FANU FANU − The BTS has n TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU − If no ANY (2 TREs max. TRE1 to TRE4 are connected to ANC ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 5: Indoor MEDI . the numbering scheme is a little bit different for: TRE5 and TRE6..

): TRE1 and 2 connected to ANX − If ANY2 only: ANY2 connected to ANX Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU S U M A ANY 3 ANY 1 ANY 2 ANX − ANY filling order: ANY2 then ANY1 then ANY3 Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 6: Indoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2..1x2. ANX version) The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI .8 (GSM 1900.1x2. ANX version) 42 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Connection Area The BTS has n TRE a b ANX Stage 3 ANY1 ANY2 IDU 1 IDU2 TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ANY3 TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7 − If no ANY (2 TREs max. ANX version).8 configuration (GSM 1900.1x2.6 Indoor MEDI .1..8 Configuration (GSM 1900..14 ...2 Configurations .2..

Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.12 This configuration is the logical extension of the 1x2.1.. the following restrictions have to be considered: 1x11..1x9.12 configuration.8 configuration with a minimum of nine TREs. The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI ..... Top Stage FANU TRE12 FANU TRE11 TRE10 FANU TRE9 − The BTS has n TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU − Both ANXs are set to the same sector number ANY 4 ANY 5 ANX 2 TRE5 TRE8 (TRE6) TRE7 (TRE5) TRE6 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUM ANY 3 ANY 1 ANY 2 ANX 1 Dummy Panels Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE12 TRE11 TRE10 TRE9 The BTS has n TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC 1 ANY 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY 2 5 6 7 8 IDU 1 IDU 2 ANC 2 TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 Stage 2 S U M A FANU FANU FANU a b ANC 2 TRE 9 10 11 12 ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Stage 1 Figure 7: Indoor MEDI .1x9.12 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C..2..1x9.. Configurations up to 1x10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.14 43 / 914 .12 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..7 Indoor MEDI .

1.2x1.5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.8 Indoor MEDI .): TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX − ANY filling order: ANY2 then ANY1 then ANY3 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUM ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX (Sector 1) Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Connection Area TRE6 TRE5 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC 1 ANY1 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC 2 ANY3 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY4 56 ANY2 56 IDU 1 ANY4 ANY3 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) TRE6 TRE5 TRE2 Stage 2 S U M A FANU FANU TRE1 FANU ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) ANY2 ANY1 Microwave IDU (Optional) Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 8: Indoor MEDI .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.6 configuration....2x1...2x1..2. Top Stage FANU TRE6 TRE5 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 1 has n TREs Sector 2 has p TREs ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX (Sector 2) For each sector: TRE6 TRE5 TRE2 TRE1 − If no ANY (2 TREs max. Configurations up to 2x1.14 ... the following restrictions have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.6 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .6 Configuration 44 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.

.1x1. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC 1 ANY 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY 2 5678 IDU 1 IDU 2 ANC 2 (Sector 2) TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 Stage 2 S U M A FANU FANU FANU a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 (Sector 1) Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 9: Indoor MEDI .....4 (GSM 900/1800) The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI .8 + 1x1.4 configuration.2 Configurations .8 + 1x1.8 + 1x1..4 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.1x1.1...1x1.14 45 / 914 ....9 Indoor MEDI ..2.

.1.3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C..4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2.4..2.. Configurations up to 3x1..14 . Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.10 Indoor MEDI .3x1...3x1.2 Configurations . the following restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C. Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 1 has n TREs Sector 2 has p TREs Sector 3 has q TREs ANY ANX (Sector 3) TRE1 ANY ANX (Sector 2) TRE1 TRE2 TRE2 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU For each sector: TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs only (no ANY) SUM ANY ANX (Sector 1) Dummy Panels Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n.4 Configuration 46 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3x1. p and q TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 ANC 3 ( Sector 3 ) IDU 1 IDU 2 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC 3 Stage 2 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE 1 2 3 4 S U M A ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Stage 1 Figure 10: Indoor MEDI . (The ANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800)..

3x1...Rack Layouts 2..3x1. TRE1 and 2 connected to ANX if 2 TREs only (no ANY) S U M A IDU1 IDU2 ANY1 ANX1 (Sector 1) Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 11: Indoor MEDI . p and q TREs a Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU b a b ANX1 ANY2 TRE 1 2 3 4 a ANX2 ANY2 TRE 1 2 3 4 b ANY3 ANX3 (Sector 3) ANY2 ANX2 (Sector 2) ANX3 ANY3 TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE2 Stage 2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU For each sector.3x1.1..4 Configuration (GSM 1900. the following restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C. ANX version) 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors with respectiv ely n...11 Indoor MEDI .3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C..4 configuration.2 Configurations .2. Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.4 (GSM 1900.. ANX version) The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI .14 47 / 914 . Configurations up to 3x1.

Top Stage FANU FANU TRE6 FANU TRE5 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU − The BTS has n TREs and one sector − ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number − ANY1 only present if n>6 or if ANY Pre−equipment ANY2 ANX2 TRE4 Stage 2 FANU FANU TRE3 FANU SUM ANY1 ANX1 Extension from 1x6 to 1x8 TRE8 FANU TRE7 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Stage 1 Connection Area TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC1 a b ANC2 TRE 3 4 5 6 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU TRE 1 2 7 8 IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 Both ANCs are set to the same sector number In case of 1x3.1x3.8 .2.2..14 ..1x3.Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .Low Losses Configuration 48 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.. The bridges will be removed at installation (on site) if no more than 2 TREs are onnected to them Extension from 1x6 to 1x8 Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space TRE4 Stage 2 FANU FANU TRE3 FANU SUMA ANC1 Stage 1 TRE8 FANU TRE7 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 12: Indoor MEDI .8 Low Losses configuration.Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 2.8 ..2 Configurations . on each ANC.1x3..Rack Layouts 2..2 Indoor Configurations ..1 Indoor MEDI ..4.

14 49 / 914 ..2 Indoor MEDI . Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.2.Rack Layouts 2..12 Low Losses configuration.. Configurations up to 1x1...Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI .2 Configurations .1x9.12 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.12 . Connection Area TRE12 TRE11 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 7 8 a b ANC 2 TRE 3 4 5 6 ANC 3 IDU 1 IDU 2 ANC 2 a b ANC 3 TRE10 FANU TRE9 FANU S U M A TRE4 TRE3 FANU Stage 2 TRE 9 10 11 12 The 3 ANCs are set to the same sector number Extension from 1x8 to 1x12 Microwave IDU (Optional) ANC 1 Stage 1 TRE8 FANU TRE7 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 13: Indoor MEDI .10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C... the following restrictions have to be considered: 1x11.12 .1x9..1x9..Low Losses Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..2.

both ANXs are set to the same sector number.2x1.. Top Stage FANU TRE6 TRE5 FANU TRE6 FANU TRE5 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 1 has n TREs Sector 2 has p TREs ANY ANX3 (Sector 2) ANY ANX2 (Sector 1) In each sector.2.5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.6 Low Losses configuration...2 Configurations ...6 . Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs..3 Indoor MEDI .2.Rack Layouts 2..Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI .Low Losses Configuration 50 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 . Configurations up to 2x1.14 .2x1.. the following restrictions have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C. TREs 3 and 4 are directly connected to ANX Stage 2 SUM ANX4 (Sector 2) ANX1 (Sector 1) Extension from 2x4 to 2x6 Stage 1 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Figure 14: Indoor MEDI .2x1. TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU When no ANY.

2.6 Low Losses configuration.Low Losses Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.14 51 / 914 ..2x3.. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them Figure 15: Indoor MEDI .2x3. Connection Area TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs Sector 1: Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 Sector 2: a b ANC3 a b ANC2 3 456 ANC3 (Sector 2) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 1) a b ANC4 3 456 TRE4 Stage 2 FANU TRE3 FANU S U M A TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE 1 2 ANC4 (Sector 2) ANC1 (Sector 1) In each sector: Both ANCs are set to the same sector number Extension from 2x4 to 2x6 Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space In case of 2x3. Configurations up to 2x3.6 ...2 Configurations ..2x3.. the following restrictions have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C..Rack Layouts 2.Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI .6 .4: On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site). Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs..4 Indoor MEDI ...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.

2x1 . Rack Layout with classical HP TREs: Connection Area The BTS has 2 sectors with 1 TRE each ANC1 ( Sector 1 ) ANC2 ( Sector 2 ) IDU1 S U M A a b ANC1 TRE 1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space TRE1 Stage 1 FANU FANU TRE1 FANU On each ANC: the two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site) Rack Layout with EDGE HP TREs: Connection Area ANC2 ( Sector 2 ) IDU 1 S U M A ANC1 ( Sector 1 ) TRE1 Stage 1 FANU FANU TRE1 FANU Figure 16: Indoor MINI .2.High Power GSM 1800 configuration.2.14 .2x1 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MINI.High Power GSM 1800 2.1 Indoor MINI .3 Indoor Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .3.2x1.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 52 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2x1..1x1. on the ANC: Bridges can be removed if only 2 TREs connected to the ANC IDU1 IDU2 With classical HP TRE: Connection Area TRE4 FANU FANU FANU Stage 2 FANU S U M A FANU FANU IDU1 IDU2 ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE4 FANU S U M A FANU FANU ANC1 (Sector 1) Stage 1 TRE3 FANU TRE2 FANU Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 17: Indoor MEDI ....4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI.3 Indoor MEDI .14 53 / 914 ..4 High Power GSM 1800 configuration.2 High Power configuration.2.. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..2.1x1.3.Rack Layouts 2.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 2.2 Configurations ..4 .1x1. Connection Area The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 3 4 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU On site..2 This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the 3x1.2 Indoor MEDI ..3.

2x1. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs a b ANC1 a b ANC2 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4 IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) On site.2.4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MED I.4 Indoor MEDI .14 ..Rack Layouts 2..2x1.4 High Power GSM 1800 configuration.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 54 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2x1..3.. on each ANC: the two bridges can be removed if only 2 TREs connected TRE4 With classical HP TRE: Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 Stage 2 FANU S U M A FANU TRE1 FANU FANU FANU FANU IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE4 TRDH FANU S U M A TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE3 Stage 1 FANU FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space TRE3 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU Figure 18: Indoor MEDI ..2 Configurations ..4 .

.5 Indoor MEDI ...2.3x1.2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI . Top Stage FANU FANU TRE2 FANU The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n..3.2 . Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC3 (Sector 3) ANC2 IDU1 IDU2 (Sector 2) With classical HP TREs: Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 Stage 2 FANU FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU FANU FANU ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE2 Stage 1 FANU FANU TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU FANU FANU Figure 19: Indoor MEDI ..Rack Layouts 2.. t he two bridges are removed at installation (on site).3x1.3x1.2 High Power GSM 1800 configuration.2 Configurations .High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. p and q TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANX2 (Sector 2) a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 ANX3 (Sector 3) TRE1 Stage 2 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU ANX1 (Sector 1) a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 SUM Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE2 Stage 1 FANU FANU TRE1 FANU Empty space Connection Area TRE2 On each ANC.14 55 / 914 .

14 ..2 Configurations .6 Indoor MEDI .3.3x1.2: ANC2 ANC3 nc 1 2 3 nc 1 2 3 HP MP nc HP MP On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time.3 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .. p and q TREs b a b a b ANC1 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU 1 2 3 HP MP ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) For 3x1.3 High Power GSM 1800 configuration. (On site) One HP TRE transmitting per antenna (HP) TRE1 Stage 2 S U M A FANU FANU (HP) TRE2 (HP) TRE1 FANU For 3x3: On each ANC: The bridge where the MP TRE is connected is removed on site ANC1 (Sector 1) With classical HP TRE: Connection Area TRE3 TRDM TRE2 TRDH TRE3 TRDM FANU FANU FANU (MP) TRE3 Stage 1 FANU FANU (HP) TRE2 (HP) TRE1 FANU ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space TRDH TRE1 FANU S U M A TRDH TRE2 FANU TRDH TRE1 FANU ANC1 (Sector 1) TRDM TRE3 FANU TRDH TRE2 FANU TRDM TRE1 FANU Figure 20: Indoor MEDI .High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 56 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..3 ..3x1.Rack Layouts 2. Connection Area TRE3 (MP) TRE2 (HP) TRE3 (MP) a The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n..3x1..2...

4 Indoor Configurations .Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. INNER CELL OUTER CELL TMA TMA A ANC Sector 2 B PDU 1 A TRE 2 TRE 4 TRE 1 TRE 3 ANC Sector 1 B TRE 2 TRE 4 TRE 1 TRE 3 Figure 21: Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI extended cell configuration based on RX TMA use.14 57 / 914 .2.Extended Cell GSM 900 Extended cell configurations are based on RX TMA use as shown in the following figures. Connection Area The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs: − n TREs in the Outer Cell − p TREs in the Inner Cell Stage 3 ANC2 Inner Cell (Sector 2) Inner Cell: a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 3 4 Outer Cell: a TRE4 Stage 2 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU ANC1 Outer Cell (Sector 1) Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space b ANC1 TRE 1 2 3 4 IDU1 IDU2 S U M A Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 22: Indoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .

1x1..1x1.2 ..2/ 1x1.2..5.1x1...Multiband BTS Configuration 58 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..5 Indoor Configurations .2..2 Configurations .2/ 1x1.Rack Layouts 2.2 .Multiband BTS configuration.2/ 1x1..Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 2. Top Stage FANU FANU FANU SUM ANX ( Sector 2 ) ANX ( Sector 1 ) − Sector 1 has n TREs − Sector 2 has p TREs GSM 1800 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Stage 1 Connection Area The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) IDU 1 S U M A Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space GSM 1800 Stage 1 On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site) Figure 23: Indoor MINI ..1 Indoor MINI ...14 .2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI ..

..2 Indoor MEDI .6 ..1x1..6/1x1.2 Configurations ... Top Stage FANU TRE6 TRE5 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 − Sector 1 has n TREs − Sector 2 has p TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX (Sector 2) TRE1 TRE6 TRE5 TRE2 For each sector: − If no ANY (2 TREs max..Rack Layouts 2.5.Multiband BTS configuration.14 59 / 914 ..6/1x1..1x1.1x1..)...6 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .2.6 .Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6/1x1. TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX − ANY filling order: ANY2 then ANY1 then ANY3 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUM ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy Panels Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC1 ANY1 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY2 56 IDU1 ANY4 ANY3 ANC2 (Sector 2) TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC2 TRE6 Stage 2 FANU FANU TRE5 FANU ANY3 SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1 (Sector 1) ANY4 34 TRE 1 2 5 6 Microwave IDU (Optional) GSM 1800 Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 24: Indoor MEDI .

5.Multiband BTS Configuration 60 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1x1.2...Multiband BTS configuration.. Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU The BTS has 2 sectors: − One with n TREs in GSM 900 − One with p TREs in GSM 1800 ANY4 ANX2 (Sector 2) TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 The configur ation is based on 1x8 configur ation.1x1.8/1x1.Rack Layouts 2. and extended with a 1x4 sector Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU GSM 1800 Dumm y panels SUM ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX1 (Sector 1) TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectiv ely n and p TREs The configur ation is based on 1x8 configur ation.8/1x1.4 .1x1.. and extended with a 1x4 sector Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) ANY1 TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7 TRE 1 2 3 4 b ANC1 ANY2 5 6 7 8 If no ANY (4 TREs maxim um).8/1x1.4 ..3 Indoor MEDI . TRE1 to 4 are connected to ANC Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC2 SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE 1 2 3 4 Microwave IDU (Optional) GSM 1800 Empty space TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 25: Indoor MEDI ....2 Configurations ..14 ....4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .

..4/1x1. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs The configuration is based on 1x8 configuration.. TRE1 to 4 are connected to ANC Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC2 SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE 1 2 3 4 Microwave IDU (Optional) GSM 1800 Empty space TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 26: Indoor MEDI . and extended with a 1x4 sector Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) ANY1 TRE 1 2 3 4 b ANC1 ANY2 5 6 7 8 TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7 If no ANY (4 TREs maximum).4/1x1....1x1......14 61 / 914 .2.1x1.1x1..5.8 .2 Configurations .8 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI .4 Indoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2.4/1x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8 Multiband BTS configuration.

Multiband BTS configuration.4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI 1x3.2 Configurations . extended with a 1x4 sector Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC3 (Sector 2) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 1) a b ANC1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 7 8 TRE 3 4 5 6 Stage 2 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU S U M A TRE4 TRE3 FANU ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number ANC1 (Sector 1) a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 3 4 GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) Stage 1 TRE8 FANU TRE7 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 27: Indoor MEDI .4 On ANC1 and ANC2: The bridges will be removed at installation time (on site).....5.5 Indoor MEDI ..1x3.8LL/1x1.8LL/1x1.1x3... extended with a 1x4 sector ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUM ANY ANX1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy panels TRE4 Stage 1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE6 TRE5 In case of 1x3.. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs The configuration is based on 1x8 Low Loss configuration..2.4LL/1x1..4 .Rack Layouts 2.4 ...Multiband BTS Configuration 62 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..... Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU The BTS has 2 sectors: One with n TREs in GSM 900 One with p TREs in GSM 1800 Minimum TREs in sector 1 is 5 ANY ANX3 (Sector 2) ANY ANX2 (Sector 1) TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The configuration is based on 1x8 Low Loss configuration.14 .8LL/1x1.

Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.1x1...14 63 / 914 . Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 1 has n TREs Sector 2 has p TREs Sector 3 has q TREs ANY ANX (Sector 3) TRE1 ANY ANX (Sector 2) TRE1 TRE2 TRE2 For each sector.1x1.5..4/2x1. in the sector Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUM ANY ANX (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy Panels Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n.6 Indoor MEDI .4/2x1..Rack Layouts 2.Multiband BTS configuration.1x1.2 Configurations .. TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max...4 .4 ....4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI ...4/2x1. p and q TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC1 a b ANC2 ANC3 ( Sector 3 ) IDU1 IDU 2 ANC2 ( Sector 2 ) TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC3 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE 1 2 3 4 Stage 2 SUMA ANC1 ( Sector 1 ) GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 28: Indoor MEDI .

7 Indoor MEDI .. TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max.5...2x1.2x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 64 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..2 Configurations ..4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .4/1x1.Rack Layouts 2.4 .Multiband BTS configuration. p and q TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC1 a b ANC2 ANC3 ( Sector 3 ) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 ( Sector 2 ) TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC3 Stage 2 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU ANC1 ( Sector 1 ) TRE 1 2 3 4 SUMA GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 29: Indoor MEDI ..2. Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 1 has n TREs Sector 2 has p TREs Sector 3 has q TREs ANY ANX (Sector 3) TRE1 ANY ANX (Sector 2) TRE1 TRE2 TRE2 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU For each sector... in the sector SUM ANY ANX (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy Panels Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n...2x1.14 .4/1x1.4 ..4/1x1..

....8 Indoor MEDI ...2 ... p...4/...4/. q and r TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC3 TRE2 FANU ANC4 ( Sector 4 ) TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU ANC1 ( Sector 1 ) a b ANC4 Stage 2 TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 SUMA GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 30: Indoor MEDI ..4.5..Multiband BTS configuration.Rack Layouts 2....2 .1x1.4.1x1. Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Sector 1 has n TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 2 has p TREs Sector 3 has q TREs ANY ANX (Sector 3) ANY ANX (Sector 2) Sector 4 has r TREs In sectors 2 and 3.Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...2..2 Configurations .....2..2..2. TRE2 Stage 2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max.2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI 1x1.4/.4....14 65 / 914 .. in the sector SUM ANX (Sector 4) ANX (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy Panels Stage 1 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 4 sectors with respectively n.

.2..4 . q and r TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC3 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 Stage 2 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANC4 (Sector 4) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 31: Indoor MEDI .4.4.9 Indoor MEDI .4.....2 Configurations .2...Multiband BTS configuration.Multiband BTS Configuration 66 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.....14 .4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .5.... in the sector SUM ANX (Sector 4) ANX (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy Panels Stage 1 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 4 sectors with respectively n..2..2.......2/1x1. Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Sector 1 has n TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 2 has p TREs Sector 3 has q TREs ANY ANX (Sector 3) ANY ANX (Sector 2) Sector 4 has r TREs In sectors 2 and 3: TRE2 Stage 2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max.....4 ...Rack Layouts 2.2/1x1.2/1x1.... p.

10 Indoor MEDI ...2 . TRE2 Stage 2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU SUM ANX4 (Sector 4) ANX1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy Panels TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Stage 1 Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 4 sectors with: n+r TREs in GSM 900 p+q TREs in GSM 1800 Sectors GSM 900: Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) TRE4 STASR 3 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 Sectors GSM 1800: a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU ANC4 (Sector 4) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 32: Indoor MEDI .14 67 / 914 . in the sector..2 Configurations .2x1... Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Sector 1 has n TREs Sector 2 has p TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 3 has q TREs ANY ANX3 (Sector 3) ANY ANX2 (Sector 2) Sector 4 has r TREs In sectors 2 and 3: TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max..2.2 ...4/2x1..Multiband BTS configuration.2x1.4/2x1.2x1..Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2.5.4/2x1.

Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Sector 1 has n TREs Sector 2 has p TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 3 has q TREs Sector 4 has r TREs ANY ANX3 (Sector 3) ANY ANX2 (Sector 2) In sectors 2 and 3: TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max.2..2x1..Multiband BTS Configuration 68 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..5...4 .14 ..11 Indoor MEDI ...4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .2x1. in the sector TRE2 Stage 2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU SUM ANX4 (Sector 4) ANX1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy Panels TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Stage 1 Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 4 sectors with: n+r TREs in GSM 900 p+q TREs in GSM 1800 Sectors GSM 900: Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) Sectors GSM 1800: STASR 3 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU Stage 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANC4 (Sector 4) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 33: Indoor MEDI .2/2x1.2x1..4 .2/2x1..Multiband BTS configuration.2 Configurations ..Rack Layouts 2.2/2x1..

Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed....2/.2 Configurations ..2) ..Rack Layouts 2..6.2...1x(..Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 2.14 69 / 914 ..6 Indoor Configurations .2) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI .1x(.2) Multiband Cells configuration. Top Stage FANU FANU FANU The single sector has: − n TREs in the GSM 900 band − p TREs in the GSM 1800 band ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number SUM ANX2 ANX1 GSM 1800 TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Connection Area a ANC2 IDU1 S U M A ANC1 b a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 ANC2 TRE 1 2 ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site) Figure 34: Indoor MINI .1x(.2.2/.2/.1 Indoor MINI ...

6/...Multiband Cells Configuration 70 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1x(...6) Multiband Cells configuration..2 Indoor MEDI ..6/. TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX ANY filling order: ANY2 then ANY1 then ANY3 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX2 TRE6 TRE5 TRE2 TRE1 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUM ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX1 GSM 1800 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Dummy Panels Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU Connection Area The BTS has one sector with: p TREs in GSM 900 n TREs in GSM 1800 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 a Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU b ANC1 ANY1 IDU1 ANY4 ANY3 ANC2 ANY2 56 b TRE 1 2 3 4 a TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 ANC2 ANY3 TRE 1 2 5 6 ANY4 34 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1 Both ANCs are set to the same sector number Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 GSM 1800 Empty space Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU Figure 35: Indoor MEDI ..2 Configurations ...14 .2.1x(.).6) .6. Top Stage FANU FANU FANU TRE6 TRE5 TRE4 TRE3 The single sector has: n TREs in the GSM 900 band p TREs in the GSM 1800 band ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number For each frequency band: If no ANY (2 TREs max.1x(...6) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2.6/..

.2) .4/.Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max.6.4/.2) Multiband Cells configuration...2) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI .2 Configurations .4/..3 Indoor MEDI .. in the sector GSM 1800 TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 Stage 3 FANU ANC3 (Sector 2) FANU FANU ANC2 (Sector 1) Sector 1 has: − n TREs in the GSM 900 band − p TREs in the GSM 1800 band Sector 2 has: − r TREs in the GSM 900 band − q TREs in the GSM 1800 band a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 IDU1 IDU2 TRE4 STASR 3 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 ANC 1 and ANC 2 are set to the same sector number (1) Stage 2 FANU ANC4 (Sector 2) FANU FANU ANC1 (Sector 1) SUMA a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANC3 and ANC4 are set to the same sector number (2) TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) Empty space Figure 36: Indoor MEDI .2x(....2. Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU Sector 1 has: − p TREs in the GSM 900 band − n TREs in the GSM 1800 band Sector 2 has: − q TREs in the GSM 900 band − r TREs in the GSM 1800 band ANY ANX3 (Sector 2) ANY ANX2 (Sector 1) ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number (1) ANX3 and ANX4 are set to the same sector number (2) TRE2 Stage 2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU SUM ANX4 (Sector 2) ANX1 (Sector 1) In the upper part of the BTS.2x(.2x(...Rack Layouts 2..14 71 / 914 ..

2x(.2/.....14 .2/.4) Multiband Cells configuration.6..2x(.2.2x(. in the sector GSM 1800 TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy Panels Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 Stage 3 FANU ANC3 (Sector 2) FANU FANU ANC2 (Sector 1) Sector 1 has: − n TREs in the GSM 900 band − p TREs in the GSM 1800 band Sector 2 has: − q TREs in the GSM 1800 band − r TREs in the GSM 900 band a b ANC1 a b ANC2 IDU1 IDU2 STASR 3 TRE4 Stage 2 FANU ANC4 (Sector 2) TRE3 FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number (1) a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) ANC3 and ANC4 are set to the same sector number (2) GSM 1800 Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 37: Indoor MEDI .. Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Sector 1 has: − n TREs in the GSM 900 band − p TREs in the GSM 1800 band Sector 2 has: − q TREs in the GSM 1800 band − r TREs in the GSM 900 band ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number (1) ANX3 and ANX4 are set to the same sector number (2) Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANY ANX3 (Sector 2) ANY ANX2 (Sector 1) TRE2 Stage 2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU In the upper part of the BTS..2/.Rack Layouts 2.4 Indoor MEDI .4) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI ....2 Configurations . SUM ANX4 (Sector 2) ANX1 (Sector 1) TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max..Multiband Cells Configuration 72 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4) ..

.14 73 / 914 ...Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2....2/.Rack Layouts 2. 1x(... 1x(.. in the sector SUM ANX4 (Sector 1) ANX1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 Dummy Panels Stage 1 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 Sector 1 has: − n TREs in the GSM 900 band − q TREs in the GSM 1800 band Sector 2 has: − r TREs in the GSM 900 band − p TREs in the GSM 1800 band a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC3 (Sector 1) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) TRE4 STASR 3 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU ANC1 and ANC3 are set to the same sector number (1) a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 3 4 Stage 2 FANU FANU ANC4 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) ANC2 and ANC4 are set to the same sector number (2) GSM 1800 TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 Microwave IDU (Optional) FANU Empty space Figure 38: Indoor MEDI ..6. Top Stage FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 Sector 1 has: − n TREs in the GSM 900 band − r TREs in the GSM 1800 band Sector 2 has: − p TREs in the GSM 900 band − q TREs in the GSM 1800 band ANX1 and ANX4 are set to the same sector number (1) ANX2 and ANX3 are set to the same sector number (2) Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANY ANX3 (Sector 2) ANY ANX2 (Sector 2) TRE2 Stage 2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU In the upper part of the BTS.5 Indoor MEDI . 1x(.1x(.4) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI ..2)....1x(..4/..2/.2).2/..Multiband Cells configuration..4) . TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max...4/..2 Configurations .2).1x(.4) ....4/.

BTS−CA ABAC PMO8 PMO8 5 4 FANU TRE8 PMO8 PMO8 3 2 FANU TRE7 TRE6 APOD AFIP A C R I a b ANX ANY1 ANY2 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY3 5678 Stage 3 (*) PMO8 BCU1 1 FANU TRE5 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU − If no ANY (2 TREs max.2 Configurations ..1x1.). ANY2 is connected to ANX − ANY filling order: ANY2 then ANY1 + ANY3 (*) Fan stage always present Dummy Panels TRE4 Stage 1 (*) FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU BBU Options depending of the configuration Options if GSM 1800 Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has n TREs a b ANC ANY2 5678 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANY1 ANY2 ANY1 ANC TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE4 Stage 2 FANU ADAM PM12 Stage 1 PM12 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU BATS or 2 x IDU FANU If no ANY (4 TREs maximum).2.14 ..2.8 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the AC Indoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2... TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX SUM ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX − If ANY2 only.7.1x1.8 Configuration 74 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..7 AC Indoor Configurations GSM 900/1800 2.. TRE1 to TRE4 are connected to ANC Pre−equipment of ANY possible PM12 SUMA FANU BATS or Microwave IDU (Optional) BBU (Option) Empty space Figure 39: AC Indoor MEDI .1 AC Indoor MEDI .1x1.8 configuration.

. BTS−CA ABAC PMO8 PMO8 5 4 FANU ANX (Sector 3) PMO8 PMO8 3 2 FANU TRE2 APOD AFIP ACR I a b ANX TRE 1 2 Sector 1 a b ANX 1 2 2 a b ANX 1 2 3 Stage 3 PMO8 BCU1 1 FANU TRE1 Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU SUM ANX (Sector 2) ANX (Sector 1) Dummy Panels Options depending on the configuration Options if GSM 1800 TRE2 Stage 1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU BBU Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n..2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the AC Indoor MEDI .7.2 configuration..2x1.2 configuration (sector 3 is not equipped).2.3x1.3 AC Indoor MEDI .14 75 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2..2 Configurations .7. 2.2 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.. p and q TREs a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 (Sector 2) TRE2 BATS TRE1 Stage 2 FANU ADAM PM12 PM12 FANU FANU PM12 SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) FANU Stage 1 FANU FANU BATS or Microwave IDU (Optional) BBU Empty space Figure 40: AC Indoor MEDI .3x1..2.2 AC Indoor MEDI ....2 This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the 3x1.3x1..

.3x1.2. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n.2x1.6 Configuration 2.3x1. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs a b ANC1 Stage 3 FANU BATS or 2 x IDU FANU FANU ANY1 ANY2 ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA TRE 1 2 34 5 6 TRE2 TRE6 Stage 2 FANU ADAM PM12 PM12 TRE5 FANU FANU TRE1 a b ANC2 ANY2 TRE 1 2 34 5 6 PM12 ANY1 ANC1 (Sector 1) BATS or Microwave IDU (optional) TRE6 Stage 1 FANU TRE5 FANU TRE4 TRE3 FANU Empty space Figure 41: AC Indoor MEDI ..6 configuration..Rack Layouts 2..14 ..4 configuration.3x1.7..4 AC Indoor MEDI .5 AC Indoor MEDI ..2x1...2 Configurations .4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI ..2. p and q TREs Stage 3 FANU FANU BATS or 2 x IDU FANU a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 ANC 3 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC 3 TRE2 FANU ADAM P M 1 2 P M 1 2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) TRE 1 2 3 4 Stage 2 P M 1 2 S U M A BATS or Microwave IDU (Optional) TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Stage 1 Figure 42: AC Indoor MEDI .4 Configuration 76 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.7..2x1.6 The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI ..

1x1..8/1x1..2..4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI 1x1..6 AC Indoor MEDI .4 Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2. Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs a b ANC 1 Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU TRE 1 2 3 4 IDU ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) a b ANC 2 ANY 1 TRE4 Stage 2 FANU ADAM P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) ANY 2 5678 TRE 1 2 3 4 S U M A If no ANY (4 TREs maximum).7...8/1x1.1x1..8/1x1......2 Configurations .14 77 / 914 . TRE1 to TRE4 are connected to ANC Microwave IDU (Optional) GSM 1800 Stage 1 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 43: AC Indoor MEDI .4 Multiband BTS configuration.

5 x PM08 if more than eight TREs.14 . This configuration requires the following actions: Add additional AC/DC converters in the AC Indoor cabinet. maximum TREs: 12 (a 3x6 site configuration is not possible).7.7 DC Power Distribution from an AC Indoor Cabinet To extend on site the capacities in terms of TREs per sector. (3 x AC/DC converters in the case of a standalone AC Indoor cabinet) Use of a DC power cable between the two cabinets. the coupling of a DC Indoor cabinet to an AC Indoor cabinet can be envisaged. maximum TREs: 18 (a 3x6 site configuration is possible) GSM 1800: 3 x PM08 up to six TREs.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.2. 4 x PM08 up to eight TREs. A typical case is a 3x6 sectored site with the following hardware: 1x6 AC Indoor MEDI + 2x6 DC Indoor MEDI. 78 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. AFIP Subrack AC/DC ASIB DC Power Cable BTS−CA BU41 AC Cabinet DC Cabinet Figure 44: Interconnection between an AC Cabinet and a DC Cabinet Maximum number of TREs depending on DC Consumption: GSM 900: 3 x PM08 up to eight TREs. 5 x PM08 if more than eight TREs.

1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 G3 MINI .14 79 / 914 . n.a. n.a. 4 -> 8 2/2 -> 4/4 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2 12 -> 16 6/6 -> 8/8 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6 2.Rack Layouts 2.a.a.3 9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRX The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on Twin TRX modules. n.3.2 Configurations .a. n.a. n. Cabinet Number of sectors AC Carriesrs per sector DC Carriesrs per sector Single TRX -> Twin Single TRX -> Twin TRX TRX Mini 1 2 3 Medi 1 2 3 n.

3 G3 MINI .14 .2 Configurations .3.3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 80 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 2.2 G3 MINI .3.Rack Layouts 2.

14 81 / 914 .3.Rack Layouts 2.1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 G3 MEDI .2 Configurations .

2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 82 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.5 G3 MEDI .3.

2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.6 G3 MEDI .14 83 / 914 .3.3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

4. Cabinet Number of sectiors AC Carriesrs per sector DC Carriesrs per sector Single TRX -> Twin Single TRX -> Twin TRX TRX Mini 1 2 3 Medi 1 2 3 n. n.a.14 .a.a.4 9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRX The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on Twin TRX modules.2 Configurations . n.1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 84 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.a. 2/2 -> 4/4 2/2/2 (4/4/4) -> 4/6/6(6/6/6) 4 -> 8 2/2 -> 4/4 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2 12 -> 16 6/6 -> 8/8 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6 * : Change of SUMA location 2. n.1 G4 MINI .

2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 2.4.2 G4 MINI .4.3 G4 MINI .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 85 / 914 .

4.1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 86 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.14 .4 G4 MEDI .

2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 87 / 914 .

2 Configurations .2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 88 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .5 G4 MEDI .4.Rack Layouts 2.

14 89 / 914 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

Rack Layouts 2.3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 90 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 G4 MEDI .14 .2 Configurations .4.

14 91 / 914 .Rack Layouts 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .

2 Configurations .14 .Rack Layouts 92 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

.8 .. for GSM 850.Rack Layouts 2. 2. TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC Dummy Panel The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case fewer than 3TREs Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 45: MBI3 .1.14 93 / 914 .1x1. Pre−equipment possible Up to 4 TREs. Note: Restrictions None.DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 .8 . Configurations up to 1x6 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.8 ..1 MBI Configurations .. 2 ANYs are required.Standard BTS GSM 850/900/1800/1900 The following configurations are valid for GSM 850/900/1800/1900 unless otherwise indicated. For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs..1 MBI3 . and if no ANY pre−equipped.DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..5.DC configuration.5..5 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Single TRX 2. The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs Connection Area a TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 ANY1 TRE 1 3 5 7 FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU b ANC1 ANY2 2 46 8 SUMA ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC1 If more than 4 TREs.8 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.1x1. the following restrictions have to be considered: 1x7..1x1.2 Configurations .

1..AC configuration.4 .1x1...1x1.4 .2 MBI3 .AC Configuration 94 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .5.14 . Note: Restrictions None.Rack Layouts 2.AC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 ..4 .1x1.. for GSM 850. Connection Area ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 FANU FANU Air Inlet 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 BATS (Option) FANU ANC1 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC1 TRE 1 3 2 4 SUMA The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3TREs Dummy Panel Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 46: MBI3 ..

.DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors: Sector 1 with n TREs.4 .DC configuration.Rack Layouts 2.4 . the following restrictions have to be considered: 2x4 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.1.2 Configurations .3 MBI3 .. Sector 2 with p TREs a FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU b ANC1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3TREs Dummy Panel Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 47: MBI3 .DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 . Note: Restrictions None.3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.2x1. Configurations up to 2x1....4 .14 95 / 914 ..2x1.2x1. for GSM 850. For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.5..

5.4 MBI3 .2x1...1.AC Configuration 96 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. for GSM 850.2x1.AC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 .2x1.Rack Layouts 2. Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC1 2 a b ANC2 2 TRE 1 ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA TRE 1 Sector 1 Sector 2 Dummy Panel The ANC can be replaced by the ANB also Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 48: MBI3 .AC configuration.2 ...2 Configurations ..2 .2 .. Connection Area ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 FANU FANU Air Inlet 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 BATS (Option) FANU ANC1 (Sector 1) The BTS has 2 sectors: Sector 1 with n TREs. Note: Restrictions None.14 .

.1.. Note: Restrictions None. Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 3 sectors: Sector 1 with n TREs..5 MBI3 ..3x1.5.2 ..2 .Rack Layouts 2.14 97 / 914 .2 Configurations . Sector 2 with p TREs.DC configuration.3x1.DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3x1.DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 .. Sector 3 with q TREs ANC3 (Sector 3) a b ANC1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU TRE 1 Sector 1 a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel Sector 3 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB also Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 49: MBI3 . for GSM 850.2 .

6 MBI3 .2 Configurations .3x1 .Rack Layouts 2. one TRE per sector a b ANC1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 ANC3 (Sector 3) ANC2 (Sector 2) Sector 1 a b ANC3 Dummy Panel TRE 1 Sector 3 SUMA TRE1 FANU TRE1 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU TRE 1 Sector 2 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB also Empty space Figure 50: MBI3 .3x1 .3x1 . Connection Area ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 FANU FANU Air Inlet 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 BATS (Option) FANU ANC1 (Sector 1) The BTS has 3 sectors.14 .1.5.AC Configuration 98 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.AC configuration. for GSM 850. Note: Restrictions None.AC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 .

7 MBI5 ..1.2 Configurations ...1x1. Pre−equipment possible Up to 4 TREs.8 ..8 .Rack Layouts 2. and if no ANY pre−equipped. TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs Dummy Panel TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 12345678 1234567 12345678 1234567 12345678 1234567123 12345678 1234567 12345678 1234567 12345678 1234567 123456 1234567 123456 12345678 1234567 123456 123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 BBU or STASR 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 Air Inlet ADAM SUMA PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 BATS (Option) Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space FANU FANU FANU (Option) STAND Figure 51: MBI5 .1x1. 2 ANYs are required.14 99 / 914 .1x1.AC or DC configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.AC or DC configuration.AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .5. Connection Area The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC1 ANY2 2 46 8 ANY1 FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU TRE 1 3 5 7 ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC1 If more than 4 TREs.8 ...

8 configuration with a minimum of nine TREs..Rack Layouts 2..12 (Low Loss) .AC or DC This configuration is the logical extension of the 1x1.14 .AC or DC configuration. the following restrictions have to be considered: 1x11.2 Configurations ..12 (Low Loss) ...1....8 MBI5 .1x9. The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 1x9..12 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C. For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs. Configurations up to 1x10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.5.1x9. Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC1 ANY2 2 4 6 8 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs ANY1 FANU ANY 2 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 BATS (Option) TRE3 FANU Air Inlet FANU TRE 1 3 5 7 ANY 1 ANC1 a b ANC2 9 TRE 11 10 12 Dummy Panel Both ANCs are set to the same sector number TRE4 FANU TRE2 FANU Air Inlet TRE1 FANU 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE12 FANU TRE11 SUMA ANC2 123 123 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space Dummy Panel TRE10 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE9 FANU Figure 52: MBI5 . for GSM 850..12 (Low Loss) . Note: Restrictions None.AC or DC Configuration 100 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC1 FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) ANC1 (Sector 1) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU ADAM TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Air Inlet PM12 PM12 PM12 SUMA Empty space FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU BBU (BU101) STAND Figure 53: MBI5 .. for GSM 850.Rack Layouts 2.AC Configuration with BU101 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1..AC configuration with BU101. Note: Restrictions None.2x1.5.4 .2x1.2 Configurations ..4 ..9 MBI5 .4 . Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors: Sector 1 with n TREs...14 101 / 914 .2x1.AC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .

Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.5.6 . no ANY is required.14 ... the following restrictions have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.1...10 MBI5 .6 .AC or DC configuration.AC or DC Configuration 102 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.. Connection Area TRE6 TRE5 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs..5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.Rack Layouts 2. If no more than 4 TREs..6 ..AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 . Configurations up to 2x1.2x1.2x1. − Sector 2 with p TREs a Sector 1 FANU b ANC1 SUMA 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 FANU Air Inlet BATS (Option) TRE5 FANU TRE 1 3 ANY1 2 4 56 ANY 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) Sector 2 a b ANC2 ANY2 TRE 1 3 24 56 Dummy Panel TRE6 TRE2 TRE1 FANU In each sector. 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 Dummy Panel TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU FANU Air Inlet The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs ANC1 (Sector 1) ANY 1 123 123 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU Air Inlet STAND Figure 54: MBI5 . TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.2x1.2 Configurations .

.14 103 / 914 . Note: Restrictions None...Rack Layouts 2.1x1.1x1..4 .AC or DC configuration..1.8 + 1x1...4 ...AC or DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.11 MBI5 .5.8 + 1x1.. for GSM 850 and GSM 1900.AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 ..4 .2 Configurations .8 + 1x1. − Sector 2 with p TREs Sector 1 FANU ANY 2 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 BATS (Option) TRE3 FANU Air Inlet FANU TRE ANY 1 ANC2 (Sector 2) Sector 2 a b ANC2 ANY2 2 46 8 ANY1 TRE 1 3 5 7 Dummy Panel TRE4 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE4 FANU TRE3 Air Inlet SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel 123 123 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU Air Inlet STAND Figure 55: MBI5 .1x1.. Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC1 1 3 2 4 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs.

3x1..3x1.AC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 ..12 MBI5 . Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 ANC3 (Sector 3) a b ANC1 FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs. Note: Restrictions None.2 .2 .1.Rack Layouts 2.3x1. − Sector 3 with q TREs Sector 1 Sector 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) ANC1 (Sector 1) a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 Sector 3 TRE2 FANU ADAM P M 1 2 FANU P M 1 2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB also Air Inlet P M 1 2 S U M A FANU Empty space FANU Air Inlet BBU (BU101) STAND Figure 56: MBI5 .2 .5.2 Configurations .AC Configuration with BU101 104 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed....AC configuration with BU101. for GSM 850..14 . − Sector 2 with p TREs.

.AC or DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .AC or DC configuration.5.. Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.3x1. the following restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.14 105 / 914 .13 MBI5 . − Sector 2 with p TREs.. Configurations up to 3x1.2 Configurations ..3x1...4 .. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs.4 .Rack Layouts 2.. − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU ANC3 (Sector 3) 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 BATS (Option) TRE1 TRE2 FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet a b ANC1 a b ANC2 1 3 2 4 a b ANC3 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 3 2 4 ANC2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE4 FANU TRE3 Air Inlet SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel 12 12 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 57: MBI5 .4 .3x1.1.

AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 .4 .AC or DC Configuration 106 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Low Losses .Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 2..2 MBI Configurations .1 MBI3 .2.Low Losses .4 .1x3.14 .AC or DC configuration. 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 FANU ANC2 Connection Area FANU Air Inlet 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 BATS (Option) FANU ANC1 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC1 2 a b ANC2 4 TRE 1 3 SUMA Both ANCs are set to the same sector number Dummy Panel On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (on site) TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU 12 12 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space Figure 58: MBI3 .Rack Layouts 2..1x3.5...1x3..5.4 .Low Losses .2 Configurations ..

2 MBI5 . Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC1 a b ANC2 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs TRE 1 5 2 6 FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU TRE 3 7 4 8 Both ANCs are set to the same sector number ANC2 ANC1 In case of 1x3.AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 ..AC or DC configuration..AC or DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed....1x3. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them. TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 12345678 1234567 12345678 1234567 12345678 1234567123 12345678 1234567123 12345678 1234567 12345678 1234567 123456 1234567 123456 12345678 1234567 123456 123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 BBU or STASR 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 Air Inlet ADAM SUMA PM12 PM12 PM12 BATS (Option) FANU FANU FANU (Option) STAND Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space Figure 59: MBI5 .2 Configurations ..Low Losses .1x3.8 .1x3.4 Dummy Panel On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (on site).Low Losses .2..8 .Rack Layouts 2.8 ..Low Losses .14 107 / 914 .5.

1x9.Rack Layouts 2.. Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs FANU ANC2 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 BATS (Option) Dummy Panel TRE3 FANU Air Inlet TRE2 FANU FANU Air Inlet TRE ANC1 a b ANC1 a b ANC2 374 8 15 2 6 a b ANC3 TRE 9 11 10 12 TRE4 FANU TRE1 FANU The 3 ANCs are set to the same sector number 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE12 FANU TRE11 SUMA ANC3 123 123 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space Dummy Panel TRE10 TRE9 FANU FANU Air Inlet STAND Figure 60: MBI5 . Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.12 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.1x9.AC or DC configuration..12 .3 MBI5 ..2 Configurations ..12 .5.Low Losses .2...AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .12 ..AC or DC Configuration 108 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..Low Losses .14 .Low Losses . Configurations up to 1x1.1x9..10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.. the following restrictions have to be considered: 1x11.

.5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.6 .2 Configurations ..5..Low Losses .14 109 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2. ANC4 (Sector 2) S U M A ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 61: Indoor MEDI .. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them.2x3.Low Losses Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 ... Connection Area TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs Sector 1: a b ANC1 FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 3 5 46 Sector 2: ANC3 (Sector 2) ANC2 (Sector 1) a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 a b ANC4 3 5 46 Dummy Panel In each sector: Both ANCs are set to the same sector number TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE4 FANU Air Inlet TRE3 FANU In case of 2x3.4 On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (on site).4 MBI5 .6 . the following restrictions have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.DC configuration..Low Losses .2x3..DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .. Configurations up to 2x3. Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.2x1..2.

2 Configurations .High Power .2x1 .High Power GSM 1800 2.3.AC or DC Configuration 110 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5.5.1 MBI3 .2x1.14 .High Power . 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM12 PM12 FANU ANC2 (Sector 2) Connection Area FANU Air Inlet 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 BATS (Option) FANU ANC1 (Sector 1) The BTS has 2 sectors with 1 TRE each a b ANC1 TRE 1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 SUMA Dummy Panel On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (on site) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB also TRE1 FANU FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU 123 123 Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration Figure 62: MBI3 .2x1 .High Power .AC or DC configuration.3 MBI Configurations .AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 .Rack Layouts 2.

4 .1x1.14 111 / 914 .5..High Power .3.4 .2 MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2. Connection Area The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs FANU 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 BATS (Option) Dummy Panel FANU Air Inlet FANU a b ANC1 TRE 1 3 2 4 On site..High Power ..2 Configurations .1x1.AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .High Power ..AC or DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. on the ANC: The two bridges can be removed if only 2 TREs are connected TRE4 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE3 FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU SUMA ANC1 123 123 Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 63: MBI5 .1x1.AC or DC configuration.4 ...

..2x1. on each ANC: The two bridges can be removed if only 2 TREs are connected TRE4 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs TRE1 FANU Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 FANU FANU Air Inlet ADAM SUMA PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 ANC1 (Sector 1) 12 12 Dummy Panel TRE3 FANU TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 64: MBI5 .2x1..4 . Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs FANU 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 FANU Air Inlet BATS (Option) Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU a b ANC1 ANC2 (Sector 2) TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC2 1 3 2 4 On site.3.High Power .Rack Layouts 2..2x1.High Power .2 Configurations .4 .AC or DC Configuration 112 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.High Power .AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .AC or DC configuration..3 MBI5 .5..14 .4 .

4 MBI5 . Connection Area TRE3 TRE2 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n.2 Configurations .High Power . p and q TREs a b ANC1 FANU a b ANC2 1 3 2 a b ANC3 1 3 2 ANC3 (Sector 3) 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 BATS (Option) TRE2 FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet TRE 1 3 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) In case of 3x1.3 . One HP TRE transmitting per antenna... Dummy Panel TRE1 TRE1 FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE3 FANU FANU Air Inlet S U M A ANC1 (Sector 1) 12 12 Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 65: MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2.AC or DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed....AC or DC The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .3x1.High Power ..5.3.2: On each ANC: The two bridges can be removed if only 2 TREs are connected (on site)...AC or DC configuration.3 .3 .High Power .14 113 / 914 .3x1.3x1.

2 is reconfigured to MBI5 2x1.High Power .3x6 .5 MBI5 .DC configuration is based on two cabinets with the following TRE split: Cabinet 1: 1x6 TREs + 1x3 TREs Cabinet 2: 1x6 TREs + 1x3 TREs These configurations use a mixture of high-power and medium-power TREs.4) Cabinet 2: 1x4 HP TREs build on an MBI5 cabinet basis.Rack Layouts 2.6 MBI5 .3x6 . The extension is realized by adding a second BTS cabinet with the following TRE split: Cabinet 1: 2x4 HP TREs (the MBI5 3x1.5. 114 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.DC The MBI5 ..High Power .3.2 Configurations .DC configuration is an extension of the 3x2 configuration described earlier.14 .3.DC The MBI5 ..3x4 ...5. 2.3x4 .High Power .High Power .

INNER CELL OUTER CELL TMA DC Bias T PDU 1 TMA A ANC Sector 2 B DC Bias T A B ANC Sector 1 TRE 2 TRE 4 TRE 1 TRE 3 TRE 2 TRE 4 TRE 1 TRE 3 Figure 66: Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2.14 115 / 914 . − p TREs in the Outer cell Inner Cell: a b ANC1 TRE 1 3 2 4 FANU TRE4 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 BATS (Option) Dummy Panel TRE3 TRE2 FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU ANC2 Outer Cell (Sector 2) Outer Cell: a b ANC2 TRE1 TRE 1 3 2 4 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 123456712 123456 12345678 123456712 123456 123456 123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 BBU or STASR 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 FANU FANU Air Inlet ADAM P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 S U M A ANC1 Inner Cell (Sector 1) FANU FANU FANU (Option) STAND Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space Figure 67: MBI5 .Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use.5.4 MBI Configurations . Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs: − n TREs in the Inner cell.2 Configurations .Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Extended Cell GSM 900 Extended cell configurations are based on RX TMA use as shown in the following figure.

5...5.5 MBI Configurations ...1x1.14 .5.. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 ..1x1.Rack Layouts 2.4/1x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 116 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4/1x1.4/1x1...Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 2.4 .1x1...1 MBI3 . − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC1 FANU FANU Air Inlet S U M A FANU TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 1 ANC2 (Sector 2) ANC1 (Sector 1) a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs Dummy Panel GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 68: MBI3 .4 Multiband BTS configuration..2 Configurations ..

.6 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .6/1x1.5. 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 Dummy Panel TRE4 FANU TRE3 Air Inlet The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs ANC1 (Sector 1) PM1 2 ANY 1 GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 TRE2 TRE1 FANU 12 12 Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration FANU Air Inlet STAND Figure 69: MBI5 .2 Configurations ..1x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. if no more than 4 TREs.1x1..6/1x1.6 .. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.5..6/1x1. − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC1 Sector 1 FANU SUMA TRE6 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 BATS (Option) Dummy Panel TRE5 FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet FANU TRE 1 3 ANY1 2 4 5 6 ANY 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) Sector 2 a b ANC2 ANY2 TRE 1 3 2 456 TRE2 TRE1 FANU In each sector... Connection Area TRE6 TRE5 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs.. no ANY is required.14 117 / 914 ...2 MBI5 .1x1...6 Multiband BTS configuration.Rack Layouts 2.

.Multiband BTS Configuration 118 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...3 MBI5 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.1x1. if no more than 4 TREs.8/1x1.1x1... TRE4 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM Air Inlet GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 ANC1 (Sector 1) PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 SUMA Dummy Panel 123 123 Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 70: MBI5 ..1x1..5..5.4 ..4 Multiband BTS configuration..8/1x1. Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC1 1 3 2 4 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs.8/1x1.14 . − Sector 2 with p TREs Sector 1 TRE ANY 2 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 FANU FANU BATS (Option) TRE3 FANU Air Inlet Sector 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC2 ANY2 2 4 6 8 ANY 1 ANY1 TRE 1 3 5 7 Dummy Panel In sector 2..4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 . no ANY is required. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC..

.4/1x1..4/1x1.8 .1x1.8 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 . no ANY is required...8 Multiband BTS configuration.5..4 MBI5 .1x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..5.4/1x1..2 Configurations .14 119 / 914 . Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC1 1 3 2 4 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs. if no more than 4 TREs.. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.1x1. − Sector 2 with p TREs Sector 1 TRE ANY 2 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 FANU FANU Air Inlet BATS (Option) TRE3 FANU a b ANC2 ANY2 2 4 6 8 Sector 2 ANC2 (Sector 2) ANY 1 ANY1 TRE 1 3 5 7 Dummy Panel In sector 2.Rack Layouts 2. TRE4 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM Air Inlet ANC1 (Sector 1) PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 SUMA GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy Panel 123 123 TRE1 FANU Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND Figure 71: MBI5 .....

.... 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE8 FANU TRE7 FANU Air Inlet SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel 123 123 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space Figure 72: MBI5 .. FANU ANC3 (Sector 2) 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 BATS (Option) TRE1 TRE4 FANU FANU Air Inlet Sector 1 TRE a b ANC1 12 7 8 a b ANC2 3 4 5 6 ANC2 (Sector 1) Sector 2 a b ANC3 TRE 1 3 2 4 Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU TRE3 FANU In case of 1x3.1x3.2 Configurations .1x3.5..4 LL/1x1.8LL/1x1..5.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 ..Multiband BTS Configuration 120 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .8LL/1x1...Rack Layouts 2.8 Low Loss configuration extended with a 1x4 sector..5 MBI5 ..8LL/1x1. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs The configuration is based on 1x3.4 .4 Multiband BTS configuration.4 On ANC1 and ANC2: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (on site).......1x3.

4/2x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MBI5 ..4 Multiband BTS configuration. − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU ANC3 (Sector 3) 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 BATS (Option) TRE1 TRE2 FANU FANU Air Inlet a b ANC1 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC2 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 a b ANC3 1 3 2 4 Sector 3 ANC2 (Sector 2) Sector 1 Dummy Panel The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU Air Inlet SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel 123 123 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space Figure 73: MBI5 ...4/2x1. − Sector 2 with p TREs.1x1..14 121 / 914 .4 ...5.1x1.. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs..6 MBI5 .5..4/2x1.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .1x1...Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..

4/1x1..14 .4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 . − Sector 2 with p TREs. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs..7 MBI5 .4/1x1.4/1x1.4 Multiband BTS configuration.4 . − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU ANC3 (Sector 3) 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 1234567 BATS (Option) TRE1 TRE2 FANU FANU Air Inlet a b ANC1 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC2 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 a b ANC3 1 3 2 4 Sector 3 ANC2 (Sector 2) Sector 1 Dummy Panel The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU Air Inlet SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel 123 123 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Modules present only in AC configuration Empty space Figure 74: MBI5 .2 Configurations ..2x1....5..2x1....5..2x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 122 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..Rack Layouts 2.

2 .14 123 / 914 .8 MBI5 .....4/.... q and r TREs FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet Sector 1 ANC3 (Sector 3) ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC3 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 Dummy Panel Sector 3 Sector 4 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Empty space ANC4 (Sector 4) S U M A ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 TRE1 FANU FANU Figure 75: MBI5 .4/...2...1x1.1x1..2 Multiband BTS configuration... Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 The BTS has 4 sectors with respectively n......4...2.1x1.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .4/....2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 ..Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..4.5.4...2..5. p..

...2/1x1...4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .2/1x1.....4...Rack Layouts 2..2..Multiband BTS Configuration 124 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 ..4..2...4 .2/1x1...2..5......2 Configurations ....4 Multiband BTS configuration.4.5. p... q and r TREs FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet Sector 1 ANC3 (Sector 3) ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC3 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 Dummy Panel Sector 3 Sector 4 GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet TRE1 FANU ANC4 (Sector 4) S U M A ANC1 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU FANU Figure 76: MBI5 . Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 The BTS has 4 sectors with respectively n....9 MBI5 .

2x1.4/2x1...10 MBI5 .2 Configurations . p..4/2x1..5.5.2 .14 125 / 914 ...2x1.. q and r TREs FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet a b ANC1 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 ANC3 (Sector 3) ANC2 (Sector 2) Sector 2 Dummy Panel TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 a b ANC4 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 4 Sector 3 FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs ANC4 (Sector 4) S U M A ANC1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Empty space Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 TRE1 FANU FANU Figure 77: MBI5 ..2x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4/2x1..2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2...2 Multiband BTS configuration. Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 4 sectors with respectively n..

.14 .2/2x1...2 Configurations ..4 .. p.Multiband BTS Configuration 126 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.11 MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2. q and r TREs a b ANC1 FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 Sector 1 ANC3 (Sector 3) ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC3 Dummy Panel TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 3 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 Sector 4 TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE4 FANU Air Inlet TRE3 FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 ANC4 (Sector 4) S U M A ANC1 (Sector 1) Empty space Dummy Panel TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU FANU Figure 78: MBI5 .4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 . Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 4 sectors with respectively n..2x1..2/2x1...5.2/2x1.2x1.4 Multiband BTS configuration..2x1..5..

5.2 Configurations .4) ...6 MBI Configurations .4) .4/..DC configuration.6.1x(.....Multiband Cells .. Connection Area TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 1 sector with: − n TREs in GSM 900 band.4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 .5..1 MBI3 .Rack Layouts 2.14 127 / 914 .Multiband Cells ..1x(.Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 2. − p TREs in GSM 1800 band ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number FANU FANU Air Inlet S U M A FANU a b ANC1 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 ANC2 ANC1 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs Dummy Panel GSM 1800 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU Figure 79: MBI3 .1x(.DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...4/.4/.

.6) ... − n TREs in GSM 1800 band a b ANC1 FANU SUMA 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 FANU Air Inlet BATS (Option) Dummy Panel TRE5 FANU TRE 1 3 ANY1 2 456 ANY 2 ANC2 a b ANC2 ANY2 TRE 1 3 2 456 TRE6 TRE2 TRE1 FANU 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 FANU FANU ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number....6/.1x(..6) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2.6.5..2 MBI5 .. Connection Area TRE6 TRE5 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 1 sector with: − p TREs in GSM 900 band. Air Inlet ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 ANY 1 ANC1 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs GSM 1800 Dummy Panel 12 12 TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU Air Inlet STAND Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration Figure 80: MBI5 .1x(.. If no more than 4 TREs.Multiband Cells .6/.14 .AC or DC configuration.AC or DC Configuration 128 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .Multiband Cells .1x(.6) .6/.. no ANY is required.. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.

.3 MBI5 ..4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .Multiband Cells .5..4) . − p TREs in GSM 1800 band ANY 2 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 FANU Air Inlet BATS (Option) TRE3 FANU a b ANC2 ANC2 ANY1 TRE 1 3 5 7 Dummy Panel ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number.AC or DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..6.AC or DC configuration...2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2. no ANY is required..1x(..8/.1x(. 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE4 FANU TRE3 Air Inlet The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs ANC1 GSM 1800 SUMA Dummy Panel 123 123 TRE1 FANU Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND Figure 81: MBI5 . ANY2 2 4 6 8 ANY 1 TRE4 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU ANC2. If no more than 4 TREs..Multiband Cells . TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.. Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC1 TRE FANU 1 3 2 4 The BTS has 1 sector with: − n TREs in GSM 900 band.1x(.8/...4) .8/.14 129 / 914 .

4/. TRE4 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.4/.Multiband Cells .14 .8) .8) .5...Rack Layouts 2.1x(.. ANC1 GSM 1800 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 ADAM PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 TRE4 FANU TRE3 Air Inlet SUMA Dummy Panel 123 TRE1 FANU Empty space Modules present only in AC configuration TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND Figure 82: MBI5 ..AC or DC Configuration 130 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..4 MBI5 .Multiband Cells .2 Configurations .AC or DC configuration..1x(. − p TREs in GSM 1800 band ANY 2 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456 FANU Air Inlet BATS (Option) TRE3 FANU a b ANC2 ANC2 ANY1 TRE 1 3 5 7 Dummy Panel ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number.4/..1x(.. ANY2 2 4 6 8 ANY 1 ANC 2.8) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the MBI5 . Connection Area TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC1 TRE FANU 1 3 2 4 The BTS has 1 sector with: − n TREs in GSM 900 band. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC. no ANY is required..6.. if no more than 4 TREs...

.DC configuration.2x(..Rack Layouts 2.....5.6.2) . FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 a b ANC4 TRE 1 3 2 4 ANC4 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs Dummy Panel GSM 1800 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU FANU Figure 83: MBI5 . Sector 1: − n TREs in GSM 900 band.2 Configurations ..2) .2x(.4/..4/.DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 131 / 914 .Multiband Cells .2) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .2x(. − p TREs in GSM 1800 band ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number. Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors.. FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet ANC3 (Sector 2) ANC2 (Sector 1) a b ANC1 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 Dummy Panel TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 Sector 2: − q TREs in GSM 1800 band. − r TREs in GSM 900 band ANC3 and ANC4 are set to the same sector number.Multiband Cells ...4/.5 MBI5 ..

. TRE4 FANU TRE3 TRE4 FANU Air Inlet TRE3 FANU a b ANC3 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC4 TRE 1 2 ANC4 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs..4) .Multiband Cells .2/..4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .... Sector 1: − n TREs in GSM 900 band.14 . FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 ANC3 (Sector 2) ANC2 (Sector 1) Dummy Panel Sector 2: − q TREs in GSM 1800 band..4) .2x(.Multiband Cells ... − p TREs in GSM 1800 band ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number.5.6 MBI5 . Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors.2x(..DC Configuration 132 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. − r TREs in GSM 900 band ANC3 and ANC4 are set to the same sector number.2 Configurations . Dummy Panel GSM 1800 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU FANU Figure 84: MBI5 .DC configuration..2/.2x(..6.2/.Rack Layouts 2.

14 133 / 914 . − q TREs in GSM 1800 band ANC1 and ANC3 are set to the same sector number.DC configuration.Rack Layouts 2...1x(.7 MBI5 .4/....5.4) . FANU FANU FANU Air Inlet a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC3 TRE 1 2 ANC3 (Sector 1) ANC2 (Sector 2) Dummy Panel TRE4 TRE3 Sector 2: − p TREs in GSM 1800 band..2/. 1x(..4) .2/.. Sector 1: − n TREs in GSM 900 band... Dummy Panel GSM 1800 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU Air Inlet STAND TRE1 FANU FANU Figure 85: MBI5 .Multiband Cells ... Connection Area TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors.1x(... TRE4 FANU TRE3 a b ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC4 TRE 1 3 2 4 FANU FANU Air Inlet ANC4 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 .2/.1x(.2 Configurations ...4/.DC Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2). 1x(.Multiband Cells .... 1x(...4/..6... − r TREs in GSM 900 band ANC2 and ANC4 are set to the same sector number.2).2).

1 Sector with Twin-TRX 134 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI3 Cabinet) 2.6.6.1.14 .1 Capacity Mode 2.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.1 MBI3 .

3 Sectors with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .6.2 MBI3 .1.14 135 / 914 .6.3 MBI3 .1.Rack Layouts 2.2 Sectors with Twin-TRX 2.

6.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .4 Sectors with Twin-TRX 136 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.14 .4 MBI3 .

1 MBI3 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.2.14 137 / 914 .2 Capacity Mode Low Loss 2.6.1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6.

14 .2 MBI3 .2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 138 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .6.Rack Layouts 2.2.

6. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.14 139 / 914 . Multiband cell: The BTS has one sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz.2 Configurations .3 Multiband & MB Cell MBI3 .Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX.

1 Sector TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX 140 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.14 .6. 2Rx Div.2 Configurations .4 Coverage Mode TxDiv.1 MBI3 .4. 2.6.

6.2 Sector TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 141 / 914 .2 MBI3 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .4.

14 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.3 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 142 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 MBI3 .4.6.

1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 2Rx Div.6.14 143 / 914 .1 MBI3 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations . Low Loss 2.5.6.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv.

2 Configurations .2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 144 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5.14 .Rack Layouts 2.6.2 MBI3 .

Rack Layouts 2.6.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. Low Loss 2.2 Configurations .1 MBI3 . 4Rx Div.6.6.14 145 / 914 .1 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 146 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .2 Configurations .6.6.2 MBI3 .Rack Layouts 2.

14 147 / 914 .7 Extended Cell MBI3 .2 Configurations . with up to 4 + 4 TRX. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Extended Cell with Twin-TRX AC or DC configuration.Rack Layouts 2.6.

4RX Div for Outer Cell MBI3 .8 Extended Cell TxDiv.Extended Cell with mixed HP/Twin-TRX 148 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6.6.9 Mixed High Power/Twin-TRX Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 2.MBI3 .Extended Cell .2 Configurations .14 .

14 149 / 914 .7.1.1 MBI5 .7.1 Sector with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.7 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AA) 2.1 Capacity Mode 2.2 Configurations .

2 Configurations .1.7.2 Sectors with Twin-TRX 150 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .Rack Layouts 2.2 MBI5 .

2 Configurations .1.Rack Layouts 2.14 151 / 914 .3 MBI5 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Sectors with Twin-TRX Configurations with maximum 4/4/4 TRX.7.

152 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations . respective more than 4/4/4 TRX.14 .Rack Layouts Configurations with intended.

1.Rack Layouts 2.7.14 153 / 914 .4 Sectors with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 MBI5 .2 Configurations .

Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .7.7.14 .1 MBI5 .2.1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX 154 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss 2.

14 155 / 914 .Rack Layouts 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .

2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 156 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 MBI5 .14 .7.2 Configurations .2.Rack Layouts 2.

Rack Layouts 2.7.3 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 157 / 914 .3 MBI5 .2.2 Configurations .

Multiband cell: The BTS has one sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz.1 MBI5 .14 .7.Multiband 1 + 1 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX.3 Multiband & MB Cell 2.3. 158 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.7.2 Configurations .

Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 TRX.7. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 159 / 914 .Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus p and r TRX in 1800 TRX.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.2 MBI5 .3.

t TRX in 1800 MHz.3 MBI5 . Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz.3. s TRX in 900 MHz and p.14 . 160 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2. r.Multiband 3 + 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n. q.7.

2Rx Div.1 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.4.1 MBI5 . 2.14 161 / 914 .7.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv.7.

Rack Layouts 2.14 .2 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX 162 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 MBI5 .4.2 Configurations .7.

Rack Layouts 2.3 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 163 / 914 .3 MBI5 .4.2 Configurations .7.

Low Loss 2.1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 164 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .5.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv.Rack Layouts 2. 2Rx Div.7.2 Configurations .1 MBI5 .7.

2 Configurations .7.Rack Layouts 2.5.14 165 / 914 .2 MBI5 .2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

14 .3 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 166 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .3 MBI5 .5.Rack Layouts 2.7.

6.Rack Layouts 2. 4Rx Div.14 167 / 914 .1 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .1 MBI5 .7. Low Loss 2.7.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv.

6.14 .2 MBI5 .2 Configurations .7.Rack Layouts 2.2 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 168 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

3 Sectors TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .14 169 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.6.3 MBI5 .7.

Rack Layouts 2.14 .7.Extended Cell with Twin-TRX 170 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.7 Extended Cell MBI5 .2 Configurations .

14 171 / 914 .Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.7.Rack Layouts 2.8 Extended Cell TxDiv. 4RX Div for outer cell MBI5 .2 Configurations .

1 Sector with Twin-TRX 172 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) 2.1 MBI5 .1.14 .Rack Layouts 2.8.1 Capacity Mode 2.8.2 Configurations .

8.2 Sectors with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .14 173 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.1.2 MBI5 .

3 Sectors with Twin-TRX Configurations with maximum 4/4/4 TRX.3 MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2.8.2 Configurations .14 .1. 174 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 Configurations . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 175 / 914 . respective more than 4/4/4 TRX.Rack Layouts Configurations with intended.

4 Sectors with Twin-TRX 176 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .14 .8.1.4 MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2.

8.2 Configurations .8.2.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss 2.1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 MBI5 .14 177 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.

2 Configurations .14 .Rack Layouts 178 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

8.14 179 / 914 .2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.2.2 MBI5 .

Rack Layouts 2.2.14 .3 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 180 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8.2 Configurations .3 MBI5 .

14 181 / 914 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.3 Multiband & MB Cell 2.8.3.Multiband 1 + 1 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8. Multiband cell: The BTS has one sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz.1 MBI5 .

2 Configurations .8.Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus p and r TRX in 1800 TRX.2 MBI5 . Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 TRX.3.Rack Layouts 2.14 . 182 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 Configurations . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 MBI5 . t TRX in 1800 MHz. r.14 183 / 914 . q. Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz.8.3.Multiband 3 + 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n. s TRX in 900 MHz and p.Rack Layouts 2.

Multiband 1 + 1 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 184 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .8.8.14 .1 MBI5 .4 Multiband Configurations Capacity Low Loss 2.Rack Layouts 2.4.

4.Rack Layouts 2.2 MBI5 .14 185 / 914 .2 Configurations .Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8.

Rack Layouts 2.14 .Multiband 3 + 3 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 186 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 MBI5 .2 Configurations .4.8.

1 MBI5 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.8.5.8.5 Multiband Configurations Coverage Mode with TX Diversity 2. Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz.2 Configurations .Multiband 1 + 1 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX.14 187 / 914 .

Rack Layouts 2.5. 188 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 MBI5 . Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz.2 Configurations .14 .Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus p and r TRX in 1800 MHz.8.

Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz.s TRX in 900 MHz plus p.8. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5.2 Configurations .Multiband 3 + 3 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n.t TRX in 1800 MHz.3 MBI5 .14 189 / 914 .r.Rack Layouts 2.q.

8.14 .Rack Layouts 2.1 MBI5 . 2Rx Div.6. 2.1 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX 190 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .8.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv.

2 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8.6.14 191 / 914 .2 MBI5 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.

3 MBI5 .2 Configurations .6.3 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 192 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8.14 .Rack Layouts 2.

1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations . 2Rx Div.7.14 193 / 914 .8. Low Loss 2.7 Coverage Mode TxDiv.Rack Layouts 2.8.1 MBI5 .

2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 194 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .7.14 .2 MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2.8.

3 MBI5 .8.7.Rack Layouts 2.14 195 / 914 .3 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .

8. Low Loss 2.2 Configurations .8.14 .1 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 196 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div.8.Rack Layouts 2.1 MBI5 .

2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.8.2 MBI5 .2 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 197 / 914 .8.

8.Rack Layouts 2.3 Sectors TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 198 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .14 .3 MBI5 .8.

9 Extended Cell MBI5 .8.2 Configurations .14 199 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.Extended Cell with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

8.10 Extended Cell TxDiv.Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX 200 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 . 4RX Div for outer cell MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .

a. Cabinet Number of sectiors AC Carriesrs per sector DC Carriesrs per sector Single TRX -> Twin Single TRX -> Twin TRX TRX MBI3 1 2 3 MBI5 1 2 3 4 -> 8 2/2 -> 4/4 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2 n. 4/4/4 -> 4/6/6 (6/6/6*) 8 -> 12 4/4 -> 4/6(6/6*) 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4 12 -> 16 6/6 -> 8/8 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6 * : Change of SUMA location 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .14 201 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2. n.a.9 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AA and AB) The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on Twin TRX modules.

1 MBI3 .9.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.1 sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 202 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

14 203 / 914 .9.2 Configurations .2 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 MBI3 .Rack Layouts 2.

Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .14 .9.3 MBI3 .3 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 204 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 Configurations .14 205 / 914 .4 MBI5 .1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.9.

14 .5 MBI5 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 206 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .9.

9.3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 207 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.6 MBI5 .2 Configurations .

14 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 208 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

10 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX (Only in MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on Twin TRX modules. n.a.a.14 209 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations . Cabinet Number of sectiors AC Carriesrs per sector DC Carriesrs per sector Single TRX -> Twin Single TRX -> Twin TRX TRX MBI5 (AB) 1 2 3 * : Change of SUMA location n. 4/4/4 -> 4/6/6(6/6/6) 12 -> 16 6/6 -> 12/12 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.14 .1 MBI5 AB variant .1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 210 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.10.

Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 211 / 914 .2 MBI5 AB variant .10.

3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 212 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.10.3 MBI5 AB variant .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.14 .

14 213 / 914 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

1 Capacity Mode 2.Rack Layouts 2.2 Sectors with mixed HP/Twin-TRX 214 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.11.11.2 Configurations .14 .1.1 MBI5 .11 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed High Power/Twin-TRX Configurations (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) 2.

Rack Layouts 2.1.11.2 MBI5 .14 215 / 914 .2 Configurations .3 Sectors with mixed HP/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 Configurations .14 .MBI5 .Extended Cell with mixed HP/Twin-TRX 216 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations Extended Cell .11.

Rack Layouts 2.12 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant Equipped with Three Subracks) The following configurations are available for the capacity mode.1 Sector with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .12.14 217 / 914 . 2.1 MBI53 .

12.2 Sectors with Twin-TRX 218 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.14 .2 MBI53 .

Rack Layouts 2.14 219 / 914 .2 Configurations .12.3 Sectors with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 MBI53 .

12.4 Sectors with Twin-TRX 220 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.14 .4 MBI53 .2 Configurations .

.2 configuration.Rack Layouts 2.1x1.13 Outdoor Configurations with Single TRX 2..Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 2..1..2 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13.2 Configurations ...1 Outdoor Configurations .1x1.1x1.2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO .14 221 / 914 .1 Outdoor CBO . Figure 86: Outdoor CBO .13.

4 configuration.1x1..4 Configuration 222 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed... TRE1 and TRE2 are directly connected to ANX AIR Empty space. OPTIONS SUM ANY ANX The BTS has n TREs If ANY not equipped (2 TREs max.14 ..13.Rack Layouts 2.4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI .2 Outdoor MINI .1...1x1.2 Configurations .1x1. no dummy panels needed TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs AIR a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 3 4 SUMA ANC1 AIR Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 87: Outdoor MINI .).

13. TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC.8 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI ..8 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1x1. Up to 4 TREs. AIR TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a FANU FANU AIR FANU ANC1 b ANY1 SUMA ANY2 ANY 1 ANC1 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY2 5 6 7 8 AIR If more than 4 TREs.1.14 223 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2. TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 88: Outdoor MINI ...3 Outdoor MINI .1x1. and if no ANY pre−equipment. 2 ANY are required pre−equipment possible.2 Configurations .1x1..8 configuration...

2x2 Configuration 224 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 1234567890123456 BATS ANC2 ANC1 The BTS has 2 sector with 1 TRE a b ANC1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 ADAM2 SUMA TRE1 FANU FANU HEAT3 TRE1 FANU TRE 1 PM12 PM12 12 12 Empty space Options Figure 89: Outdoor CBO .4 Outdoor CBO .2x1 configuration.2x1 Configuration 2.2x1 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO .14 . Figure 90: Outdoor CBO .Rack Layouts 2.2x2 configuration.2 Configurations .5 Outdoor CBO .13.2x2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO .13.1.1. This configuration is available only on CBO DC variant.

. OPTIONS SUM ANX (Sector 2) ANX (Sector 1) The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs Empty space.6 Outdoor MINI .2 Configurations .2 configuration...13.2x1.1.2 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI . no dummy panels needed AIR TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs AIR a ANC1 (Sector 1) b ANC1 a b ANC2 ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA TRE 1 2 Sector 1 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 AIR Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 91: Outdoor MINI .2x1.Rack Layouts 2.14 225 / 914 .2x1...

7 Outdoor MINI ..14 .13..4 Configuration 226 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..2 Configurations .2x1...Rack Layouts 2.4 configuration. AIR TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC1 a b ANC2 ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE 1 2 3 4 Sector 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 Sector 2 AIR Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 92: Outdoor MINI .2x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor Mini .1..2x1.

one per sector FANU FANU FANU Empty space.1. OPTIONS ANX SUM (Sector 2) TRE 3 TRE 2 The BTS has 3 TREs. no dummy panels needed ANX (Sector 3) ANX (Sector 1) TRE 1 AIR Figure 93: Outdoor MINI . This configuration is available only on CBO DC variant.3x1 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI .14 227 / 914 .8 Outdoor MINI .2 Configurations .13.13.9 Outdoor CBO . Figure 94: CBO 3x1 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3x1 configuration.1.3x1 Configuration 2.Rack Layouts 2.3x1 The following figure shows the rack layout of the CBO .3x1 configuration.

.2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI ..3x1. AIR Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 95: Outdoor MINI . AIR TRE2 TRE1 ANC3 (Sector 3) The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs a FANU FANU AIR FANU b a b a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 Sector 1 ANC2 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 ANC3 TRE 1 2 Sector 3 ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) On each ANC. if maximum power is required.13.2 Configurations ..3x1..3x1.2 Configuration 228 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.2 configuration.Rack Layouts 2.14 . the bridges can be removed at installation (on site)...10 Outdoor MINI .

3x1.GSM 1900 (ANX version) The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI .3x1.GSM 1900 configuration (ANX version)...2 .3x1.14 229 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2. AIR TRE2 TRE1 ANX 3 ( Sector 3 ) The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANX 1 TRE 1 2 Sector 1 a b ANX 2 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 a b ANX 3 TRE 1 2 Sector 3 ANX 2 ( Sector 2 ) S U M A AIR ANX 1 ( Sector 1 ) Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 96: Outdoor MINI .2 ...2 Configurations .11 Outdoor MINI .1.13...2 .GSM 1900 Configuration (ANX version) 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

Rack Layouts 2. ANY2 is connected to ANX1 SUM ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX1 ANY filling order: ANY2 then ANY1 then ANY3 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 AIR AIR Empty space.14 .1x1. TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX If ANY 2 only.8 configuration for GSM 900/1800.1x1.12 Outdoor MEDI .8 Configuration 230 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.. 2 ANYs are required Pre−equipment possible AIR AIR Empty Space TRE4 FANU AIR TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 97: Outdoor MEDI .).1..2 Configurations ..1x1..8 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI . AIR TRE8 OPTIONS The BTS has n TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU If no ANY (2 TREs max...13. no dummy panels needed TRE4 FANU AIR TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE8 TRE7 AIR TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a FANU FANU AIR TRE FANU ANY1 1 2 3 4 ANY2 5 6 7 8 b ANC1 AIR SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1 If more than 4 TREs.

no dummy panels needed AIR AIR TRE12 FANU TRE11 TRE10 FANU AIR TRE9 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE8 TRE7 AIR TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC 1 FANU FANU AIR FANU ANY 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY 2 5 678 AIR S U M A AIR ANC 2 ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 a b ANC 2 9 TRE 10 11 12 AIR Both ANCs are set to the same sector number Empty Space TRE12 FANU TRE11 TRE10 FANU AIR TRE9 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 98: Outdoor MEDI .12 configuration.1... Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.14 231 / 914 ..1x9.12 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI .. Configurations up to 1x1.2 Configurations ...Rack Layouts 2.13..1x9.13 Outdoor MEDI . AIR TRE8 OPTIONS TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 FANU FANU AIR FANU ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number SUM ANY 1 ANY 2 ANX 1 ANY ANY 3 1 ANY 2 ANX 2 Empty space...1x9. the following restrictions have to be considered: 1x11.10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C..12 with 28 W at + 40 C.12 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

4 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C. TRE 1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Microwave IDU locations Figure 99: Outdoor CPT2 .2 Configurations .6 configuration for GSM 900 and GSM 1800...6 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 ..14 Outdoor CPT2 .Rack Layouts 2..2x1.. ACSU ADAM AIR TRE5 TRE6 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 ANY1 ANC1 (Sector 1) FANU FANU AIR FANU ANC1 ANY1 TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 AIR SUMA IDU1 IDU2 ANY2 ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC2 ANY2 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 BBU TRE4 FANU LPFU In each sector.6 Configuration 232 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13.1.14 . Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1800 configuration using TRAD/TRADE TREs... if no more than 4 TREs.2x1. no ANY is required.. the following restriction has to be considered: 2x5.6 with 45 W at + 40 C..2x1.. Configurations up to 2x1.

. Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.. the following restrictions have to be considered: 2x6 with 28 W at + 40 C.Rack Layouts 2. in the sector (No ANY) SUM ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX (Sector 1) ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX (Sector 2) Empty space.6 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2x1..15 Outdoor MEDI . TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max.2 Configurations .1.. no ANY is required. AIR TRE6 OPTIONS TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 FANU FANU AIR FANU For each sector..6 configuration.5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C. Configurations up to 2x1.2x1.6 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI ..14 233 / 914 .2x1... if no more than 4 TREs. no dummy panels needed AIR AIR TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE6 TRE5 AIR TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC1 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU ANY1 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY2 56 SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1 (Sector 1) ANY4 ANY3 ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC2 ANY3 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY4 56 AIR AIR In each sector.13. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty Space Figure 100: Outdoor MEDI .

Configurations up to 3x1.4 Configuration 234 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.3x1.3x1..3x1.. Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1800 configuration using TRAD/TRADE TREs.1..14 . For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs. AIR ACSU TRE4 ADAM ANC1 (Sector 1) FANU AIR ANC3 (Sector 3) IDU1 SUMA ANC2 (Sector 2) TRE TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space BBU TRE2 FANU LPFU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Microwave IDU locations AIR 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 FANU AIR FANU a b a b a b TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 IDU2 ANC1 ANC2 ANC3 Figure 101: Outdoor CPT2 .Rack Layouts 2..4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 .16 Outdoor CPT2 .3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.. the following restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40 C... Configurations up to 3x1....13.4 configuration. the following restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40 C.

2 Configurations ..4 configuration.1.17 Outdoor MEDI .3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.3x1.14 235 / 914 .. no dummy panels needed AIR AIR TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC1 a b ANC2 a b ANC3 SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) ANC3 (Sector 3) ANC2 (Sector 2) TRE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AIR AIR Empty Space TRE2 FANU FANU AIR TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 102: Outdoor MEDI .13... Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.3x1.. Configurations up to 3x1. AIR TRE4 OPTIONS For each sector.3x1..4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI . (The ANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800). (no ANY) TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU FANU AIR FANU ANY1 SUM ANX (Sector 1) ANY3 ANX (Sector 3) ANY2 ANX (Sector 2) Empty space.. TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max.. the following restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40 C.4 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.

Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs..4 GSM 1900 Configuration 236 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.Rack Layouts 2.18 Outdoor MEDI ..13.3x1.14 .4 GSM 1900 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI .2 Configurations ..3x1...4 GSM 1900 configuration. AIR TRE4 TRE3 AIR TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU a b ANX1 a b ANX2 ANY2 a b ANX3 ANY3 SUMA ANY1 ANX1 (Sector 1) ANY3 ANX3 (Sector 3) ANY2 ANX2 (Sector 2) ANY1 TRE1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AIR AIR For each sector: ANY is required if more than 2 TREs Pre−equipment possible TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 103: Outdoor MEDI ...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C. the following restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40 C Configurations up to 3x1.3x1..

1 Outdoor MEDI .8 Low Losses configuration.2 Configurations ..14 237 / 914 . the two bridges will be removed at installation (on site)..Low Losses Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13.1x3..2 Outdoor Configurations .. no dummy panels needed TRE8 FANU TRE7 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU FANU AIR TRE4 TRE3 FANU AIR AIR The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC1 AIR AIR TRE 1 2 3 4 SUMA ANC1 ANC2 a b ANC2 TRE 5 6 7 8 Both ANCs are set to the same sector number (Remote Inventory) Empty Space AIR AIR In case of 1x3. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE8 FANU TRE7 FANU AIR TRE6 TRE5 FANU Figure 104: Outdoor MEDI .8 Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI .8 .Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 2...13.Rack Layouts 2.4: On each ANC.2.1x3. AIR TRE6 OPTIONS The BTS has one sector with n TREs TRE5 FANU FANU AIR FANU ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number SUM ANY1 ANX1 ANY2 ANX2 AIR AIR Extension from 1x6 to 1x8 Empty space...1x3.

.2.1x9.Low Losses Configuration 238 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. AIR TRE4 TRE3 TRE12 TRE11 AIR TRE10 TRE9 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC1 a b ANC2 a b ANC3 SUMA ANC1 ANC3 ANC2 TRE1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 AIR AIR The 3 ANCs are set to the same sector number TRE2 FANU FANU AIR TRE1 FANU TRE8 FANU TRE7 FANU AIR TRE6 TRE5 FANU Empty space Figure 105: Outdoor MEDI .12 Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI .13...14 ...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.2 Outdoor MEDI ..1x9.12 Low Losses configuration.2 Configurations . the following restrictions have to be considered: 1x11..1x9.12 with 28 W at + 40 C... Configurations up to 1x1.12 .Rack Layouts 2. Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs..

2x3.Low Losses Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..6 Low Losses configuration. TREs 3 and 4 are directly connected to ANX TRE6 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU SUM ANX4 (Sector 2) ANX1 (Sector 1) ANY ANX3 (Sector 2) ANY ANX2 (Sector 1) Empty space.2 Configurations .. both ANCs are set to the same sector number Extension from 2x4 to 2x6 Empty Space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU On each ANC.14 239 / 914 .. Configurations up to 2x3. Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs.2.6 .13.2x3. AIR TRE5 OPTIONS In each sector: − Both ANXs are set to the same sector number − When no ANY.. the following restrictions have to be considered: 2x6 with 28 W at + 40 C.5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.. the two bridges will be removed at installation (on site).2x3. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them Figure 106: Outdoor MEDI . no dummy panels needed Extension from 2x4 to 2x6 AIR AIR TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE4 TRE3 FANU AIR TRE6 TRE5 AIR TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 5 6 a b ANC4 3 4 a b ANC3 3 4 FANU FANU AIR (Sector 1) FANU FANU FANU AIR (Sector 2) FANU a b ANC2 ANC2 TRE 1 2 5 6 ANC4 SUMA ANC1 ANC3 AIR AIR In each sector.6 Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2...3 Outdoor MEDI ..

4 ... Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Per sector.3x3.4 Low Losses configuration. the following restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40 C.Low Losses Configuration 240 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13. Configuration 3x3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C. AIR TRE4 TRE3 ANC6 (Sector 3) TRE2 AIR TRE1 ANC5 (Sector 3) The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs Sector 1 a FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU b ANC1 Sector 2 a b ANC2 12 a b ANC3 3 4 Sector 3 a b ANC5 12 a b ANC6 3 4 TRE 1 2 ANC4 (Sector 1) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) ANC3 (Sector 2) ANC2 (Sector 2) a b ANC4 4 AIR AIR TRE 3 On each ANC.3x3.14 .3x3. both ANCs are set to the same sector number Empty Space Figure 107: Outdoor MEDI ..2 Configurations .4 Outdoor MEDI .4 Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2...2. bridges are removed at installation (on site)..

4 .2 Configurations ..13.3.Rack Layouts 2.4 High Power GSM 1800 configuration.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1x1.1 Outdoor MINI ..4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI . bridges are removed at installation (on site)..1x1.High Power GSM 1800 2.13.14 241 / 914 .1x1. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them Empty space SUMA ANC1 With classical HP TREs AIR AIR TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU AIR FANU SUMA ANC1 AIR TRE3 FANU TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU Figure 108: Outdoor MINI ..3 Outdoor Configurations ... AIR TRE4 The BTS has 1 sector a b ANC1 TRE 1 2 3 4 FANU FANU AIR FANU On each ANC.

High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 242 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. no dummy panels needed AIR TRDH TRE1 FANU FANU AIR AIR TRDH TRE1 FANU The BTS has 2 sectors with 1 TRE each a AIR ANC2 (Sector 2) ANC1 (Sector 1) b ANC1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 Sector 2 SUMA TRE 1 Sector 1 AIR Empty space On each ANC.2x1 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI .13. if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them TRE1 FANU FANU AIR TRE1 FANU Figure 109: Outdoor MINI .2x1 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Outdoor MINI .2 Configurations .High Power GSM 1800 configuration.14 .3.2x1 . OPTIONS The BTS has 2 sectors: Sector 1 with 1 TRE Sector 2 with 1 TRE SUM ANX2 (Sector 2) ANX1 (Sector 1) Empty space. t he two bridges are removed at installation (on site).

.3 Outdoor MINI ..2x1.3.Rack Layouts 2.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. bridges will be removed at installation (on site).2x1..13.14 243 / 914 . ANC2 (Sector 2) SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) Empty space AIR With classical HP TREs AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU AIR ANC2 (Sector 2) ANC1 (Sector 1) TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU SUMA AIR TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU Figure 110: Outdoor MINI .2 ..2 High Power GSM 1800 configuration.. AIR The BTS has 2 sectors with up to 2 TREs each TRE2 a b ANC1 a b ANC2 TRE 1 2 Sector 1 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 FANU FANU AIR FANU On each ANC..2 Configurations .2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI .2x1.

2x1.2 Configurations .4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI .4 Outdoor MEDI ..Rack Layouts 2.2 .3x1. 2.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 244 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13. AIR TRE4 TRE4 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR a b ANC1 a b ANC2 FANU AIR SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) ANC2 (Sector 2) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AIR AIR On each ANC.5 Outdoor MEDI ... Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1800 configuration using TADH TREs.14 ..13.4 ..3..4 High Power GSM 1800 configuration...3.. the ambient temperature is + 38 C. Configuration replaced by MINI configuration.2x1.2 This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the Outdoor MEDI . no if more than 2 TREs are connected to them TRE3 FANU FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE3 FANU FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty slots No Dummy Panels With classical HP TREs AIR TRE4 TRE4 AIR FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU SUMA ANC1 (Sector 1) AIR AIR ANC2 (Sector 2) TRE3 FANU TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU Figure 111: Outdoor MEDI.2x1. t e two bridges are h removed at installation (on site)..High Power GSM 1800 configuration.2x1.

.3x1.2 Configurations ...6 Outdoor CPT2 ..14 245 / 914 .13.2 . Note: Restrictions For the GSM 1800 configuration using TADH TREs.3. ACSU ADAM P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 IDU 2 ANC 1 (Sector 1) a FANU AIR S U M A FANU AIR FANU b a b a b TRE2 AIR The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3 ANC 3 (Sector 3) IDU 1 ANC 2 (Sector 2) 1 2 1 2 1 2 TRE2 FANU FANU TRE1 AIR FANU On each ANC: Bridges will be removed at installation time.3x1.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CPT2 .2 High Power GSM 1800 configuration..3x1.. the ambient temperature is + 40 C.Rack Layouts 2. on site Empty space BBU TRE1 FANU LPFU FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Microwave IDU locations With classical HP TREs ACSU ADAM P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 AIR ANC 3 (Sector 3) TRE2 FANU FANU TRE1 FANU IDU 1 S U M A AIR ANC 2 (Sector 2) IDU 2 ANC 1 (Sector 1) FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE2 AIR BBU TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU LPFU Figure 112: Outdoor CPT2 .

3x1.7 Outdoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2.2 High Power GSM 1800 configuration.13.. With classical HP TREs AIR TRE2 OPTIONS AIR TRE2 AIR FANU FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU FANU AIR FANU ANX 1 SUM (Sector 1) ANX 3 (Sector 3) ANX 2 (Sector 2) S U M A AIR a ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) ANC 3 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) AIR AIR AIR 1 TRE2 FANU FANU AIR TRE1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU FANU TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 AIR Empty space..3x1.3.14 ..3x1. no dummy panels needed The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU S U M A AIR ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) ANC 3 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 AIR 1 2 1 2 1 2 Empty space...2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI .High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 246 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..2 Configurations . no dummy panels needed TRE2 FANU FANU AIR TRE1 FANU TRE1 FANU FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site) Figure 113: Outdoor MEDI .2 .

AIR TRE2 (HP) AIR TRE3 (MP) TRE3 (MP) The BTS has 3 sectors − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU AIR S U M A AIR AIR FANU FANU a b ANC 1 nc 1 2 3 HP MP a b ANC 2 nc 1 2 3 HP MP a b ANC 3 nc 1 2 3 HP MP ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 3 (Sector 3) AIR ANC 2 (Sector 2) On each ANC: "The bridge.3 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI . where the TRE MP is connected.13.14 247 / 914 .8 Outdoor MEDI .3x1.3.2 High Power GSM 1800 configuration.3 . is removed on site" Empty slots.3x1. No Dummy Panels (MP) TRE3 FANU FANU AIR (HP) TRE2 (HP) TRE1 FANU (HP) TRE1 FANU FANU AIR (HP) TRE2 (HP) TRE1 FANU With classical HP TREs AIR TRE2 (HP) AIR TRE3 (MP) TRE3 (MP) FANU AIR S U M A AIR ANC 1 (Sector 1) FANU AIR FANU ANC 3 (Sector 3) AIR ANC 2 (Sector 2) (MP) TRE3 FANU (HP) TRE2 FANU AIR (HP) TRE1 FANU (HP) TRE1 FANU (HP) TRE2 FANU AIR (HP) TRE1 FANU Figure 114: Outdoor MEDI . The configuration is based on the 3x1....2 Configurations .3 ...Rack Layouts 2.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed....3x1. extended with Medium Power TREs.High Power GSM 1800 configuration.

.Multiband BTS Configuration 248 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..4 Outdoor Configurations .1 Outdoor MINI ..2 .2/1x1. OPTIONS SUM ANX (Sector 2) ANX (Sector 1) Sector 1 has n TREs Sector 2 has p TREs Empty space.1x1.Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 2..14 . no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 AIR TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR The BTS has 2 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs AIR ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 Sector 1 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 S U M A AIR On the 2 ANCs the bridges can be removed to get more power at antenna output (Low Losses) (Operation to be performed during installation phase) GSM 1800 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 115: Outdoor MINI ..2 Configurations .2/1x1...13...Rack Layouts 2.2 ..13.1x1.1x1.2/1x1...2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI .Multiband BTS configuration.4.

.4/1x1...1x1....4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI .1x1.4/1x1.1x1.4. AIR TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs FANU FANU FANU AIR a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 Sector 1 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 3 4 Sector 2 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) S U M A AIR ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) GSM 1800 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 TRE2 FANU AIR TRE1 FANU Figure 116: Outdoor MINI .Multiband BTS configuration.13.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..4 .2 Outdoor MINI .4/1x1..4 .....14 249 / 914 .

in the sector (no ANY) Empty space.6 .6 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI 1x1.6/1x1.. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty Space GSM 1800 Figure 117: Outdoor MEDI .6/1x1.1x1.4... no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 SUM ANY ANY 3 1 ANY 2 ANX (Sector 1) ANY ANY 3 1 ANY 2 ANX (Sector 2) AIR AIR TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE6 TRE5 AIR TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC 1 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU ANY 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY 2 56 S U M A ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) ANY 4 ANY 3 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) a b ANC 2 ANY 3 ANY 4 56 AIR AIR TRE 1 2 3 4 In each sector : If no more than 4 TREs..Multiband BTS Configuration 250 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 .1x1...Rack Layouts 2. no ANY is required..Multiband BTS configuration.2 Configurations ..3 Outdoor MEDI .13.6/1x1.. AIR TRE6 OPTIONS TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 For each sector : FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max....14 .

in the sector (no ANY) SUM ANY 1 ANX (Sector 1) ANY 3 ANX (Sector 3) ANY 2 ANX (Sector 2) Empty space.1x1.Multiband BTS configuration.2 Configurations ... AIR TRE4 OPTIONS TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU FANU AIR FANU For each sector : TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max..4/2x1....4 . no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 AIR AIR TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 2 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 3 TRE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AIR GSM 1800 Empty Space TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU FANU AIR Figure 118: Outdoor MEDI .4/2x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4/2x1.13..4 .Rack Layouts 2...1x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI 1x1.14 251 / 914 ..4 Outdoor MEDI ..4..

4..2 Configurations ..Multiband BTS configuration.2x1...13.. no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 SUM ANY 1 ANX (Sector 1) ANY 3 ANX (Sector 3) ANY 2 ANX (Sector 2) AIR AIR TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 2 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 3 TRE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AIR Empty Space GSM 1800 TRE2 FANU FANU AIR TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 119: Outdoor MEDI . AIR TRE4 OPTIONS TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 For each sector: FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max..Rack Layouts 2.14 .Multiband BTS Configuration 252 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...5 Outdoor MEDI ....4/1x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI 2x1.4/1x1.2x1..4 .4/1x1.4 . in the sector (no ANY) Empty space.

.. AIR ACSU ADAM P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 IDU 2 ANC 1 (Sector 1) Legend ANC 4 (Sector 4) The BTS has 4 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR ANC 3 (Sector 3) TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 ANC 2 (Sector 2) TRE 1 2 1 2 1 2 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 IDU 1 S U M A AIR FANU FANU GSM 1800 a b ANC 4 BBU TRE2 FANU LPFU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space 1 2 Microwave IDU locations Figure 120: Outdoor CPT2 .2/2x1.13.2 Configurations .....Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 .2/2x1.2 .2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 ...Multiband BTS configuration.14 253 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2..2x1..2x1.4..2/2x1..2x1.6 Outdoor CPT2 .

.4/.. AIR TRE4 OPTIONS TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU FANU AIR FANU SUM ANX (Sector 4) ANX (Sector 1) ANY ANX (Sector 3) ANY ANX (Sector 2) Empty space.Multiband BTS Configuration 254 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4..Rack Layouts 2..14 ...2 .1x1..2.4/.2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI 1x1.2.4.....7 Outdoor MEDI ..2 Configurations .2........... no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 AIR AIR TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 2 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 ( Sector 4 ) ANC 4 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 3 TRE 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AIR a b ANC 4 GSM 1800 Empty Space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU 1 2 Figure 121: Outdoor MEDI .4...2 ..1x1..4/..13..4..Multiband BTS configuration..

..4 ....14 255 / 914 ..2..Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...4.2....Multiband BTS configuration...4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2.13.8 Outdoor MEDI ..2/1x1....4 .2.....4.2 Configurations ..2/1x1.4..4.... AIR TRE4 OPTIONS TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU FANU AIR FANU SUM ANX (Sector 4) ANX (Sector 1) ANY ANX (Sector 3) ANY ANX (Sector 2) Empty slots no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 AIR AIR TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 2 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 ( Sector 4 ) ANC 4 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 3 TRE 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AIR a b ANC 4 GSM 1800 Empty Space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU 1 2 Figure 122: Outdoor MEDI .....2/1x1..

2 Configurations ..2 .14 .Multiband BTS Configuration 256 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4.. no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 AIR AIR TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 2 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 ( Sector 4 ) ANC 4 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 3 TRE 1 2 1 23 4 1 23 4 AIR a b ANC 4 GSM 1800 Empty Space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU 1 2 Figure 123: Outdoor MEDI . AIR TRE4 OPTIONS TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU FANU AIR FANU SUM ANX (Sector 4) ANX (Sector 1) ANY ANX (Sector 3) ANY ANX (Sector 2) Empty space.2 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI 2x1....9 Outdoor MEDI .2x1.4/2x1.13.Multiband BTS configuration.2 ....2x1.4/2x1...4/2x1..Rack Layouts 2..

10 Outdoor MEDI .Multiband BTS configuration.Rack Layouts 2........2/2x1.14 257 / 914 .4 The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI 2x1. AIR TRE4 OPTIONS TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU FANU AIR FANU SUM ANX (Sector 4) ANX (Sector 1) ANY ANX (Sector 3) ANY ANX (Sector 2) Empty space. no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 AIR AIR TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 2 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 ( Sector 4 ) ANC 4 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 3 TRE 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AIR a b ANC 4 Empty Space GSM 1800 1 2 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 124: Outdoor MEDI .2/2x1..2 Configurations ..2x1.4...4 .2/2x1..4 .13.Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2x1.

.2/3x1.3/2x1...3/2x1...2x1.2x1.2 .3x1.Multiband BTS configuration.....3 ... AIR TRE3 TRE3 TRE3 AIR TRE3 The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 ( Sector 4 ) ANC 4 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 3 ) ANC 3 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 2 TRE 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 23 a b ANC 4 AIR 1 2 3 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 Empty Space Figure 125: Outdoor MEDI .Rack Layouts 2..14 ....2 Configurations .2/3x1..2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI .13.Multiband BTS configuration.3 .3/2x1... − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs − Sector 5 with s TREs − Sector 6 with t TREs a b ANC 1 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) 1 2 a b ANC 4 AIR 1 2 1 2 GSM 900 GSM 1800 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space 1 2 a b ANC 2 1 2 a b ANC 5 a b ANC 3 1 2 a b ANC 6 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU ANC 4 ( Sector 4 ) S U M A AIR ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) ANC 3 ( Sector 3 ) Figure 126: Outdoor MEDI .3x1.4. AIR TRE2 TRE1 ANC 6 ( Sector 6 ) TRE2 TRE1 ANC 5 ( Sector 5 ) AIR The BTS has 6 sectors..13..2x1.12 Outdoor MEDI .Multiband BTS Configuration 258 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..11 Outdoor MEDI .2 ..4.3x1.Multiband BTS Configuration 2.3 The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI ..2/3x1..

14 259 / 914 .2/.2/..2/.1x(.2) Multiband Cells configuration.Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1x(.2) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI .1 Outdoor MINI ..5 Outdoor Configurations .Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 2.13....2 Configurations ..5.1x(..Rack Layouts 2.. OPTIONS The single sector has : n TREs in the GSM 900 band p TREs in the GSM 1800 band ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number SUM ANX 2 ANX 1 Empty space.. no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 AIR TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR The single sector has : n TREs in the GSM 900 band p TREs in the GSM 1800 band AIR a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 ANC 2 S U M A AIR ANC 1 On the 2 ANCs the bridges can be removed to get more power at the antenna output (Low Loss) (Operation to be performed during installation phase) Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 Figure 127: Outdoor MINI .2) ..13...

.5.14 ..4) .Rack Layouts 2.Multiband Cells Configuration 260 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Outdoor MINI ....1x(..4/.2 Configurations ..4/.13..1x(..4/.4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI ....1x(.4) Multiband Cells configuration. AIR TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The single sector has : n TREs in the GSM 900 band p TREs in the GSM 1800 band FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANC 2 S U M A AIR ANC 1 Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 Figure 128: Outdoor MINI .

6/..6/..6) .Rack Layouts 2.....2 Configurations ..1x(... AIR TRE6 OPTIONS TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 The single sector has : n TREs in the GSM 1800 band p TREs in the GSM 900 band ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number FANU FANU AIR FANU For each frequency band : TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max.14 261 / 914 .5...6) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI . no ANY is required.6) Multiband Cells configuration.6/. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty Space GSM 1800 Figure 129: Outdoor MEDI .3 Outdoor MEDI ..13. in the sector (No ANY) SUM ANY ANY 3 1 AIR ANY 2 ANX 1 ANY ANY 3 1 AIR ANY 2 ANX 2 Empty space no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE6 TRE5 AIR TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with : − n TREs in the GSM 900 band − p TREs in the GSM 1800 band a b ANC 1 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU ANY 1 TRE 1 2 3 4 ANY 2 56 S U M A ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 ANY 4 ANY 3 ANC 2 a b ANC 2 ANY 3 ANY 4 56 AIR AIR TRE 1 2 3 4 In each sector : If no more than 4 TREs.1x(.1x(.Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2) Multiband Cells configuration.2) The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 . ACSU ADAM P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 IDU 2 ANC 1 (Sector 1) FANU AIR ANC 3 (Sector 1) S U M A ANC 2 (Sector 2) FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 AIR TRE2 TRE1 ANC 4 (Sector 2) Legend The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs in GSM 900 and r TREs in GSM 1800 − Sector 2 with p TREs in GSM 900 and q TREs in GSM 1800 IDU 1 TRE 1 2 1 2 1 2 TRE2 FANU FANU TRE1 FANU AIR GSM 1800 a b ANC 4 BBU TRE2 FANU LPFU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space 1 2 Microwave IDU locations Figure 130: Outdoor CPT2 .2x(.....13..2) .2 Configurations ...2/..2x(.14 .4 Outdoor CPT2 ..2x(.2/.2/..Multiband Cells Configuration 262 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...Rack Layouts 2.5.

2x(.2 Configurations .2x(.2x(.5.2) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI ....4/..Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..Rack Layouts 2. a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 Sector 1 FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU TRE 1 2 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 4 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 3 ( Sector 1 ) ANC 2 Sector 2 AIR 1 2 3 4 1 23 4 a b ANC 3 a b ANC 4 1 2 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty Space GSM 1800 Figure 131: Outdoor MEDI .4/..14 263 / 914 ..5 Outdoor MEDI ... AIR TRE4 OPTIONS Sector 2 has: q TREs in the GSM 900 band r TREs in the GSM 1800 band FANU FANU AIR FANU ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number (1) ANX 3 and ANX4 are set to to the same sector number (2) TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 Sector 1 has: n TREs in the GSM 1800 band p TREs in the GSM 900 band SUM ANX 4 (Sector 2) AIR ANX 1 (Sector 1) ANY ANX 3 (Sector 2) AIR ANY ANX 2 (Sector 1) Empty space no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors...2) .2) Multiband Cells configuration..13.4/.

6 Outdoor MEDI .2/.4) ..Rack Layouts 2.2/..2 Configurations .2x(.4) Multiband Cells configuration..5..2x(. AIR TRE4 OPTIONS Sector 2 has: q TREs in the GSM 1800 band r TREs in the GSM 900 band FANU FANU AIR FANU ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number (1) ANX 3 and ANX4 are set to to the same sector number (2) TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 Sector 1 has: n TREs in the GSM 900 band p TREs in the GSM 1800 band SUM ANX 4 (Sector 2) AIR ANX 1 (Sector 1) ANY ANX 3 (Sector 2) ANY ANX 2 (Sector 1) AIR Empty space no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors Sector 1 a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU TRE 1 2 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 4 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 3 ( Sector 1 ) ANC 2 Sector 2 a b ANC 3 1 2 3 4 a b ANC 4 AIR 1 2 3 4 1 2 Empty Space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 Figure 132: Outdoor MEDI ..2/..2x(...13....4) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI .Multiband Cells Configuration 264 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 ..

.....1x(.4/.2).1x(....4) The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI 1x(.2).2 Configurations .. AIR TRE4 OPTIONS Setor 2 has: p TREs in the GSM 900 band q TREs in the GSM 1800 band FANU FANU AIR FANU ANX 1 and ANX 4 are set to the same sector number (1) ANX 2 and ANX3 are set to the same sector number (2) TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 Setor 1 has: n TREs in the GSM 900 band r TREs in the GSM 1800 band SUM ANX 4 (Sector 1) AIR ANX 1 (Sector 1) ANY ANX 3 (Sector 2) ANY ANX 2 (Sector 2) AIR Empty space no dummy panels needed GSM 1800 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU AIR TRE4 AIR TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors Sector 1 a b ANC 1 a b ANC 4 FANU AIR FANU AIR FANU TRE 1 2 ( Sector 1 ) ANC 4 S U M A AIR ( Sector 1 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 3 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 2 Sector 2 a b ANC 3 1 2 a b ANC 2 AIR 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Empty Space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU GSM 1800 Figure 133: Outdoor MEDI .2/..........4/..4/.Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..13.4) .Multiband Cells configuration.7 Outdoor MEDI .1x(.Rack Layouts 2..4) .5.1x(..2/.2)..2/.14 265 / 914 .1x(..

.2) The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI ..8 Outdoor MEDI .2) Multiband Cells configuration.5. 266 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Sector 1 : a b ANC 1 1 2 a b ANC 2 1 2 a b ANC 4 1 2 a b ANC 6 1 2 FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU AIR ANC 4 ( Sector 2 ) ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) ANC 3 ( Sector 2 ) AIR ANC 2 ( Sector 1 ) Sector 2 : a b ANC 3 1 2 Sector 3 : a b ANC 5 S U M A AIR AIR 1 2 GSM 900 GSM 1800 TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU AIR TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 134: Outdoor MEDI ..3x(.2/.Rack Layouts 2.2/.Multiband Cells Configuration 2.2) .2/...14 Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRX in 9100 BTS Outdoor Compact (CPT2) For 9100 BTS Outdoor Compact (CPT2) only symetrical configurations (identical number of TRX function with TWIN TRA as given for Single TRA) are allowed....14 .13.2 Configurations ...3x(.. AIR TRE2 TRE1 ANC 6 ( Sector 3 ) TRE2 TRE1 ANC 5 ( Sector 3 ) AIR The BTS has 3 sectors..3x(.

15 Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRX The following table gives the 9100 Compact BTS Outdoor TWIN TRX configurations. 2Rx Div Low Loss 1 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. TWIN Mode Number of sectors 1 2 3 Capacity Mode Low 1 Loss 2 Multiband & MB Cell Coverage Mode TxDiv.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations . 1 AC with BU5 carriers per sector 4 2/2 4 AC w/o BU5 carriers per sector 4 2/2 2/1/1 4 DC carriers per sector 6 3/3 or 4/2 2/2/2 6 Capacity Mode 2 +2 2 +2 3/3 4+2 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div Low Loss 1/1 2 1/1 2 1/1 1/1/1 2 2 2 2 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 267 / 914 .

1 sector with Twin-TRX 2.1.14 .1.1 CBO .15.2 Configurations .2 sectors with Twin-TRX 268 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.15.2 CBO .1 Capacity Mode Configurations 2.15.

1.15.2 Configurations .2 Capacity Mode Low Loss Configurations 2.14 269 / 914 .1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 CBO .3 sectors with Twin-TRX 2.2.15.Rack Layouts 2.3 CBO .15.

2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 2.2 Configurations .CBO .15.Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX 270 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .2.Rack Layouts 2.3 Multiband Configurations .2 CBO .15.

4.2 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 CBO .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.4.15.15.14 271 / 914 .1 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 2.1 CBO .4 Coverage Mode TX Diversity Configurations 2.15.

14 .3 CBO .2 Configurations .15.5 Coverage Mode with TX Diversity Low Loss Configurations .4.15.3 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 2.Rack Layouts 2.CBO .1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 272 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

1 Sector TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 Coverage Mode TX-Diversity 4 RX Configurations .CBO .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .14 273 / 914 .15.

Cabinet Number of sectors Carriesrs per sector Single TRX -> Twin TRX CBO 1 2 CBO DC 1 2 3 2 -> 4 1/1 -> 2/2 n.2 Configurations .a.Rack Layouts 2.16 Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on Twin TRX modules. 2/2 -> 3/3 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2 2.1 CBO 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 274 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .16.

16.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.14 275 / 914 .3 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.16.2 CBO 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 2.

4 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 276 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.16.14 .2 Configurations .

2 ANY are required Pre−equipment possible S U M A Up to 4 TREs. contact Alcatel-Lucent support.1x1.1.14 277 / 914 . and if no ANY pre−equipment.. If you are in doubt.. or if n>6.GSM 850/900/1800/1900 GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases..17.Rack Layouts 2. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 123 123 123 123 123 123 P M 1 2 TRE7 TRE6 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC 1 ANY 1 TRE8 ANY 2 TRE5 TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s FANU FANU AIR FANU If more than 4 TREs.1x1.17.1x1. the configuration is limited to six TREs..17 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations 2.8 configuration. Note: Restrictions For GSM 1900..8 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 .1 MBO1 . otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration Figure 135: MBO1 .8 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 2.1 MBO Standard Configurations ..2 Configurations . the TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed 123 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU PM12 equipped if GSM 1900.

For GSM 1900.2 Configurations .. for GSM 850.. or if (n+p)>6. Note: Restrictions None..4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 .2x1.4 configuration.1.17.2 MBO1 .Rack Layouts 2.2x1..2x1. otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 136: MBO1 .14 .. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs TRE4 a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 1 FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANC 2 (Sector 2) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed 123 123 PM12 equipped if GSM 1900.4 Configuration 278 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.. the configuration is limited to six TREs over the two sectors.

ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 123 123 123 123 123 123 ANC 3 ( Sector 3 ) The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 Sector 1 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 a b ANC 3 TRE 1 2 Sector 3 TRE2 TRE1 FANU FANU AIR FANU On each ANC: The bridges can be removed at installation time (on site)..14 279 / 914 .2 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration Figure 137: MBO1 .2 Configurations .2 configuration.3 MBO1 . for GSM 850.17.. if maximum power is required The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) S U M A ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 12 PM12 equipped if GSM 1900.2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 ..1.3x1.Rack Layouts 2..3x1.. Note: Restrictions None..3x1.

Note: Restrictions None.1x9..2 Configurations . for GSM 850.1....12 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .14 . ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 123 123 123 123 123 123 P M 1 2 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC 1 ANY 1 TRE5 TRE 1 3 5 7 ANY 2 2 468 TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 a b ANC 2 9 FANU FANU AIR FANU AIR TRE 11 10 12 Both ANCs are set to the same sector number ANC 2 Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if GSM 1900 and if n>6..12 configuration.17. Otherwise: dummy panel is installed S U M A ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 123 123 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE12 FANU TRE11 TRE10 FANU TRE9 FANU Figure 138: MBO2 ..1x9.1x9.4 MBO2 .12 Configuration 280 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.

Otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration Figure 139: MBO2 .6 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO .17...2x1.5 MBO2 .2x1.6 configuration. TREs 1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s S U M A ANY 1 ANC 1 ( Sector 1 ) ANY 2 ANC 2 ( Sector 2 ) AIR AIR Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 123 123 Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if GSM 1900 and if (n+p)>6..1..Rack Layouts 2.2x1. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 The BTS has 2 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC 1 ANY 1 TRE 1 3 2 456 TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC 2 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU ANY 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6 In each sector : If no more than 4 TREs.14 281 / 914 . no ANY is required...6 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .

.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 . for GSM 850.1x1..8 + 1x1. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 123 123 123 123 123 123 P M 1 2 The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs a b ANC 1 TRE5 ANY 1 TRE 1 3 5 7 ANY 2 2 468 TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 a b ANC 2 FANU FANU AIR FANU AIR ANC 2 (Sector 2) TRE 9 11 10 12 S U M A ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 (Sector 1) Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if GSM 1900 and if (n+p)>6......4 Configuration 282 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..8 + 1x1... Note: Restrictions None.14 .1.8 + 1x1.4 configuration..6 MBO2 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .1x1.17.. Otherwise: dummy panel is installed TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE12 FANU TRE11 TRE10 FANU TRE9 FANU 12 12 Figure 140: MBO2 .1x1.

.17. Otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration Figure 141: MBO2 .1...3x1.3x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .4 configuration.4 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..7 MBO2 .2 Configurations ..3x1.14 283 / 914 .. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 123 123 123 123 123 P M 1 2 ANC 3 (Sector 3) TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs TRE2 TRE1 a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 FANU FANU AIR S U M A FANU AIR TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s Empty space 123 123 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if GSM 1900 and if (n+p+q)>6.Rack Layouts 2.

17..2 MBO Low Losses Configurations .1 MBO1 .1x5.Low Losses Configuration 284 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..2 Configurations .GSM 900/1800/1900 2.. the configuration is limited to six TREs.Low Losses configuration..8 .8 .8 Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 .1x5. Note: Restrictions For GSM 1900. Otherwise: dummy panel is installed 12 TRE6 FANU TRE5 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 142: MBO1 .14 .Rack Layouts 2. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 TRE7 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 5 7 6 8 TRE8 Both ANCs are set to the same sector number FANU FANU AIR S U M A FANU ANC 2 ANC 1 Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if GSM 1900 and if n>6.17.1x5.2...

and kept otherwise..14 285 / 914 .Low Losses Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if GSM 1900 and if (n+p)>6.17.2x3. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC 1 TRE 1 5 2 6 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 5 2 6 a b ANC 4 3 4 a b ANC 3 3 4 FANU FANU AIR S U M A FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU In each sector : Both ANCs are set to the same sector number ANC 4 (Sector 1) ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 3 (Sector 2) ANC 2 (Sector 2) On each ANC: The two bridges will be removed at installation time (On site).Low Losses configuration.6 .6 Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .2x3.Rack Layouts 2.2 MBO2 . Otherwise: dummy panel is installed TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 12 Figure 143: MBO2 .....2..2x3.6 .2 Configurations . if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them.

Low Losses configuration..17.2 Configurations .3x3.3x3.4 . Otherwise: dummy panel is installed TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 123 123 Figure 144: MBO2 .2.3 MBO2 ..3x3.Low Losses Configuration 286 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Low Losses The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 ...Rack Layouts 2...14 . ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 ANC 6 (Sector 3) TRE2 TRE1 ANC 5 (Sector 3) The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs Sector 1 a b Sector 2 a b Sector 3 a b ANC 1 ANC 2 1 a 2 b ANC 5 TRE4 TRE3 TRE 1 a 2 b 1 a 2 b ANC 4 ANC 3 ANC 6 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE 3 4 3 4 3 4 ANC 4 (Sector 1) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 3 (Sector 2) ANC 2 (Sector 2) On each ANC: Bridges will be removed at installation time (on site) Per sector. both ANCs are set to the same sector number Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if GSM 1900 and if (n+p+q)>6.4 .

Rack Layouts 2.. ADAM4 The BTS has 1 sector P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 On site: on the ANC: Bridges can be removed if only 2 TREs connected to the ANC FANU FANU AIR FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s S U M A ANC 1 Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 145: MBO1 .1 MBO1 .High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..3.High Power GSM 900/1800 configuration.1x1.17.4 ..4 .3 MBO High Power Configurations ..1x1.1x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 .17.2 Configurations ..14 287 / 914 ..GSM 900/1800 2.

2 MBO1 ..2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.2x1.2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 .2x1.3.2 .High Power GSM 900/1800 configuration...17. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 The BTS has 2 sectors with up to 2 TREs each a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 2 Sector 1 Sector 2 FANU FANU FANU AIR On each ANC: Bridges will be removed at installation time.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 288 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. on site The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANC 2 (Sector 2) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) AIR Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 Available only on AC configuration FANU Figure 146: MBO1 ...14 .2x1.2 ..

2 Configurations .3x2 . ADAM4 The BTS has 3 sectors with 2 TREs each P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 a b a b a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 ANC 2 TRE 1 2 ANC 3 TRE 1 2 TRE2 TRE1 ANC 3 (Sector 3) Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3 On each ANC: Bridges will be removed at installation time.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3.3x2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 .3 MBO1 .3x2 .Rack Layouts 2. on site FANU FANU AIR FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANC 2 (Sector 2) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) Empty space Dummy panels if no modules installed Available only on AC configuration TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 147: MBO1 .17.14 289 / 914 .High Power GSM 900/1800 configuration.

.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 . ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 FANU AIR S U M A AIR FANU AIR The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 1 324 1324 FANU On site..2x1. otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration Figure 148: MBO2 .4 ...High Power GSM 900/1800 configuration.4 .3.High Power GSM 900/1800 configuration...2 Configurations . and on each ANC: Bridges can be removed if only 2 TREs connected The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 2 (Sector 2) Empty space AIR TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 123 123 Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6..4 . otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration Figure 149: MBO2 .4 .14 ..3x1.17.3.3x1.... ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 TRE2 TRE1 123 123 123 123 123 P M 1 2 ANC 3 (Sector 3) FANU The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 TRE 1 3 2 4 FANU FANU AIR S U M A FANU FANU AIR FANU 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 2 (Sector 2) Empty space 123 123 TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Dummy panels if no modules installed PM12 equipped if (n+p+q)>6.2x1..5 MBO2 .Rack Layouts 2.17.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 290 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3x1.High Power GSM 1800 Configuration 2.2x1.4 MBO2 .4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .

4 MBO Multiband BTS Configurations ...4/1x1..17.4 Multiband BTS configuration. otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 123 123 Figure 150: MBO1 .1 MBO1 ..4...2 Configurations .14 291 / 914 .4 ..Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 2..17. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs TRE4 a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 1 a b ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 2 FANU FANU AIR FANU The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANC 2 (Sector 2) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6.1x1..1x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 ..4/1x1.4/1x1..Rack Layouts 2.1x1.

1x1.1x1.4 Multiband BTS configuration.......6/1x1.8/1x1..1x1. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 152: MBO2 ......6 .1x1... no ANY is required.8/1x1..6 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .6 Multiband BTS configuration.17. no ANY is required.Multiband BTS Configuration 2.. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANY 1 ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANY 2 ANC 2 (Sector 2) GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 151: MBO2 ..4.8/1x1.1x1.2 Configurations .2 MBO2 ...14 .6/1x1..17.. ADAM4 Multiband BTS: P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 The BTS has 2 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC 1 ANY 1 TRE 1 3 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU 2 4 56 TRE 1 3 a b ANC 2 ANY 2 2 4 56 TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 S U M A In each sector : If no more than 4 TREs...1x1.Rack Layouts 2.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .3 MBO2 ..4 .6/1x1. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC 1 TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 ANY 1 TRE 1 3 5 7 ANY 2 2 468 a b ANC 2 AIR FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE 1 3 2 4 S U M A ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 2 (Sector 2) In sector 1: If no more than 4 TREs.Multiband BTS Configuration 292 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4.

.4/2x1..17...4/1x1.1x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .4/2x1..Rack Layouts 2.4 Multiband BTS configuration.1x1.8 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 . TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s S U M A ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC 1 (Sector 1) GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 153: MBO2 .1x1.5 MBO2 ..2 Configurations .14 293 / 914 .8 Multiband BTS configuration..1x1..Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed...1x1. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs a b ANC 1 TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 ANY 1 TRE 1 3 5 7 ANY 2 2 468 FANU FANU AIR FANU AIR ANC 2 (Sector 2) a b ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 In sector 1: If no more than 4 TREs.4/1x1..4. no ANY is required.. ADAM4 Multiband BTS: P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 FANU AIR ANC 3 (Sector 3) FANU FANU AIR S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) TRE 1 3 2 4 Sector 1 1 3 24 Sector 2 1 3 24 Sector 3 ANC 2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space Available only on AC configuration TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Figure 154: MBO2 ..4 ..4.4/1x1....4/2x1.8 .....4 MBO2 .1x1....17.Multiband BTS Configuration 2.

..4 Multiband BTS configuration.6 MBO2 .Rack Layouts 2.....Multiband BTS Configuration 294 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4/.1x1.2 Configurations .2.1x1.4.4/1x1.4/1x1...... ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband BTS : The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 2 1 2 TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU AIR ANC 3 (Sector 3) FANU FANU AIR S U M A a b ANC 3 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 4 1 2 ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 4) ANC 2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 156: MBO2 .....4/..17.Multiband BTS Configuration 2.......4/.1x1......4..2...2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 ...2 .4..4 ...4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .4..2.2 Multiband BTS configuration.17. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband BTS : The BTS has 3 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC 1 a b ANC 2 a b ANC 3 FANU AIR ANC 3 (Sector 3) FANU FANU AIR TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 24 1 3 24 S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 155: MBO2 .2x1...4.7 MBO2 ..4/1x1.2x1.2x1..14 ...

.2/1x1..4..2 Multiband BTS configuration....4...2....2/1x1......Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.17......2x1..4 Multiband BTS configuration..4..Multiband BTS Configuration 2..4/2x1...2 ..2x1.2.2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband BTS : The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 2 1 2 TRE4 TRE3 FANU AIR FANU FANU AIR a b ANC 3 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 4 1 2 ANC 3 (Sector 3) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 4) ANC 2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 158: MBO2 ..2.14 295 / 914 ...4/2x1.2/1x1...4/2x1.8 MBO2 .. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband BTS : The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 FANU AIR S U M A FANU FANU AIR a b ANC 3 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 2 1 2 TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC 4 1 2 ANC 3 (Sector 3) ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 4) ANC 2 (Sector 2) GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Empty space Figure 157: MBO2 .9 MBO2 ..2x1.4.2 Configurations ....4 ..4...17...Rack Layouts 2..4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .

3/2x1..Multiband BTS Configuration 2.2x1....11 MBO2 ..2x1.2/2x1..4.3 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 ..14 .2x1.2x1..3/2x1..4 Multiband BTS configuration.3/2x1....2/2x1...10 MBO2 .4.Rack Layouts 2.... ADAM4 Multiband BTS : P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs TRE3 TRE3 TRE3 a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 FANU AIR ANC 3 (Sector 3) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 4) FANU FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 3 TRE 1 3 2 a b ANC 2 1 3 2 TRE3 a b ANC 4 1 3 2 ANC 2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 160: MBO2 .4 .Multiband BTS Configuration 296 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Multiband BTS configuration.2x1.4 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .17.....17.2 Configurations . ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband BTS : The BTS has 4 sectors : − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs − Sector 4 with r TREs TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 2 1 2 FANU AIR FANU FANU AIR a b ANC 3 TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 4 1 2 ANC 3 (Sector 3) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 4) ANC 2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 159: MBO2 ...3 ..2x1.2/2x1.

4.2/3x1.. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors : Sector 1 a b ANC 1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 a b ANC 2 1 2 Sector 3 a b ANC 3 1 2 TRE4 TRE3 ANC 6 (Sector 6) ANC 5 (Sector 5) Sector 4 a b ANC 4 Sector 5 a b ANC 5 1 2 Sector 6 a b ANC 6 1 2 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE 1 2 ANC 3 (Sector 3) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 4) ANC 2 (Sector 2) On each ANC: Bridges will be removed at installation time (on site) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 161: MBO2 .....2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2..2 Multiband BTS configuration.17..Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..2 .2/3x1...2 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .3x1..12 MBO2 .2/3x1.14 297 / 914 ..3x1.3x1.

4/.1x(.Rack Layouts 2.17. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 Multiband Cell: The BTS has only 1 sector with: − n TREs in GSM 900 band − p TREs in GSM 1800 band ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number TRE4 a b ANC 1 FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 3 2 4 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s ANC 2 S U M A ANC 1 GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6. otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 123 123 Figure 162: MBO1 ....5 MBO Multiband Cells Configurations ..14 .GSM 900/1800 2.5...2 Configurations ..Multiband Cells Configuration 298 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4) .1x(..4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 .Multiband Cells configuration..4/.1 MBO1 .1x(.4/.17...4) ..

Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4) .. no ANY is required..Multiband Cells configuration..6) .6) .1x(.Multiband Cells Configuration 2.Multiband Cells configuration...1x(.6/.8/....6/....1x(.8/. no ANY is required...14 299 / 914 .1x(. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 164: MBO2 .2 Configurations .6) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 163: MBO2 .17..4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .1x(..2 MBO2 ..1x(.4) ..5.Rack Layouts 2..6/.. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband Cell: The BTS has only 1 sector with − n TREs in GSM 900 band − p TREs in GSM 1800 band ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC 1 ANY 1 TRE 1 3 5 7 ANY 2 2 468 FANU FANU AIR FANU AIR a b ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 S U M A ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC1 ANC 2 On ANC1: If no more than 4 TREs. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband Cell: The BTS has only 1 sector with: − p TREs in GSM 900 band − n TREs in GSM 1800 band ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 a b ANC 1 ANY 1 a b ANC 2 ANY 2 FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU S U M A ANY 1 ANC 1 ANY 2 ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 56 TRE 1 3 2 4 56 On each ANC: If no more than 4 TREs...3 MBO2 ..17..8/.5.

5......17..5 MBO2 ..4/. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s S U M A ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC1 ANC 2 GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE4 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 165: MBO2 .4/....2) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 ..Multiband Cells configuration.5..4/. no ANY is required.Multiband Cells Configuration 300 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2x(...Rack Layouts 2.14 ..4/.2x(.4/.2) .8) .1x(.8) .2 Configurations .Multiband Cells Configuration 2.1x(.....Multiband Cells configuration. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband Cell: The BTS has only 1 sector with − p TREs in GSM 900 band − n TREs in GSM 1800 band ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number a b ANC 1 ANY 1 TRE 1 3 5 7 ANY 2 2 468 TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 FANU FANU AIR FANU AIR a b ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 On ANC1: If no more than 4 TREs.4/.1x(..2x(..8) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .2) .17. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband Cell: The BTS has 2 sectors : Sector 1: − n TREs in GSM 1800 band − p TREs in GSM 900 band Sector 2: − q TREs in GSM 1800 band − r TREs in GSM 900 band a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 AIR S U M A a b ANC 3 ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 2) ANC 2 (Sector 1) TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 4 1 2 a b ANC 2 1 2 TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU AIR FANU FANU ANC 3 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 166: MBO2 ..4 MBO2 ...

.2x(.4) ..6 MBO2 .2x(.3/.Multiband Cells Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed..3/...2 Configurations .14 301 / 914 ....2x(.Rack Layouts 2.7 MBO2 ..Multiband Cells configuration.2/..Multiband Cells Configuration 2.3) .2x(..3/..2/..3) .2x(..Multiband Cells configuration... ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband Cell: The BTS has 2 sectors : Sector 1: − n TREs in GSM 1800 band − p TREs in GSM 900 band Sector 2: − q TREs in GSM 1800 band − r TREs in GSM 900 band a b ANC 1 TRE 1 3 2 4 AIR S U M A a b ANC 3 ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 2) ANC 2 (Sector 1) TRE 1 3 2 4 a b ANC 2 1 2 TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 FANU AIR FANU FANU a b ANC 4 1 2 ANC 3 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 167: MBO2 .17.17.5....4) .2/..3) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 ....2x(.4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 . ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband Cell: The BTS has 2 sectors : Sector 1: − n TREs in GSM 1800 band − p TREs in GSM 900 band Sector 2: − q TREs in GSM 1800 band − r TREs in GSM 900 band a b ANC 1 TRE1 3 2 a b ANC 3 ANC 2 (Sector 1) TRE 1 3 2 a b ANC 2 1 3 2 TRE3 TRE3 TRE3 TRE3 FANU AIR ANC 3 (Sector 2) FANU FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU S U M A a b ANC 4 1 3 2 ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 168: MBO2 ..5.

1x(...4/.2/.2)... ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband Cell: The BTS has 3 sectors : Sector 1: ANC1 + ANC2 Sector 2: ANC3 + ANC4 Sector 3: ANC5 + ANC6 Sector 1 a b ANC 1 TRE 1 2 Sector 2 a b ANC 2 1 Sector 2 a b ANC 3 2 TRE4 TRE3 ANC 6 (Sector 3) TRE2 TRE1 ANC 5 (Sector 3) 2 1 Sector 3 a FANU FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU a b ANC 4 a b ANC 5 b ANC 6 ANC 3 (Sector 2) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 2) ANC 2 (Sector 1) 1 2 TRE 1 2 1 On each ANC: Bridges will be removed at installation time (on site) 2 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 170: MBO2 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .4/.1x(.4) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .1x(. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 Multiband Cell: The BTS has 2 sectors : Sector 1: − n TREs in GSM 900 band − p TREs in GSM 1800 band a b ANC 1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 a b ANC 3 1 3 24 TRE 1 3 2 4 FANU FANU AIR S U M A FANU AIR Sector 2: − q TREs in GSM 900 band − r TREs in GSM 1800 band a b ANC 2 ANC 2 (Sector 2) a b ANC 4 1 2 ANC 3 (Sector 1) ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 2) TRE 1 2 The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 1800 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE2 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU Available only on AC configuration Figure 169: MBO2 .3x(.14 .9 MBO2 ..17.3x(....1x(..2) .2/...1x(.2/....2/.2)..1x(.4/..Multiband Cells configuration..5.17....Multiband Cells Configuration 302 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.....2).2/........4) .Multiband Cells configuration..Multiband Cells Configuration 2..2) .4) .5.3x(.2) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 ...2/..8 MBO2 .

6.GSM 850/1800/1900 GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases....3 Multiband BTS configuration. contact Alcatel-Lucent support.17.3x1/3x1. 2.3 Multiband BTS Configuration 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. If you are in doubt.17. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 ANC 6 (Sector 6) TRE3 TRE1 ANC 5 (Sector 5) The BTS has 6 sectors: Sector 1 a b ANC 1 Sector 2 a b ANC 2 Sector 3 a b ANC 6 TRE2 TRE1 TRE 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 Sector 4 a b ANC 3 Sector 5 a b ANC 4 Sector 6 a b ANC 5 FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE 1 1 1 ANC 3 (Sector 3) S U M A ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 4) ANC 2 (Sector 2) On each ANC: Bridges will be removed at installation time (on site) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 850 Dummy panels if no modules installed TRE1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU 123 123 Empty space PM12 equipped if GSM 1900.Rack Layouts 2..3x1/3x1.14 303 / 914 .3 The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 ..6 MBO Multiband BTS.3x1/3x1. Multiband Cells Configurations . Otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration Figure 171: MBO2 .2 Configurations .. and if TREs (n+p+t)>3.1 MBO2 .

6..Rack Layouts 2.17. Otherwise: dummy panel is installed Available only on AC configuration Figure 172: MBO2 ..14 ..3x(1/. ADAM4 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 P M 1 2 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 P M 1 2 ANC 6 (Sector 3) TRE3 TRE1 ANC 5 (Sector 3) The BTS has 3 sectors: Sector 1 a b ANC 1 Sector 2 a b ANC 2 Sector 3 a b ANC 6 TRE2 TRE1 TRE 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 a b ANC 3 a b ANC 4 a b ANC 5 FANU AIR FANU FANU FANU FANU AIR FANU TRE 1 1 1 ANC 3 (Sector 1) S U M A On each ANC: Bridges will be removed at installation time (on site) ANC 1 (Sector 1) ANC 4 (Sector 2) ANC 2 (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s GSM 850 Dummy panels if no modules installed Empty space 123 TRE1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU TRE1 FANU TRE3 FANU TRE2 TRE1 FANU PM12 equipped if GSM 1900..3x(1/.2 MBO2 .3) Multiband Cells Configuration 304 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3x(1/.3) Multiband Cells configuration.2 Configurations .. and if TREs (n+p+t)>3..3) The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 .

2 Configurations .18.14 305 / 914 .1 MBO1 .18 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on Twin TRX modules.1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2. Cabinet Number of sectors Carriesrs per sector Single TRX -> Twin TRX MBO1 MBO1T 1 2 3 MBO2 1 2 3 8 -> 12 4/4 ->4/6(6/6*) 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4 12 -> 16 6/6 -> 8/8 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6 2.

2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 306 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .18.Rack Layouts 2.2 MBO1 .2 Configurations .

Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .3 MBO1 .18.14 307 / 914 .3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

4 MBO2 .18.2 Configurations .1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 308 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .Rack Layouts 2.

5 MBO2 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.18.2 Configurations .14 309 / 914 .

Rack Layouts 2.18.3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 310 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 MBO2 .2 Configurations .14 .

2 9100 MBO1E 2 Sectors 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 9100 MBO1E 1 Sector 2.2 Configurations .19.19.14 311 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.19 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Configurations with Single TRX 2.

2 Configurations .3 9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors The following figure shows the MBO1E .14 .Rack Layouts 2.3 sectors with 3 TRE in one sector. 312 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.19.

2 Configurations .19.19.14 313 / 914 .5 9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 9100 MBO2E 2 Sectors 2.Rack Layouts 2.

14 .7 9100 MBO2 6 Sectors 314 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.19.2 Configurations .6 9100 MBO2 4 Sectors 2.19.Rack Layouts 2.

2 Configurations .20 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on Twin TRX modules.1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.20. Cabinet Number of sectors Carriesrs per sector Single TRX -> Twin TRX MBO1E 1 2 3 MBO2E 1 2 3 8 -> 12 4/4 ->4/6(6/6*) 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4 n. 8/6 -> 12/12 4/4/4 -> 8/8/8 2.Rack Layouts 2.1 MBO1E .a.14 315 / 914 .

2 MBO1E .2 Configurations .2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 316 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.14 .20.

Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 317 / 914 .20.3 MBO1E .

14 .Rack Layouts 2.2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 318 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 MBO2E .2 Configurations .20.

Rack Layouts 2.14 319 / 914 .20.5 MBO2E .3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .

2Rx Div.14 .21 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Configurations with Twin TRX 2. 4Rx Div. 1 2 3 8 6/6 4/4/4 2/2/2/2 12 6/6 6+6 2/2 + 2/2 4 2/2 2/2/2 2 2/2 2 2/2 MBO2E Carriers per sector 8 8/8 8/8/8 6/6/6/6 16 12/12 8/8/8 12 + 12 6/6 + 6/6 4/4/4 + 4/4/4 4 4/4 4/4/4 2 2/2 2/2/2 2 2/2 2/2/2 320 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations . Low Loss 1 2 3 Coverage Mode TxDiv. Twin Mode Number of sectors MBO1E Carriers per sector Capacity Mode 1 2 3 4 Capacity Mode Low Loss 1 2 3 Multiband & Multiband Cell 1 2 3 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div.1 Introduction The following table gives the Twin TRX configurations. 1 2 3 Coverage Mode TxDiv.21.

Rack Layouts Twin Mode Number of sectors MBO1E Carriers per sector MBO2E Carriers per sector 8+8 8+2 Extended Cell Extended Cell TxDiv.2 Transceiver Module TRM stands for TRansceiver Module and it can be: Twin module (TGT08. 1 Out 1 In. TGT09.2 Configurations . and one TRX in Tx Div mode. TGT18). or Single module (TRAG TAGH TRAD TRAP TRAL TADH) The twin module can operate as: One TRM for two TRE. 4RX Div for outer cell 1 In. and two TRX in capacity mode One TRM for one TRE. 1 Out 4+4 4+2 Table 7: Twin TRX Configurations 2.14 321 / 914 .21. TRX 1a TRM TRX 1b TRX 1 Capacity Mode Tx Div Mode Figure 173: Twin Module Modes 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

14 .1 Standard Configuration The following symbol is equivalent with Figure 174: Up to 4 TREs or 322 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.21.21.2 Configurations .3 Cabling Information 2.Rack Layouts 2.3.

14 323 / 914 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts Figure 175: Up to 4 TREs 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

14 .2 Configurations .Rack Layouts The following symbol is equivalent with Figure 176: Up to 6 TREs 324 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

Rack Layouts The following symbol is equivalent with Figure 177: Up to 8 TREs 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .14 325 / 914 .

Rack Layouts 2.14 .2 Configurations .21.2 Tx Div 2Rx Div Configurations The following symbol is equivalent with 326 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3.

Rack Layouts 2.14 327 / 914 .3 Tx Div 4Rx Div Configurations The following symbol is equivalent with 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .21.3.

14 .4.21.21.Rack Layouts 2.4 Capacity Mode 2.2 Configurations .1 MBO1E .1 Sector with Twin-TRX 328 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 Configurations .4.Rack Layouts 2.2 MBO1E .21.2 Sectors with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 329 / 914 .

2 Configurations .3 MBO1E .3 Sectors with Twin-TRX 330 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .4.Rack Layouts 2.21.

2 Configurations .4.Rack Layouts 2.4 Sectors with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 MBO1 .14 331 / 914 .21.

Rack Layouts 2.5 MBO2E .4.21.2 Configurations .1 Sector with Twin-TRX 332 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

14 333 / 914 .4.2 Sectors with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .6 MBO2E .21.Rack Layouts 2.

7 MBO2E .14 .21.4.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .3 Sectors with Twin-TRX 334 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

8 MBO1E .Rack Layouts 2.14 335 / 914 .2 Configurations .4 Sectors with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.21.4.

Rack Layouts 2.4 Sectors with Twin-TRX 336 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.9 MBO2E .4.14 .2 Configurations .21.

1 MBO1 .5.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5 Capacity Mode Low Loss 2.21.21.14 337 / 914 .

5.2 Configurations .14 .1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX 338 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.2 MBO2E .21.

5.3 MBO1E .Rack Layouts 2.2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.21.2 Configurations .14 339 / 914 .

2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 340 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .2 Configurations .5.21.Rack Layouts 2.4 MBO2E .

Rack Layouts 2.14 341 / 914 .3 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5.5 MBO2E .2 Configurations .21.

21.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.14 .6 Multiband & Multiband Cell 2.Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz 342 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.21.6.1 MBO1E .

14 343 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.6.Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus p and r TRX in 1800 MHz Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .21.2 MBO1E .

Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz 344 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 MBO2E .21.2 Configurations .Rack Layouts 2.6.14 .

Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus p and r TRX in 1800 MHz Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.6.2 Configurations .4 MBO2E .14 345 / 914 .21.

5 MBO2E .6.Rack Layouts 2.t TRX in 1800 MHz Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz 346 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.s TRX in 900 MHz plus p.Multiband 3 + 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n.21.14 .q.2 Configurations .r.

21.14 347 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.7 Coverage Mode TxDiv.21.2 Configurations . 2.7.1 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 2Rx Div.1 MBO1E .

21.Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX 2.3 MBO1E .7.14 .2 MBO1E .Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .3 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 348 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.21.7.

21.7.Rack Layouts 2.7.4 MBO2E .21.14 349 / 914 .1 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 2.5 MBO2E .2 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .

14 .Rack Layouts 2.7.3 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX 350 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .6 MBO2E .21.

Low Loss 2. 2Rx Div.Rack Layouts 2.21.14 351 / 914 .21.8.1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Configurations .1 MBO1E .8 Coverage Mode TxDiv.

2 MBO2E .21.8.1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 352 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .14 .

21.Rack Layouts 2.2 Configurations .3 MBO1E .2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8.14 353 / 914 .

14 .21.Rack Layouts 2.2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 354 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8.2 Configurations .4 MBO2E .

14 355 / 914 .Rack Layouts 2.5 MBO2E .2 Configurations .21.3 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8.

Rack Layouts 2. 4Rx Div.1 Sector TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX 356 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .9 Coverage Mode TxDiv.9.1 MBO1E . 2.21.21.2 Configurations .

Rack Layouts 2.9.21.2 MBO2E .2 Configurations .14 357 / 914 .1 Sector TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 Configurations .2 Sectors TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX 358 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts 2.14 .9.21.3 MBO1E .

2 Configurations - Rack Layouts

2.21.9.4 MBO2E - 2 Sectors TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

359 / 914

2 Configurations - Rack Layouts

2.21.9.5 MBO2E - 3 Sectors TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX

360 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

2 Configurations - Rack Layouts

2.21.10 Extended Cell
2.21.10.1 MBO1E - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

361 / 914

2 Configurations - Rack Layouts

2.21.10.2 MBO2E - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX

362 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

2 Configurations - Rack Layouts

2.21.11 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell
2.21.11.1 MBO1E - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX

2.21.11.2 MBO2E - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

363 / 914

2 Configurations - Rack Layouts

364 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3 Indoor Cabinets

3 Indoor Cabinets
This chapter describes the indoor cabinets used in 9100 BTS configurations.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

365 / 914

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1 CIMI/CIDI
The CIMI and CIDI are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectional and sectorized configurations. The following figure shows the position of the main modules.
CIMI Top FANUs Interconnection Panel CIDI

Interconnection Panel

STASR 2

STASR 2

Dummy Panel

Dummy Panel

STASR 1

STASR 1

FANUs Air Inlet

FANUs Air Inlet

Figure 178: CIMI/CIDI Module Positions Both cabinets are designed to house two STASRs. In the CIMI, the upper subrack (STASR2) contains the SUM and can contain TRE and/or AN modules. The lower subrack (STASR1) can contain TRE and/or AN modules. In the CIDI, the upper subrack (STASR2) can contain the SUM, the microwave equipment and/or AN modules. The lower subrack (STASR1) can contain the SUM and/or TRE modules.

366 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.1 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Access and Features
The following figure shows the CIMI/CIDI equipped with the interconnection panel and two empty subracks.
Perforated Cover contains FANUs (CIMI only). RF Interface Equipment Label

Interconnection Area

Perforated Door Strips

Dust Filter (CIDI only)

Subrack

EMC Gasket (CIMI only) Adjustable Feet

Figure 179: CIMI/CIDI Equipped with Empty Subracks

3.1.1.1 Construction
The CIMI/CIDI is a steel box construction with four adjustable feet, on its underside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinet has no side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the top of the cabinet. The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment comply with IEC 297 standards.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

367 / 914

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.1.2 Door
The CIMI/CIDI can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations. Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the front of the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet. In the CIMI, the door is fitted with a copper-beryllium gasket to ensure EMC integrity when closed. An optional dust filter can be fitted to the CIDI door. The filter is removable for cleaning.

3.1.1.3 Cables
All external cables, except for the antenna, are connected to the interconnection panel. The external cables include the DC supply and Abis connections. The antenna cabling is connected at the top of the cabinet. A ribbon cable is used in the cabinet to link the subracks together; as shown in the following figure. In the CIMI, the top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.1.3) ). In the CIDI, the cable terminates at the rear connector of the top subrack. The bottom end terminates on the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) ).

TFBP (CIMI only) Rear

Subrack Front Subrack

Ribbon Cable

BTSRI

Figure 180: CIMI/CIDI Subracks Interconnection Cable

368 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.1.4 Cabinet Top
The following figure is a top view of the CIMI, showing antenna connectors and the fan cover. The cover is cut away to reveal extractor fans. The fans are installed and removed via the front of the cabinet. The CIDI cabinet differs in that it requires no top fans and no Top Fan Backplane. The cabinet has a perforated top cover.
Fan Cover Top Fans (x6) Top Fan Backplane

Ground Bolt

Sector q/A Sector q/B Sector r/A Sector r/B Antenna Connectors

Sector n/A Sector n/B Sector p/A Sector p/B Antenna Connectors

Front
Interconnection Panel

DC Filter Connectors

Note:

Sector n/p/q/r means the sector with n/p/q/r TREs. A and B are numbering conventions of the antennas. Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped.

Figure 181: CIMI/CIDI Top View The antennas are connected to RF connectors in a recess at the top of the cabinet. An M8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet to ground. Any unequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate.

3.1.1.5 Cooling
The CIMI is air cooled by fans, both inside the cabinet and at the top. Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door and is then forced up, through the subracks, by the internal fans. The warm air is expelled through perforations at the top of the cabinet. The CIDI is cooled by fans inside the cabinet only; it does not require top fans. Refer to Temperature Control (Section 11) for information about the cooling system hardware.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

369 / 914

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.2 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Interconnection Panel
All the external electrical interfaces are located on a panel at the top of the cabinet; as shown in the following figure.
Interconnection Area (BTSCA)
Abis Interface Group Equipment Labels XIO Interface Connectors
XBCB XGPS

Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area (DCBREAK)

XRT

Abis 4

Abis 3

Abis 2

Abis 1

XCLK1 In

XCLK1 Out

Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1

For details see below

XGND GND

XCLK2 In/Out

External Input/Output Interface Group

Krone Strip External Clock Interface Group

Abis Relays

CIMI

DC Variant
Equipment Labels

CIDI

DC Variant

DC Filter Connectors

DC Filter Connectors

−48V −48V 0V

0V

I

I

I I I 0 INT SR1 I 0 SR2 0 S R 2 0

0 0 BTS S INT R 1

Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breakers

Figure 182: CIMI/CIDI Interconnection Panel The interconnection area (BTSCA) is located on the left-hand side (see Figure 182 ); the shaded areas identify separate groups of connectors. The power supply input-connectors and circuit breakers are located on the right-hand side. All interfaces are overvoltage protected. An External Input/Output Board is located behind the interconnection area. The XIOB is connected to the interconnection area and contains a 24 V DC/DC converter and interface circuitry for external alarms. The interconnection panel provides interfaces for the: XIO, external clock, and Abis signals DC supplies.

370 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.3 CIMI/CIDI Signal Interfaces
The CIMI/CIDI have XIO, external clock and Abis signal interfaces. This section describes the connectors and functions for each of these interfaces, as well as the external alarm inputs.

3.1.3.1 XIO Interface
The XIO connectors allow various external alarm devices to be connected to the 9100 BTS. These include smoke and flood detectors, as well as electro-mechanical switches. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors. Figure 182 shows the positions of the XIO connectors. The following figure provides a detailed view of the XIO connectors.
XI1 GND XI2 GND XI3 GND XI4 GND XI5 GND XI6 GND XI7 GND XI8 GND

XIO 1

External Alarm Inputs

XI9 GND XI10 GND XI11 GND XI12 GND XI13 GND XI14 GND XI15 GND XI16 GND

XIO 2

XI17 GND XI18 GND XI19 GND XI20 GND XI21 GND XI22 GND XI23 GND XI24 GND

XIO 3

External Alarm Outputs

+24V +24V +24V +24V X01 X02 X03 X04 X05 X06 X07 X08 X GND X GND X GND X GND

XIO 4

Figure 183: 9100 BTS Indoor XIO Interface Connectors

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

371 / 914

3 Indoor Cabinets

The following table lists the XIO connectors, in functional groups. External Alarm Inputs Connectors XIO 1 to XIO 3 provide an interface for connecting 24 external alarm inputs. Each input alarm is reported to the OMC-R, where it is mapped to customer-defined ASCII text. The ASCII text describes the particular alarm. Each alarm input has two adjacent pins associated with it on the XIO connector. If these pins are open-circuit (open loop), an alarm is generated. External Alarm Outputs Connector XIO 4 provides an interface for the SUM to control eight external alarm devices. This feature is for future use. For more information about the SUM, refer to Station Unit Modules (Section 8) . Connector XIO 4 provides a + 24 VDC power source for external alarm devices that require a power supply. The XGND connector is used when attaching the external alarm 24 VDC ground to the 9100 BTS ground. If the connector pins are not short-circuited (open loop), the input and output alarms are isolated from the 9100 BTS ground.

+ 24 VDC Supply

XGND

Table 8: 9100 BTS Indoor XIO Interface Connectors (Functional Groups)

372 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.3.2 External Alarm Inputs
The following table gives a detailed view of the external alarm inputs. Alarm Description Alarm number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 XIO Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Alarm Class 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 No Yes No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Outside Alarm Connection Alarm Generation

Table 9: 9100 BTS Indoor External Alarm Inputs

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

373 / 914

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.3.3 External Clock Interface
The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions (see Figure 182 ). The following table describes the connectors. XBCB The XBCB connector provides an external interface to the BCB. Certain external control functions can be implemented via the XBCB connector: RI Power supply status Battery status Additional Input/Output signals. The 9100 BTS does not have to be powered up when accessing the Remote Inventory function. XRT The XRT connector provides access to the 9100 BTS via an asynchronous serial interface. The signal levels conform to CCITT V.24. This allows a standard terminal to be used for radio supervision and loop-test purposes. The data rate is programmable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. The XRT Interface is controlled by the SUM. The XGPS connector provides an asynchronous serial interface. This controls and supervises an external GPS receiver. The signal levels conform to CCITT V.24. The data rate is programmable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. This interface can also be used to synchronize the 9100 BTS to the GPS receiver. The synchronizing signal conforms to RS-422. The XGPS Interface is controlled by the SUM. The XCLK connectors are used to synchronize the 9100 BTS to another BTS, which can be a G1 BTS, a G2 BTS or a 9100 BTS. The signaling interface conforms to RS-422. The XCLK1 In and XCLK1 Out are connected together, pin-to-pin. The XCLK2 In/Out connector provides a bi-directional clock interface. The XCLK Interface is controlled by the SUM.

XGPS

XCLK

Table 10: 9100 BTS External Clock Interface Connectors

374 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.3.4 Abis Interface
The Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions (see Figure 182 ). The interface consists of the connectors described in the following table. Abis Connectors The Abis Interface connects the 9100 BTS to the BSC. There are four connectors (Abis 1, 2, 3 and 4). All the connectors provide 120 and 75 impedances. The impedance is selected by the type of cable connector plugged into the interface. For 120 cable connection, the CA01 cable should be used. For 75 cable connection, the CA02 cable should be used. Note: Only Abis 1 and 2 are currently used; Abis 3 and 4 are provided for future use. Krone Strip Connector When the Krone connector is used for Abis connection, depending on the cable impedance, take into account the following remarks: If 120 cables are used, the SP2M connector must be removed from the Abis connectors If 75 cables are used, the SP2M connector must be plugged into the Abis connectors. The Krone strip supports an overvoltage protection device and an Abis monitoring device. The overvoltage protection device is a ’make-before-break’ type. This means there is no interruption of service during insertion and removal. Abis Relays Four relays, one for each Abis Interface, are controlled by the SUM. The relays can be used to: Perform loop-back tests on the individual Abis Interfaces. Provide transparent routing of the Abis traffic when the 9100 BTS is powered down or faulty. This ensures that the Abis connection is not broken in multidrop configurations. Table 11: 9100 BTS Abis Interface Connectors

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

375 / 914

3 Indoor Cabinets

3.1.4 CIMI/CIDI DC Supplies Interface
The external power supply inputs to the CIMI/CIDI are located at the top of the cabinet (see Figure 182 ). The following table lists the components. DC Filters In CIMI, there are two DC filter connectors; one for the 0 V input and one for the -48/-60 VDC input. CIDI requires only a single filter in the -48/-60 VDC line. The 0 V input connector consists of an M8 bolt. Circuit Breakers Three hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breakers protect the CIMI/CIDI equipment from overload. Each subrack power supply is protected by a separate circuit breaker. The XIOB (which includes the interconnection area) and the top fan backplane share the third breaker (see CIMI/CIDI Power Supply and Grounding (Section 3.1.5) ).

Table 12: CIMI/CIDI, DC Supplies Interface

376 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

The XIOB and TFBP have the same inputs as the subracks.1. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 377 / 914 .5 CIMI/CIDI Power Supply and Grounding The CIMI/CIDI is powered from a -48/-60 VDC external power source.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. Power is distributed to the cabinet via: One filtered and one unfiltered input connector for CIDI Two filtered input connectors for CIMI. The following figure shows the CIMI/CIDI DC power interconnections. Ground (M8 Bolt) DC Supply Part of Interconnection Panel 0 VDC Filter −48/−60 VDC Filter Circuit Breakers 2 5A 1 XIOB Top Fan Backplane (CIMI only) STASR2 25 A STASR1 25 A Figure 184: CIMI/CIDI DC Power Interconnections Each subrack has: A filtered input of -48/-60 VDC A filtered 0 V return A ground connector A circuit breaker.

This is a branched cableform. the CIMI/CIDI is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the cabinet with an M8 bolt. At cabinet level.3 Indoor Cabinets The following table shows the rated values for the power components. Item 0 and -48/-60 VDC Filters Circuit Breakers 1 and 2 Circuit Breaker 3 Component/Rating 4 µF capacitors.14 . The CIDI uses a bus bar for this purpose. 378 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. rated at 75 A. 25 A 5A Table 13: CIMI/CIDI Power Component Ratings The CIMI/CIDI is EMC protected at both cabinet and module level. A functionally identical alternative to the cabinet bus bar is used in later models of CIMI. The bus bar (or cableform) also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks and other CIMI/CIDI equipment. ground continuity is carried to the subracks via the cabinet bus bar. At module level.

XIOB. It connects to an XIO connector on the Interconnection Panel. Cable Assembly . Part Number 3BK 07720 BUMI 3BK 07763 CA-ADCO 3BK 07953 CIMI bus bar 3BK 07763 CS02 3BK 07598 CS03 3BK 07599 CS04 3BK 07600 CS05 3BK 07199 Table 14: CIMI/CIDI Internal Cables 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.1. The CIMI bus bar is a hardware module used for the DC power connections to the subracks. It connects an ANX/ANC to two antenna cabinet connectors. and top fans. Different variants exist for some of the cables and cable sets. and top fans. A BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the cable. refer to Cable Descriptions (Section 16) .6.6 CIMI/CIDI Cables and Cable Sets This section lists the cables and cable sets for all 9100 BTS CIMI/CIDI configurations.Alarm Disable Connector disables eight alarm inputs. In a CIMI it interconnects the SUM and the Interconnection Panel. For the variants used in a specific cabinet. For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables. The BUMI is a branched cableform. Cable Set 04 is an Antenna cable set. and clock and control signals to and from the SUM. It connects an ANY to another ANY or to an ANX/ANC. Cable Set 05 is the BTS Connection Area to SUM cable set. 3.14 379 / 914 .1 Internal Cables The CIMI/CIDI internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable sets listed in the following table. XIOB. It contains cables for the DC power connections to the subracks. Table 15 lists and describes the cables that comprise the cable sets. refer to its parts list. Mnemonic BTSRIMI Description The BTSRIMI is a flat cable and Printed Circuit Board. Cable Set 03 is a TRE cable set which connects a TRE to an ANX/ANC or ANY. The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. It interconnects the subrack backplanes (and the TFBP in case of CIMI).1. Cable Set 02 is an Antenna Network cable set.

TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to an ANY.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. The Transmitter Radio Frequency Cable connects an ANY TX connector to an ANX or another ANY TX connector. Cable Set CS02 Cable RXRC Description The Receiver Radio Frequency Cable connects an ANY RX connector to an ANX or another ANY RX connector. ANX or ANC TX connector. The Cable Assembly . Part Number 3BK 07920 Quantity 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS03 RXRC 3BK 07920 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS04 ANIC 3BK 07921 2 CS05 CA-ABIS 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 Table 15: CIMI/CIDI Cable Sets 380 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The Cable Assembly . ANX or ANC RX connector. RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to an ANY.Abis BTSCA-SUM Cable carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the Interconnection Panel to the SUM.1.BTSCA-SUM Flat Cable carries clock and control signals between the Interconnection Panel and the SUM.2 Cable Sets The following table describes the cable sets used in the CIMI/CIDE cabinets.6. The Antenna Indoor Cable provides a duplex connection between the ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.14 .

75 PCM cable. Cable Assembly 01 is a 120 PCM cable. Black is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable.Power Cable 35 mm sq. HCF1/ 2. The cable used is Flex3. The Cable Assembly . 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel and the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.1. A shorting plug. for impedance matching.Power Cable Two Wires 16 mm sq. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables. shielded. and to the customer’s ground point. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq. CA02 Cable Assembly 02 is a 75 PCM cable. and to the customer’s DC power source. 1AC 01723 0001 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. yellow/green power cable. 2 Mbit/s.Cable BTS Terminal is the BTS Terminal cable. CA-CBTE The Cable Assembly . The cable used is a 35 mm sq. 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m / 5 m length. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. black power cable. CA-PC2W16 Cable Assembly . 2 Mbit/s. The cable used is L907.Ground Cable 35 mm sq. The cable used is a 35 mm sq. is the cabinet ground cable. black power cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel and the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board. SP2M is used with Flex3. and to the customer’s 0 VDC power source. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. Mnemonic Antenna Jumper Description Antenna jumpers.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. It connects to the 0 VDC connector on the Interconnection Panel. an 8 pair. The cables used are a 16 mm sq.14 381 / 914 .6.3 External Cables The CIMI/CIDI external cables consist of discrete cables that are listed and described in the following table. It connects to the M8 ground bolt on the cabinet. It connects the BTS Terminal to the BTS Terminal connector on the SUM. 2 x 7/ 16 straight male connectors.. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. a multi-coaxial. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. Part Number 3BK 05360 CA01 3BK 07594 1AC 01328 0004 3BK 07595 1AC 00110 0011 3BK 08949 3BK 07951 CA-GC35 3BK 08031 1AC 01723 0003 3BK 08029 1AC 00147 0001 (Blue) 1AC 00147 0002 (Black) 3BK 08030 CA-PC35BK Cable Assembly . It connects to the DC connectors on the Interconnection Panel.

It connects to the -48 VDC connector on the Interconnection Panel. Synchronization Cable Generation 2/3 is a clock synchronization cable.3 Indoor Cabinets Mnemonic CA. 2 Mbit/s. Synchronization Cable Mark 2/3 is a clock synchronization cable.Power Cable 35 mm sq.PC35BL Description Cable Assembly . It connects a 9100 BTS to another 9100 BTS. It connects a G1 BTS Mark1 to the 9100 BTS. and to the customer’s -48 VDC power source. Synchronization Cable Generation 3 is a clock synchronization cable. an 8-pair. blue power cable. SCG2/3 SCG3 3BK 07950 SCM1/3 3BK 08102 SCM2/3 3BK 08103 Table 16: CIMI/CIDI External Cables 382 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Part Number 3BK 08032 1AC 01723 0002 1AC 01328 0001 3BK 08101 External Alarms This cable can be made onsite to the desired length. Blue is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. Synchronization Cable Mark 1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. The cable used is L907. shielded. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length.14 . 120 PCM cable. The cable used is a 35 mm sq. It connects a G2 BTS to the 9100 BTS. It connects a G1 BTS Mark2 to the 9100 BTS.

SCM2/3 CA−ADCO TFBP DC (CIMI only) CS05 BTSRIMI BTSCA CA−CBTE STASR 2 Backplane SUM STASR 1 Backplane BTSRI Figure 185: CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. SCG3. CA PC35BK. CA PC35BL CA01/02 SCG2/3.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.1.7 CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data and control cables.14 383 / 914 . SCM1/3. CA GC35. CA PC2W16.

Figure 186: CIMA/CIDE Module Positions 384 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 CIMA/CIDE The CIMA/CIDE are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectional and sectorized configurations. DC variant Top FANUs Connector Area STASR 5 Up to 4 TREs Up to 4 TREs Power control modules Up to 4 TREs Connector Area STASR 5 ASIB Top FANUs Connector Area AC variant Connector Area STASR 4 FANUs FANUs Air Inlet STASR 4 ANs Up to 2 ANCs and up to 2 Microwave Modules Air Inlet STASR 4 STASR 3 Up to 4 TREs or ANs FANUs Air Inlet STASR 3 FANUs Air Inlet Up to 2 ANCs and up to 2 Microwave Modules Dummy Panel STASR 3 Up to 4 TREs Dummy Panel STASR 3 STASR 2 Up to 4 TREs FANUs Air Inlet Dummy Panel STASR 2 Up to 4 TREs SUM and ANs FANUs Air Inlet STASR 2 SUM and ANs STASR 2 FANUs Air Inlet Dummy Panel STASR 1 STASR 1 ADAM. There are two variants. ANC FANUs Air Inlet SUM.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. SUM.14 . where the allowed configurations are determined by the type of external power supply used by the cabinet: DC power supply variant AC power supply variant. ANYs and ANCs Up to 4 TREs Dummy Panel STASR 1 Dummy Panel STASR 1 FANUs Air Inlet FANUs Air Inlet Up to 4 TREs Up to 4 TREs Batteries Fitted into special Battery Tray Batteries Fitted into special Battery Tray or another STASR fitted with TREs *) Dummy Panel FANUs Air Inlet FANUs Air Inlet Dummy Panel CIMA CIDE CIMA CIDE * ) If TREs are installed FANUs are installed under this STASR instead of over it. The following figure shows the position of the main modules for both variants. 3 PM12s.

2. The odd-numbered subrack positions (1 and 3) each contain up to four TREs. Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the odd-numbered subracks and. also at the top of the cabinet. the CIDE holds four STASRs. ANY or ANC modules. in the CIMA. The odd-numbered subrack positions (1. the CIDE holds five STASRs. STASR3 contains up to two ANCs. in the CIMA.14 385 / 914 . STASR2 contains the SUM and a mixture of ANX. as required.1 DC Power Supply Variant The DC variant of the cabinet is designed to house up to five STASRs. Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the subracks containing TREs and the power control subrack. STASR4 can contain only a mixture of ANX. ANY or ANC modules. up to two microwave communications modules If an external battery is used. three PM12s and the ADAM. 3 and 5) each contain up to four TREs. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The battery tray at the bottom of CIDE is replaced by a STASR which contains up to four additional TREs. STASR1 contains the SUM.2 AC Power Supply Variant The AC variant of the CIMA is designed to house up to three STASRs and an ASIB subrack. In this case FANUs are installed under this STASR.2. 3.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. The battery tray in the bottom of the cabinet can contain a BU41 or a BU100. as required. as well as microwave communications modules. STASR2 contains the SUM and a mixture of ANX and ANY modules. and optionally. The AC variant of the CIDE uses a backup battery which can be housed internally or externally: If an internal battery is used. STASR2 and 4 each contain up to four TREs. Subrack 4 is an ASIB subrack containing the AC power control modules.

2. Top Cover RF Interface RF Interface Equipment Label Interconnection Area Note that the AC variant uses an ASIB to replace the top STASR.14 .3 Indoor Cabinets 3.3 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Access and Features The following figure shows the CIMA/CIDE equipped with the interconnection panel and five empty subracks. Adjustable Feet Figure 187: CIMA/CIDE Equipped with Empty Subracks 386 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Perforated Door Strips EMC Gasket (CIMA only) STASR Note that the AC variant may replace the bottom STASR with a battery tray containing BU41 or BU100.

14 387 / 914 . The antenna cabling is connected at the top of the cabinet. to compensate for any unevenness in the floor.1 Construction The CIMA/CIDE is a steel box construction with four adjustable feet. 3. are connected to the interconnection panel. the ribbon cable also connects to the RIBAT (refer to RIBAT (Section 12. The door is the full height of the cabinet and. If an internal battery is used in the AC Variant.refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.2. TFBP (CIMA only) Subrack TFBP (CIMA only) Subrack Ribbon Cable Subrack Ribbon Cable Subrack Subrack Rear Front Rear Subrack Front Subrack Subrack Subrack BTSRI BTSRI RIBAT in Case of Battery (CIDE only) Sub rack or Battery Tray DC variant AC variant Figure 188: CIMA/CIDE Subracks Interconnection Cable 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the top of the cabinet. 3. The top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (CIMA only . on its underside. The bottom end terminates on the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8. is fitted with a copper-beryllium gasket to ensure EMC integrity when closed.3.1.2.2. see the following figure.3. A ribbon cable is used within the cabinet to link the subracks together.5) for more information). The external cables include the AC or DC supply and Abis connections. The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment comply with IEC 297 standards.2 Door The CIMA/CIDE can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.3.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. in the CIMA. The cabinet has no side access.3) for more information).3 Cables All external cables. Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the front of the cabinet. except for the antenna.29) for more information).

The CIDE has no top fans.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. The fans are installed and removed via the front of the cabinet. showing antenna connectors and the fan cover. Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped.14 . The filter has terminals for connection to a 230 VAC 1ø supply. Fan Cover Top Fans (x6) Top Fan Backplane Ground Bolt Sector q/A Sector q/B Sector r/A Sector r/B Antenna Connectors Sector n/A Sector n/B Sector p/A Sector p/B Front Interconnection Panel Antenna Connectors AC or DC Filter Connectors. Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped. 388 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Figure 189: CIMA Top View The following figure is a top view of the CIDE.3.4 Cabinet Top The following figure is a top view of the CIMA. A and B are numbering conventions of the antennas.2. An M8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet to ground. depending on CIMA variant Note: Sector n/p/q/r means the sector with n/p/q/r TREs. Figure 190: CIDE Top View The antennas are connected to RF connectors at the top of the cabinet. Top Cover AC Mains Filter Terminals Ground Bolt Sector q/A Sector q/B Sector r/A Sector r/B Antenna Connectors Sector n/A Sector n/B Sector p/A Sector p/B Antenna Connectors DC Filter Connectors DC Output Connector Front Interconnection Panel Note: Sector n/p/q/r means the sector with n/p/q/r TREs. just a perforated top cover. The CIDE AC variant has an AC filter set in the roof plate next to the antenna connectors on the left side. A and B are numbering conventions of the antennas. Any unequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate. The cover is cut away to reveal extractor fans.

The power supply input-connectors and circuit breakers are located on the right-hand side. additionally at the top. external clock and Abis signals External power supplies for both DC and AC variants. DC and AC Variants The interconnection area is located on the left-hand side of the Interconnection Panel (see Figure 191 ).2. AC mains input terminals are part of the AC mains filter.3. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The interconnection panel provides interfaces for: XIO. Interconnection Area (BTSCA) Abis Interface Group Equipment Labels XIO Interface Connectors XBCB XGPS Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area (DCBREAK) XRT Abis 4 Abis 3 Abis 2 Abis 1 XCLK1 In XCLK1 Out Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1 For details see below XGND GND XCLK2 In/Out External Input/Output Interface Group External Clock Interface Group Krone Strip Abis Relays CIMA DC Variant DC Filter Connectors CIMA DC Output AC Variant AC Input Equipment Labels CIDE DC & AC Variant DC Filter Connectors DC Output (−48 V) −48V −48V 0V + EXT. Refer to Temperature Control (Section 11) for details of the cooling system hardware. The following figure shows the details of the CIMA/CIDE DC and AC variants.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. The filter is located next to the antenna connectors. The XIOB is connected to the interconnection area and contains a 24 V DC/DC converter and interface circuitry for external alarms. by the internal fans. The warm air is expelled through perforations at the top of the cabinet by the top fans.2. see Figure 190 . through the subracks. the shaded areas identify separate groups of connectors.5 Cooling The CIMA/CIDE is air cooled by fans. BATTERY _ S R 5 DC OUT −48 V/200 W max L 0V DC OUT 200 W max I 0V EXTERN DC −48V I I I 0 S R 2 I 0 S R 3 I 0 S R 4 I 0 I I I I I I 0 0 BTS S INT R 1 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 INT & SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4 SR5 DC OUT Circuit Breakers External Battery External DC Circuit Breakers Figure 191: CIMA/CIDE Interconnection Panel. An XIOB is located behind the interconnection area. which is located in the cabinet roof. in the CIMA.14 389 / 914 . 3.4 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Interconnection Panel All the external electrical interfaces are located on a front-facing panel at the top of the cabinet. inside the cabinet and. Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door and is then forced up. The exception is the CIDE AC mains input.

14 . EUC output alarms connected to BTS inputs: Sixteen free configurable ESD protected alarm inputs are available in BTS. Alarm inputs sharing (alarms collected outside of cabinet): Parallel connection to BTS and EUC may only be considered when both circuitries are fully compatible. Vc External alarm trigger BTS alarm input 1 mA R or R Figure 192: Alarm Operation Principle For CIMA/CIDE cabinets the following values are used: Vc=24V.3 Indoor Cabinets Concerning the external alarms the following cases apply: Alarms connected to Equipments Under Consideration (EUC) only (inputs): An external cable may enter cabinet in top via dedicated metallic bracket replacing antenna hole. The outer jacket must be partially removed and the shield connected conductive to bracket. This means: loop conductive = no alarm loop non-conductive = alarm. 390 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. O&M alarm sharing via rack master over cabinet internal RS232 or Ethernet PPP link on request feasible. Connection by cage terminals. Check case by case necessary. During normal operation the loop in the previous drawing is closed. The cable must be shielded type. The EUC alarm cable must be routed via bracket in rack top. Maximum cable diameter 15mm. R=12k .

Six hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breakers protect the CIMA equipment from overload. as well as electro-mechanical switches. Abis Interface 3. DC Filters There are two DC filter connectors. 3.6.14 391 / 914 . Circuit Breakers Table 17: CIMA. Figure 183 provides a detailed view of the XIO connectors.5 CIMA/CIDE Signal Interfaces The following table describes the three CIMA/CIDE signal interfaces. The interface consists of the connectors described in Table 11 . The Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions. Figure 191 shows the positions of the XIO connectors.2.2. one for the 0 V input and one for the -48/-60 VDC input. External Clock Interface The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. Table 8 describes the XIO connectors. These include smoke and flood detectors. in functional groups. The XIOB (which includes the interconnection area) and the top fan backplane share the sixth breaker (see Figure 193 ).1 CIMA DC Variant Interface The external power supply inputs to the CIMA are located on a panel to the right of the interconnection area. see Figure 191 . DC Power Supply Interface 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Each subrack power supply is protected by a separate circuit breaker. The following table lists the components. see Figure 191 . see Figure 191 . Table 9 gives a detailed view of the eternal alarm inputs. Table 10 describes the connectors.2.6 CIMA/CIDE External Power Supply Interfaces This section describes the external power supply interfaces for the CIMA/CIDE AC and DC variants. XIO Interface The XIO connectors allow various external alarm devices to be connected to the 9100 BTS. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors.

see Figure 191 . Each subrack power supply is protected by a separate circuit breaker (see Figures 193 and 195 ). AC Filter There is one AC filter connector.2.3 CIDE DC and AC Variant Interface The external power supply inputs to the CIDE are located on top of an AC mains filter fitted in the roof of the cabinet. to two optional Microwave Communication Modules. DC Filters Circuit Breakers DC Output Table 19: CIDE. Figure 194 describes the CIMA power supply system for the AC variant.14 . There are two DC filter connectors. see Figure 190 . There is one DC filter connector. The following table lists the components.2 CIMA AC Variant Interface The external power supply inputs to the CIMA are located on a panel to the right of the interconnection area. AC Power Supply Interface 3. The following table lists the components. One hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breaker protects the CIMA equipment from overload. for the -48/-60 VDC output. for the 230 VAC 1ø input.2. A 9-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at 200 W max. one for the 0 V input and one for the -48/-60 VDC input. AC Filter There is one AC filter connector. DC and AC Power Supply Interface 392 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. DC Output A 9-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at 200 W max. DC Filter Circuit Breaker Table 18: CIMA.6. for the 230 VAC 1ø input.6. Six hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breakers protect the CIDE equipment from overload.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.

2.2.7.14 393 / 914 .3 Indoor Cabinets 3.1 CIMA/CIDE DC Variant The CIMA/CIDE is powered from a -48/-60 VDC external power source. The XIOB and TFBP (CIMA only) have the same inputs as the subracks. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. see the following figure.7 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply and Grounding 3. Power is distributed to the cabinet via two filtered input connectors. Ground (M8 Bolt) DC Supply Part of Interconnection Panel 0 VDC Filter DC Output −48 V / 200 W max (CIDE only) −48/−60 VDC Filter Circuit Breakers 6 5A XIOB 5 4 3 2 1 Top Fan Backplane (CIMA only) STASR 5 25 A STASR 4 25 A STASR 3 25 A STASR 2 25 A STASR 1 25 A Figure 193: CIMA/CIDE DC Power Interconnections Each subrack has: A filtered input of -48/-60 VDC A filtered 0 V return A ground connector A circuit breaker.

At cabinet level. 25 A 5A Table 20: CIMA/CIDE Power Component Ratings The CIMA/CIDE is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level.3 Indoor Cabinets The following table shows the rated values for the power components. a functionally identical alternative to the cabinet bus bar is used in the AC variant and the later DC variant of CIMA. rated at 75 A.5 Circuit Breaker 6 Component/Rating 4 µF capacitors. In the CIMA. The bus bar (or cableform) also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks and other CIMA/CIDE equipment.14 . ground continuity is carried to the subracks via the cabinet bus bar. 394 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. At module level. Item 0 and -48/-60 VDC Filters Circuit Breakers 1 . This is a branched cableform. the CIMA/CIDE is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the cabinet with an M8 bolt.

AC In put AFIP APOD Control Alarms To/From FANUs ASIB ACRI PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1 BCB Shunt DC Bus GND 0 VDC −48 VDC S h u n t ABAC Ground (M8 Bolt) APOD Circuit Breakers 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 VDC (M6 Bolt) 5A XIOB * External Battery 5A AFIP Top Fan Backplane * BU41 or BU100 STASR 4 25 A STASR 3 25 A 0 VDC −48 VDC External −48 VDC 200 W STASR 2 25 A STASR 1 25 A * Only one battery possible Figure 194: CIMA AC Variant Power Supply System 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 CIMA AC Variant The following figure shows the power supply distribution for the CIMA AC variant.2.14 395 / 914 .3 Indoor Cabinets 3.7.

25) for detailed descriptions of BCU1 and the ABAC. respectively. respectively. where it is filtered and passed to the APOD. Up to five PM08s are used in the CIMA.16) .3 Indoor Cabinets The AC input is 230 VAC 1ø. Refer to BCU1 (Section 12. The ASIB contains the modules that: Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. The AC input is connected to the AFIP. 396 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. ground continuity is carried to the subracks via a branched cableform. these are PM08/5 to PM08/1 Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. the CIMA is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the cabinet with an M8 bolt.20) .14 . The cables are terminated with FASTON. Refer to APOD (Section 12.12) for detailed descriptions of the APOD and the PM08s. At module level. BU100 (Section 12. Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors. The CIMA is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. The APOD is located in the ASIB and contains an AC circuit breaker used to isolate the AC input supply. At cabinet level.24) . ABAC (Section 12. The DC supply produced in the ASIB is connected to the remaining modules in the CIMA via the circuit breakers located on the APOD. and the optional items BU41 and BU100. BU41 (Section 12.11) and PM08 (Section 12.

3 CIDE AC Variant The following figure shows the power supply distribution for the AC variant.2.7. AC In put AC Filter OMU PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1 ADAM 0 VDC −48 VDC DCBREAK Optional inter nal or external Battery Unit BU41 or BU100 Circuit Breakers DC Output 200 W max 6 5 4 3 2 1 RIBAT 0 VDC (M6 Bolt) Ground (M8 Bolt) XIOB 10 A STASR 5 25 A STASR 4 25 A STASR 3 25 A STASR 2 25 A STASR 1 25 A Figure 195: CIDE AC Variant Power Supply System 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 397 / 914 . The presence of the battery depends on the power supply option selected: CIDE without backup battery CIDE with an internal backup battery CIDE with an external backup battery.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.

refer to its parts list. Control of the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing is provided by the OMU via the BCB. Refer to ADAM (Section 12. Charge/discharge current is monitored via a shunt in the ADAM. For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables.21) for a detailed description of the ADAM and for a functional description of the power supply system. The CIDE is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level.3 Indoor Cabinets The AC input is 230 VAC 1ø. The ADAM acts as an interface between the PM12s.14 .2. five for STASRs 1 . and one for the XIOB. The mains power connection to each PM12 is via a flying socket. Up to three PM12s are used in a CIDE. At module level. where it is filtered and passed to three PM12s. Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.5.14) for a description of the PM12. The three PM12s convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. For some of the cables and cable sets. The cables are terminated with FASTON.8 CIMA/CIDE Cables and Cable Sets This section lists the cables and cable sets for all 9100 BTS CIMA/CIDE configurations. The AC input is connected to the AC Filter. For the variants used in a specific cabinet. 3. these are PM12/3 to PM12/1. Refer to PM12 (Section 12. see Cable Descriptions (Section 16) . ground continuity is carried to the subracks via a bus bar system. the batteries and the power distribution inside the BTS. there exist different variants. DCBREAK contains six circuit breakers. the CIDE is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the cabinet with an M8 bolt. At cabinet level. 398 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. DC power is distributed in the BTS via DCBREAK and the bus bar.

It contains cables for the DC power connections to the subracks. XIOB. The CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. The following table lists the cables and cable sets. Table 22 lists and describes the cables that comprise the cable sets. A BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable. It includes a cable for the battery temperature sensor. it interconnects the 3BK 07199 SUM and the Interconnection Panel. CS02 is an AN cable set. 3BK 25115 CA-PCAN CA-PCAP 3BK 25114 Table 21: CIMA/CIDE Internal Cables 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. It connects to an XIO connector on the Interconnection Panel. Part Number 3BK 25146 ADABM BTSRIMA ADABM connects the -48 VDC filter to ADAM or the interconnection area.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. The CIMA bus bar is a hardware module used for the DC power connections to the subracks. Mnemonic ADABA Description ADABA connects the battery via breakers to ADAM. 3BK 25139 The CIMA BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MEDI is a flat 3BK 07720 cable and a PCB. it connects a TRE to an ANC. It connects an ANY to another ANY or to an ANX or ANC. and top fans.14 399 / 914 . It connects an ANX or ANC to two antenna cabinet connectors. CA-PCAP connects the 0 VDC filter (on DCBREAK) to ADAM or to the interconnection area. and clock and control signals to and from the SUM.2. The Cable Assembly Maxi as used in the later variant of CIMA is a branched cableform. CA-PCAN connects the -48 VDC filter (on DCBREAK) to ADAM or to the interconnection area. 3BK 07600 CS05 CS05 is the BTSCA-to-SUM cable set. In a CIMA. XIOB. In a CIMA. The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. it connects a TRE to an ANX or ANY. 3BK 07762 BUMA CA-ADCO 3BK 07953 CIMA bus bar 3BK 07762 CS02 3BK 07598 CS03 3BK 07599 CS04 CS04 is an ANT cable set. CS03 is a TRE cable set. and top fans. In a CIDE.1 Internal Cables The CIMA/CIDE internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable sets.8.

Cable Sets ADABA Mnemonic CA-ADABM Description CA-ADABM connects -48 VDC from ADAM to the battery breaker. The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the Interconnection Panel to the SUM. The ANIC provides a duplex connection between the ANX or ANC and a cabinet antenna connector. ANC or another ANY RX connector. The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to an ANY. Part Number 3BK 25139 Qty 1 CA-ADABP 3BK 25138 1 CA-BABRM 3BK 25141 1 CA-BABRP 3BK 25140 1 CA-BSENS 3BK 08119 1 CS02 RXRC 3BK 07920 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS03 RXRC 3BK 07920 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS04 ANIC 3BK 07921 2 CS05 CA-ABIS 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 Table 22: CIMA/CIDE Cable Sets 400 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Cable Sets The following table describes the cable sets used in the CIMA/CIDE cabinets. The RXRC connects an ANY RX connector to an ANX. The TXRC connects an ANY TX connector to an ANX. ANC or another ANY TX connector. The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to an ANY.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.8. ANX or ANC TX connector. CA-ADABP connects 0 VDC from ADAM to the battery breaker.2.14 . CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the battery breaker to the battery interconnection area. The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the Interconnection Panel and the SUM. CA-BSENS connects the battery temperature sensor to RIBAT. ANX or ANC RX connector. CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from the battery breaker to the battery interconnection area.

black power cable. Part Number 1AC 00170 0012 3BK 05360 Antenna Jumper CA01 3BK 07594 1AC 01328 0004 3BK 07595 1AC 00110 0011 3BK 08949 3BK 07951 CA-GC35 3BK 08031 1AC 01723 0003 3BK 08029 1AC 00147 0001 (Blue) 1AC 00147 0002 (Black) 3BK 08030 CA-PC35BK CA PC35BK is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable. CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. CA02 CA02 is a 75 PCM cable. The cable used is Flex3. It connects the BTS Terminal to the BTS Terminal connector on the SUM. The cable used is L907.2. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length.14 401 / 914 . a multicoaxial. black power cable. shielded. CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. 4 mm sq. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel and the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board. 2 x 7/ 16 straight male connectors. 2 Mbit/s. The cable used is a 35 mm sq. and to the customer’s ground point. CA01 is a 120 PCM cable. yellow/green power cable. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length. and to the customer’s DC power source. Antenna jumpers. power cable. It connects to the DC connectors on the Interconnection Panel. 2 Mbit/s. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01723 0001 CA -PC35BL CA PC35BL is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. The cable used is a 35 mm sq. A shorting plug. It connects to the -48 3BK 08032 VDC connector on the Interconnection Panel.8. 120 PCM cable. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The cables used are a 16 mm sq. CA-PC2W16 CA PC2W16 is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. and to the customer’s -48 VDC power source. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq. It connects to the M8 ground bolt on the cabinet. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. for impedance matching. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel and the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board. HCF1/ 2. SP2M is used with Flex3. and to the customer’s 0 VDC power source. 75 PCM cable. It connects to the 0 VDC connector on the Interconnection Panel. Mnemonic AC Supply Description This AC power supply cable can be made onsite to the desired length. The cable used is a single pair. an 8-pair.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.3 External Cables The CIMA/CIDE external cables consist of discrete cables that are listed and described in the following table.

SCG3 3BK 07950 SCM1/3 3BK 08102 SCM2/3 3BK 08103 Table 23: CIMA/CIDE External Cables 402 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Part Number 1AC 01723 0002 1AC 01328 0001 3BK 08101 External Alarms SCG2/3 This cable can be made onsite to the desired length. The cable used is a 35 mm sq. SCM1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. SCG2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. an 8-pair.3 Indoor Cabinets Mnemonic Description This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. It connects a 9100 BTS to another 9100 BTS. It connects a G2 BTS to the 9100 BTS. SCG3 is a clock synchronization cable.14 . SCM2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. shielded. 120 PCM cable. blue power cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 2 to the 9100 BTS. 2 Mbit/s. The cable used is L907. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 1 to the 9100 BTS.

3 Indoor Cabinets 3. CA PC35BK. CA PC2W16. SCM2/3 STASR 4 Backplane CA−ADCO BTSCA CS05 DC STASR 3 Backplane CA−CBTE STASR 2 Backplane SUM STASR 1 Backplane BTSRIMA BTSRI Figure 196: CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2. TFBP (CIMA only) STASR 5 Backplane CA GC35.14 403 / 914 . CA PC35BL CA01/02 SCG2/3. SCM1/3. SCG3.9 CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data and control cables.

ANC BATS (option) Dummy Panel STASR 1 Up to 4 TREs ADAM. TREs Dummy Panel STASR 1 Up to 4 TREs FANUs Large batteries fitted into special battery tray FANUs Air Inlet FANUs Air Inlet FANUs Air Inlet Empty Space MBI3 − AC or DC Variant MBI5 − DC Variant MBI5 − AC Variant with or w/o BATS MBI5 − AC Variant with large BBU Figure 197: MBI3/MBI5 Module Positions 404 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. ANYs and ANCs Top FANUs Connector Area STASR 3 DC: TREs. There are two variants. Top FANUs Connector Area STASR 5 Up to 4 TREs Top FANUs Connector Area STASR 5 Up to 4 TREs Top FANUs Connector Area STASR 5 Up to 4 TREs FANUs Air Inlet STASR 4 SUM.14 . ANC Dummy Panel STASR 1 DC: Up to 4 TREs AC: SUM. ANCs AC: SUM. The following figure shows the position of the main modules for both variants.3 Multistandard Base Station Indoor The MBI3/MBI5 are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectional and sectorized configurations. ANYs and ANCs STASR 2 FANUs Air Inlet STASR 2 FANUs Air Inlet ADAM. 3 PM12s. 3 PM12s. ANYs and ANCs STASR 4 FANUs Air Inlet STASR 4 FANUs Air Inlet SUM. SUM. where the allowed configurations are determined by the type of external power supply used by the cabinet: DC power supply variant AC power supply variant. ANCs Dummy Panel STASR 3 Dummy Panel STASR 3 Dummy Panel STASR 3 Up to 4 TREs Up to 4 TREs Up to 4 TREs FANUs Air Inlet STASR 2 SUM. ANYs. BATS (option) SUM. ANYs and ANCs. BATS (Option) FANUs Air Inlet STASR 2 DC: SUM. 2 or 3PM12s. SUM. ANC AC: ADAM.

as well as microwave communications modules. STASR1 contains the SUM. The battery tray at the bottom of the MBI is replaced by a STASR which contains up to four additional TREs. STASR4 can contain only a mixture of ANY or ANC modules. Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the odd-numbered subracks and also at the top of the cabinets. FANUs are installed under this STASR. and optionally. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. In this case. the MBI3 hold three and the MBI5 holds five STASRs.14 405 / 914 . STASR2 contains the SUM and a mixture of ANY and ANC modules. 3. STASR2 and 4 each contain up to four TREs.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. the MBI3 holds two and the MBI5 holds four STASRs. as required.3.1 DC Power Supply Variant The DC variant of the cabinets is designed to house up to three or five STASRs.3. The odd-numbered subrack positions each contain up to four TREs. up to two microwave communications modules If an external battery is used.2 AC Power Supply Variant The AC variant of the MBIs uses a backup battery which can be housed internally or externally: If an internal battery is used. three PM12s and the ADAM. STASR3 contains up to two ANCs. Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the subracks containing TREs and the power control subrack.

14 .3 MBI Cabinet Access and Features The following figures show the MBI3/MBI5 equipped with the interconnection panel and three or five empty subracks.3. 3.1 MBI3 Cabinet Top Fan Unit AC Input RF Interface Interconnection Area RF Interface Equipment Label Perforated Door Strips STASR Adjustable Feet Figure 198: MBI3 Equipped with Empty Subracks 406 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.3.3.

2 MBI5 Cabinet Top Fan Unit AC Input RF Interface Interconnection Area RF Interface Equipment Label Perforated Door Strips EMC Gasket STASR Note that the AC variant may replace the bottom STASR with a battery tray containing BU101 Adjustable Feet Figure 199: MBI5 Equipped with Empty Subracks 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 407 / 914 .3.3.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.

3 Indoor Cabinets 3. 3. The door is the full height of the cabinet.5 Cables All external cables. The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment comply with IEC 297 standards.3.5) for more information).29) for more information). 3.14 .3.4 Door The MBI3/MBI5 can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations. The top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.3. the ribbon cable also connects to the RIBAT (refer to RIBAT (Section 12. all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the top of the cabinets. A ribbon cable is used within the cabinet to link the subracks together.1. MBI5 DC variant AC variant TFBP Subrack Subrack MBI3 DC variant AC variant Subrack Ribbon Cable Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Rear Subrack Front Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack Subrack or Battery Tray BTSRI RIBAT in case of battery FANU in case of subrack Figure 200: MBI3/MBI5 Subracks Interconnection Cable 408 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The external cables include DC supply and Abis connections. are connected to the interconnection panel.3.3.3 Construction The MBI3/MBI5 are steel box constructions with four adjustable feet on the underside. to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. except for the antenna and AC supply. Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the front of the cabinet. The antenna cabling and AC supply are connected at the top of the cabinet. If an internal battery is used in the AC variant.3) for more information). The bottom end terminates on the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.3. The cabinets have no side access. see the following figure.

AC main filter terminal. The filter has terminals for connection to a 230 VAC 1ø supply. The fans are installed and removed via the front of the cabinet. 3. The MBI3/MBI5 AC variant has an AC filter set in the roof plate next to the antenna connectors on the left side. Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door and is then forced up.14 409 / 914 .7 Cooling The MBIs are air cooled by fans. Refer to Temperature Control (Section 11) for more information about the cooling system hardware.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.3. showing antenna connectors. The warm air is expelled through perforations at the top of the cabinet by the top fans.3. AC Filter with new Fixation Panel Fan Cover Top Fans (x6) Top Fan Backplane Ground Bolt M8 Antenna labelling on the roof Q ANT A Q ANT B Antenna labelling on the roof N ANT A N ANT B R ANT A (*) R ANT B Auxiliary3 x N antenna blocks (microwave) P ANT A P ANT B Antenna Connectors External Input Board Multistandard BTS Connection Area Blind XIBM Plate MSCA Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area Hole for SMA connector GPS (*) Auxiliary 3 x 7/16 antenna blocks Note: Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped. Any unequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate. fan cover and ground bolt. by the internal fans. through the subracks. An M8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet to ground. Figure 201: MBI3/MBI5 Top View The antennas are connected to RF connectors at the top of the cabinet. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The cover is cut away to reveal extractor fans.3.3.6 Cabinet Top The following figure is a top view of the MBI3/MBI5. inside the cabinet and additionally at the top.

External Alarm Input Board Multistandard XIBM Multistandard Connection Area MSCA Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area DCBR3 Equipment Labels DC Filter Connectors DC Output * −48 V/500 W max Equipment Labels External Interface Connectors DC Output External Clock Interface Group Abis Interface Group XCLK1 Out XCLK1 In GND +12 V −48V Abis 3 Abis 1 0V DC OUT 500 W max Abis 4 Abis 2 Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1 XCLK2 In/Out I I I I XBCB 0 0 0 0 INT & SR1 SR2 SR3 DC OUT RS232 XRT Krone Strip Abis Relays Extension Area (Blind Plate) Circuit Breakers * : From DCBR3 variant 3BK 25977 ACxx the DC Out connector was removed Figure 202: MBI3 Interconnection Panels External Alarm Input Board Multistandard XIBM Multistandard Connection Area MSCA Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area DCBR5 Equipment Labels DC Filter Connectors DC Output * −48 V/500 W max Equipment Labels External Interface Connectors DC Output External Clock Interface Group Abis Interface Group XCLK1 Out XCLK1 In GND +12 V −48V Abis 3 Abis 1 0V DC OUT 500 W max Abis 4 Abis 2 Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1 XCLK2 In/Out I I I I I I XBCB 0 0 0 0 0 0 INT & SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4 SR5 DC OUT RS232 XRT Krone Strip Abis Relays Extension Area (Blind Plate) Circuit Breakers * : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed Figure 203: MBI5 Interconnection Panels 410 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 . The following figures show the details of the MBI3/MBI5 interconnection panels.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. AC mains input terminals are part of the AC mains filter.4 MBI3/MBI5 Cabinet Interconnection Panels All the external electrical interfaces are located on front-facing panels at the top of the cabinet.3. The exception is the AC mains input. see Figure 201 . The filter is located next to the antenna connectors. which is located in the cabinet roof.

DC Power supplies. The EUC alarm cable must be routed via bracket in rack top.3 Indoor Cabinets The External Alarm Input Board Multistandard XIBM is located on the left-hand side of the interconnection area (see Figures 202 and 203 ). O&M alarm sharing via rack master over cabinet internal RS232 or Ethernet PPP link on request feasible. followed by the Multistandard Interconnection Area MSCA in the middle. The interconnection panels provide interfaces for: Signals External alarms External clock Abis. Vc External alarm trigger BTS alarm input 1 mA R or R Figure 204: Alarm Operation Principle For MBI cabinets the following values are used: Vc=12V. The outer jacket must be partially removed and the shield connected conductive to bracket. Check case by case necessary. Connection by cage terminals. Maximum cable diameter 15mm. This means: loop conductive = no alarm loop non-conductive = alarm. R=6k . The power supply input/output connectors and circuit breakers are located on DCBR3/DCBR5 on the right-hand side.14 411 / 914 . The cable must be shielded type. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. An extension area is covered with a blind plate. EUC output alarms connected to BTS inputs: Sixteen free configurable ESD protected alarm inputs are available in BTS. Alarm inputs sharing (alarms collected outside of cabinet): Parallel connection to BTS and EUC may only be considered when both circuitries are fully compatible. During normal operation the loop in the previous drawing is closed. The XIBM contains a 12 V DC/DC converter and interface circuitry for external alarms on the back side of the panel. Concerning the external alarms the following cases apply: Alarms connected to Equipments Under Consideration (EUC) only (inputs): An external cable may enter cabinet in top via dedicated metallic bracket replacing antenna hole.

External Alarm Interface ’Mini Combicon’ connectors XI 1 and XI 2 provide an interface for connecting 16 external alarm inputs. The ASCII text describes the particular alarm. an alarm is generated. to pull the alarm inputs on active or inactive level in order to check them. For test purposes. batteries or to provide additional I/O signals) If the BTS is not powered. the XBCB can be externally powered. AC/DC power supply.5 MBI Signal Interfaces The MBI has XIBM. If these pins are open-circuit (open loop). The signal levels are according to RS-485. DC Output The DC Output Connector provides a + 12 VDC power source for external alarm devices that require a power supply. every unconnected input alarm is bridged by a short circuit on the plug-in connector. Each input alarm is reported to the OMC-R. the input and output alarms are isolated from the 9100 BTS ground. This section describes the connectors and functions for each of these interfaces. it is possible. MSCA clock and MSCA Abis signal interfaces. 3. XBCB The XBCB connector provides an external interface to the internal BCB: If the BTS is powered. Then the direction of the interface is reversed so that it can be used for remote inventory of the whole BTS. An EEPROM is used to store the remote inventory data of the XIBM.1 XIBM Interface Connectors The following table lists the XIBM interface connectors. Each alarm input has two adjacent pins associated with it on the XI connector.3. If the connector pins are not short-circuited (open loop). with software. Therefore. where it is mapped to customer-defined ASCII text.14 .. The GND connector is used when attaching the external alarm 12 VDC ground to the 9100 BTS ground.g.3. Table 24: XIBM Interface Connectors 412 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.5. the XBCB can be used to control external devices (e. This feature is used only at factory level.

The following figure provides a detailed view of the XI connectors.14 413 / 914 . XI1 GND XI2 GND XI3 GND XI4 GND XI5 GND XI6 GND XI7 GND XI8 GND XI 1 XI9 GND XI10 GND XI11 GND XI12 GND XI13 GND XI14 GND XI15 GND XI16 GND XI 2 Figure 205: MBI External Alarm Interface Connectors 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. as well as electro-mechanical switches.3 Indoor Cabinets The XI connectors allow various external alarm devices to be connected to the 9100 BTS. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used on the XI connectors. These include smoke and flood detectors. The positions of the XI connectors are shown in Figures 202 and 203 .

24. This allows a standard terminal to be used for radio supervision and loop-test purposes. The following table describes the connectors.000 baud. These signal lines are according to RS-422 Drivers and control of the RS-232 interface are located on the SUMA. 9100 BTS) in time and frequency or vice versa.14 .24.3. The data rate is programmable between 1200 and 115. Hardware flow is not implemented. There are three XCLK connectors: XCLK1IN: input XCLK1OUT: output XCLK2IN/OUT: bi-directional interface. Only transmit and receive lines are used. The signal levels conform to CCITT V.2 MSCA Clock Interface The MSCA external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions. Bus drivers and control logic are located on the SUMA. The XCLK2IN/OUT connector provides a bi-directional clock interface. The input XCLK1IN and the output XCLK1OUT are connected together. see Figures 202 and 203 .3 Indoor Cabinets 3. G2 BTS. pin-to-pin. Table 25: MSCA External Clock Interface Connectors RS-232 XCLK 414 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The RS-232 connector provides an asynchronous serial interface to control and supervise an external GPS receiver or an antenna tilt signal. This interface can also be used to synchronize the 9100 BTS to the GPS receiver or another external clock reference. Hardware flow control is not implemented. The data rate is programmable between 1200 and 115.5. The signaling interface conforms to RS-422. Only transmit and receive lines are used. The signal levels conform to CCITT V. The XCLK connectors are used to synchronize the 9100 BTS to another BTS (G1 BTS. Drivers and control of the XRT interface are located on the SUMA.000 baud. XRT The XRT connector provides access to the 9100 BTS via an asynchronous serial interface.

3 and 4. these are Abis1 . The impedance is selected by the type of cable connector plugged into the interface. The interface consists of the connectors described in the following table. Krone Strip Connector The Krone strip supports an overvoltage protection device and an Abis monitoring device.3. are controlled by the SUMA.5.3 MSCA Abis Interface The MSCA Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions. Four relays. one for each Abis Interface.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. The relays can be used to: Perform loop-back tests on the individual Abis Interfaces Provide transparent routing of the Abis traffic when the 9100 BTS is powered down or faulty.14 415 / 914 . The overvoltage protection device is a ’make-before-break’ type. This means there is no interruption of service during insertion and removal of the inserts. Abis 3 and 4 are provided for future use. 2. This ensures that the Abis connection is not broken in multidrop configurations. Table 26: MSCA Abis Interface Connectors Abis Relays 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. see Figures 202 and 203 . There are four connectors. Note: Only Abis1 and 2 are currently used. All connectors provide 120 and 75 impedances. Abis Connectors The Abis Interface connects the 9100 BTS to the BSC.

to two optional Microwave Communication Modules or external transmission equipment. pylon lightning. There are two DC filter connectors.14 . The DC Output Connector was removed starting with DCBR3 variant 3BK 25977 ACxx and DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx. The following table lists the components. one for the 0 V input and one for the -48/ -60 VDC input. see Figures 198 and 199 . AC Filter There is one AC filter connector. See Figures 202 and 203 .6 MBI External Power Supply Interfaces The external power supply inputs/outputs to/from the MBI3/MBI5 are located on top of the AC mains filter fitted in the roof of the cabinet or on the power supply and circuit breaker area DCBR3/DCBR5. Each subrack power supply is protected by a separate circuit breaker.3. etc. for the 230 VAC 1ø input. DC and AC Power Supply Interface DC Filters Circuit Breakers DC Output 416 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Four (MBI3) or six (MBI5) hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breakers protect the MBI equipment from overload. Table 27: MBI. A 3-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at 500 W max.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.

3.7 MBI Power Supply and Grounding 3.14 417 / 914 . Ground DC Input * 0V (M8 Bolt) 0 VDC Filter DC Output −48 V / 500 W max DC Input −48 V DCBR3 −48/−60 VDC Filter Clamp Panel (not on DCBR3) Circuit Breakers INT & DC OUT SR3 SR2 SR1 XIBM Top Fan Backplane 15 A 30 A STASR3 30 A STASR2 30 A STASR1 BUS Bar BUS Bar * : From DCBR3 variant 3BK 25977 ACxx the DC Out connector was removed Figure 206: MBI3 DC Power Interconnections Ground DC Input * DC Output 0V (M8 Bolt) −48 V / 500 W max DC Input −48 V 0 VDC Filter DCBR5 −48/−60 VDC Filter Clamp Panel (not on DCBR5) Circuit Breakers INT & DC OUT SR5 SR4 SR3 SR2 SR1 XIBM 15 A Top Fan Backplane STASR 5 30 A STASR 4 30 A STASR 3 30 A STASR 2 30 A STASR 1 30 A BUS Bar BUS Bar 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.7.3. Power is distributed to the cabinet via two filtered input connectors.3 Indoor Cabinets 3.1 MBI DC Variant The MBI DC variants are powered from a -48/ -60 VDC external power source. see the following figures.

14 .3 Indoor Cabinets * : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed Figure 207: MBI5 DC Power Interconnections 418 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

ground continuity is carried to the subracks via the cabinet bus bar.14 419 / 914 . The bus bar also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks and other MBI equipment.5 (MBI5) Circuit Breaker 4 (MBI3) Circuit Breaker 6 (MBI5) Table 28: MBI Power Component Ratings The MBIs are EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. Items 0 and -48/ -60 VDC Filters Circuit Breakers 1 . At cabinet level. 15 A Component/Rating 4 µF capacitors. the MBIs are connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the cabinet with an M8 bolt.3 Indoor Cabinets Each subrack has: A filtered input of -48/ -60 VDC A filtered 0 V return A ground connector A circuit breaker. At module level. The following table shows the rated values for the power components. rated at 75 A 30 A 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 (MBI3) Circuit Breakers 1 . The XIBM and TFBP have the same inputs as the subracks.

2 MBI AC Variant The following figures show the power supply distribution for the AC variant of MBI5. but it is not possible to install a large internal backup battery (no BU101 possible.3.7. only BATS).3 Indoor Cabinets 3.14 . AC I nput AC Filter OMU PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1 ADAM 0 VDC Ground (M8 Bolt) DC Output * −48 VDC DCBR5 0 VDC Filter −48V/−60 VDC Filter Circuit Breakers XIBM 15 A Top Fan Backplane STASR 5 30 A STASR 4 30 A STASR 3 30 A STASR 2 30 A STASR 1 BUS Bar 30 A BUS Bar * : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed Figure 208: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System w/o Battery 420 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The presence of the battery depends on the power supply option selected: MBI without backup battery MBI with an internal backup battery MBI with an external backup battery. MBI3 AC variants are similar (only fewer circuit breakers and STASRs).

3 Indoor Cabinets AC I nput AC Filter OMU PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1 Back panel ADAM Front side Ground (M8 Bolt) LOAD 0 VDC −48 VDC DC Output * BATT −48 VDC Battery Breakers DCBR5 0 VDC Filter −48V/−60 VDC Filter Optional internal Battery Unit + − Battery Circuit Breakers to BCB RIBAT XIBM 15 A Top Fan Backplane STASR 5 30 A STASR 4 30 A STASR 3 30 A STASR 2 30 A STASR 1 BUS Bar 30 A BUS Bar * : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed Figure 209: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System with Internal Battery 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 421 / 914 .

14 .3 Indoor Cabinets AC I nput AC Filter OMU PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1 Back panel ADAM Front side LOAD 0 VDC −48 VDC DC Output * BATT −48 VDC Battery Breakers Ground (M8 Bolt) DCBR5 0 VDC Filter −48V/−60 VDC Filter GND Optional external Battery Unit − + Battery Circuit Breakers XBCB RIBAT XIBM 15 A Top Fan Backplane STASR 5 30 A STASR 4 30 A STASR 3 30 A STASR 2 30 A STASR 1 BUS Bar 30 A BUS Bar * : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed Figure 210: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System with External Battery 422 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

batteries and power distribution inside the BTS.3 and one for the XIBM and top fan unit. The ADAM acts as an interface between PM12s. Up to three PM12s are used in a MBI. ground continuity is carried to the subracks via a bus bar system. these are PM12/1 to PM12/3. Charge/discharge current is monitored via a shunt in the ADAM. Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.21) for a detailed description of the ADAM and for a functional description of the power supply system. Control of the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing is provided by the OMU via the BCB. The mains power connection to each PM12 is via a flying socket. The cables are terminated with FASTON. Refer to PM12 (Section 12. The DCBR3 contains four circuit breakers. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Indoor Cabinets The AC input is 230 VAC. At cabinet level. DC power is distributed in the BTS via the DCBR5 and the bus bar. where it is filtered and passed to three PM12s. Refer to ADAM (Section 12. The AC input is connected to the AC filter.14) for a description of the PM12. In the MBI5. The DCBR5 contains six circuit breakers. The MBIs are EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. three for STASRs 1 . DC power is distributed in the BTS via the DCBR3 and the bus bar. five for STASRs 1 .14 423 / 914 .5 and one for the XIBM and top fan unit. In the MBI3. the MBIs are connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the cabinet with an M8 bolt. The three PM12s convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. At module level.

8 MBI Cables and Cable Sets This section lists the cables and cable sets for all 9100 BTS MBI configurations. The BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MBI3 is a flat cable and a PCB. ADABM connects the -48 VDC filter to a clamp panel. It connects to an XIO connector on the Interconnection Panel. CS04 CS04 is an ANT cable set. The CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. The BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MBI5 is a flat cable and a PCB. A BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable. it connects to the circuit breakers of DCBR3/DCBR5.3. For the variants used in a specific cabinet.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. see Cable Descriptions (Section 16) . 3BK 07600 Part Number 3BK 25146 ADABM 3BK 25139 BTSRI3 3BK 025973 BTSRI5 3BK 025974 CA-ADCO 3BK 07953 CABATS CA-PCAN 3BK 25873 3BK 25115 CA-PCAP CS02 3BK 25114 3BK 07598 CS03 3BK 07599 CS05 3BK 07199 Table 29: MBI Internal Cables 424 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. Different variants exist for some of the cables and cable sets. 3.14 .1 Internal Cables The MBI internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable sets. and clock and control signals to and from the SUM. It interconnects the SUM and the MSCA. CABATS connects the small battery unit BATS to ADAM. In combination with CA-PCAN.8. refer to its parts list. CS02 is an AN cable set. It connects an ANC to two antenna cabinet connectors. Table 30 lists and describes the cables that comprise the cable sets. Mnemonic ADABA Description ADABA connects the battery via breakers to ADAM. The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. It connects an ANY to another ANY or to an ANC. It includes a cable for the battery temperature sensor. CS05 is the MSCA-to-SUM cable set. It connects a TRE to an ANC. A BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable. CA-PCAN connects the ADAM or the -48 VDC filter (on DCBR3/DCBR5) to the DC breakers on DCBR3/DCBR5. CS03 is a TRE cable set. For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables.3. CA-PCAP connects the 0 VDC filter (on DCBR3/DCBR5) to ADAM. The following table lists the cables and cable sets.

CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the battery breaker to the battery interconnection area. CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from the battery breaker to the battery interconnection area. CA-ADABP connects 0 VDC from ADAM to the battery breaker. The RXRC connects an ANY RX connector to an ANC or another ANY RX connector. CA-BSENS connects the battery temperature sensor to RIBAT. The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the MSCA to the SUM.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to an ANY or ANC RX connector. The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to an ANY or ANC TX connector. The ANIC provides a duplex connection between the ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.3. The TXRC connects an ANY TX connector to an ANC or another ANY TX connector.2 Cable Sets The following table describes the cables contained in each MBI cable set.14 425 / 914 . The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the MSCA and the SUM.8. Part Number 3BK 25139 Qty 1 CA-ADABP 3BK 25138 1 CA-BABRM 3BK 25141 1 CA-BABRP 3BK 25140 1 CA-BSENS 3BK 08119 1 CS02 RXRC 3BK 07920 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS03 RXRC 3BK 07920 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS04 ANIC 3BK 07921 2 CS05 CA-ABIS 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 Table 30: MBI Cable Sets 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Cable Sets ADABA Mnemonic CA-ADABM Description CA-ADABM connects -48 VDC from ADAM to the battery breaker.

1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. 4 mm sq. The cable used is a 35 mm sq. shielded. 120 PCM cable. The cables used are a 16 mm sq. for impedance matching. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. It connects the BTS Terminal to the BTS Terminal connector on the SUM. CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. and to the customer’s ground point. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. black power cable. The cable used is Flex3. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel MSCA and the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. It connects the DC connectors on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s DC power source. The cable used is L907. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. A shorting plug. black power cable. CAPC2W16 CA PC2W16 is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the 0 VDC connector on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s 0 VDC power source. CA01 is a 120 PCM cable.14 . Part Number 1AC 00170 0012 3BK 05360 Antenna Jumper CA01 3BK 07594 1AC 01328 0004 3BK 07595 1AC 00110 0011 3BK 08949 3BK 07951 CA-GC35 3BK 08031 1AC 01723 0003 3BK 08029 1AC 00147 0001 (Blue) 1AC 00147 0002 (Black) 3BK 08030 CA-PC35BK CA PC35BK is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable. a multicoaxial. Mnemonic AC Supply Description This AC power supply cable can be made onsite to the desired length. CA02 CA02 is a 75 PCM cable. The cable used is a 35 mm sq.8. 2 x 7/ 16 straight male connectors. 1AC 01723 0001 3BK 08032 1AC 01723 0002 426 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. power cable. yellow/green power cable.3. SP2M is used with Flex3. HCF1/ 2. an 8-pair. 2 Mbit/s.3 External Cables The MBI external cables consist of discrete cables that are listed and described in the following table. 75 PCM cable. It connects to the M8 ground bolt on the cabinet. The cable used is a 35 mm sq. It connects the -48 VDC connector on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s -48 VDC power source. The cable used is a single-pair. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. CA -PC35BL CA PC35BL is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. Antenna jumpers. blue power cable. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables. 2 Mbit/s. CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel MSCA and the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.

14 427 / 914 . It connects a G2 BTS to the 9100 BTS. Part Number 1AC 01328 0001 3BK 08101 SCG3 3BK 07950 SCM1/3 3BK 08102 SCM2/3 3BK 08103 Table 31: MBI External Cables 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 2 to the 9100 BTS. SCM2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. an 8-pair. It connects a 9100 BTS to another 9100 BTS. 2 Mbit/s. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 1 to the 9100 BTS.3 Indoor Cabinets Mnemonic External Alarms SCG2/3 Description This cable can be made onsite to the desired length. 120 PCM cable. SCG2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. SCG3 is a clock synchronization cable. SCM1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. shielded. The cable used is L907.

SCG3.14 . CA PC35BK. CA PC35BL CA01/02 TFBP SCG2/3. CA PC35BL CA01/02 STASR 4 Backplane SCG2/3. SCM1/3. SCM2/3 CA−ADCO DC STASR 3 Backplane BTSRI3 XIBM/MSCA CS05 CA−CBTE STASR 2 Backplane SUM STASR 1 Backplane BTSRI Figure 211: MBI3 Data and Control Cabling TFBP STASR 5 Backplane CA GC35. CA PC35BK. CA GC35. SCM1/3. SCM2/3 CA−ADCO XIBM/MSCA DC STASR 3 Backplane CS05 CA−CBTE STASR 2 Backplane SUMA STASR 1 Backplane BTSRI5 BTSRI Figure 212: MBI5 Data and Control Cabling 428 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. CA PC2W16.9 MBI Data and Control Cabling The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by data and control cables.3. CA PC2W16.3 Indoor Cabinets 3. SCG3.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4 Outdoor Cabinets This section describes the outdoor cabinets used in 9100 BTS configurations.14 429 / 914 .

4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. refer to Configurations .1 Outdoor Cabinets General Information There are four classes of outdoor cabinets available to house the 9100 BTS equipment: COME/CODE .one-door outdoor cabinet CBO . The COEP is designed to allow the extension in the field of a COMI to a COME and a CODI to a CODE. The following figures show the possible positions of the main modules.three-door outdoor cabinet COMI/CODI/CPT2/MBO2/MBO2E/MBO2EDC . The MBOE/MBOEE is designed to extend an MBO1/MBO1E to an MBO2/MBO2E. for more information.one-door outdoor cabinet.two-door outdoor cabinet COEP/MBOE/MBOEDC/MBOEEDC . All outdoor cabinets support both omnidirectional and sectorized configurations. The positions of the modules in the subracks are configuration dependent. COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2 cabinets have two or three compartments: Side compartment BTS compartment 1 BTS compartment 2. MBO1/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2E cabinets have one or two compartments: MBO1/MBO1E MBOE/MBOEE. 430 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.Rack Layouts (Section 2) . The MBOEDC/MBOEEDC is designed to extend an MBO1DC/MBO2EDC to an MBO2DC/MBO2EDC. The MBO1T and CBO cabinets have one compartment. MBO1DC/MBO1EDC/MBO2DC/MBO2EDC cabinets have one or two compartments: MBO1DC/MBO1EDC MBOEDC/MBOEEDC.one-door outdoor extension cabinet MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO1EDC .14 .

1 COME/COMI/COEP with Modules COME COMI Service Light and AC Power Socket COEP Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment 2 Smoke Detector Service Light and AC Power Socket (not neces sarily equipped) Equipment Labels Door Alarms Override Key Switch Interconnection Panel SRACDC or ACSR Document Holder BTSRIOUT Battery (2 BU41s or BU100) Flood De tector (installation on left or right posi tion) STASR 1 STASR 3 Electricity Meter Option Option STASR 5 ACSB DCDP STASR 2 STASR 4 Not neces sarily equipped Door Alarm Switch (installation on upper or lower posi tion) Front View HEAT2 HEAT2 HEAT2 HEAT2 HEAT2 HEX2 HEX2 HEX2 Top View Figure 213: COME/COMI/COEP Module Positions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14 431 / 914 .1.

1.2 CODE/CODI/COEP with Modules CODE CODI COEP Service Light and AC Power Socket Equipment Labels Door Alarms Override Key Switch (Bus−bar) Interconnection Panel Document Holder Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment 2 Smoke Detector ACSU STASR 3 STASR 7 STASR 6 Options or 2nd Battery STASR 2 STASR 5 Battery STASR 1 STASR 4 Door Alarm Switch LPFU Flood Detector BTSRIOUT Front View HEAT2 HEX2 HEAT2 HEAT2 HEX2 HEX2 Top View Figure 214: CODE/CODI/COEP Module Positions 432 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.

4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.3 CPT2 with Modules Service Light and AC Power Socket Equipment Labels Door Alarms Override Key Switch (Bus−bar) OUTC Document Holder STASR 5 STASR 2 Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 Smoke Detector ACSU STASR 6 STASR 3 Door Alarm Switch Battery STASR 4 LPFU Flood Detector Front View HEAT2 HEX2 HEAT2 HEX2 Top View Figure 215: CPT2 Module Positions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.14 433 / 914 .

4 MBO1 with Modules Service Light Smoke Detektor AC Switch Unit (ACMU) LPFM ADAM4 STASR 7 HEX Breaker Options Area (e.14 .g.1. Microwaves) Door Alarms Override Key Switch STASR 3 Batteries Document Holder Battery Cover STASR 2 OUTC Batteries STASR 1 Door Alarm Switch Flood Detector Front View HEAT2 HEX4 Top View Figure 216: MBO1 Module Positions 434 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.

1.5 MBO1DC with Modules Service Light Smoke Detektor DC Connection Unit (DCMU) HEX Breaker Options Area (e.14 435 / 914 . Microwaves) Door Alarms Override Key Switch STASR 3 OUTC STASR 2 STASR 1 Door Alarm Switch Flood Detector Front View HEATDC HEX4 Top View Figure 217: MBO1DC Module Positions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.g.

4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.1.g.14 . Microwaves) HEX Breaker STASR 3 Door Alarms Override Key Switch Batteries STASR 2 OUTC Battery Cover ACDUE STASR 1 PM 18 Door Alarm Switch Flood Detector Front View HEAT2 HEX9 Top View Figure 218: MBO1E Module Positions 436 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 MBO1E with Modules Service Light Document Holder Smoke Detektor Options Area (e.

g.g.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. Microwaves) STASR 2 OUTC DCDUE STASR 1 Door Alarm Switch Flood Detector Front View HEATDC HEX9 Top View Figure 219: MBO1EDC Module Positions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 437 / 914 . Microwaves) HEX Breaker STASR 3 Door Alarms Override Key Switch Options Area (e.1.7 MBO1EDC with Modules Service Light Document Holder Smoke Detektor Options Area (e.

14 .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.g.1. Microwaves) STASR 3 Batteries Document Holder Battery Cover STASR 2 OUTC Batteries Door Alarm Switch STASR 1 Front View HEX4 Top View Figure 220: MBO1T Module Positions 438 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8 MBO1T with Modules AC Switch Unit Tropical (ACMUT) LPFMT ADAM 4 STASR 7 HEX Breaker Options Area (e.

1.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.g. Microwaves) Door Alarms Override Key Switch STASR 3 STASR 6 Batteries OUTC Document Holder Battery Cover STASR 2 STASR 5 Batteries Door Alarm Switch STASR 1 STASR 4 Flood Detector Front View HEAT2 HEAT2 HEX4 HEX3 Top View Figure 221: MBO2 Module Positions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 439 / 914 .9 MBO2 with Modules MBO2 Service Light Smoke Detektor AC Switch Unit (ACMU) LPFM ADAM4 MBO1 MBOE STASR 7 STASR 0 HEX Breaker Options Area (e.

g. Microwaves) STASR 6 Door Alarms Override Key Switch Batteries STASR 2 STASR 5 ACDUE OUTC Battery Cover STASR 1 Batteries PM 18 STASR 4 Door Alarm Switch Flood Detector Front View HEAT2 HEAT2 HEX9 HEX8 Top View Figure 222: MBO2E Module Positions 440 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.14 .10 MBO2E with Modules MBO2E Service Light MBO1E MBOEE Smoke Detektor Document Holder HEX Breaker STASR 3 Options Area (e.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.

Microwaves) Door Alarms Override Key Switch STASR 3 STASR 6 OUTC STASR 2 STASR 5 Door Alarm Switch STASR 1 STASR 4 Flood Detector Front View HEATDC HEAT2 HEX4 HEX3 Top View Figure 223: MBO2DC Module Positions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 441 / 914 .g.1.11 MBO2DC with Modules MBO2DC Service Light Smoke Detektor DC Connection Unit (DCMU) MBO1DC MBOEDC HEX Breaker Options Area (e.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.

Microwaves) STASR 2 STASR 5 DCDUE OUTC STASR 1 STASR 4 Door Alarm Switch Flood Detector Front View HEATDC HEATDC HEX9 HEX8 Top View Figure 224: MBO2EDC Module Positions 442 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.12 MBO2EDC with Modules MBO2EDC Service Light MBO1EDC MBOEEDC Smoke Detektor Document Holder HEX Breaker STASR 3 Options Area (e.14 .g.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.g. Microwaves) STASR 6 Door Alarms Override Key Switch Options Area (e.1.

14 Side Compartment The side compartment is designed to house AC/DC power equipment and provide an external cables connection point.1. enter the side compartment. All external cables. Microwaves) Door Switch DCUC ACUC STASR 2 OUTC ADAM 2 LPFC External Batteries Breaker STASR 1 Cables Entry Front View HEAT3 HEX5 Top View Figure 225: CBO Module Positions 4.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. This provides connectors for DC supplies.1. The layout of the Side Compartment differs for COME/COMI and CODE/CODI/CPT2 versions. The ACSB also provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines. The SRACDC or ACSR houses the modules that convert the AC mains supply into a 0/-48 VDC supply.13 COBO with Modules CBO Options Area (e.1. An ACSB provides AC distribution and circuit breakers for the incoming AC mains supply. alarm and clock cables.14 443 / 914 . Between the side compartment and BTS compartment 1 is the Interconnection Panel. there is room for an optional electricity meter.1 COME/COMI At the top of the compartment. except RF cables.g. 4. and for the external Abis.

3 CPT2 AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the side compartment. Directly underneath the ACSU a STASR contains the ADAM and three PM12s. An additional BU41 or BU100 can be fitted above the batteries. The CODE has one BU41 or one BU100 on the floor. There is also provision for optional microwave equipment. In the CODE.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. RIBAT and COAR functions and provides connectors for DC supplies.2 CODE/CODI AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the side compartment. The LPFU provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. AC power socket at the top.4 Common Features Other equipment items include: BOSU for power distribution. HEX2. 444 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC). and for the external Abis. Directly above the batteries a STASR contains up to four TREs and three FANUs.1. At the top of the side compartment is the ACSU which provides AC distribution. temperature sensor.14.14 . At the top of the side compartment is the ACSU which provides AC distribution. on the floor. This provides connectors for DC supplies. The ACSU contains AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays. and an additional BU41 or BU100 can be fitted above (as an option) Document holder on the side panel Equipment labels on the side panel HEX2 on the inside of the door Door alarm switch on the side frame Door alarm override key switch on the side frame (COME/COMI) or on the bus-bar (CODE/CODI/CPT2) Service light. and for the external Abis. The Interconnection Panel is located between the side compartment and BTS compartment. a STASR contains the ADAM and three PM12s. Directly underneath the ACSU.14. alarm and clock cables. 4. alarm and clock cables. The ACSU contains AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.14.1. The LPFU provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. It contains the XIOB.1. STASR7 and the Power Distribution Units HEAT2 on the floor in the COME and on the lower left side panel in the CODE/CPT2 Two optional BU41s or one BU100 on the floor in the COME. circuit breakers are provided in the BOSU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB. 4. BTSRI.

one HEAT2 for CODE/CODI/CPT2 HEX2 on the inside of the door Door alarm switch on the side frame Flood detector on the floor RF lightning protectors in the floor Smoke detector on the ceiling Service light and an AC power socket at the top. circuit breakers are provided in the BOBU for isolating the DC supply from the STASRs and HEXxs. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Circuit breakers are provided for isolating the DC supply from the STASRs. HEX2s. The optional equipment is housed above the DCDP Circuit breakers are provided in the BOBU for isolating the DC supply from the STASRs. HEX2s. The middle subrack holds the SUM and a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. A CODE/CODI/CPT2 BTS Compartment 1 holds three STASRs. as required. CODE/CODI/CPT2 In addition. XIOB and optional microwave link equipment. The method used for DC supply isolation depends on the compartment type: For the COME/COMI.14 445 / 914 . The optional equipment is housed above the upper subrack (STASR2).1. COME/COMI A COME/COMI BTS compartment 1 holds two STASRs. all BTS compartment 1s have the following common equipment: Up to two HEAT2s on the floor for COME/COMI. XIOB and optional microwave link equipment.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. The lower subrack (STASR1) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. The upper subrack (STASR2) holds the SUM and a mixture of ANX or ANY modules. there are two possibilities: The DCDP above the upper subrack.15 BTS Compartment 1 The following table describes the equipment contained in compartment 1 in the COME/COMI and CODE/CODI/CPT2 cabinets. The top and bottom subracks contain up to four TREs and three FANUs each. In the CODE/CODI/CPT2.

Other equipment includes: For COME. ANY or ANC modules.1. one HEAT2 for CODE HEX2 on the inside of the door Door alarm switch on the side frame RF lightning protectors in the floor Service light and an AC power socket at the top (not necessarily equipped). The upper and lower subracks each contain up to four TREs and three FANUs.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. 446 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 . up to two HEAT2s on the floor. as required. The middle subrack contains a mixture of ANX.16 BTS Compartment 2 BTS compartment 2 holds three STASRs.

AC mains power is applied to the LPFM located at the left upper side of the MBO1 compartment. The ACMU contains AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays. BTSRI..4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14 447 / 914 . The batteries (BU101) are located directly underneath these optional modules. STASR2 above contains a mixture of SUMA. There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and two batteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series. and for the external Abis. alarm and clock cables. a rack frame is installed which contains four STASRs. three or four PM12s. It contains the XIOB.1. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.17 MBO1 MBO1 is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. AC power socket. Other equipment includes: BOMU for power and alarm distribution in MBO1/MBOE. The LPFM provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply.g. ANY and ANC modules as required. HEX3/HEX4. temperature sensor. All external cables enter the MBO1 at roof top. STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. At the left upper back side of the compartment is the ACMU which provides AC distribution. STASRs and the Power Distribution Units HEX4 on the inside of the door HEAT2 at the back of the front door underneath HEX4 Document holder in the cover of the battery box Equipment labels on the side panel Door alarm switch on the side frame Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMU) Service light. RIBAT and COAR functions and provides connectors for DC supplies. microwaves) are installed. Underneath the ACMU optional modules (e. and smoke detector at the top Flood detector on the floor. At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC). The top STASR (STASR7) contains ADAM4 and two. STASR3 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUs each. Circuit breakers are provided in the BOMU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB. To the right of the batteries and the optional modules.

19 MBO1T MBO1T is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. Optional modules (e. ANY and ANC modules as required. The ACMUT contains an AC circuit breaker. The LPFMT provides lightning protection for the AC supply line and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. All external cables enter the MBO1T at roof top.g.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. a rack frame is installed which contains three STASRs. alarm and clock cables. It contains the XIOB. there is an empty area. The batteries (BU101) are located directly underneath these optional modules.. AC mains power is applied to the LPFMT located at the left upper side of the MBO1T compartment. microwaves) are installed underneath the ACMUT. All external cables enter the MBO1DC at roof top. The DCMU provides DC distribution inside the cabinets. Directly underneath these optional modules. At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).g.14 .1. STASR2 above contains a mixture of SUMA. STASR3 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUs each. To the right of the empty area and the optional modules. BTSRI and COAR functions and provides connectors for DC supplies. microwaves) are installed underneath the DCMU.1. At the left upper back side of the compartment is the ACMUT which provides AC distribution. All batteries are connected in series. It contains DC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays. 4. Other equipment includes: BOMU for power and alarm distribution in MBO1DC/MBOEDC. DC mains power is applied to the DCMU located at the left upper side of the MBO1DC compartment. STASRs and the Power Distribution Units HEX4 on the inside of the door HEATDC at the back of the front door underneath HEX4 Equipment labels on the side panel Door alarm switch on the side frame Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMU) Service light DC and smoke detector at the top Flood detector on the floor. STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. 448 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. temperature sensor plug SENSP. and for the external Abis. Circuit breakers are provided in the BOMU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB. Optional modules (e.18 MBO1DC MBO1DC is designed to house DC power equipment. HEX3/HEX4.. There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and two batteries in a lower block.

temperature sensor. RIBAT and COAR functions and provides connectors for DC supplies. The DCDUE provides DC distribution inside the cabinets. HEX4. STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. It contains DC circuit breakers and the associated power relays. There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and two batteries in a lower block. BTSRI. a rack frame is installed which contains three STASRs and the power supply subrack. All batteries are connected in series. To the right of the batteries and the optional modules. AC mains power is applied to the ACDUE located at the left lower side of the MBO1E compartment. microwaves) or batteries are installed behind the ACDUE. ANY and ANC modules. STASRs and one Power Distribution Units HEX4 on the inside of the door Document holder in the cover of the battery box Equipment labels on the side panel Door alarm switch on the right bottom side. STASR2 above contains a mixture of SUMA. containing four STASRs. STASR2 above contains a mixture of SUMA. All external cables enter the MBO1E at bottom plate.4 Outdoor Cabinets To the right of the batteries and the optional modules. Other equipment includes: BOMUT for power and alarm distribution in MBO1T. ANY and ANC modules as required.1. BTSRI. 4. an ACDUE and PM18 modules are equipped. STASR3 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUs each. a DCDUE is equipped.14 449 / 914 . as required. STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR3 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUs each.. The Outdoor Control Board (OUTC) is located on the right side of the compartment. In case of AC power supply. while in case of DC power supply. It contains the XIOB. RIBAT and COAR functions and 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Optional modules (e. The Outdoor Control Board (OUTC) is located on the right side of the compartment. The ACDUE provides also AC distribution. A second battery branch can be installed on top of the first one. AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays. a rack frame is installed.20 MBO1E MBO1E is designed to be powered alternatively by primary AC or DC power supply. Circuit breakers are provided in the BOMUT for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB. The ACDUE provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. It contains the XIOB. DC mains power is applied to the DCDUE located at the left lower side of the MBO1E compartment. and for the external Abis.g. alarm and clock cables. The top STASR (STASR7) contains ADAM4 and two or three PM12s.

14 . Other equipment includes: HEX3 on the inside of the door HEAT2 at the bottom on the right side frame Door alarm switch on the side frame RF lightning protectors in the roof Service light and an AC power socket at the top. Circuit breakers are provided in the BOMUE for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB. alarm and clock cables.21 MBOE An MBOE holds four STASRs. temperature sensor. When ACDUE version 3BK 27266 ABxx is used the AC power socket is part of ACDUE. STASRs and the Power Distribution Unit HEX9/DAC9 on the inside of the door HEAT2/HEATDC on the bottom plate of MBO1E rack Document holder in the cover of the battery box Equipment labels on the side panel Door alarm switch on the side frame Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMUE) Service light.4 Outdoor Cabinets provides connectors for DC supplies.1. Flood detector on the floor. 4. The bottom subrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. The top subrack (STASR0) can be used for optional 19" units. and for the external Abis. and smoke detector at the top When ACDUE version 3BK 27266 AAxx is used the AC power socket is part of the service light body. Other equipment includes: BOMUE for power and alarm distribution in MBO1E/MBOEE. STASR6 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUs each. HEX8/HEX9 or DAC8/DAC9. AC power socket. 450 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. STASR5 above contains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required.

which provides DC distribution.1. a thermostat and an AC power socket.1. STASR6 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUs each. The DCUC. The LPFC provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. Other equipment includes: HEX8/DAC8 on the inside of the door HEAT2/HEATDC on the bottom plate on MBOEE Door alarm switch on the side frame RF lightning protectors in the bottom plate Service light at the top. Above the STASRs. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.24 CBO 4.1. STASR5 above contains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. At the top of the rack space is foreseen for options installation. The bottom subrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. 4.23 MBOEE An MBOEE holds three STASRs and optional equipment. optional 19" equipment can be fitted.24. Other equipment includes: HEX3 on the inside of the door HEATDC at the bottom on the right side frame Door alarm switch on the side frame RF lightning protectors in the roof Service light at the top. All external cables enter the CBO at the right side of the cabinet where the cables entry is located. STASR5 above contains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. The bottom subrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR6 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUs each. In the free space above STASR6. up to three 19" units can be installed. The ACUC contains AC circuit breakers.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. AC mains power is applied to the LPFC located above the cable entry of the CBO cabinet. Above the LPFC is the ACUC which provides AC distribution.22 MBOEDC An MBOE holds three STASRs. 4. STASR0 use was cancelled.1.1 CBO AC Variant CBO is designed to house two TREs with up to two ANCs and an optional BATS module. is located above the ACUC.14 451 / 914 . A maximum of three MW units can be installed.

STASR2 above contains the BATS and up to two ANC modules. SUMA and up to two TREs and three FANUs. temperature sensor.4 Outdoor Cabinets The bottom STASR (STASR1) contains the ADAM2. RIBAT and COAR functions. It contains the XIOB. BTSRI. Other equipment includes: HEX5 on the inside of the door HEAT3 under the STASR1 Equipment labels on the side panel Door alarm switch on the side frame Degasing filtered holes are foreseen at the top and the bottom of the cabinet Two holes are foreseen at the bottom of the door for water outlet from HEX5.14 . alarm and clock cables. and for the external Abis. two PM12s. 452 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).

is located above the cables entry. BTSRI.1. At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC). and for the external Abis. Above the STASRs. up to three 19" units can be installed. or up to four TREs and three FANUs.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. When three ANBs are used only three TREs can be equipped.14 453 / 914 .24. Other equipment includes: HEX5 on the inside of the door HEAT4 under the STASR1 Equipment labels on the side panel Door alarm switch on the side frame Two holes are foreseen at the bottom of the door for the water outlet from HEX5. It contains the XIOB. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. temperature sensor.2 CBO DC Variant CBO is designed to house four TREs with up to three ANBs. The DCUC. The bottom STASR (STASR1) contains the SUMA and up to three TREs. RIBAT and COAR functions. All external cables enter the CBO at the right side of the cabinet where the cables entry is located. STASR2 above contains the SUMA and up to two ANBs or up to three ANB modules. which provides DC distribution. DC mains power is applied to the DC filter located at the cable entry of the CBO cabinet. A maximum of three MW units can be installed. At the top of the rack space is foreseen for options installation. alarm and clock cables.

4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.2. 4.14 . carries COAR and RIBATs Guiding Channel Antenna Connectors Plinth Side Panel Cabinets joined by four M8 Bolts. Guiding Channel used for tool ac cess from side of cabinet Cabinet Joining Brackets Removable Panel Figure 226: 9100 BTS Outdoor Cabinet Construction 454 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. carries COAR CODE/CODI: Part of Panel.2 Outdoor Cabinet Access and Features The following figures show the 9100 BTS outdoor cabinets without subracks.1 COME/COMI/CODI/CODE Cabinet Access Alternative Door Style Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 Hinged Outer Roof Subrack Mounting Rail BTS Compartment 2 Lifting Ring Inner Roof (flat on CODE/CODI) Bolt and Washer Interconnection Panel RIBAT (CODE/ CODI only) Cable Entry Plate COME/COMI: Perforated Panel.

2 CPT2 Cabinet Access Hinged Outer Roof Side panel Outdoor Control Board (OUTC) Figure 227: 9100 BTS Outdoor Cabinet Construction CPT2 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14 455 / 914 .

3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E Cabinet Access Figure 228: Multistandard BTS Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T Figure 229: Multistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO1E 456 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.2.

2.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14 457 / 914 .4 MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E Cabinet Access Figure 230: Multistandard BTS Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO2/MBO2DC 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

4 Outdoor Cabinets Figure 231: Multistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO2E 458 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

2. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.thus extended cabinet without partition wall inside Easily removable roof.and EMC-protected. socle panels (except for MBO1/MBO2/CBO) and heat exchanger Double-skinned wall (except for CBO) and roof Cooling by air/air heat exchanger (generic) Environmental.6 Outdoor Cabinet Features The following is a list of the main design features of the outdoor cabinets: Cabinet extensibility onsite Cabinet dismountable onsite for easier manual transportation Front access to BTS equipment only Side walls removable .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.5 CBO Cabinet Access Figure 232: Compact BTS Outdoor Construction CBO 4.2.14 459 / 914 .

3 Door All the 9100 BTS cabinets can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations. On MBOx/MBOxDC roofs. Other components are added to this basic construction.1 or 0. referred to as the door alarm override switch. The space between BTS Compartments 1 and 2 is open.1 Construction Each 9100 BTS compartment consists of a box-shaped frame bolted to a plinth.6. Mounted on the inside of the door is a HEXx. the side compartment and BTS Compartment 2 each have a side panel. It ensures that non-authorized opening of the doors leads to an alarm. In the MBO2/MBO2DC.2. In the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T. The rails are positioned on the left and right sides of each compartment. the side compartment and BTS Compartment 1 each have a side panel. One COME/COMI variant uses joining brackets fixed to the sides and bottom of the cabinet frame. In the COMI/CODI/CPT2. This reveals an inner roof (flat on CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBOx/MBOxDC/MBOxE) and four lifting rings.6.2 m at the side and back. The COME/COMI side compartment and BTS Compartment 1 are separated by perforated panels which prevents RF interference from entering the side compartment. and 0. 4.4 Subracks The subracks are secured to two vertical mounting rails. which uses the same key as the side compartment or MBO/MBODC compartment door lock. Above (COME/COMI/CBO) or under (CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E) the HEXx is a latch mechanism for keeping the door open during maintenance.2. the compartment has two side panels.8 m free space must be left in front of the cabinet doors. there is another mounted electronic switch. 4. The method of joining the cabinets is different for each variant.14 . respectively. Each door presses an electronic switch. Another COME/COMI variant and CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E use four M8 bolts in the corners of the cabinet with guiding channels at the rear of the cabinet to help locate the fixing tool and bolts. Access to each compartment is via a door at the front.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. Each door contains a door lock opened by a key.2 Roof The outer roof of each compartment can be raised at the front and unhinged at the rear for removal. from right to left. Each compartment has a separate rear panel. in turn. All door switches are serially connected. MBO1/MBO1DC and MBOE/MBOEDC have a side panel each. 460 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Similar panels are used in CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO2 but only as a structural element and support for COAR and RIBATs (CODE/CODI) or OUTC (CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E).6.2. The door provides both an environmental and EMC seal when closed. In the COME/CODE. Two or three compartments are bolted together. as required.2. Each outer roof must be removed. At least 0. SRACDC. and ACSR.6. a label warns to lift the top cover with care in windy conditions. Refer to Standard Telecommunications Subrack (Section 6) and AC Power Subracks (Section 7) for more information on STASR. In the side compartment or MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E compartment. 4.

14 461 / 914 . the HEXxs switch on. the notch is not needed and can be closed. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. and the other to the subracks in BTS compartment 2.5) HEAT2 (Section 11. There is a space between the side panel and internal rack construction to take in the cables.2) HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.5 External Cable Entry All external cables.8 Heating and Cooling Heating is provided by HEAT2/HEAT3/HEATDC if the internal air temperature is below 10 C. One cable part connects to the subracks in BTS compartment 1.2. Internal signal connections between MBO1 and MBOE are made via the outdoor control board.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. refer to: HEX2 (Section 11.2. The plate can be fitted to the front or left side of the side compartment plinth. 4. The outdoor control board performs the functions of four boards: the COAR. Refer to Outdoor Cabinet Signal Interfaces (Section 4. and RIBAT. The ribbon cable is in two parts. XIOB.4) HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11. For more information.8) HEATDC (Section 11. Refer to Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection Panel COMI/COME/CODI/CODE (Section 4. The outward-facing sides of the plinths are covered by removable panels.3) for detailed information on the interconnection panel. Refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.6. including antenna cables.6. As the temperature rises further. enter the cabinet via the cable entry plate or from below the plinth. For the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC.6 Internal Interconnections Internal power and signal connections between the side compartment and BTS compartment 1 are made via the interconnection panel or the outdoor control board (CPT2). Above this temperature. a ribbon cable is used in the cabinet to link the STASRs together. If the external cables come directly from the BTS socket. If the temperature increases above 20 C. HEXxs transfer heat from the cabinet interior to the outside air environment. For the CBO.7) HEAT3 (Section 11.7 STASR Ribbon Cable In the COME/CODE only.2. 4. BTSRI.2. the side panel has a variable notch on the bottom or top so that all external cables can be passed through.4) for detailed information. joined by the BTSRIOUT board between them.5) for information about the Remote Inventory function. module cooling is provided by FANUs. BTS compartments 1 and 2 have RF connectors fitted to the floor. These are for antenna cabling.6. 4. the cables entry has an adjustable cover plate that must be removed so that the cables can be passed through it. The cables are fixed at the side of the internal rack and led to the top where they enter the cabinet. the HEXx fan speed increases. The interconnection panel also contains a PCB.6.10) .3) HEX5 (Section 11.

2.11 Adjustable Feet Adjustable feet are provided in each corner of the compartment (MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC) or compartment plinth for levelling the cabinet.2. an alarm is raised.6.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.12 Wind Load The cabinet is designed to withstand a wind load of 180 km/h.6.15 Service Light/AC Power Socket A service light with an integral 230 VAC power socket is fitted (not necessarily equipped in BTS compartment 2) in each compartment. the service light can be switched on by the service staff.2.6. the document holder is fitted on the cover of the battery box. 462 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the front of the cabinet.6. The MBO1T cabinet is not extensible. the service light is an independent item but still supplied by ACDUE. In case of smoke inside the BTS. An MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO1EDC cabinet can be extended onsite to MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/MBO2EDC by adding an MBOE/MBOEDC/MBOEE/MBOEEDC. If water enters the BTS above the bottom plate.6.2. On MBO1E/MBO2E using ACDUE version 3BK 27266 ABxx or newer. on the right side wall of MBO1E or BTS compartment 1 (COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2).10 Additional Outdoor Cabinet Features The outdoor cabinets include the following additional features. The same applies to extend a CODI to a CODE by adding a COEP.2. 4. 4. 4.2. 4.14 .9 Cabinet Installation All the 9100 BTS cabinets can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations. In MBO1.2.17 Extensibility The BTS cabinet COMI can be extended onsite to COME by adding an additional BTS cabinet COEP on the right hand side.6.6.16 Document Holder A document box is mounted to store A4 documents on the left side wall inside of the side compartment and MBO1E. following the clearance recommendations given in the SPP documents. At least 0.8 m free space must be left in front of the cabinet doors. 4. an alarm is raised.6. 4. 4. If needed.13 Smoke Detector An optical smoke detector is fitted to the inner roof plate of the MBO1.2.14 Flood Detector A flood detector is fitted to the bottom plate of the MBO1 or BTS compartment 1 (COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2). The power socket is part of ACDUE body.2. 4.6.

Interconnection Panel Components X - - X X X X X 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The following figure shows the view from the side compartment. Status and control signals via the COAR. One Feed through terminal HDFKV25 (-48 VDC) and one M6 bolt (0 VDC) for DC power distribution. COME/COMI AC Connectors Light Heater RIBAT1 CODE/CODI COAR Ground COAR DC Connectors −48 V (Blue) 0 V (Red) RIBAT2 −48 V (Blue) 0 V (Black) (Viewed from Side Compartment) (Viewed from Side Compartment) Figure 233: 9100 BTS Outdoor. COME/ COMI X CODE/ CODI - Components Two filter connectors to provide 230 VAC power for HEAT2.14 463 / 914 . Connectors for RIBAT1 and RIBAT2. M8 ground bolt. Table 32: 9100 BTS Outdoor.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. 0/ -48 V power distribution Two filters with M6 bolt connectors for DC power distribution by the DCDP or One filter with one M6 bolt connector (-48 VDC) and one M6 bolt (0 VDC) for DC power distribution by the BOBU.3 Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection Panel COMI/COME/CODI/CODE All the power and signal connections between the side compartment and BTS compartment 1 are made via the interconnection panel for COME/COMI/CODE/CODI (via OUTC for CPT2). service light and AC power socket in BTS compartment 1. Interconnection Panel The interconnection panel carries the components listed in the following table.

4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.1 Interconnection Panel . 464 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.COME/COMI COAR Front View The following figure shows the COME/COMI COAR.14 .3. All these interfaces are overvoltage protected. viewed from the side compartment. Ext−Alarms External Input/ Output Interface Group X303 XI17−24 XGND Surge Protectors Alarms Side Comp XBCB XRT HEX Power Equipment Labels External Clock Interface Group XCLK2 In/Out XCLK1 In XCLK1 Out XGPS Abis 4 Abis 3 Abis Interface Group Abis 2 Abis Relays Abis 1 Krone Strip Figure 234: COME/COMI COAR Front View The shaded areas in the above figure identify separate external interface groups.

14 465 / 914 .CODE/CODI COAR Front View The following figure shows the front view of the CODE/CODI COAR.3.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.2 Interconnection Panel . Ext−Alarms External Input/ Output Interface Group Alarms Side Comp EBCB Surge Protectors X303 XI17−24 XGND XRT External Clock Interface Group XCLK2 In/Out XCLK1 In XCLK1 Out Abis 4 XGPS Equipment Labels XBCB Abis 3 Abis Interface Group Abis 2 Abis Relays Abis 1 Krone Strip Figure 235: CODE/CODI COAR Front View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

14 . The XIOB is connected to the COAR and contains a 24 V DC/DC converter and interface circuitry for external alarms.3 Interconnection Panel . The COAR provides interfaces for: XIO External clock Abis Miscellaneous connections. COME/ COMI only HEX Power ALARM BTS2 ALARM BTS1 SUM ABIS2 Figure 236: 9100 BTS Outdoor COAR Rear View The XIOB is located behind the COAR (BTS compartment 1 side). 466 / 914 ABIS1 ABIS 1+2 ABIS 3+4 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.3.9100 BTS Outdoor Rear View The following figure shows the rear view of the COME/COMI and CODE/CODI COAR.

Each additional alarm is reported to the OMC-R via the SUM. as well as electro-mechanical switches. If these pins are open circuit (open loop).1 XIO The XIO connectors allow various alarm devices to be connected to the 9100 BTS.14 467 / 914 . Connector X112 provides a + 5 VDC power source for RIBAT. At the OMC-R. The ASCII text describes the particular alarm. These include smoke and flood detectors. It also has a miscellaneous connections interface. Each external alarm input has two adjacent pins associated with it on the Ext-Alarms connector. Connector XI17-24 provides an interface for connecting eight additional non-BTS alarm inputs.4. External Alarm Inputs The Ext-Alarms connector provides an interface for three external alarms. If the connector pins are not short-circuited (open loop). door switches. 235 and 238 show the positions of the XIO connectors. Connector X300 provides an interface for the SUM to control eight external alarm devices. the alarms are mapped to predefined and customer-defined ASCII text. an alarm is generated. external clock and Abis signal interfaces. Connector X303 provides a + 24 VDC power source for external alarm devices that require a power supply. refer to Station Unit Modules (Section 8) . The XGND connector is used when referencing the external alarm 24 VDC ground to the 9100 BTS ground.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. This feature is for future use. the input and output alarms are isolated from the 9100 BTS ground. an alarm is generated. If these pins are open-circuit (open loop). The 16 alarms are reported to the OMC-R via the SUM. The following sections describe the connectors and functions for each of these interfaces. Each additional alarm input has two adjacent pins associated with it on the XI17-24 connector. For more information about the SUM. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors. These are alarms that are external to the cabinet (for example.4 Outdoor Cabinet Signal Interfaces The outdoor cabinet has XIO. The ASCII text describes the particular alarm. At the OMC-R. etc. The three external alarms are part of a group of 16 alarms which includes the pre-wired smoke detector. Figures 234 . an antenna lamp failure alarm). the additional alarms are mapped to customer-defined ASCII text. Additional Alarm Inputs External Alarm Outputs + 24 VDC Supply + 5 VDC Supply XGND Table 33: 9100 BTS Outdoor Interface Connectors 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The following table describes the XIO interface connectors. 4.

4.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14 . 4. alarm no 14) GND (braid earthing clamp) Table 35: 9100 BTS Outdoor Ext-Alarms Connector 468 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description GND (braid earthing clamp) ALM 1 (GND) ALM 1 (ext.1. alarm* Side Compartment X X X*** X - X*** X - X ** X X Table 34: 9100 BTS Outdoor Pre-wired Internal Alarms * These alarms are serially linked and reported as only one alarm in case of multi-failure. alarm no 10) ALM 2 (GND) ALM 2 (ext.1 Pre-Wired Internal Alarms The following table shows a list of the pre-wired internal alarms. *** For MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC only. BTS Compartment 1 X BTS Compartment 2 X - Pre-wired Internal Alarm Door alarm* Door alarm over-ride Smoke detector alarm Float detector alarm Heat exchange. alarm no 13) ALM 3 (GND) ALM 3 (ext.4. ** When equipped (more than six TREs).2 Ext-Alarms Connector The following table shows the pin assignment of the Ext-Alarms connector.

4. only eight external alarms are available for that purpose). The following table provides detailed information about the external alarm inputs.1.3 External Alarm Inputs Up to seven alarms can be reported to the BTS (taking into account that the maximum configuration is six TREs.14 469 / 914 .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. and that in an outdoor BTS. Alarm Description Alarm Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 XIO Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Alarm Class 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Alarm Connection Not used Not used Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Not used Not used Yes Not used Not used Yes Yes Not used Not used Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Alarm Generation Inside Inside Inside Inside Inside Outside Outside Outside Inside Inside Inside Inside Inside Inside 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

Connection by cage terminals. During normal operation the loop in the previous drawing is closed. EUC output alarms connected to BTS inputs: Sixteen free configurable ESD protected alarm inputs are available in BTS. Alarm inputs sharing (alarms collected outside of cabinet): Parallel connection to BTS and EUC may only be considered when both circuitries are fully compatible.14 . This means: loop conductive = no alarm loop non-conductive = alarm. Maximum cable diameter 15mm.4 Outdoor Cabinets Alarm Description Alarm Number 23 24 XIO Input 23 24 Alarm Class 9 9 Alarm Connection Yes Yes Alarm Generation Inside Inside Table 36: 9100 BTS Outdoor External Alarm Inputs Concerning the external alarms the following cases apply: Alarms connected to Equipments Under Consideration (EUC) only (inputs): An external cable may enter cabinet in top via dedicated metallic bracket replacing antenna hole. Check case by case necessary. The EUC alarm cable must be routed via bracket in rack top. The outer jacket must be partially removed and the shield connected conductive to bracket. 470 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. O&M alarm sharing via rack master over cabinet internal RS232 or Ethernet PPP link on request feasible. The cable must be shielded type. R=12k . Vc External alarm trigger BTS alarm input 1 mA R or R Figure 237: Alarm Operation Principle For cabinets using COAR the following values are used: Vc=24V.

4.2 External Clock Interface The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions.4.4. HEX2 This is the 0/ -48 VDC power supply from the DCDP or BOBU (COME/COMI (depending on COME/COMI variant). Table 10 describes the connectors.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.3 Abis Interface The Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions.14 471 / 914 . as described in the following table. see Figures COME/COMI COAR Front View (234) . only) Table 37: 9100 BTS Outdoor Miscellaneous Connections Interface 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Front View (238) . The interface consists of the connectors described in Table 9100 BTS Abis Interface Connectors (11) . 235 and 238 . CODE/CODI COAR Front View (235) and OUTC. 4. Alarms This includes the door alarm switch and the HEXx alarm. 4. see Figures 234 .4 Miscellaneous Connections Interface Connectors are provided for the side compartment.

Front View 472 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14 . EBCB (optional) DC IN External ALARM OUTPUTS Input/ Output Interface Group ALARM INPUTS EXT − ALARMS SUN CONNECTION XBCB External Input/ XRT Output Interface SIDE COMPARTMENT ALARMS COMPARTMENT 1 ALARMS External Clock XCLK 1 IN Interface Group XCLK 1 OUT KRONE CONNECT XGPS Group ABIS4 XCLK 2 IN/ OUT ABIS3 ABIS 3&4 ABIS2 Abis Interface Group Abis ABIS 1&2 Interface Group ABIS1 ABIS 1 Remote Inventory Part FLAT CABLE COMPARTMENT 1 FLAT CABLE SIDE COMPARTMENT ABIS 2 TEMP.5 Outdoor Control Board CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/ MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/CBO The Outdoor Control Board (OUTC) performs the functions of the following four separate boards: COAR XIOB BTSRI RIBAT The following figure shows the front part of the OUTC. SENSOR RIBAT Port Figure 238: OUTC.

3 BTSRI Part VCC_BRI Driver XIOB Part NGTSL BCB_VCC BCB_VCC_BP Figure 239: OUTC.5 −48/ 60V Linear Regulator Linear Regulator External Power Supply BCB_VCC VCC Temp Sensor VDD SUM ALARM INPUTS ALARM Outputs XBCB NGTSL RIBAT Part NGTSL1 .. RIBAT and BCB parts of the XIOB. No galvanic isolation between external inputs/outputs and the BTS. even the BTSRI. The ’Power Architecture’ of the OUTC is different from that of the earlier boards (see the following figure)..2 .4 Outdoor Cabinets All the functions of these four boards are kept. DC DC VCC12 5V VCC_BRI XBCB_VCC VCC5. these parts are only supplied via the BCB_VCC. Power Architecture 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The current per output is limited to 50 mA instead of 100 mA... Each part of the board is powered by the power supply of the OUTC. except for the following: The output voltage provided on the external output connector is 12 V instead of 24 V.14 473 / 914 . On the earlier boards.

Table 38: Interconnection OUTC . It is a 120 cable which is used if the external Abis cables have 120 or 75 . The KRONE Strip Connector also provides the possibility to monitor the Abis links.SUMA 4. RF shielded cable.1 Connection Area (COAR) The Connection Area is part of the OUTC. Therefore. OUTC-SUM cable The OUTC-SUM cable is a flat cable with 37 wires. The required impedance conversion is realized on the OUTC itself. on the OUTC side with a Sub-D connector of 37-pins/female. 4. 2 cable The Abis cable is a four pair. It is equipped on the SUMA side with a Sub-D connector of 37-pins/male. It is a 120 cable which is used if the external Abis cables have 120 or 75 .. RF shielded cable. It provides external BTS interfaces which are grouped in three different functional parts: Abis External Clock Interface External Inputs/Outputs.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. 4 cable The Abis cable is a four pair.1. The interconnection between the SUMA and the OUTC consists of the following cables: Abis 1. Table 9100 BTS External Clock Interface Connectors (10) describes the connectors. 474 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. the overvoltage insert has to be pulled out and replaced by a special monitor insert.5. Abis 4).14 . Abis 3.5.. The interface consists of the connectors described in 9100 BTS Abis Interface Connectors (11) .1 Abis The Abis part provides the external interfaces for four separate Abis links (Abis 1 .5. The required impedance conversion is realized on the OUTC itself.2 External Clock Interface The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions.

door. These are on the ’EXT-ALARMS’ connector for external alarm numbers 10. The version with crimp contacts is the solution if the customer has a common interface and pre-equipped cables can be used. It is inserted in the alarm input connectors which are not connected by an external alarm cable to suppress alarms based on open inputs. Alarms 17 to 24 are not protected by special transient or overvoltage components but these inputs have to withstand a 1. key. eight additional non-BTS alarms. Plug in Connectors The insert in these connectors have either clamp strip contacts or crimp contacts. the other one provides the alarm outputs and + 12 VDC voltage. Overvoltage Protection The OUTC additionally provides surge arrestors for three alarms to protect the circuitry of these inputs. Table 39: External Inputs/Outputs Concerning the external alarms the following cases apply: Alarms connected to Equipments Under Consideration (EUC) only (inputs): An external cable may enter cabinet in top via dedicated metallic bracket replacing antenna hole. The version with a clamp strip is used for customer with no common interface where no pre-equipped cable can be used.1. ’Open’ alarm inputs are interpreted by the BTS as ’alarm on’. Every unconnected input alarm has to be bridged by a short circuit on the plug-in connector. On-board Connectors These are two ’Mini Combicon’ connectors. Alarm Disable Connector The alarm disable insert consists of a connector with crimp contacts which provides the short circuits for eight alarm inputs.14 475 / 914 ..4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. one Sub-D 9 and one Sub-D 15 connector (to connect five internal BTS alarms.5. One of the two ’Mini Combicon’ connectors provides eight alarm inputs.3 External Inputs/Outputs The external Input/Output part of the OUTC provides the interfaces for 16 BTS alarm inputs. Therefore. The alarm outputs are protected by bi-directional suppressor diodes. and 14. heat exchanger. e. fire. and eight alarm outputs.2/ 50 1500 V wave. any unconnected input alarm has to be bridged by a short circuit on the plug-in connector. The cable must be shielded type. 13.g. water) and one connector with screws for special protected alarm inputs (three alarms). The following table describes the external inputs/outputs. The outer jacket 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

Alarm inputs sharing (alarms collected outside of cabinet): Parallel connection to BTS and EUC may only be considered when both circuitries are fully compatible.14 . This means: loop conductive = no alarm loop non-conductive = alarm. Connection by cage terminals. R=6k . 476 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Check case by case necessary. The EUC alarm cable must be routed via bracket in rack top. Vc External alarm trigger BTS alarm input 1 mA R or R Figure 240: Alarm Operation Principle For cabinets using OUTCR the following values are used: Vc=12V. During normal operation the loop in the previous drawing is closed. Maximum cable diameter 15mm. O&M alarm sharing via rack master over cabinet internal RS232 or Ethernet PPP link on request feasible.4 Outdoor Cabinets must be partially removed and the shield connected conductive to bracket. EUC output alarms connected to BTS inputs: Sixteen free configurable ESD protected alarm inputs are available in BTS.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Five wires are reserved on the cable for this purpose.2 BTSRI The BTS Remote Inventory part of the OUTC is used to store basic information about a BTS in non-volatile memory.14 477 / 914 . The BTSRI is either powered via the flat cable (BCB_VCC_BP. the SUM can use the BCB bus as the interface to the BTSRI If the BTS is unpowered. The mounting position of the flat cables is located on the bottom of the OUTC (see Figure 238 ).4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. Then the external tool provides the necessary power supply. The access to this board can be established via the BCB bus. provided by the SUMA) or via the power supply of the OUTC board. This feature is used only at factory level. B C B p l u s Reset Circuit B C B p l u s Protection Overcurrent Flat Cable Side Compartment or MBO1 BCB Driver NGTSL EEPROM Flat Cable BTS Compartment 1 or MBOE BCB_VCC_BP Figure 241: Block Diagram of BTSRI The heart of the BTSRI is an NGTSL-ASIC. A reset circuit (MAX 811) is used to reset the ASIC at power on. The subrack number is coded on the flat cable with holes.5. An EEPROM is used as memory (256 x 16 bits). which corresponds to the large outdoor configuration. There are two possible ways to establish a link to the BTSRI: If the BTS is in traffic. Flat cables from compartment 1 and the side compartment or MBO1/MBO2 are connected to the BTSRI.(and BCB-) bus. the BTSRI can be accessed by an external tool via the XBCB. An overcurrent protection protects the BCB_VCC_BP line. Up to six subracks can be coded. The following figure shows the block diagram of the BTSRI.

3 XIOB The External Alarm Input and Output Board (XIOB) is used as the interface between the external environment and the BTS. No galvanic isolation is provided between inputs/outputs to the BTS. and eight alarm outputs. each NGTSL handles eight alarm inputs. The third NGTSL can be used to pull the alarm inputs to the active or inactive status for test purposes.5. The first NGTSL also controls eight outputs and the EEPROM. An alarm line must stay longer than 1 ms in the active status in order to be detected as active. 478 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It is possible to pull the alarm inputs with software on active or inactive level in order to check them.14 . which is used to store the remote inventory data of the XIOB. The alarm outputs use Darlington transistor arrays with open collectors. A current of approximately 1 mA flows from the alarm input to ground if the alarm input is pulled to ground. The XIOB functions are integrated in the OUTC. One common ground (GND) is used within the BTS including inputs and outputs. 48V in 12 VDC 5 VDC Overcurrent Protection EEPROM 12 VDC 12V out BCB VCC Alarm Inputs NGTSL 1 Outputs BCB BUS Bus Driver NGTSL 2 Alarm Inputs GND Alarm Inputs XBCB_VCC NGTSL 3 EBCB_VCC EBCB_SP TTL/ RS485 conversion XBCB_BUS Figure 242: Block Diagram of the XIOB Three NGTSLs are used. The alarm inputs use comparators to detect an alarm. The board provides 16 BTS alarm inputs. Open alarm inputs are regarded as active. The following figure shows the block diagram of the XIOB. Alarm test 0 pulls all inputs to the inactive status and alarm test 1 pulls all inputs to the active status. eight additional non-BTS alarms.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. These alarms are described in Tables 9100 BTS Outdoor Interface Connectors (33) to 9100 BTS Outdoor External Alarm Inputs (36) .

A 12 VDC power supply is used to supply input and output circuitry. This power supply can be used to supply relays that can be switched with the outputs. This feature is used only at factory level. An ABTE 16246 is used as the internal BCB driver.4 Outdoor Cabinets The DC/DC converter is switched on if the BCB_VCC (powered by the SUMA) is available. then the interface can be used to control external devices If the BTS is unpowered. An overcurrent protection protects the BCB_VCC line. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. the XBCB can be powered externally. An XBCB interface provides access to the internal base station control bus (BCB): If the BTS is powered.14 479 / 914 . The signal levels are according to RS-485. Then the direction of the interface is changed so that it can be used for remote inventory of the BTS.

The operating temperature range of the board is 0 C to 70 C.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. The internal battery of the outdoor BTS is located inside a side compartment.5.5 C. Its task is to measure the battery temperature and to provide the OMU with the temperature value and the battery Remote Inventory information which includes the information of the battery type. Values below -10 C means a short cut at the temperature sensor. The connection and addressing differs for different configurations. the Remote Inventory EEPROM including the Remote Inventory information. This range is extended against the operating temperature range of the batteries (0 C to 50 C) and the minimum operating temperature range of the RIBAT to submit high or low temperature alarms. The power consumption is about 30 mA. Remote Supply Voltage Input Fixed address 0000 0011 1100 0001 (JC1 hqx ) NGTSL BCB D A RI EEPROM Temperature Sensor Figure 243: RIBAT Block Diagram The board consists of an NGTSL which is the terminal for the ISL data link. The ADC outputs are connected directly to the NGTSL alarm inputs. The following figure shows the RIBAT block diagram. The analog part includes signal conditioning and an ADC to digitize the temperature value. The measurement resolution is 0. Power supply is provided remotely either via the BCB_VCC_BP or the internal power supply of the OUTC. An external PT100 temperature sensor is connected to the analog part.14 . but physically integrated in the OUTC. The RIBAT is supplied from the BTS not from the batteries. The board contains a BCB interface to transfer the information. The RIBAT is connected to the BCB via a flat band cable coming from the backplane. Knowledge of the temperature value is necessary for charging.4 RIBAT The RIBAT board is part of the battery. and the analog part for temperature measuring. Values above 70 C means a not-connected or interrupted sensor. 480 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The battery temperature range which can be measured is between -10 C and 70 C.

The ACSB contains lightning overvoltage protectors. The COME/COMI is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 bolt fitted to the side compartment plinth.1 COME/COMI For the COME/COMI. there are two different power supply systems. and circuit breakers for AC power distribution. CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO2 and MBO1DC/MBO2DC.6. The AC input is connected to the ACSB via the optional electricity meter. input supply fuses. Certain elements are common for both variants. From there. separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment. These are used for: HEAT2s Service light and AC power sockets SRACDC or ACSR. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and Grounding The following sections describe the different power supply systems for the COME/COMI.14 481 / 914 . The AC input can be 230 VAC 1ø or 415 VAC 3ø. and another one based on PM11s with BCU2. 4. The switched outputs from the ACSB are 230 VAC 1ø. one based on PM08s with BCU1.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.

1) and PM08 (Section 12. Refer to DCDP (Section 12. respectively. Refer to BCU1 (Section 12.12) for detailed descriptions of the ACIB and the PM08s. and the optional BACO and BU41.30) for a detailed description of the DCDP. Refer to ACIB (Section 12. Service Light and AC Power Sockets ACIB Control Alarms To/From FANUs XBCB ACRI PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1 Shunt DC Bus 0 VDC −48 VDC Shunt SRACDC BACO BU41 Figure 244: COME/COMI AC/DC Power Supply System with PM08s and BCU1 The SRACDC contains the modules that: Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC.6.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.1. The DC supply produced in the SRACDC is connected to the DCDP via the interconnection panel.16) . 482 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. BACO (Section 12.14 .24) for detailed descriptions of the BCU1. Three PM08s are used in the COMI. respectively. five PM08s are used in the COME. Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing.1 COME/COMI Power Supply with PM08s and BCU1 The following figure shows the COME/COMI power supply system with PM08s and BCU1. AC Input Electricity Meter ACSB AC to Heaters.18) and BU41 (Section 12.

1. respectively. BAC2 (Section 12. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13) for a detailed description of the PM11s.24) .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. Refer to BCU2 (Section 12.2 COME/COMI Power Supply with PM11s and BCU2 The following figure shows the COME/COMI power supply system with PM11s and BCU2. the ACSB distributes the AC input directly to the PM11s and the ACSB executes the functions normally performed by the ACIB. and the optional BAC2 and BU41 or BU100. In Figure 245 . Refer to PM11 (Section 12. The DC supply produced in the ACSR is connected to the BOBU via the interconnection panel.25) for detailed descriptions of the BCU2. and BU100 (Section 12.6. BU41 (Section 12.19) .14 483 / 914 . Three PM11s are used in the COMI. four PM11s are used in the COME Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. The ACSB used in combination with PM11s is slightly different from the ACSB used in combination with PM08s.17) . Service Light and AC Power Sockets Control Alarms To/From FANUs XBCB PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2 Shunt DC Bus 0 VDC −48 VDC Shunt ACSR BAC2 BU41 or BU100 Figure 245: COME/COMI AC/DC Power Supply System with PM11s and BCU2 The ACSR contains the modules that: Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. AC Input Electricity Meter ACSB AC to Heaters.

refer to LPFU (Section 12. AC power is then passed to the ACSU located at the top of the side compartment.2 CODE/CODI/CPT2 The CODE/CODI/CPT2 power supply system differs from that of COME/COMI because it is completely integrated in the BTS. For a detailed description of the ACSU. refer to ACSU (Section 12. The system control functions are performed by the OMU. AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the side compartment. The switched outputs from the ACSU are used for: Two or three PM12s HEAT2s and optional air conditioning Service Light and AC power sockets. which is part of the SUMA. The AC input can be 230 VAC 1ø or 400 VAC 3 ø.9) .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14 .5) ). From there.6. The ACSU provides AC distribution via seven AC circuit breakers. The LPFU provides overvoltage lightning protection for the AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detailed description of the LPFU. AC Input LPFU ACSU AC to Heaters. separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment. The CODE/CODI/CPT2 are grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 bolt fitted to the side compartment plinth. The following figures show the power supply system for the CODE/CODI/CPT2. Service Light and AC Power Sockets PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1 0 VDC ADAM DC Bus −48 VDC STASR BU41 or BU100 OMU RIBAT Figure 246: CODE/CODI/CPT2 AC/DC Power Supply System 484 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

BU41 (Section 12. Refer to ADAM (Section 12. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Three PM12s are used in the CODE/CODI/CPT2. The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing.4 Outdoor Cabinets The STASR contains the modules that: Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC.25) for detailed descriptions of ADAM and the BU41.21) . pylon lightning. BU100 and BU101 batteries.24) and BU100 (Section 12. The sense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14 485 / 914 . etc. A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment. The DC supply produced in the STASR is connected to the BOSU and BOBU via the interconnection panel.14) for a detailed description of the PM12s.

AC Input LPFM ACMU AC to Heaters. The MBO1/MBOE are grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1 (near LPFM). From there. refer to LPFM (Section 12. The system control functions are performed by the OMU.6. The LPFM provides overvoltage lightning protection for the AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detailed description of the LPFM. The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1 and MBO2.7) .14 .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. The ACMU provides AC distribution via five AC circuit breakers.3 MBO1/MBO2 The MBO1/MBO2 power supply system differs from that of COME/COMI because it is completely integrated in the BTS. which is part of the SUMA. Service Light and AC Power Sockets PM12/4* PM12/3* PM12/2 PM12/1 0 VDC ADAM4 DC Bus −48 VDC STASR BU101 OMU RIBAT * not necessarily equipped Figure 247: MBO1/MBO2 AC/DC Power Supply System 486 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. refer to ACMU (Section 12.4) ). separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment. For a detailed description of the ACMU. The switched outputs from the ACMU are used for: Two to four PM12s in combination with ADAM4 HEAT2s and optional air conditioning Service Light and AC power sockets. AC power is then passed to the ACMU located at the top of the MBO1 compartment. AC mains power is applied to the LPFM located at the upper side of the MBO1 compartment. The AC input can be 230 VAC 1ø or 400 VAC 3 ø.

26) for detailed descriptions of ADAM4 and the BU101 battery. which is part of the SUMA. From there. The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1 and MBO2.14 487 / 914 .23) and BU101 (Section 12.14) for a detailed description of the PM12s. 4. Two or three PM12s are used in the MBO1. A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment. DC Input DC Filter DCMU DC to Heaters and Service Light 0 VDC DC Bus −48 VDC Figure 248: MBO1DC/MBO2DC Power Supply System The DC supply is connected to the BOMU via the DCMU. For a detailed description of the DCMU. three or four PM12s are used in the MBO2. A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment. separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment. pylon lightning. The MBO1DC/MBOEDC are grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1DC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12. Refer to ADAM4 (Section 12.4 MBO1DC/MBO2DC The MBO1DC/MBO2DC power supply system differs from that of COME/COMI because it is completely integrated in the BTS.6. DC power is then passed to the DCMU located at the top of the MBO1DC compartment. etc. The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. The switched outputs from the DCMU are used for: BTS compartments HEATDCs and optional air conditioning Service Light. pylon lightning. The DCMU provides DC distribution via four DC circuit breakers.4 Outdoor Cabinets The STASR contains the modules that: Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC.33) . The DC supply produced in the STASR is connected to the BOMU via ADAM4. The sense data is passed to the OMU. etc. DC mains power is applied to the DC In filters located at the upper side of the MBO1DC compartment. The system control functions are performed by the OMU. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. refer to DCMU (Section 12.

488 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3) ). The ACMUT provides AC distribution via one AC circuit breaker. The sense data is passed to the OMU. The DC supply produced in the PM12 and is connected to the BOMUT via ADAM4. AC Input LPFCT ACMUT PM12/3* PM12/2 PM12/1 0 VDC DC Bus ADAM −48 VDC STASR BU101 OMU RIBAT * not necessarily equipped Figure 249: MBO1T AC/DC Power Supply System The STASR contains the modules that: Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment.14 . AC power is then passed to the ACMUT located at the top of the MBO1T1 compartment.8) . The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing.5 MBO1T MBO1T is derived from MBO1 by reducing the used equipment. For a detailed description of the ACMUT. The LPFMT provides overvoltage lightning protection for the AC supply line and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detailed description of the LPFMT. AC mains power is applied to the LPFMT located at the upper side of the MBO1T compartment. etc. The AC input is 230 VAC 1ø.6.21) and BU101 (Section 12. pylon lightning. The MBO1T is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1T (near LPFMT). refer to ACMUT (Section 12. A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment. Two or three PM12s are used in the MBO1T.26) for detailed descriptions of ADAM and the BU101 battery. refer to LPFMT (Section 12. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14) for a detailed description of the PM12s. From there. The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1T. The switched outputs from the ACMUT are used for two to three PM12s in combination with ADAM4.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.

apart of service light. In case of AC power supply.6. an ACDUE and PM18 modules are equipped. The AC input can be 230 VAC 1ø or 400 VAC 3 ø. The following sections describe the power distribution systems for each case.6. 4.6 MBO1E/MBO2E MBO1E/MBO2E is designed to be powered alternatively by primary AC or DC power supply. Starting with ACDUE version 3BK 27266 ABxx the AC power socket is part of ACDUE. Service Light and AC Power Sockets PM18/3 PM18/2 PM18/1 0 VDC PM18SR DC Bus −48 VDC BU101 PM18C Temperature Sensor Figure 250: MBO1E/MBO2E AC/DC Power Supply System 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.6) ). AC power is then passed to the switching block located at the middle part of ACDUE. a DCDUE is equipped. From there. refer to ACDUE (Section 12.14 489 / 914 . The switched outputs are used for: One to three PM18 rectifiers supervised by PM18 controller HEAT2s Service Light and AC power socket. AC Input ACDUE LP Filter ACDUE Switching AC to Heaters. separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment. while in case of DC power supply.1 MBO1E/MBO2E AC Powered The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1E and MBO2E. The MBO1E/MBOEE are grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left lower side of the MBO1E (near the front left fixation point). AC mains power is applied to the ACDUE located at the lower side of the MBO1E compartment (for a detailed description of the ACDUE.6. The switching block provides AC distribution via five AC circuit breakers.

A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment. refer to DCDUE (Section 12. For a detailed description of the DCDUE.2 MBO1E/MBO2E DC Powered The MBO1E/MBO2E power supply system is completely integrated in the BTS.14 . Refer to PM18 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of PM18 and the BU101 battery. From there.6. DC Input DC Filter DCDUE DC to Heaters and Service Light 0 VDC DC Bus −48 VDC Figure 251: MBO1E/MBO2E Power Supply System The DC supply is connected to the BOMUE via the DCDUE.4 Outdoor Cabinets The PM18SR contains the modules that: Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. The MBO1E/MBOEE are grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left lower side of the MBO1E. separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment. A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment. 4. etc. pylon lightning. DC power is then passed to the DC In filter located at the bottom of the MBO1EDC compartment. etc.15) for a detailed description of the PM18s. The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1E and MBO2E.32) . DC mains power is applied to the DC In clamps located in the DCDUE at the lower side of the MBO1E compartment.6. The DCDUE provides DC distribution via four DC circuit breakers. The sense data is passed to the controller. The system control functions are performed by the OMU. 490 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. three PM18s are used in the MBO2E. pylon lightning. The operation of the PM18s is controlled by the PM18 controller Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Two PM18s are used in the MBO1E. which is part of the SUMA. The DC supply produced in the PM18 power supply subrack and is connected to the BOMUE. Refer to PM18 (Section 12.15) and BU101 (Section 12. The switched outputs are used for: BTS compartments Service Light HEATDCs and optional air conditioning.

For a detailed description of the DCUC. refer to LPFC (Section 12. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. The LPFC provides overvoltage lightning protection for the AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detailed description of the LPFC. Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. From there. AC Input LPFC ACUC AC to Heater and AC Power Sockets STASR PM12/2 PM12/1 ADAM2 0 VDC −48 VDC DC Bus OMU BATS or External Batteries RIBAT Figure 252: CBO AC Variant Power Supply System The STASR contains the modules that: Convert the AC input to 0/-48 VDC.14) for a detailed description of the PM12s. The sense data is passed to the OMU.7 CBO 4. The system control functions are performed by the OMU. Refer to ADAM2 (Section 12.7.14 491 / 914 .10) . The AC input is 230 VAC 1ø.22) and BATS (Section 12. refer to DCUC (Section 12.28) for detailed descriptions of ADAM2 and the BATS battery. which is part of the SUMA. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.1 CBO AC Variant The CBO power supply system is completely integrated in the BTS. The following figure shows the power supply system for the CBO.6.34) . The CBO is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 socket fitted to the right upper side of the cables entry. separate ground straps are used to ground all equipment modules. For a detailed description of the ACUC.6. AC mains power is applied to the LPFC located above the cables entry compartment. refer to ACUC (Section 12. The ACUC provides AC distribution via two AC circuit breakers. The switched outputs from the ACUC are used for: Two PM12s in combination with ADAM2 HEAT3 AC power socket.2) ). Two PM12s are used in the CBO. The DC supply produced in the PM12 is connected to the DCUC via ADAM2. AC power is then passed to the ACUC located above the LPFC.

14 . DC mains power is applied to the DC In filter located above the cables entry compartment. refer to DCDU (Section 12. DC power is then passed to the DCDU located at the top of the CBO DC compartment. The DCDU provides DC distribution via five DC circuit breakers.2 CBO DC Variant The CBO DC variant DC power supply distribution differs from that of CBO AC variant. For a detailed description of the DCDU.31) .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.6. The switched outputs from the DCDU are used for: BTS compartments Optional equipments Heater HEAT4 Heat exchanger HEX5. From there.7. DC Input DC Filter DCDU DC to Heater and Heat Exchanger 0 VDC DC Bus −48 VDC Figure 253: CBO DC Variant Power Supply System 492 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The CBO DC variant is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1DC. separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment. The following figure shows the power supply distribution for CBO DC variant.

8. When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C. If the temperature is below -20 C when the 9100 BTS is first switched on. there is no AC supply to the AC/DC converters.8. the HEATDC is powered in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0 C.8. When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C. When switched on at minus temperature. When the HEAT2 raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20 C. 4. CODI. The HEATDC prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0 C.3 CBO DC For the CBO DC variant with the DCUC. The HEAT4 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0 C. the SUM switches on the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational. 4. both the HEAT3 and AC/DC are powered in time in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0 C.5 MBODC/MBOxEDC With the DCMU/DCDUE.8 Temperature Control The following sections describe how the temperature is controlled in the different cabinets. The HEAT3 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0 C.4 MBO1T As MBO1T is designed to be used in tropical areas. This means that the 0/ -48 VDC supply is not available and the 9100 BTS cannot operate. MBOxE The ACSB/ACSU/ACMU contain a relay which is controlled by a thermostat. When switched on at minus temperature.6.2 CBO For the CBO AC variant with the ACUC.6. a permanent connection is maintained up to -33 C. CODE.8.6.1 COMI.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.14 493 / 914 . COME. only cooling facilities are implemented by the HEX4 unit. AC power is available only on the HEAT2 to warm-up the cabinet. The HEAT2 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0 C. 4. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6. 4. the SUM switches on the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational. When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C.6. the SUM switches on the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational. When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C. MBO. 4. a permanent connection is maintained up to -33 C. a permanent connection is maintained up to -33 C. When switched on at minus temperature. When the temperature is above -20 C.8. the AC supply is connected to the AC/DC converters.6. the power relay is activated and the AC supplies are passed to the AC/DC converters. the SUM switches on the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational. both the HEAT4 and DC are powered in time in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0 C.

Additional external coarse protection is unnecessary. see the following table. for example. External Cable AC Mains Supply Lightning Protection Two types of lightning protectors can be fitted: Medium stage protectors (DIN VDE 0675-6. building tops and open fields. L3 and N Coarse protectors (DIN VDE 0675-6. Abis Interface Medium-stage spark gap overvoltage protection is provided by the Krone strip on the COAR or OUTC. Class C) are installed in the ACSB for supply lines L1. L2. Combined medium stage and fine overvoltage protection is provided by the COAR or OUTC surge protectors. refer to Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors (Section 14) .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. Three External Alarms Antenna Connectors Table 40: 9100 BTS Outdoor Lightning Protection 494 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Class B) are installed externally if the cabinet is sited in exposed locations.7 Outdoor Cabinet Lightning Protection Protection against the effects of lightning strikes is provided for external cables. For detailed information on the lightning protectors.14 . Quarter wave (λ/4) lightning protectors are fitted at the bottom of BTS compartment 1 and 2. Such locations are.

4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. It connects to the XI17 . Different variants exist for some of the cables and cable sets.1. The cable connects to the Alarms Side Comp connector on the COAR. For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables. It interconnects the BTS compartment 1 STASR backplanes and the BTSRI.24 connector on the COAR.8. CA-ASMC is an AC power cable.8 Outdoor Cabinet Cables and Cable Sets This section lists the cables and cable sets for all 9100 BTS outdoor configurations. door switch and HEX2 alarms. 4.14 495 / 914 . flood detector and HEX2. CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. CA-ACSC gathers alarms from the side compartment. CA-APC2 gathers BTS compartment 1 alarms from the door switch. For the variants used in a specific cabinet.1 COMI/COME/COEP Internal Cables COME Mnemonic BTSRIOUT Description BTSRIOUT is a flat cable which is permanently attached to a BTSRI board. refer to its accompanying cable list.1 Internal Cables The 9100 BTS outdoor internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable sets listed in Tables COMI/COME/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables (41) to CPT2 Outdoor Internal Cables (43) . It connects 230 VAC from the ACSB to the ACIB.8. see Cable Descriptions (Section 16) . Table 9100 BTS Outdoor Cable Sets (46) lists and describes the cables that comprise the cable sets. This consists of the key switch. smoke detector. Part Number 3BK 08126 COMI X COEP - CA-ACSC 3BK 08078 X - CA-ADCO 3BK 07953 X - CA-APC2 3BK 08215 X - CA-ASMC 3BK 08807 X - 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 4.

CS08 is the customer equipment cable set. BTS compartment 2 is part of COME.4 Outdoor Cabinets COME Mnemonic CA-ONCCx Description CA-ONCCx carries: 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar TX/RX from the Connection Area Abis 1/2 Interfaces from the SUM. This includes the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. This suppresses the side compartment HEX2 alarm. CA-OSCP2 short circuits the Alarms BTS2 connector on the COAR. CS03 is a TRE cable set. CS02 is an AN cable set. This suppresses the BTS compartment 2 HEX2 and door switch alarms. clock. control and alarm signals. 3BK 08095 X Part Number COMI X COEP - CA-OSCP2 3BK 08096 X - CS02 3BK 07598 X X CS03 3BK 07599 X X CS07 3BK 07964 X X CS08 3BK 08036 X - CS09 3BK 08037 X - 496 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. HEX2 and XIOB Signal connections to the SUM. CS07 is an ANT cable set. CS09 is a BTS compartment 1 basic cable set. It connects an ANY to another ANY or to an ANX/ANC. It connects a TRE to an ANX/ANC or an ANY. CA-OSCP1 CA-OSCP1 short circuits the HEX2 P1 connector of CA-ACSC. It connects a BTS to the microwave equipment and other customer equipment. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs. The cable connects to the customer equipment in BTS compartment 1.14 . It connects an ANX/ANC to two antenna cabinet connectors. The side compartment HEX2 is only fitted in the COME when there are more than six TREs.

The side compartment HEX2 is only fitted in the COME when there are more than six TREs. It provides the 0/ -48 VDC supply for the side compartment HEX2.14 497 / 914 . It connects a TRE to ANY. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs and HEX2 Signal connections between the STASRs.4 Outdoor Cabinets COME Mnemonic CS10 Description CS10 is an optional cable set. CS11 is the BTS compartment 2 basic cable set. CS12 CS12 is a TRE cable set. 3BK 08041 X Part Number 3BK 08042 COMI COEP X CS11 3BK 08040 - X Table 41: COMI/COME/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs and HEX2 Signal connections between the STASRs. 3BK 07599 X X Part Number 3BK 25156 CODI X COEP - BTSRIOUT 3BK 08126 X - CA-ADCO 3BK 07953 X - CA-ONCCx - X - CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. CS08 is the customer equipment cable set. It connects a TRE to an ANX/ANC or an ANY. It includes a cable for the battery temperature sensor.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. The cable connects to the customer equipment in BTS compartment 1.2 CODI/CODE/COEP Internal Cables CODE Mnemonic BATCO Description BATCO connects the battery via breakers to the interconnection area. CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. BTSRIOUT is a flat cable which is permanently attached to a BTSRI board. It connects 3BK 07964 an ANX/ANC to two antenna cabinet connectors. It connects a BTS to the microwave equipment and other customer equipment. CA-ONCCx carries: 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar TX/RX from the Connection Area Abis 1/2 Interfaces from the SUM. It interconnects the BTS compartment 1 STASR backplanes and the BTSRI. It connects to the XI17 . 3BK 08036 X X CS08 X - CS11 3BK 08040 - X 498 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. CS11 is the BTS compartment 2 basic cable set.14 .8.24 connector on the COAR. CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set.

control and alarm signals. HEX2 and XIOB Signal connections to the SUM. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the HEX2 Signal connections to the SUM. CS16 CS16 is a side compartment basic cable set. Table 42: CODI/CODE/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables 3BK 08775 X Part Number 3BK 08719 CODI X COEP - 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. clock.4 Outdoor Cabinets CODE Mnemonic CS15 Description CS15 is a BTS compartment 1 basic cable set. This includes control and alarm signals. This includes the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces.14 499 / 914 .

CS07 is an ANT cable set.8. This includes control and alarm signals. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.3 CPT2 Internal Cables Mnemonic BATCO Version AA Description BATCO AA connects the battery via breakers to the interconnection area. This includes the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the HEX2 Signal connections to the SUM. It connects an ANC to two antenna cabinet connectors.1. It includes a cable for the battery temperature sensor. CS16 CS16 is a side compartment basic cable set.14 . clock. CS15 is a BTS compartment 1 basic cable set. It connects a TRE to an ANC or an ANY. CS03 is a TRE cable set. control and alarm signals. Table 43: CPT2 Outdoor Internal Cables 3BK 08775 Part Number 3BK 25156 CS03 3BK 07599 CS07 3BK 07964 CS15 3BK 08719 500 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. HEX2 and OUTC Signal connections to the SUM.

CM02E CM02E is an MBOEE compartment basic cable set. control and alarm signals Remote inventory data. CMO1E CM01E is an MBO1E basic cable set.8. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs.14 501 / 914 . CM02 CM02 is an MBOE compartment basic cable set. control and alarm signals Remote inventory data. clock. HEX4 and OUTC Signal connections to the SUM.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. This includes the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. It includes a cable for the battery temperature sensor. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs. clock. It contains cables for: DC power connections and alarms to the HEX8/DAC8 DC power connections to the STASRs Remote inventory data. CM01 is an MBO1 basic cable set. It contains cables for: DC power connections and alarms to the HEX3 DC power connections to the STASRs Remote inventory data. This includes the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. HEX9/DAC9 and OUTC Signal connections to the SUM. 3BK 27269 X 3BK 25819 X 3BK 27268 X X Part Number 3BK 25156 MBO1 X MBO2 X CM01 3BK 25818 X X 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC Internal Cables Mnemonic BATCO Version BA Description BATCO BA connects the battery via breakers to the interconnection area.1.

8. 3BK 26354 Part Number 3BK 26346 502 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. control and alarm signals Remote inventory data. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs. This includes the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. clock.4 Outdoor Cabinets Mnemonic CMO11* Description CM011 is an MBO1DC basic cable set. BATSC BATSC connects the battery to the ADAM board and the 0 V bolt. clock.5 CBO Internal Cables Mnemonic CBOA Description CBOA is an CBO basic cable set.1. HEX4 and OUTC Signal connections to the SUM. Part Number 3BK 26621 MBO1 X MBO2 X CMO1T** CMO1T is an MBO1T basic cable set. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs. clock. It connects a TRE to an ANC or an ANY. CS07 is an ANT cable set. control and alarm signals Remote inventory data. It contains cables for: DC power connections to the STASRs. HEX5 and OUTC Signal connections to the SUM. It connects an ANC to two antenna cabinet connectors. This includes the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. : Available only for MBODC : Available only for MBO1T 3BK 07599 X X CS07 3BK 07964 X X * ** Table 44: MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC Outdoor Internal Cables 4. This includes the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces. HEX4 and OUTC Signal connections to the SUM. control and alarm signals SENSP Remote inventory data. 3BK 27142 X - CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set.14 .

4 Outdoor Cabinets Mnemonic CS03 Description CS03 is a TRE cable set. Part Number 3BK 07599 CS26 3BK 26351 Table 45: CBO Outdoor Internal Cables 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It connects an ANC to two antenna cabinet connectors. CS26 is an ANT cable set. It connects a TRE to an ANC or an ANY.14 503 / 914 .

RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1 modules to OUTC. CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the battery breaker to battery interconnection area. CA-ADACM connects the -48 VDC from the battery to the ADAM2 board. CA-BSENS connects the battery temperature sensor to RIBAT or OUTC. Transfers alarms from the HEX3/ HEX4.14 . Carries AC and DC power supplies to the STASRs. smoke detector.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. and door switches to the OUTC. CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the battery to the battery breakers. CA-BSENS connects the battery temperature sensor to RIBAT or OUTC. CA-RIMO1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable. 3BK 25182 1 3BK 25822 1 Part Number 3BK 25141 Quantity 1 CA-BABRP 3BK 25140 1 CA-BRCM 3BK 25246 1 CA-BRCP 3BK 25245 1 CA-BSENS 3BK 08119 1 BATCO Version AB CA-CBRM 3BK 25868 1 CA-CBRP 3BK 25869 1 CA-BRCM 3BK 25246 1 CA-BRCP 3BK 25245 1 CA-BSENS 3BK 08119 1 BATSC CA-PDCP 3BK 25231 1 CA-ADACM 3BK 25248 1 CM01 BOMU 3BK 25672 1 504 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. service lights. CA-CBRM connects -48 VDC from the battery to the battery breaker. CA-PDCP connects the 0 VDC from the battery to the ground bolt. HEX3/ HEX4. It connects LPFM to a ground bolt. flood detector. XIOB. HEAT2. Bus bar Outdoor Multistandard Unit. CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. customer and microwave equipment. CA-BRCM connects -48 VDC from the battery breaker to the battery interconnection area.6 9100 BTS Outdoor Internal Cable Sets Cable Sets BATCO Version AA Mnemonic CA-BABRM Description CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from the battery to the battery breaker. CA-CBRP connects 0 VDC from the battery to the battery breakers.8. CA-BRCM connects -48 VDC from the battery breaker to the battery interconnection area.1. CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the battery breaker to battery interconnection area.

The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM. Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable. Power cable outdoor for upper subracks (MBO2). 3BK 27318 1 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 CM02 CA-PCOS 3BK 08809 AA 3BK 08809 BA 3BK 25820 2 CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for bottom subrack (MBO2). The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM. This suppresses the MBO2 HEX3 and door switch alarms. The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM. Part Number 3BK 25245 Quantity 1 CA-ABIS 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 CMO1T CA-RIMO1 3BK 25822 1 CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable.4 Outdoor Cabinets Cable Sets Mnemonic CA-BRCP Description CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the battery breaker to battery interconnection area. RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1 modules to OUTC. 1 CA-HOAP HEX outdoor alarm and power cable. CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM. The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM. 3BK 25182 1 CA-BRCP 3BK 25245 1 CA-ABIS 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 CA-OSCP4 3BK 272003 1 CM01E CA-RIC1 3BK 27319 1 CA-XBCBPS CA-XBCBPS carries alarm and Remote Inventory information from the PM18C to the OUTC.14 505 / 914 . 1 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It connects LPFM to a ground bolt. The CA-HOAP connects HEX3 and BOMU transferring DC power and alarms. The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM. The CA-OSCP4 short circuits the Alarms BTS2 connector on the OUTC. CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the battery breaker to battery interconnection area. Remote Inventory Multistandard Evolution Out cable. RIC1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1E modules to OUTC.

HEX3/ HEX4. CA-RIC2 transfers remote inventory data of MBO2E modules to OUTC. BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX3/ HEX4. flood detector. RXRC connects an ANY RX connector to an ANX/ANC or another ANY RX connector. 3BK 08809 BB 3BK 25820 3 CA-HOAP 1 CA-RIC2 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out Evolution cable. customer and microwave equipment. and door switches to the OUTC. XIOB. CA-RIMO2 transfers remote inventory data of MBO2 modules to OUTC. RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1DC modules to OUTC. ANOC provides a duplex connection between the ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector. TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to an ANY or ANX/ANC TX connector. smoke detector. HEX outdoor alarm and power cable. The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM. 3BK 25822 1 CA-SENSP CA-ABIS Temperature sensor plug.4 Outdoor Cabinets Cable Sets Mnemonic CA-RIMO2 Description Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable. HEATDC. The CA-HOAP connects HEX3 and BOMU transferring DC power and alarms. 3BK 26147 3BK 07922 1 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 CS02 RXRC 3BK 07920 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS03 RXRC 3BK 07920 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS07 ANOC 3BK 07965 2 506 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TXRC connects an ANY TX connector to an ANX/ANC or another ANY TX connector. 3BK 25672 1 CA-RIMO1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable.14 . 3BK 27320 1 CMO11 BOMU Bus bar Outdoor Multistandard Unit. BOBU carries DC power supplies to the STASRs. RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to an ANY or ANX/ANC RX connector. The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM. service lights. Part Number 3BK 25823 Quantity 1 CM02E CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for upper subracks (MBO2E).

CA-XBCBO carries alarm and Remote Inventory information from the ACRI to the COAR. CA-OSPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP to an STASR.HEX2 Power Cable 2 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP. CA-MLBP carries 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar.HEX2 Power Cable 3 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the HEX Power connector on the COAR. The cable connects to the COAR. CA-RFMW carries the TX/RX to the bottom plate of the BTS.4 Outdoor Cabinets Cable Sets CS08 Variant BA CS08 Variant CA Mnemonic CA-DFUX Description CA-DFUX carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces to the SUM. CA-RFMW carries the TX/RX to the bottom plate of the BTS. CA-MXBP carries 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar. The cable connects to the side compartment HEX2. CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the COAR and the SUM. The cable connects to the microwave equipment in BTS compartment 1. CA-GCMW is a cabinet ground cable.14 507 / 914 . Cable Assembly . It connects the microwave equipment to ground. The cable connects to the BTS compartment 1 HEX2. Cable Assembly . CA-GCMW is a cabinet ground cable. CA-XIOPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP to the XIOB. CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the COAR to the SUM. The cable connects to the microwave equipment in BTS compartment 1. CA-2MMC2 carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces to the SUM. H2PC1 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP. Part Number 3BK 08503 Quantity 1 CA-GCMW 3BK 07934 1 CA-MXBP 3BK 08886 1 CA-RFMW 3BK 07931 1 CS08 Variant BB CA-2MMC2 3BK 08289 1 CA-GCMW 3BK 07934 1 CA-MLBP 3BK 08887 1 CA-RFMW 3BK 07931 1 CS09 CA-ABIS 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 CA-H2PC1 3BK 08077 1 CA-OSPC 3BK 08079 2 CA-XBCBO 3BK 08205 1 CA-XIOPC 3BK 08087 1 CS10 CA-H2PC2 3BK 08092 1 CA-H2PC3 3BK 08093 1 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It connects the microwave equipment to ground.

The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the COAR and the SUM. CA-H2PC1 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP.Alarm Cable BTS2 gathers alarms from BTS compartment 2. Part Number 3BK 08086 Quantity 1 CA-ACB2 3BK 08091 1 CA-H2PC1 3BK 08077 1 CA-OSPC 3BK 08079 1 of AA. The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to an ANY connector. This consists of the door switch and HEX2 alarms. Cable Assembly .Power Cable Outdoor Subrack carries 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU to the STASR. The cable connects to the Alarms BTS2 connector on the COAR. flood detector. 2 of AB 1 CS11 Variant BA CA12 3BK 08086 CA-OHAC 3BK 08810 1 CA-PCOS Cable Assembly . BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX2. XIOB. The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to an ANY connector. customer and microwave equipment. The cable connects to the BTS compartment 2 HEX2. HEX2. The cable connects to the BTS compartment 2 HEX2. HEAT. service lights. BOBU carries AC and DC power supplies to the STASRs.14 . smoke detector. 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 508 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. CA12 is a flat cable that interconnects the BTS compartment 2 STASR backplanes and the BTSRIOUT. CA-OHAC carries: 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU Alarms to the BOBU.4 Outdoor Cabinets Cable Sets CS11 Variant AA Mnemonic CA12 Description Cable Assembly 12 is a flat cable that interconnects the BTS compartment 2 STASR backplanes and the BTSRIOUT. and door switches to the COAR. CA-OSPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP to an STASR. 3BK 08809 3 CS12 RXRC 3BK 07920 2 TXRC 3BK 07919 1 CS15 Variant CA BOBU 3BK 08742 1 CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the COAR to the SUM.

HEAT. 3BK 08741 1 CA-Ground1 CA-Ground1 is a cabinet ground cable.14 509 / 914 . flood detector. service lights. CA-OHAC carries: 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU Alarms to the BOBU. The cable connects to the BTS compartment 1 (CPT2) HEX2. and door switches to the OUTC. customer and microwave equipment. service lights. It connects the ACSB to a ground bolt.4 Outdoor Cabinets Cable Sets Mnemonic CA-OHAC Description CA-OHAC carries: 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU Alarms to the BOBU. BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX2. It connects between two ground bolts. and ASCB/ACSU. smoke detector. 3BK 25538 1 CA-OHAC 3BK 08810 1 CS16 Variant AA BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to the HEX2. The cable connects to the BTS compartment 1 HEX2. It interconnects the BTS compartment 1 STASR backplanes and the OUTC. key and door switch to the COAR. 3BK 08118 1 3BK 08117 1 3BK 08810 1 3BK 08205 1 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Part Number 3BK 08810 Quantity 1 CS15 Variant DA BOBU BOBU carries AC and DC power supplies to the STASRs. The cable connects to the BTS compartment 1 HEX2. CA-Ground2 CA-Ground2 is a cabinet ground cable. BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2. HEAT. CA-XBCBO CA-XBCBO carries alarm and Remote Inventory information from the BCU2 to the COAR. 3BK 08742 1 CA-RICPT2 The CA-RICPT2 is a flat cable which is permanently attached to the OUTC board. CA-OHAC CA-OHAC carries: 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU Alarms to the BOBU. XIOB. HEX2.

key and door switch to the COAR. It connects the LPFU grounding bolt to the bottom plate. 3BK 25232 1 CA-PDCP 3BK 25231 1 CA-ADACM 3BK 25248 1 CA-ADACP 3BK 25247 1 CS16 Variant DA BOSU 3BK 08741 1 CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. service lights. key and door switch to the OUTC.14 . CA-ADACP carries 0 VDC from ADAM to the battery interconnection area. HEAT. CA-OHAC carries: 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU Alarms to the BOBU. CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2. 3BK 25182 1 CA-RICPT1 3BK 25537 1 CA-OHAC 3BK 08810 1 510 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. CA-ADACM carries -48 VDC from ADAM to the battery interconnection area. service lights. CA-PDCP carries 0 VDC from ADAM to the side wall interconnection area.4 Outdoor Cabinets Cable Sets CS16 Variant CA Mnemonic BOSU Description BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to the HEX2. and ACSB/ACSU. It connects the LPFU grounding bolt to the bottom plate. 3BK 25178 1 CA-Ground 3BK 25182 1 CA-OHAC 3BK 08810 1 CA-PDCM CA-PDCM carries -48 VDC from ADAM to the side wall interconnection area. Part Number 3BK 08741 Quantity 1 CA-CSTR CA-CSTR connects the COAR with RIBAT 1. It interconnects the side compartment STASR backplanes and the OUTC. BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2. and ACSU. CA-OHAC carries: 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU Alarms to the BOBU The cable connects to the BTS compartment 1 HEX2. The cable connects to the BTS compartment 1 HEX2. RIBAT 2 and STASR7. HEAT. The CA-RICPT1 is a flat cable which is permanently attached to the OUTC board. BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to the HEX2.

4 Outdoor Cabinets Cable Sets Mnemonic CA-PDCM Description CA-PDCM carries -48 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2 to the side wall interconnection area.14 511 / 914 . Part Number 3BK 25232 Quantity 1 CA-PDCP 3BK 25231 1 CA-ADACM 3BK 25248 1 CA-ADACP 3BK 25247 1 CA-ABIS 3BK 07922 1 CA-BTSCA 3BK 07923 1 CS25 ANCO 3BK26151 2 CS26 ANLC 3BK 26349 2 CS27 ANCO 3BK26151 2 Table 46: 9100 BTS Outdoor Cable Sets 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. ANCO provides a duplex connection between the ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector. The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals between the OUTC and the SUMA. ANCO provides a duplex connection between the ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector. CA-ADACM carries -48 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2 to the battery interconnection area. ANLC provides a duplex connection between the ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector. CA-PDCP carries 0 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2 to the side wall interconnection area. The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from the OUTC to the SUMA. CA-ADACP carries 0 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2 to the battery interconnection area.

because COEP is used to extend COMI to COME and CODI to CODE. It connects a G2 BTS to the 9100 BTS.2 External Cables The 9100 BTS outdoor external cables consist of the discrete cables listed in the following table. HCF1/ 2.8. yellow/green power cable. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. a multicoaxial.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables. 1AC 00465 0003 OCC23 OCC23 is a clock synchronization cable. CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminal to the BTS Terminal connector on the SUM. power cable. shielded. 120 PCM cable. The cable used is L907. 3BK 08303 OCC33 3BK 08304 Table 47: 9100 BTS Outdoor External Cables List 512 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It connects to the M8 ground 3BK 08031 bolt on the side compartment floor. Antenna jumpers. The cable used is a five-core. 75 PCM cable. and to the customer’s ground point. 6 mm sq. It connects a 9100 BTS to another 9100 BTS. The cable used is Flex3. 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length. an 8-pair. 2 Mbit/s. OCC33 is a clock synchronization cable.14 . There are no COEP external cables. 2 x 7/ 16 straight male connectors. Mnemonic AC Supply Description This cable can be made onsite to the desired length. The cable used is a 50 mm sq. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. They belong to COME/COMI and CODE/CODI. 2 Mbit/s. This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. Part Number 1AC 00468 0003 Antenna Jumper 3BK 05360 1AC 01328 0004 1AC 00110 0011 3BK 07951 CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable.

The cabling descriptions are grouped by outdoor cabinet types.9. DC Power and Alarm Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Descriptions are supported by diagrams. CPT2.1 Outdoor Cabinet DC Power and Alarm Cabling The DC power and alarm cabling for the COME/COMI/CODE/CODI.1 COME/COMI/CODE/CODI There are two variants of cable sets used to distribute DC power and alarms within the 9100 BTS outdoor cabinets: One variant is used for COME/COMI AXXX One variant is used for COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI.1. MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC. Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment (COME only) XIOB CA−XIOPC X1 X6 X7 DCDP X12−X14 X8 X9/X10 CA−OSPC CA−OSPC To STASRs (COME only) HEX2 (optional) CA−ADCO CA−H2PC3 Power CA−ACSC Alarm HEX Power Alarms Side Comp HEX Power CA−H2PC2 (COME only) To STASRs CA−H2PC1 AB (COME only) Alarms BTS2 CA−ACB2 for COME CA−OSCP2 for COMI COAR Door Switch Key Switch Alarms BTS1 CA−H2PC1 AA HEX2 HEX2 (COME only) Power CA−APC2 Alarm Door Switch Smoke Detector Flood Detector Power Alarm Door Switch Figure 254: COME/COMI AXXX. 4. as well as data and control cabling.9 Outdoor Cabinet Cabling The following sections describe the various types of cabling used in outdoor cabinets.9. This includes DC power and alarm cabling. 4.14 513 / 914 . and CBO cabinets are described separately.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms within the COME/COMI AXXX.

this is not shown in the following figure. DC Power and Alarm Cabling 514 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 . although the bus bars carry AC power.4 Outdoor Cabinets The following figure shows the cables and bus bars that carry DC power and alarms within the COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI. Side Compartment GND 0 VDC −48 VDC Optional Power Supplies (CODE only) XIOB BTS Compartment 1 Optional Power Supplies (COME only) GND 0 VDC −48 VDC BTS Compartment 2 (CODE/COME only) BOSU BOBU CA−ADCO STASR 7 (CODE only) Alarms Side Comp Alarms BTS STASR 1 STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 STASR 6 HEX2 (optional) COAR HEX2 HEX2 (CODE/ COME only) Power Power Power Alarm Alarm Alarm Door Switch Door Switch Key Switch Door Switch Smoke Detector Flood Detector Figure 255: COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI. Note that.

although the bus bars carry AC power. Side Compartment GND 0 VDC −48 VDC BTS Compartment 1 GND 0 VDC −48 VDC BOSU BOBU STASR 2 CA−ADCO STASR 3 Alarms BTS Alarms Side Comp STASR 4 STASR 5 STASR 6 HEX2 (optional) XIOB Function HEX2 OUTC Power Power Alarm Alarm Door Switch Key Switch Door Switch Smoke Detector Flood Detector Figure 256: CPT2 DC Power and Alarm Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.9.1. this is not shown in the figure. Note that.14 515 / 914 .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.2 CPT2 The following figure shows the cables and bus bars that carry DC power and alarms within the CPT2.

14 .3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC The following figures show the cables and bus bars that carry DC power and alarms within the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E and MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E.1. GND 0 VDC −48 VDC Door Switch Key Switch Smoke Detector Water Detector HEX4 STASR 7 STASR 3 STASR 2 STASR 1 BOMU CA−ADCO X901 Alarms X910 XIOB Function OUTC Figure 257: MBO1/MBO1DC DC Power and Alarm Cabling GND 0 VDC −48 VDC Door Switch HEX4 STASR 7 STASR 3 STASR 2 STASR 1 BOMUT CA−ADCO X901 Alarms X910 XIOB Function OUTC Figure 258: MBO1T DC Power and Alarm Cabling 516 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.9.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.

4 MBO1E/MBO1EDC/MBO2E/MBO2EDC The following figures show the cables and bus bars that carry DC power and alarms within the MBO1E/MBO1EDC and MBO2E/MBO2EDC.14 517 / 914 .9.1. GND 0 VDC −48 VDC Door Switch Key Switch Smoke Detector Water Detector HEX9 STASR 3 STASR 2 STASR 1 BOMUE CA−ADCO X901 Alarms X910 XIOB Function OUTC Figure 260: MBO1E/MBO1EDC Power and Alarm Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets GND 0 VDC −48 VDC Door Switch Key Switch Smoke Detector Water Detector HEX4 STASR 7 STASR 3 STASR 2 STASR 1 Door Switch HEX3 STASR 0 (not used) STASR 6 STASR 5 BOMU STASR 4 CA−ADCO X901 Alarms X910 XIOB Function OUTC MBO1 MBOE Figure 259: MBO2/MBO2DC DC Power and Alarm Cabling 4.

4 Outdoor Cabinets GND 0 VDC −48 VDC Door Switch Key Switch Smoke Detector Water Detector HEX9 Door Switch HEX8 STASR 3 STASR 2 STASR 1 STASR 6 STASR 5 BOMUE STASR 4 CA−ADCO X901 Alarms X910 XIOB Function OUTC MBO1E MBOEE Figure 261: MBO2E/MBO2EDC Power and Alarm Cabling 518 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

1. although the bus bars carry AC power. GND 0 VDC −48 VDC HEAT4 HEX5 Optional Equipment STASR 2 STASR 1 DCDU CA−ADCO X901 Alarms X910 XIOB Function OUTC CBO Figure 263: CBO DC Power and Alarm Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.9. GND 0 VDC −48 VDC HEX5 Optional Equipment STASR 2 STASR 1 DCUC CA−ADCO X901 Alarms X910 XIOB Function OUTC CBO Figure 262: CBO DC Power and Alarm Cabling CBO DC Variant The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms within the CBO AC variant. this is not shown in the figure.14 519 / 914 .4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. Note that.5 CBO CBO AC Variant The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms within the CBO AC variant.

9.2. COEP STASR5 Backplane COAR OCC23/OCC33 CA−ABIS STASR2 Backplane STASR4 Backplane SUM STASR1 Backplane STASR3 Backplane BTSRIOUT CA12 BTSRI Figure 264: COME/COMI Data and Control Cabling 520 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. 4.14 .2 Outdoor Cabinet Data and Control Cabling The following sections described the data and control cabling used in the different types of outdoor cabinets.1 COME/COMI The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data and control cables for the COME/COMI.9.

14 521 / 914 .2 CODE/CODI The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data and control cables for the CODE/CODI.9. STASR 7 Backplane RIBAT 1 RIBAT 2 COEP STASR 3 Backplane STASR 6 Backplane COAR OCC23/OCC33 CA−ABIS STASR 2 Backplane STASR 5 Backplane SUMA STASR 4 Backplane STASR 1 Backplane BTSRIOUT CA12 BTSRI Figure 265: CODE/CODI Data and Control Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.2.

3 CPT2 The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data and control cables for the CPT2.14 .2.9. STASR 3 Backplane STASR 6 Backplane Option: OCC23/OCC33 CA−ABIS CA−BTSCA STASR 2 Backplane STASR 5 Backplane OUTC SUMA STASR 4 Backplane CA−RICPT1 CA−RICPT2 Figure 266: CPT2 Data and Control Cabling 522 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.

STASR 7 Backplane Option: OCC23/OCC33 STASR 3 Backplane CA−ABIS STASR 2 Backplane CA−BTSCA SUMA OUTC STASR 1 Backplane CA−RIMO1 Figure 267: MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T Data and Control Cabling STASR 7 Backplane STASR 0 Backplane (not equipped) Option: OCC23/OCC33 STASR 3 Backplane STASR 6 Backplane CA−ABIS STASR 2 Backplane CA−BTSCA STASR 5 Backplane SUMA OUTC STASR 1 Backplane STASR 4 Backplane CA−RIMO1 CA−RIMO2 MBO1 MBOE Figure 268: MBO2/MBO2DC Data and Control Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.9.14 523 / 914 .4 MBO1/MBO2 The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the data and control cables for the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC.2.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4. The STASR7 is equipped only in MBO1 and MBO2.

9.14 . Option: OCC23/OCC33 XBCBPS PM18SR PM18C STASR 3 Backplane CA−ABIS STASR 2 Backplane CA−BTSCA SUMA OUTC STASR 1 Backplane CA−RIC1 Figure 269: MBO1E Data and Control Cabling Option: OCC23/OCC33 XBCBPS PM18SR PM18C STASR 3 Backplane STASR 6 Backplane CA−ABIS STASR 2 Backplane CA−BTSCA OUTC SUMA STASR 5 Backplane STASR 1 Backplane STASR 4 Backplane CA−RIC1 CA−RIC2 MBO1E MBOEE Figure 270: MBO2E Data and Control Cabling 524 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5 MBO1E/MBO2E The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the data and control cables for the MBO1E/MBO1EDC/MMBO2E/MBO2EDC. The PM18SR is equipped only in MBO1E and MBO2E AC variants.2.4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.

4 Outdoor Cabinets 4.2. Option: OCC23/OCC33 STASR 2 Backplane OUTC CA−ABIS CA−BTSCA STASR 1 Backplane SUMA CA−RIBCO Figure 271: CBO Data and Control Cabling 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 CBO The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data and control cables for the CBO.9.14 525 / 914 .

4 Outdoor Cabinets 526 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

14 527 / 914 .5 External Battery Cabinets 5 External Battery Cabinets This section describes the mechanical design of battery cabinets and cabling between the battery cabinets and the BTS. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

each battery unit is connected with separate DC connectors and can be switched on/off by a separate circuit switch (block diagram 1).14 . Up to three battery units (48 V) can be installed inside the cabinet. it is not allowed to use a BTS configuration with an internal battery in parallel.5 External Battery Cabinets 5. In this case. DC output connectors of BTS1 are used. In this case. The following figures show block diagrams illustrating this principle. DC battery voltage can be switched on/off by using the common circuit switch. as required.1 External Indoor Battery Cabinet The external indoor battery cabinet is used to house a large backup battery. If battery units are connected to different BTSs. Block Diagram 3x1 Battery Units 528 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Battery units can also be connected in parallel. BTS1 DC Output Connectors BTS2 BTS3 XBCB 3 2 1 Breaker F3 Temperature Sensor − + 12 V Breaker F2 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V RIBAT 3 Battery Unit 3 − + 12 V Breaker F1 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V RIBAT 2 Battery Unit 2 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V RIBAT 1 Battery Unit 1 Figure 272: External Indoor Battery Cabinet.

Block Diagram 1x2 + 1x1 Battery Units DC Output Connectors BTS2 BTS1 BTS3 XBCB 3 2 1 Common Breaker F4 Breaker F3 Temperature Sensor − + 12 V Breaker F2 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + RIBAT 3 12 V Battery Unit 3 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V − + RIBAT 2 12 V Battery Unit 2 Breaker F1 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V − + RIBAT 1 12 V Battery Unit 1 Figure 274: External Indoor Battery Cabinet.5 External Battery Cabinets BTS1 DC Output Connectors BTS2 BTS3 XBCB 3 2 1 Common Breaker F4 Breaker F3 Temperature Sensor − + 12 V Breaker F2 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V RIBAT 3 Battery Unit 3 − + 12 V Breaker F1 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V RIBAT 2 Battery Unit 2 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V RIBAT 1 Battery Unit 1 Figure 273: External Indoor Battery Cabinet. Block Diagram 1x3 Battery Units 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 529 / 914 .

Battery units can also be connected in parallel with a common circuit switch (connection area at the top) and a common connector for one BTS.1 Mechanical Design The external indoor battery is built by using the housing of the MBI3 cabinet (see MBI Cabinet Access and Features (Section 3.3.3) ).14 . Battery units can be connected to separate circuit switches (placed at the left side of each unit) and separate connectors (placed at the connection area at the top) for different BTSs.1. Each unit consists of four separate battery blocks (12 V) connected in line. Adjustable brackets are at both sides of each shelf for positioning of the battery unit. The following figure shows that the battery units are mounted in three shelves.5 External Battery Cabinets 5. Common Circuit Switch DC Output Connectors (to BTS) XBCB Connectors for RIBAT Cable Circuit Switch for one Battery Unit Different types of Battery Units just shown for demonstration (cabinet must be equipped with identical batteries) Circuit Switch for one Battery Unit Cover Plate Figure 275: External Indoor Battery Cabinet 530 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. For environmental conditions and electromagnetic compatibility. one unit per shelf. The distance between battery blocks is maintained by means of spacers supplied with the battery. Battery units are covered with a small cover plate to secure the batteries. see Environment (Section 17) .

The output from the sensor is used by the SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating. corresponding RIBAT boards are also connected together. producing a common result of monitoring. RIBAT boards are powered by a BTS via RIBAT cable(s). which are placed behind each battery unit at the rear side of the shelves.29) ) are connected with the XBCB connectors placed at the connection area on the top.14 531 / 914 . First this sensor information is collected and stored in RIBAT boards. RIBAT boards (see RIBAT (Section 12. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. which monitors the battery temperature. RIBAT and DC battery cables are connected to the BTS(s) passing through the battery cabinet on the top.5 External Battery Cabinets One battery terminal of each unit is connected with a temperature sensor. If battery units are connected in parallel.

This type is also used in indoor and outdoor BTSs and external outdoor battery cabinets.1. 3BK 25349 AAAA. To BUS Bar via Circuit Breaker To BUS Bar Temperature Sensor Cable (to RIBAT) Battery Battery Battery Battery Front View Jumper Top View Figure 276: External Indoor Battery Unit 5. including charging.2 External Battery The battery type used in the external indoor battery cabinet is BU101. 3BK 25259 AAAA. 3BK 25258 AAAA.1. 532 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.26) provides a detailed description. Ground Cable for external Battery CA-RIBEB.5 External Battery Cabinets 5. Power Cable external Battery 0 V CA-PCEBM. as shown in the following figure. Power Cable external Battery -48 V CA-GND. discharging and storage parameters. BU101 (Section 12.14 . 3BK 25260 AAAA. RIBAT Cable for external indoor Battery. Battery blocks of one unit are installed in line (contrary to the installation in an MBO cabinet).3 Battery Cabinet External Cabling The following cables are used for connecting an external battery cabinet indoor with a BTS and ground: CA-PCEBP.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5 External Battery Cabinets For a description of the mechanical design of the cables.14 533 / 914 . refer to External Cables (Section 16.2) .

Up to three battery units (48 V) can be installed inside the cabinet. Common Circuit Switch +VE BUS Bar BTS −VE BUS Bar Terminal Block Single Pole Circuit Switch − + 12 V Single Pole Circuit Switch − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V Battery Unit 3 − + 12 V Single Pole Circuit Switch − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V Battery Unit 2 − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V − + 12 V Battery Unit 1 Figure 277: External Outdoor Battery Cabinet. Block Diagram 534 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5 External Battery Cabinets 5. as required. All battery units are connected in parallel via two bus bars. Connection to the BTS is made via terminal blocks.14 . The following figure shows a block diagram illustrating the principle. it is not allowed to use a BTS configuration with an internal battery in parallel.2 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor The external battery cabinet outdoor battery cabinet is used to house a large backup battery. In this case. Each battery branch can be switched on/off separately by a single pole circuit switch. Complete DC battery voltage can be switched on/off by using the common circuit switch.

2. Four clearance long holes in the bottom (one in each edge) allow to fix the cabinet to the fundament using M12 anchor bolts.2.1 Mechanical Design 5. Both bus bars are connected with a double pole main circuit switch (placed at the DC breaker box) and then with terminal blocks placed at the bottom of the right side wall for further connection to BTS. An exhaust tube for each battery unit is connected to the roof or bottom plate. Cabinet with three battery units.2 Cabinet The external outdoor battery cabinet consists of a box-shaped frame bolted to a plinth. the minus line is connected to a bus bar.5 External Battery Cabinets 5. Each unit consists of four separate battery blocks (12 V) connected in line. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The following figures show the internal arrangement of the different variants of cabinets. Adjustable brackets are at both sides of each shelf to position the battery unit.1 Dimensions and Weight The external outdoor battery cabinet has the following dimensions and weight. The battery units are mounted in three shelves. From that circuit switch.2.14 535 / 914 . Table 49: Weight < 180 kg < 600 kg 5. The minus line of each battery unit is connected to a separate single-pole circuit switch placed at the DC breaker box above the battery floors in cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAA and at the AC/DC distribution box in cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAB.1. one unit per shelf. Cabinet Version Total Height Width Depth Table 48: Dimensions 3BK 26004 AAAA 1500 mm 700 mm 800 mm 3BK 26004 AAAB 1312 mm 680 mm 830 mm Cabinet pre-equipped with ACU but without batteries. The cabinet has foam-insulated walls and roof. The distance between battery blocks is maintained by means of spacers supplied with the battery.1. Plus lines of all battery units are connected to another bus bar. Other components are added to this basic construction.

This sensor information is collected and stored in RIBAT boards. RIBAT boards (see RIBAT (Section 12. which are placed above the DC breaker box. The output from the sensor is used by the SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus to prevent battery overheating.5 External Battery Cabinets Battery units are covered in front with a small cover plate to secure the batteries.29) ) are powered by the BTS via the CA-RIBEO cable. 536 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. RIBAT Plate Door Switch RIBAT Plate Smoke Detector Smoke Detector Door Switch DC Breaker Box Battery Units Battery Units A Transmission Blocks External Cable Entry A Airconditioner with integrated heater AC Box (behind frame) Front View Airconditioner with integrated heater AC/DC Box and Transmission Blocks (behind frame) External Cable Entry Front View Battery Unit Jumper Internal Cable Entry Internal Cable Entry Internal Cable Entry Battery Unit Jumper Exhausting Holes Top View A (Bottom Floor) Top View A (Bottom Floor) Figure 278: External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Variant 3BK 26004 AAAA (Left) and 3BK 26004 AAAB (Right) The main (+) battery terminal of each unit is connected to a temperature sensor.14 . which monitors the battery temperature.

For cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAA the cables are connected to the DC and alarm terminals (placed at the right inner side wall). Lightning protectors for AC leads (L. Above the air conditioner is a latch mechanism for keeping the door open during maintenance. opened by a key.2. For cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAB the cables are connected to the AC/DC power connection box (placed at the left inner side wall) or to the first RIBAT board.4 Cable Entry and Terminals AC.14 537 / 914 .3 Door Access to the external outdoor battery cabinet is via a door at the front. N) are placed at the right and wired to the earthing strip. 5. Internally. The door provides both an environmental seal and EMI protection when closed. if the door is open. This switch causes an alarm.1.1.5 External Battery Cabinets 5. the AC distribution box (placed at the left inner side wall). the left or right side wall. Figure 279 shows the AC distribution box for cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAA (left) and for cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAB (right). Residual Current Breaker ’Service Light/ Socket’ To Service Light/ Socket To Service Light/ Socket Air Conditioner/Heater Smoke Detector To Battery Strings Surge Protections To Airconditioner/ Heater Residual Current Breaker ’Service Light/Socket’ Battery Strings 1. The switch can be switched off during maintenance. RIBAT (CA-RIBEO) and alarm cables enter the cabinet via the cable entry plate at the bottom of back. It contains an 1-pole AC main switch (L). Restrainers allow fixing the door open at 90 and 135.3 DC Disconnector AC Distribution Box Surge Protections Switch ’Airconditioner/ Heater’ AC Main Switch AC Main Switch Switch ’Air conditioner/ Heater’ AC/DC Distribution Box AC Main Entry Bottom Plate Cable Entry Bottom Plate Figure 279: AC Distribution Box for Cabinet Version 3BK 26004 AAAA (Left) and 3BK 26004 AAAB (Right) 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. and a switch for the air conditioner and integrated heater. The door has a 3-point latching system with a Eurocylinder barrel located centrally. Mounted on the inside of the door is an air conditioner with an integrated heater. The door presses an electronic switch. cables are passed through cable glands at the ground floor.2. DC.2. a residual current breaker (RCB) for the service light and socket. or to the first RIBAT board.

3 (public transportation.2 (careful transportation.2. The minimum ambient temperature is -33 C. Shock and vibration according to class 4M3. earthquake according to Bellcore 3.2. Battery blocks of one unit are installed in line (contrary to the installation in the MBO cabinet).14 .26) provides a detailed description. cabinet with battery fitted).1. This type is also used in indoor and outdoor BTSs and internal indoor battery cabinet.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility Conducted emission on AC (air conditioner/heater) are according to EN 55022 class B. 5. Harmonic current emissions on AC lines are according to EN 61000-3-2.2 External Battery The battery type used in the external outdoor battery cabinet is BU101. Transportation conditions (packed) are either according to ETS 300 019-1-2 class 2. 5. as shown in the following figure.5 Environmental Conditions The external battery cabinet equipment housings provide the necessary environmental and safety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019 -1-4 class 4.5 External Battery Cabinets 5. Storage conditions are according to ETS 300 019-1-1 class 1.1. discharging and storage parameters. Transport and crane lifting with batteries is possible.1.2. BU101 (Section 12. exceptional ambient temperature is up to +50 C.2. To BUS Bar via Circuit Breaker To BUS Bar Temperature Sensor Cable (to RIBAT) Battery Battery Battery Battery Front View Jumper Exhausting Hoses Top View Figure 280: External Outdoor Battery Unit 538 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. cabinet without batteries fitted) or to ETS 300 019-1-2 class 2. for outdoor equipment. including charging.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The heater element is located in front of the fan intake area. Air Paths The internal warmer air is taken into the internal fan at the top of the unit and is forced through the evaporator coil and supplied back to the bottom of the cabinet. The air conditioner is fixed to the door via 2x5 M5 studs placed on the door. The heater element (1 kW) is located in the upper internal part of the air conditioner just before the internal fan intake.2 Heater The heater is used for a warm-up period from -33 C and to maintain temperature inside the cabinet above 10 C. Air Outlet Internal Air Path Top Rear Side Door Side External Air Path Air Inlet Door Side Rear Side Air Paths Side View Figure 281: Air Conditioner Unit. 5. The heater is integrated in the air conditioner.2. Both have a setting of 40 C for cut off and 25 C for resetting.5 External Battery Cabinets 5.3. two thermal switches are placed close to the heater elements. cooling capacity is 350 W. Supervision of the air conditioner produces one SUM alarm if the unit fails. The following figure shows the internal and external air paths.25 C at ambient temperature up to 45 C. The external cooler air is taken into the external fan positioned in the bottom of the unit and is forced through the coil and exhausted back to the external environment at the top.3.1 Air Conditioner The air conditioner is used to maintain the temperature of the battery in range of about 20 .2. The heater is controlled by a control board and is supplied by 230 VDC. For protection. solar load included.2. 5. The unit is supplied by 230 VAC. The alarm line is wired to signal terminals for further connection to BTS.14 539 / 914 .3 Auxiliary Equipment This section describes the auxiliary equipment installed in the external battery cabinets.

It is fitted in the left side wall of the cabinet close to cable entry and wired to the earthing strip. The alarm line is wired to signal terminals.3. 5. 5.4 Lightning Protection Lightning protection is equipped for AC lines only.2. an alarm is raised and sent to the BTS.3. Alarm and DC power lines are wired to signal terminals.5 External Battery Cabinets 5.14 .3 Overcurrent Protections The breakers for the AC lines are fitted in a box in the left side wall of the cabinet: Breaker 1x 1-pole 1x 2-pole Type C16 A MCB in L line 6A/ 30 mA RCB in L and N lines C10 A MVB in L line Description Incoming mains line Interior light and service socket Air conditioner and heater 1x 1-pole Table 50: Overcurrent Protection AC Lines The breakers for the DC lines are fitted in the distribution box at the top of the cabinet: Breaker 1x 2-pole Type 80 A MCB fast acting in 0 V and -48 V main DC lines 80 A MCB in -48 V line 2 A fuse or MCB in 12 V line Description Main DC Outgoing 3x 1-pole 1x 1-pole Separate battery branch Smoke detector Note: The 0 V lead (+ pole of battery) is connected to PE inside the BTS.2. In case of smoke inside the cabinet. The alarm can be cancelled manually if an open door is required for maintenance operations.3.2. If the door is opened. both protected by one common 6 A MCB. Table 51: Overcurrent Protection DC Lines 5.5 Door Switch The cabinet is equipped with an electromechanical door switch. The smoke detector is powered by + 12 VDC provided from the BTS. Note: The 0 V and -48 V main DC lines can also be switched off/on by a 2-pole circuit switch inside the BTS.2. an alarm is raised and sent to the BTS. etc.2. 540 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3.7 Service Light and AC Power Socket A service light and integral 230 VAC power socket are fitted at the top of the cabinet.3.6 Smoke Detector An optical smoke detector is fitted on the top of the right inner side wall of the cabinet. 5. There are medium stage protectors (category c) for L and N leads.

29 V/cell. Overvoltage protection DC bus is not overvoltage protected.14 541 / 914 .01V Default setting 2. Temperature regulation See XBCB Interface. The boards are placed on a 19" panel and fitted above the distribution box on the top.2. 5. Boost charge Not applicable. to store A4 documents. Nominal voltage: -48V DC (0V pole connected to PE in BTS cabinet) Voltage range Ufloat: -52.280 V AC and overvoltage protection class II installed in each BTS cabinet. see RIBAT (Section 12.2.5A Default setting: 8A.2.5 to -57V temperature regulated 2-wire system (floating) connection to external battery.5A in step 0.9 Document Holder The document holder is attached to the inner side of the door or side wall.or 5-wire (L.20V to 2.3.4.N. Voltage range is -150 .2. Each RIBAT reports the supervision result at a dedicated address (for more information.3.1 9100 MBS Outdoor Interfaces The following interfaces are available for 9100 MBS Outdoor and older BTS cabinets: AC 230V TN-S. 5.PE). 3. DC wiring 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TN-C. Up to three RIBAT boards (one for each battery unit) can be fitted in one cabinet.35V in step 0. It is strongly requested to route DC wires between the BTS cabinet and external battery in a metallic cable tray connected to the site common bonding network (CBN). TT power systems are used.5 External Battery Cabinets 5. External DC 48V (charging voltage) AC/DC rectifiers PM12 are designed for permanent connection to DC load and backup battery (DC bus). RIBATs are connected to the XBCB bus in the BTS via the CA-RIBEO cable.8 RIBAT The RIBAT is a printed circuit board for remote inventory and temperature supervision of the battery.4 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Interfaces 5. Charge current limitation Maximum charge current can be set by means of the Local Terminal in commissioning mode: Limitation range: 0A to 15. RIBAT boards are powered by + 5 VDC provided from the BTS. Voltage setting Cell voltage at 20C (battery manufacturer’s recommendation) can be set by means of the Local Terminal in commissioning mode Cell voltage range 2.29) ).

Grounding All collocated equipment.5 External Battery Cabinets Maximum length of wires: 10 m.01V 542 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.g. Voltage range is -150 . XBCB is an external connection to the BTS Control Bus with BTS specific requirements. Cell voltage range 2. The RIBAT connections are: Temperature sensor XBCB cable to BTS RIBAT termination. smoke detector etc. door of ext.20V to 2.4. TT power systems are used. antenna pole and feeders. Alarm Optional interface used when an external equipment has to be supervised by the BTS OMC (e. Wire cross section must be chosen to be in line with (in general 16 or 25 mm2 ): Maximum allowed DC voltage drop 2V Used MCB 70A inside BTS cabinet Wire load capability.280 V AC and overvoltage protection class II installed in each BTS cabinet. External alarm interface characteristics: Electromechanical contacts or optocoupler.alarm loop conductive in normal status (no alarm).2 9100 MBS Evolution Outdoor Interfaces The following interfaces are available for an 9100 MBS Evolution Outdoor cabinet: AC 230V TN-S. TN-C.PE). 5. External DC 48V (charging voltage) AC/DC rectifiers PM18 used in MBO Evolution cabinet are designed for permanent connection to the DC load and backup battery. Up to three external alarm inputs can be connected. 3.or 5-wire (L. cooling equipment. if any).. XBCB Needed for temperature regulation of charging voltage. It must be placed next to external battery PBA RIBAT 3BK 25133 AAAA.35V in step 0.48V DC (0V pole connected to PE in the BTS cabinet) Voltage range Ufloat = -52. using dedicated overvoltage protected terminals inside the BTS. enclosure. external equipment.5 to -57V temperature regulated 2-wire system (floating) connection to external battery. Voltage setting Cell voltage at 20C (battery manufacturer’s recommendation) can be set by means of the Local Terminal in commissioning mode.N. Nominal voltage. BTS cabinet. must be properly connected to the site common bonding network (CBN) in the shortest possible way.14 . floating Normal closed .2. cable trays.

Overvoltage protection DC bus is not overvoltage protected. Temperature regulation PM18 temperature sensor must be connected to external battery. cable trays. Boost charge Boost charge mode (charging with elevated voltage) can be selected by means of the Local Terminal in commissioning mode. smoke detector etc. door of ext. antenna pole and feeders. cooling equipment. Limitation range 1A to 31A in step of 1A. Up to three external alarm inputs can be connected using dedicated overvoltage protected terminals inside the BTS. For routing the extension cord. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. enclosure. if any). Wire cross section must be chosen to be in line with (in general 16 or 25 mm2 ): Maximum allowed DC voltage drop 2V Used MCB 80A inside PM18 Wire load capability. the same rules apply as for DC wires..5 External Battery Cabinets Default setting 2. Connection to PM18 is done by means of an extension cord. It is strongly advised to route DC wires between the BTS cabinet and the external battery in a metallic cable tray connected to the site common bonding network (CBN). external equipment. must be properly connected to the site common bonding network (CBN) in the shortest possible way.alarm loop conductive in normal status (no alarm). XBCB Not applicable. Charge current limitation Maximum charge current can be set by means of the Local Terminal in commissioning mode. Boost charge returns to float charge mode automatically after a 5h time period or on demand by appropriate selection in the Local Terminal in commissioning mode.29 V/cell. BTS cabinet. External alarm interface characteristics: Electromechanical contacts or optocoupler.g.14 543 / 914 . Default setting 8A. DC wiring Maximum length of wires: 10 m. floating Normal closed . Alarm Optional interface used when an external equipment has to be supervised by the BTS OMC (e. Grounding All collocated equipment.

5 External Battery Cabinets 5. Cable lengths depend on the local distance between the battery cabinet and the BTS.5 mm² in 100 m roll PC25BL1D. On the BTS side. AC Power Cable. Alarm Cable. 50 mm² green/yellow in 100 m roll CA12058. Power Cable (0 V).14 .2) . 3BK 08963 BAAA. 3BK 08961 BAAA. 3BK 25995 AAAA. The mechanical design of the CA-RIBEO cable/connector is found in External Cables (Section 16. The CA-RIBEO cable is connected to the first RIBAT board on the battery cabinet side.4. 1x25 mm² blue in 100 m roll PC25B1D. Ground Cable. RIBAT Cable external Battery outdoor. 544 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 1x25 mm² black in 100 m roll PC50YG1D.2. 3x2. All external cables listed above are fixed installation cables connected to terminals at both sides. 3BK 26138 AAAA. 3BK 25561 AAAA. 120 Ohms in 100 m roll CA-RIBEO. the cable is connected to the OUTC board via an XBCB connector.3 External Battery Cabinet Cabling The following cables are used to connect an external outdoor battery cabinet with a BTS and ground: PC05B5. Power Cable (-48 V). 3BK 08965 AAAA. L907. 4 quads.

6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack 6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack The following sections describe and illustrate the standard telecommunications subrack. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 545 / 914 .

PM12 Microwave modules.coded on the subrack interconnecting ribbon cable Slot position within subrack . For a description of the subrack backplane.coded on the subrack backplane PCB. which provides the electrical and signaling interface for the modules. and the types of plug-in modules fitted into the subracks. The possible plug-in modules can be: TRE SUMX/SUMA/SUMP Antenna Network modules: AGC.14 . 546 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3) . ADAM4. ANX.6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack 6.2 STASR Mechanical Characteristics The following figure shows the STASR with no modules fitted. refer to the STASR Electrical Description (Section 6. refer to Subracks (Section 1. An inter-subrack cable connector at the top of the backplane is provided for multiple subrack configurations. The power connection consists of three FASTON connectors. The backplane has nine connectors for the plug-in modules and three for the FANUs. The number of subracks used. The STASR has an integral backplane.3) .1 STASR General Information The STASR is the standard telecommunications subrack for all 9100 BTS configurations. The number consists of: Subrack number . is configuration dependent. 6. ANY Power Supply equipment: ADAM. Each STASR plug-in module has a unique number which identifies its position within the cabinet. Inter−subrack Connector Power Connector Ground Connector Module Connector Subrack Fixing Lug Hole for Camloc Fastener FANU Guide Rail Backplane Module Guide Rail Module Connector Figure 282: STASR Construction For common information and dimensions. ANC.

and the digital signals between the various plug-in modules. is ensured by using earth linking straps. the backplane. between the subrack and the equipment rack.3. via the cabinet bus bar.3 STASR Electrical Description The following sections describe the STASR in terms of power supplies and grounding.6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack 6. The following figure shows a front view of the backplane and the positions of the various connectors. Front View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 Power Supplies and Grounding The STASR receives its -48/ -60 VDC supply from the cabinet DC distribution panel. The straps are attached to the equipment rack bus bar at one end and terminated on the subrack with a FASTON connector. 6. The subrack is also fixed to the equipment rack with conductive self-tapping screws.2 Backplane The backplane is a multi-layer PCB.14 547 / 914 . Module Connectors Ribbon Cable Connector Power Connectors 0 V GND −48 V FACB FACB Connectors X113 X100 X116 Equipment Label Connector Identity X101 X102 X110 X103 X104 X105 X106 X111 X117 X107 X108 X109 X112 Pin 1. which is a passive RF module. except the ANY.3. to power the subrack equipment. and connectors and cables. It distributes the -48/ -60 VDC. 6. Ground continuity. Row A FANU Connectors Figure 283: STASR Backplane Connector Layout. Each module fitted within the STASR has its own on-board DC/DC converter.

2 x 16-pin male Header type connector. Power Cable 1 Three-core twin and earth. The symbol shows that the particular connector is a possible plug-in position for the associated module. For connector locations. TRE HP ConnectorSUMA/SUMX SUMP X101 X102 X103 X104 X105 X106 X107 X108 X109 - ANC - ANX - ANY TRE IDU - - - - - - - - Table 53: STASR Module Connectors and Associated Modules 548 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Name Module Connectors FACB Connectors Quantity 9 Type and Description Millipacs Type 1. Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrack backplane (see Figure 283 ). It is pre-equipped with the correct number of connectors for the number of subracks deployed. see Figure 283 . Table 52: STASR Connectors and Cables The following table lists the module connectors and the associated modules. FANU Connectors 3 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors.3 Connectors and Cables The following table lists and describes the STASR cables and connectors.6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack 6. The FACB connectors are linked to the FANU connectors via the backplane printed wiring. 2 2 x 6-pin male Header type connector.14 . terminated with a three-in-one FASTON connector.3. Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector. The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks (see Figure CIMI/CIDI Subracks Interconnection Cable (180) and Figure 188 ).

14 549 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.7 AC Power Subracks 7 AC Power Subracks The following sections describe and illustrate the AC power subracks.

It contains plug-in modules which convert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. refer to Subracks (Section 1. The backplane contains nine connectors for the plug-in modules and three for the FANUs. 7. SRACDC contains the following modules: ACIB ACRI BACO BCU1 Up to five PM08s FANUs. which provides the electrical and signaling interface for the modules. The SRACDC has an integral backplane. The plug-in modules are fitted in predefined slots within the subrack.14 .3) . 550 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.7 AC Power Subracks 7.1. Pin 1.1 SRACDC Mechanical Characteristics The following figure shows the SRACDC subrack with no modules fitted.1 SRACDC The SRACDC is the power subrack used for all 9100 BTS outdoor configurations with the PM08 power supply modules. Row A X200 X201 X202 Backplane Connector Identity Subrack Fixing Lug X100 X101 X102 X103 X104 X106 Module Guide Rail FANU Connector Hole for Camloc Fastener FANU Guide Rail Module Connectors Figure 284: SRACDC Subrack Front View For common information and dimensions.

it connects to the front of the PM08s.2 SRACDC Subrack Layout Modules are fitted at the predefined positions shown in the following figure. 7. the backplane. From there.1 Power Supplies and Grounding The SRACDC power supply system subrack is fixed to the equipment rack with conductive self-tapping screws.1. as shown.1. The PM08s are identified by numbers in the range 1 to 5. and connectors and cables.14 551 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The SRACDC is isolated from the AC supply voltage.3. 7.7 AC Power Subracks 7. XIOB and HEX2s. BACO ACRI ACIB PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1 Figure 285: SRACDC Module Positions There are five PM08 slots. The 230 VAC supply from the ACSB connects directly to the AC IN connector on the front of ACIB (see the following figure). Ground continuity is maintained by the metal fittings and securing brackets. where it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC. in terms of power supplies and grounding. The DC is connected to the SRACDC backplane for distribution to the: BACO for charging the optional batteries DCDP for further distribution to the STASR subracks.1.3 SRACDC Electrical Description The following sections describe the SRACDC.

BACO and BCU1. X204 X204 −48V R211 R201 X203 0V X203 Module Connector 0/−48 VDC Power Out Connectors FANU Connector Figure 286: SRACDC Backplane Connector Layout Rear View 7.2 Backplane The SRACDC backplane distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipment that requires it.3. Two power cables carry the DC power to the equipment external to the SRACDC.3 Connectors and Cables The following table lists and describes the SRACDC subrack cables and connectors. Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrack backplane (see Figure 286 ).14 . Module Connectors 3 R64-M-a-c (DIN 41612). The connectors are used by the ACRI. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and the positions of the various connectors. The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks. The cables carry the 0/-48 VDC to the interconnection panel.7 AC Power Subracks 7. Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector. see Figures SRACDC Subrack Front View (284) and SRACDC Backplane Connector Layout Rear View (286) .1. It is pre-equipped with the correct number of connectors for the number of subracks deployed. For connector locations. Table 54: SRACDC Connectors and Cables 552 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. FANU Connectors 3 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors. Power Cables 2 60 A power terminals M5 x 8. The connectors are used by the PM08s and the BACO.1.3. Name Module Connectors Quantity 6 Type and Description H15-F (DIN 41612).

7 AC Power Subracks 7. Pin 1. The ACSR contains the following modules: BAC2 BCU2 Up to four PM11s FANUs. The backplane contains six connectors for the plug-in modules and two for the FANUs. refer to Subracks (Section 1. Row A Backplane Subrack Fixing Lug Module Guide Rail Hole for Camloc Fastener FANU Guide Rail FANU Connector Module Connectors Figure 287: ACSR Subrack Front View For common information and dimensions.3) . The plug-in modules are fitted in predefined slots within the subrack.2. The ACSR contains plug-in modules which convert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. 7. The ACSR has an integral backplane.14 553 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 ACSR The ACSR is the power subrack used for 9100 BTS outdoor configurations with PM11 power supply modules. which provides the electrical and signaling interface for the modules.1 ACSR Mechanical Characteristics The following figure shows the ACSR subrack with no modules fitted.

and connectors and cables. 7.7 AC Power Subracks 7.1 Power Supplies and Grounding The ACSR power supply system subrack is fixed to the equipment rack with conductive self-tapping screws. BAC2 PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2 Figure 288: ACSR Module Positions There are four PM11 slots. it connects to the PM11s where it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC. the backplane. The DC is connected to the ACSR backplane for distribution to: The BAC2 for charging the optional batteries The BOBU for further distribution to the STASR subracks.2.14 .3 ACSR Electrical Description The following sections describe the ACSR in terms of power supplies and grounding.2.3. 554 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. From there.2. The 230 VAC supply from the ACSB connects to the ACSR backplane. The PM11s are identified by numbers in the range 1 to 4. XIOB and HEX2s.2 ACSR Subrack Layout Modules are fitted at the predefined positions shown in the following figure. Ground continuity is maintained by the metal fittings and securing brackets. as shown in the figure. The ACSR is connected to the AC supply voltage. 7.

2. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and the positions of the various connectors.7 AC Power Subracks 7. One five-wire power cable carries the AC power from the ACSB to the backplane.14 555 / 914 . Module Connector L1 L2 N L3 230 VAC Power In Connectors GND (M5 Bolt) FANU Connector 0/−48 VDC Power Out Connectors Figure 289: ACSR Backplane Connector Layout Rear View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Two power cables carry the DC power to the equipment external to the ACSR. The backplane also distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipment that requires it.3.2 Backplane The ACSR backplane distributes the 230 VAC supply from the ACSB to the PM11s.

The cables carry the 0/ -48 VDC to the interconnection panel. see Figures ACSR Subrack Front View (287) and ACSR Backplane Connector Layout Rear View (289) . L3. It is pre-equipped with the correct number of connectors for the number of subracks deployed. L2.2.7 AC Power Subracks 7. The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks. DC Power Cables 2 60 A power terminals M5 x 8. and GND) from the ACSB. For connector locations. The cables carry the 230 VAC (L1.3. Name Module Connectors Quantity 5 Type and Description H15-F (DIN 41612). The connectors are used by the PM11s and BAC2. Module Connectors 1 R64-M-a-c (DIN 41612). Table 55: ACSR Connectors and Cables 556 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector. The connector is used by BCU2. AC Power Cables 1 Four FASTON connectors and one M5 x 8 terminal.14 . N. Two FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrack backplane (see Figure 289 ).3 Connectors and Cables The following table lists and describes the ACSR subrack cables and connectors. FANU Connectors 2 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors.

Row A X201 X202 X250 Backplane X300 Connector Identity Subrack Fixing Lug X100 X101 X102 X103 X104 X106 Module Guide Rail FANU Connector Hole for Camloc Fastener FANU Guide Rail Module Connectors Figure 290: ASIB Front View For common information and dimensions. 7.7 AC Power Subracks 7.14 557 / 914 .3 ASIB The ASIB is the power subrack for the 9100 BTS indoor configurations powered from an AC mains supply. The plug-in modules are fitted in predefined slots within the subrack. The backplane has nine connectors for the plug-in modules and three for the FANUs. which provides the electrical and signaling interface for the modules.1 ASIB Mechanical Characteristics The following figure shows the ASIB subrack with no modules fitted.3. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The ASIB has an integral backplane. refer to Subracks (Section 1.3) . Pin 1. It contains plug-in modules which convert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply.

Ground continuity is maintained by the metal fittings and securing brackets. The DC is connected to the ASIB backplane for distribution to: The ABAC for charging the optional batteries The cabinet cable trunk for further distribution to the STASR subracks. 7. The PM08s are identified by numbers in the range 1 to 5. ABAC APOD ACRI PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1 Figure 291: ASIB Module Positions There are five PM08 slots.3.7 AC Power Subracks 7. as shown.14 .3. From there.3. and connectors and cables. it connects to the front of the PM08s where it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC. 558 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 ASIB Electrical Description The following sections describe the ASIB in terms of power supplies and grounding. the backplane.1 Power Supplies and Grounding The ASIB is isolated from the AC supply voltage. The 230 VAC supply from the AFIP connects via the backplane to the APOD. 7. The subrack is fixed to the equipment rack with conductive M6 screws.3.2 ASIB Layout Modules are fitted at the predefined positions shown in the following figure.

Module Connector FANU Connector Figure 292: ASIB Backplane Connector Layout Rear View 7. ABAC and BCU1. The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks.3 Connectors and Cables The following table lists and describes the ASIB subrack cables and connectors.2 Backplane The backplane distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipment that requires it. FANU Connectors 3 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors. The connectors are used by the PM08s and the ABAC. Power Cables 4 60 A power terminals M5 x 8.3.14 559 / 914 . The cables carry the 0/ -48 VDC to the interconnection panel. see Figures ASIB Front View (290) and ASIB Backplane Connector Layout Rear View (292) . For connector locations. The connectors are used by the ACRI.3.7 AC Power Subracks 7. Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrack backplane (see Figure 292 ).3. It is pre-equipped with the correct number of connectors for the number of subracks deployed. Name Module Connectors Quantity 6 Type and Description H15-F (DIN 41612). The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and the positions of the various connectors. Module Connectors 3 R64-M-a-c (DIN 41612). Table 56: ASIB Connectors and Cables 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector.3. Four power cables carry DC power to the equipment external to the ASIB.

7 AC Power Subracks 560 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

It includes a drawing of the physical appearance of the module. showing LED indicators. including the functional blocks and their interfaces.8 Station Unit Modules 8 Station Unit Modules This section describes and illustrates the Station Unit Modules. connectors and controls. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 561 / 914 .

8 Station Unit Modules 8. Note: The AN. BTS BTS G1/G2/9100 EXT CLK ref XCLK(14) BTS A9100 CLKI (13) OML(1) RSL(2). ANX. 562 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. ANC modules are connected to the BCB.TCH(3) RSLi(7). All external links connected to the CA in Figure 293 are routed through the CA to the SUMX/SUMA/SUMP.14 . The following figure gives an overview of all the interfaces connected to the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX. but only the ANX and ANC are connected to IOM and IOM_CONF. ANY. TCHi(8) IOM(10). It is responsible for the following functional areas: Digital transmission Timing and clock generation Management of the BTS internal digital interfaces O&M functions RI Control of the AC/DC converters and check of the batteries (SUMA/SUMX only).1 Introduction to Station Unit Modules The SUMP/SUMA/SUMX provides the central management and control of all the 9100 BTS modules. IOM−CONF(9) TRE BSC RCB(5) Other Abis flows(6) Qmux(4) TSC SUMX/ SUMA/ SUMP IOM(10). IOM_CONF(9) AN AC/DC IGPS (16) GPS XGPS (15) REL_CON(18) CA EBCB(12) Internal GPS receiver *) FAN Battery BCB(11) *) Battery XBCB(12) External tool MMI(17) : *) for SUMA/SUMX only BTS Terminal Figure 293: The SUMP/SUMA/SUMX in its Environment The following table provides information relative to the links mentioned in the figure above.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. This link carries O and M messages exchanged between the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX and other BTS modules connected on the IOM. XGPS P IGPS P These flows carry the GPS CLK reference. This link is used to control the ring functions between the BIEs by managing F. These links are transparently routed by the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX from/to Abis To/from the BSII. The link carries BTS external clock synchronization signals for either the master or slave configuration. This feature is used only at factory level.8 Station Unit Modules Link OML 1 L Comment The link carries O and M messages between the BSC and BTS. When the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX is powered on. AIS bits. FEA. The link is routed by the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX from/to Abis to/from BSII. The Radio signaling Link is for TRE telecom function. the alarms from XIOB are reported to SUMP/SUMA/SUMX through the EBCB. It is External GPS when the GPS system is outside the BTS and Internal GPS when it is plugged inside the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX. These flows carry the supervision interface of the GPS system (Configuration. These links are used for BTS internal O and M between SUMP/SUMA/SUMX and other BTS equipment. It is used to broadcast the IOM configuration by the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX. This link is used for the remote transmission O and M between the TSC and the Transmission part of the BTS. R. RSL TCH Qmux L L L RCB L Other Abis flows RSLi TCHi IOM_CONF IOM L L L L L BCB P The link is connected to other BTS modules and allows the BTS Remote Inventory supported by SUMP/SUMA/SUMX. Fault). These flows are used in order to communicate with the GPS system. The link is connected to the external tool for Remote Inventory. XBCB (EBCB) P CLKI XCLK P P This link distributes BTS internal synchronizing signals to TRE and AN.14 563 / 914 . S. All the other flows carried by the Abis are transparently routed in Abis ring or drop through the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX. XBCB is changed into EBCB in between SUMP/SUMA/SUMX and CA. the BTS module Remote Inventory information is reported to the external tool through the EBCB. The Traffic Channel is for TRE telecom function. When the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX is powered off.

14 . REL_CON P This relay command flow is used to control Abis relays. This flow has its own physical interface. 1) : This column indicates for each link if it is a logical link (L) or a physical link (P). Figure 294: SUMP/SUMA/SUMX Basic Architecture 564 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8 Station Unit Modules Link MMI 1 L Comment This link is connected to a PC used as a BTS Terminal which includes the local BTS O and M application. TDMA Frame Clock and Frame Number Distribution to TRE and AN CLKI HFFI 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s BSII 0 BSII 1 BSII 2 (SUMA/SUMX only) XCLK XGPS CLK Abis 1 Abis 2 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s Transmission & Clock BSII Switch and Timing XGPS XRT MMI O&M XBCB RI BCB HFFI Hook for Future Interface: It consists of 4 Lines which are in the backplane and which are free for future evolution. Table 57: SUMP/SUMA/SUMX Interfaces The following figure shows the functional block diagram of the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX. External Interfaces Internal Interfaces System Master Clock. it includes: The download of software for SUMP/SUMA/SUMX and other BTS downloadable modules The BTS commissioning tests The O and M commands for the Transmission part of the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX The O and M commands for the Clock part of the SUMP/SUMA (for OCXO calibration and OCXO tuning).

8 Station Unit Modules The SUMP/SUMA provides a switchable 2 Mbit/s duplex connection between the Abis Interface and the BSII. This is used exclusively to carry TCH information. The SUMP/SUMA/SUMX comprises the following functional blocks: Transmission and Clock BSII OMU RI. the SUMA/SUMX uses only one to run the software/firmware for the O&M and Transmission and Clock functions.14 565 / 914 . and O&M information to the OMU/SUM microprocessor.2 Transmission and Clock Functions The SUMP/SUMA/SUMX Transmission and Clock functions provide: Clock selection and generation Two 2 Mbit/s interfaces to the BSC. The SUMP uses two microprocessors. XCLK XGPS CLK CGU CLKI Abis 1 2 Mbit/s CLK Framer Time Slot Switch 2 Mbit/s Abis 2 2 Mbit/s CLK Framer Abis 3 CLK Framer Time Slot Switch 2 Mbit/s Abis 4 CLK Framer Optional with Piggy−back Board XGPS TMMI Transmission & Clock Micropro− cessor (*) (*) for SUMA part of the SUM processor BSII 0 BSII 1 BSII 2 (SUMA/SUMX only) Figure 295: SUMP/SUMA/SUMX Transmission and Clock Architecture The principal functional components and interfaces of the Transmission and Clock are as follows: Abis Interface Transmission and Clock microprocessor CGU Q1 link. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The BSII is used to transfer TCH information to the TRE module. SUMA has an additional BSII 2 interface. 8. The following figure shows the Transmission and Clock architecture. via a PCM link.

which uses a LAPD protocol RSL. 566 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Abis Interface Functional Entities Two additional Abis Interfaces can be implemented with a ’Piggy-back’ board (SUMA/SUMX only). which carries speech and/or data OML. The SUMP/SUMA/SUMX provides two G. are used to route the Abis links transparently if the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX is switched off. which carries signaling data for the telecommunications functions Q1 Link. via the Timeslot Switch. Relays on the connection area provide a loop-back on the Abis Interface for testing the Abis links.14 . This is an optional feature of the 9100 BTS. The Abis Interface consists of the functional entities shown in the following table. Timeslot Switch The Timeslot Switch is responsible for mapping the 64 kbit/s timeslots onto the TCH. The Framer is responsible for: Insertion of frame/multiframe synchronization patterns Monitoring frame and multiframe synchronization HDB3 coding/decoding for PCM AIS detection Frame and CRC error detection. They support the following communications links: TCH.1 Abis Interface The Abis Interface is the digital interface to the BSC. The Framer can be configured for CRC by the Transmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor. Clock Recovery The Clock circuit recovers timing from the PCM link. Relays. which carries transmission management data. The switch is configured by the Transmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor.8 Station Unit Modules 8. mounted on the cabinet interconnection panel. Framer Device Loop-back Relays Table 58: SUMP/SUMA/SUMX.2.703 Abis Interfaces.

3 Station Unit Module Clock Generation Unit The functions of the clock generation unit consist of the: Generation of the GSM clock by an internal OCXO for TRE and AN modules in the BTS Possibility to synchronize the OCXO: On an external clock reference coming from (Slave synchronization Slave BTS) another BTS (G1. Generation of both frame clock and frame number for TRE and AN modules in the BTS: For the Master BTS.14 567 / 914 .2. both frame clock and frame number are aligned on those provided by the Master BTS. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.Master BTS) No synchronization (OCXO in free run mode) (OCXO free running Master BTS). (For further information. G2. 8. ’GPS synchronization’ concerns frequency synchronization and time synchronization (so that all BTSs have the same Frame Number). the Transmission and Clock functions run on the only SUM microprocessor. with access to the RAM and to the EEPROM. 9100 BTS). refer to the 9100 BTS/9110 Micro BTS Corrective Maintenance Handbook ). Regarding ’GPS synchronization’ . In the case of ’OCXO free running’ . The Transmission and Clock microprocessor controls the transmission and clock functions on the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX. 9100 BTS) On the Abis clock (PCM synchronization .8 Station Unit Modules 8. for controlling a GPS receiver. an onsite periodic electronic tuning is necessary. Distribution through the CLKI of GSM clock. The external signal connected to the microprocessor is the XGPS. it is a local generation For Slave BTS. G2 BTS. the SUMA/SUMX hardware is ready to have a GPS receiver plugged in.2 Transmission and Clock Microprocessor In the case of SUMA/SUMX. frame clock and frame number OCXO calibration (which is done on time in the factory and consists of the measurement of the OCXO curve and is stored in the SUM EEPROM) OCXO tuning (which consists of the change of the OCXO tuning value) Possibility to synchronize other BTSs (G1 BTS.Master BTS) On the GPS CLOCK receiver (GPS synchronization . It consists of a QUICC (SUMP) or PowerQUICC (SUMA/SUMX).

568 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. for configuration purposes. via the Q1 link.2. The Q1 link is also used for software downloads.14 . The O&M functions are performed remotely by the BSC TSC. can interrogate the SUMP/SUMA for the following data: Performance measurement Alarms Abis clock source Loop request Firmware version Hardware version. the Timeslot Switch. The transmission equipment is supervised by the TSC using the Q1 protocol. which identify them to the TSC. or locally via a BTS Terminal. the BSII switch and the BSII to the O&M functions.4 Q1 Link The Q1 link is a logical link routed via the Abis Interface.8 Station Unit Modules 8. All 9100 BTS transmission equipment have Q1 addresses. or a local BTS Terminal. The TSC.

Its main function is to select between BSII 0. The NGISL device is an ASIC. The Glue logic monitors the status of the BSII PLL via a lock detect signal. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. providing an internal serial link to the Remote Inventory EEPROM. BSII Switch The BSII switch performs the following functions: Distribution of the system clock. The clock is then distributed to the Transmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor. and an NGISL device. onto the internal interfaces under control of the Transmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor. The BSII bus consists of three 2 Mbit/s full duplex links: BSII 0 BSII 1 BSII 2. The drivers are disabled if the PLL is not locked to the BSII clock.048 MHz. It also performs serial-to-parallel conversion. to allow the OMU microprocessor access to the EEPROM.8 Station Unit Modules 8. Distribution is via the SUMP/SUMA Glue Logic. which are the internal interfaces for O and M data distribution and uplink and downlink TCH. via line drivers. The BSII switch is implemented with a CPLD. TDMA frame clock and FN 64 kbit/s timeslot mapping Q1 message routing. BSII 1 and BSII 2.14 569 / 914 . The data is multiplexed.3 Base Station Internal Interface The BSII is an internal digital interface to the TRE module. which is a part of the Glue Logic. The BSII basically consists of the following two functional components: BSII PLL The BSII PLL is logically a part of the CGU. It locks the BSII CLK to a fixed frequency of 2.

8 Station Unit Modules 8. and acting on.4 Operations and Maintenance Functions The O&M functions include: Starting the 9100 BTS Configuring the 9100 BTS. depending on the battery status (SUMA/SUMX only). It consists of the following functional entities: OMU microprocessor for SUMP. The OMU/SUM microprocessor performs the following O&M functions: Configuration management Fault management Performance management Configuration and supervision of the BSII Routing MMI messages to the Transmission and Clock microprocessor (SUMP only) Test facilities. SUMA or SUMX as part of the SUM processor SDRAM Flash EEPROM NGISL ASIC for SUMP and SUMA or FPGA for SUMX Glue logic. under control of the BSC Executing maintenance commands Filtering and correlating faults Reporting. The following figure shows the O&M architecture. O and M Architecture 570 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 . the status of the modules Controlling the PM12s. XRT External Interfaces MMI LEDs OMU Microprocessor (*) SDRAM Flash EEPROM Control Bus Reset Address & Data Bus BSII Glue Logic NGISL BCB (*) for SUMA part of the SUM processor Remote Inventory Figure 296: SUMP/SUMA/SUMX.

organized as 32 bits wide and accessible in 8.4.2 OMU Microprocessor In the SUMA/SUMX. There are eight such BCB bits available. 8.4. It is a Power QUICC device for SUMA and a Power QUICC II PRO device for SUMX.14 571 / 914 . The external signals connected to the microprocessor are: MMI . It is a Power QUICC device. 16 or 32 bit words Flash EPROM providing memory that is 32 bits wide. The OMU microprocessor controls the O&M functions on the SUMP. disable or reset certain hardware. implemented as a PLD.8 Station Unit Modules 8. one of which is reserved for power supply control. organized as 32 bits wide and accessible in 16 or 32 bit words DDR2 SDRAM for SUMX. 8.for connecting a BTS terminal XRT .for radio supervision and loop tests. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. organized as 32/64 bits wide and accessible in 32 or 64 bit words Flash EPROM providing memory that is 32 bits wide for SUMA and 16 bits wide for SUMX. The BCB also interfaces to an EEPROM which holds inventory information on the 9100 BTS modules.4. with access to the following memory devices: SDRAM. The BCB is used for the following functions: Accessing the RI Detecting module insertion/extraction Collecting alarm/data Controlling the battery and PM12s (SUMA/SUMX only). supports the CPU and connects the various functional blocks together. with access to the following memory devices: DDR SDRAM for SUMA.3 Glue Logic Glue logic. the O&M functions only run on the SUM processor. The BCB is also used for remote bit setting. Remote bit setting consists of setting memory bits to control.1 BTS Control Bus Most of the internal control functions are managed via the BCB.

One part of the Remote Inventory is mandatory.. firmware release. the BCB is used.. 572 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. the basic information related to a module from the hardware (and possibly software) point of view.8 Station Unit Modules 8.) to module design (part number. The range of information goes from module manufacturing (serial number. this access can be requested from different levels: Module access Inventory of the unplugged (and so unpowered) modules through a dedicated module connector Internal BTS access Inventory of all BTS modules from a central node internal to the BTS (SUMP/SUMA/SUMX). It is used at factory level when the complete BTS is unpowered (including the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX). It consists of storing. hardware capability. However. manufacturing and repair history. External BTS access Inventory of all BTS modules from a central node external to the BTS (XBCB-connected tool). Access to the inventory information is ’remote’ because it is managed externally to the module. Only the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX has to be powered.14 . while another is optional..)... For both internal and external BTS access.5 Remote Inventory The Remote Inventory is related to an Alcatel-Lucent standard. . This information is available out of the module even for unpowered modules. in non-volatile memory.

If one DC/DC converter fails. highly reliable DC/DC converter.1 VDC +/-3 % + 4.14 573 / 914 . Voltage V in Value -38.3 VDC +/-2 % + 5.4 VDC min. -80 VDC max. The DC/DC converters work in parallel to provide all the voltages required by the SUMP circuitry. -72 VDC max. The following table lists the SUMX DC/DC converters’ input/output voltages.3 VDC +/-2 % + 2. This parallel mode of operation provides redundancy. V out + 5.5 VDC +/-3 % + 3.6 Station Unit Module Power Supply The SUMP is powered by two identical DC/DC converters. Voltage V in Value -36. The following table lists the SUMP/SUMA DC/DC converters’ input/output voltages. -48 VDC to -60 VDC nom. the other is capable of supplying all the necessary SUMP voltages. The SUMA/SUMX is powered by a single.3 VDC +/-3 % + 5. V out SUMP + 3.8 Station Unit Modules 8.1 VDC +/-2 % Table 59: SUMP/SUMA Input/Output Voltages Normal operation of V out for SUMP/SUMA power supply is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in the range -10o C to 70o C.5 VDC +/-2 % 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 VDC +/-3 % + 12 VDC +/-10 % V out SUMA + 3.4 VDC min. -48 VDC to -60 VDC nom.

located on the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX board.14 . Protection Grounding 574 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The SUMP/SUMA/SUMX power supply circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarity inversion on its inputs.8 VDC +/-2 % +1.8 Station Unit Modules Voltage Value + 1. Fuse The inputs of the power supply are protected by an on-board fuse. The power supply also has the elements described below.2 VDC +/-2 % Table 60: SUMX Input/Output Voltages Normal operation of V out for SUMX power supply is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in the range 0o C to 70o C. Ground continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrack backplane which connect to the bus bar ground.

7 Station Unit Module Front Panel The following figure shows the SUMP and SUMA front panels.8 Station Unit Modules 8.14 575 / 914 . SUMP Camloc Fasteners Module Extractors SUMA Abis 1/2 Connector Equipment Label Abis 3/4 Connector LEDs BTS Connection Area Connector Optional Piggy− back Board BTS Terminal Connector Test Connector USB Connector OML O&M OMU PS1 ABIS1 ABIS2 Trans FAULT PS2 LEDs LEDs GPS Connector Figure 297: SUMP/SUMA Front Panel 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

14 . Camloc Fasteners Module Extractor E1 Port 1/2 Connector E1 PORT 1/2 Dummy Panel HSE2 MMI−RS232 CA HSE1 HSE 1/2 Connector Equipment Label BTS Connection Area Connector BTS Terminal Connector MMI−ETH TRANS1 GPS Connector GPS Test Connector TEST AUX1 P1/P2 P3/P4 Module Extractor OP/OMTr ON/FAULT LEDs Figure 298: SUMX Front Panel 576 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8 Station Unit Modules The following figure shows the SUMX front panel.

Provides two High Speed Ethernet interfaces for future use. Provides a synchronization output from an optional on-board GPS receiver.24 interface or the USB interface can be connected to a BTS Terminal. XGPS CLKX CLK1 Abis relay control. Provides remote access to the OMU and Transmission and Clock microprocessors (in the case of SUMP) and to the SUM processor (in the case of SUMA) for factory test purposes. Abis 3/4 9-pin Sub-D female Provides two Abis Interfaces on SUMA/SUMX piggy-back board. It provides a V. The impedance is selected by the type of cable connector used.24 asynchronous serial interface. It provides a V. but not both. which can be used for local maintenance and configuration purposes. which can be used for local maintenance and configuration purposes. Presence of a terminal is automatically detected. The impedance is selected by the type of cable connector used. X X - Test 9-pin Sub-D male X X GPS SMA female RJ45 - X X TRANS1 - - X* 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Either the V. For connecting a computer terminal. It provides a high-speed serial interface. Provides the following digital interfaces: XBCB XRT XGPS. The connector is pre-equipped for both 75 and 120 impedance cables. Provides traffic connection to the network.24 asynchronous serial interface.8 Station Unit Modules The following table describes the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX front panel connectors. The connector is pre-equipped for both 75 and 120 impedance cables. Two more Abis Interfaces are possible with a piggy-back board. Presence of a terminal is automatically detected. which can be used for local maintenance and configuration purposes.14 577 / 914 . X X X X* SUMP X SUMA X SUMX X HSE 1/2 RJ45 - - X BTS 37-pin Connection Sub-D Area female X X X MMI-RS232 9-pin Sub-D female - - X BTS Terminal USB port For connecting a computer terminal. BTS Terminal 9-pin Sub-D female For connecting a computer terminal. Presence of a terminal is automatically detected. Connector Type Abis 1/2 9-pin Sub-D female Description Provides two Abis Interfaces.

8 Station Unit Modules Connector Type MMI-ETH RJ45 Description For connecting a computer terminal. O and M status for the OMU.1 SUMP/SUMA LEDs There are eight LEDs on the SUMP front panel or six LEDs on the SUMA front panel. The following table describes each LED and provides a definition of the various operational states. Operational. X X X X X X SUMP X SUMA X Off ABIS 2 Yellow 578 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Failure detected on Abis2 . Provides connection for auxiliary equipment. before reaching the operational state. On Blinking Off O and M Yellow On Blinking Abis 1 serviceable. In a transient state. Link disconnected. SUMP - SUMA - SUMX X* AUX1 * RJ45 - - X* : For future use Table 61: SUMP/SUMA/SUMX Front Panel Connectors 8.8 Station Unit Module LEDs 8. Failure detected on Abis1 . LED OML Color Yellow On Blinking Off ABIS 1 Yellow Status Description Status of the OML. Connecting link. Status of Abis2 for Transmission and Clock. It can be used for local maintenance and configuration purposes.14 . Not configured or not used. Status of Abis1 for Transmission and Clock.8. Not used. Link connected. On Blinking Abis 2 serviceable. which provide a visual indication of the operational status of the SUMP/SUMA module (see Figure 297 ).

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. No alarms. OMU alarm status. No alarm.8 Station Unit Modules LED Color Status Off Description Not configured or not used. Non-fatal alarm. Failure detected on Abis 3. Transmission and Clock alarm status. (X) On Blinking Off ABIS 4 Yellow Abis 3 serviceable. X - Blinking Off Trans FAULT On Fatal alarm or module is unserviceable. SUMP SUMA OMU (for SUMP) FAULT (for SUMA) Red X X On Fatal alarm or module is unserviceable. Converter 1 status. X X Blinking Off PS1 (for SUMP) ON (for SUMA) Green On Converter 1 serviceable. Status of Abis 4 for Transmission and Clock.14 579 / 914 . Non-fatal alarm. X - Converter 2 serviceable. Not configured or not used. Converter 2 faulty. Status of Abis 3 for Transmission and Clock. Converter 2 status. Off PS2 Green (SUMP only) On Off ABIS 3 Yellow Converter 1 faulty. (X) On Abis 4 serviceable.

Not configured or not used. The following table describes each LED and provides a definition of the various operational states. Note: During a reset of the OMU microprocessor.8. Failure detected on Abis link 1 Abis link 1 is not configured (not used) Abis link 2 state Abis link 2 is configured and ok. Failure detected on Abis link 3 Abis link 3 is not configured (not used) Abis link 4 state Abis link 4 is configured and ok. Failure detected on Abis link 4 Abis link 4 is not configured (not used) Operational status 580 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. LED P1 Color Yellow ON Blinking OFF P2 Yellow ON Blinking OFF P3 Yellow ON Blinking OFF P4 Yellow ON Blinking OFF OP Yellow Status Description Abis link 1 state Abis link 1 is configured and ok. 8.2 SUMX LEDs There are eight LEDs on the SUMX front panel.14 . This is a test of the LEDs to ensure that they are all working. all the red and yellow LEDs are lit for approximately 100 ms. if piggy-back board is connected on the SUMA board. Failure detected on Abis link 2 Abis link 2 is not configured (not used) Abis link 3 state Abis link 3 is configured and ok. which provide a visual indication of the operational status of the SUMX module (see Figure 297 ). SUMP SUMA Table 62: SUMP/SUMA LED Descriptions (X) Optional.8 Station Unit Modules LED Color Status Blinking Off Description Failure detected on Abis 4.

14 581 / 914 .8 Station Unit Modules LED Color Status ON Short blinking Description Module is in operational status There is a mismatch between the SW running on the board and the SW version set by the management system (The board did a fallback to the original SW after a reset). Not used Power status OFF ON Green ON OFF FAULT Red ON SUMX is powered ON SUMX is powered OFF Alarm status Fatal alarm on SUMX or on any SBL inside the BTS Non fatal alarm on SUMX or on any SBL inside the BTS OCXO warm up No alarm Blinking Short blinking OFF Table 63: SUMX LED Descriptions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Transient state to reach the O&M operational state State of the module is not known Module is not in operational status Status of the O&M transmission link Blinking Fast blinking OFF OMTr ON Blinking Operational Transient state before reaching the operational state.

14 .8 Station Unit Modules 582 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

showing LED indicators. including the functional blocks and their interfaces.9 Transceiver Equipment 9 Transceiver Equipment This section describes and illustrates the Transceiver Equipment. It includes a drawing of the physical appearance of the module. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. connectors and controls.14 583 / 914 .

In the TADH/TRADE/TADHE/TAGH/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAD/TRAG/TRAL/TRAP TRE variants. TRDM. TRED and TREA are implemented in one submodule (TREDAx).14 . The following figure shows the TRE basic architecture. TREPS (for TRAG/TRAD). TRGM. TEPADHE (for TADHE) or TREPAxx (for TRDH.1.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. TRPM) Power supply TREP (for TRDH. or TREPSH (for TADH/TRADE/TADHE/TAGH/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP). TRPM). TREDAx (for TADH/TRAD/TRAG/TRAL/TRAP) TREDAxE (for TRADE/TADHE/TRAGE/TAGHE) T(R)EPAxx TRED TREA to ANCx from TREPxx Figure 299: TRE Basic Architecture The TRE performs the digital functions interface to the SUM and the analog functions interface to the AN module. TRDM.1 Single Transceiver Equipment 9. 584 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TRGM. The TRE contains its own integrated power supply. The architecture is split into three functional blocks: Digital part TRED Analog part TREA with the power amplifier TEPAxx (for TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP).1 Introduction to Transceiver Equipment The TRE combines digital baseband and analog RF functions in one module.

TRE medium power module for GSM 850 TRAP. TRE high power module for GSM 1800 TRDM. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Digital Functions The following figures show a block diagram of the TRED hardware architecture. enhanced 8-PSK power TAGHE. TRE medium power module for GSM 1900 TRDH. TRE medium power module for GSM 900 TRAGE. TRE medium power module for GSM 1900. relative to each other. TRE module medium power for GSM 1800.14 585 / 914 . They show the functional blocks. 9. TRE high power module for GSM 900 TRAD. For more information. TRE high power module for GSM 900 GMSK and 8-PSK TRAL. and the interfaces to the TRED. TRE high power module for GSM 1800 GMSK and 8-PSK TRAG. TRE module medium power for GSM 900. enhanced 8-PSK power TADHE. TRE medium power module for GSM 1800 TRADE. which are implemented on the same hardware device. contact Alcatel-Lucent support.1. TRE medium power module for GSM 1800 TRGM. The shaded areas identify separate functional blocks. TRE medium power module for GSM 900 TRPM. TRE high power module for GSM 1800 TAGH.9 Transceiver Equipment The following types of TRE modules are available for the different 9100 BTS variants: TADH. Not all BSS software releases support GSM 850 .

TRPM) consists of the following functional entities (refer to the figure above): Entity Control Parallel Link (ECPL) signaling and Control Processor (SCP) Decoder (DEC) Demodulator (DEM) Multiplexer. Encryption and Decryption (MBED) Encoder and Transmitter Processor (ENCT) Carrier Unit Logic (CUL) Clock Generation Unit (CGU) External Test Adapter (ETA) Remote Inventory (RI).2.1. TRPM) The TRED (TRDH. TRPM RCD RPI Power Switch/Reset MMI/Debug 1 Debug 2 LEDs ETI BCBT ADR RI SCP ETA CLKI CGU ECPL I2C MBED DEM BSII 0 BSII 1 MUX DEC BED DEM CUL CUI FHL HFFI ENC TXP ENCT Figure 300: TRED Architecture (TRDH. TRGM. TRDM.1 TRED Architecture of TRDH. TRGM. 586 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Baseband. TRDM. TRGM. TRDM.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.14 .

14 587 / 914 .9 Transceiver Equipment 9. TRAG. TRAGE. TRADE. TRAD.2 TRED Architecture of TADH.1. TRAL. TAGHE. TRAL.TRAG.2. TRAP) 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TRAD. TAGHE. TAGH. TADHE. TRAP RCD RPI Power Swit/Reset USB : MMI Debug ET LEDs BCB ADR RI SCP CLKI BSII0 BSII1 BSII2 CGU ECPL I2C DCOP IRDMC UBEL MBED DEM IRDM DEC MUX FHL HFFI ENC TXP BED DEM BBTX ASIC DRCS From IF Filter To I/Q Modulator ENCT on TREA Figure 301: TRED Architecture (TADH. TADHE. TAGH. TRAGE. TRADE.

3 TRED System Interfaces The TRED provides a number of system interfaces. TRAGE. TAGHE. TRAG. Clock interface: used to distribute the 9100 BTS master clock and the frame clock multiplexed on the same line with the frame number in a serial format.2. is a spare interface and can be used for future extensions. TRAL. BCB CLKI BSII HFFI FHL RCD RPI 588 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The following table briefly describes each of them (see also Figures 300 and 301 ). Base station internal interface: transfers all TCH-related data (traffic and signaling) and internal O and M data. DCOP. and IRDMC ENCT CGU RI Baseband ASIC for Transmitter (BBTX). containing the MBED. Used to set BCB physical BCB terminal address and BSII HDLC address. 9. Frequency hopping link: used for downlink baseband frequency hopping. located on the TREA. Remote cabling detection: detects DC voltage variations on the TREA receiver inputs.9 Transceiver Equipment The TRED (TADH. TRADE. ADR Module address: provides a unique address to each module in the BTS. located on the TREA Diversity Receiver Chip Set (DRCS). part of the UBEL United Baseband Logic (UBEL). TRDH/TRDM/TRGM/TRPM: two links. part of the UBEL Decoder Co-processor (DCOP). TRAP) consists of the following functional entities (refer to the figure above): ECPL SCP DEC DEM Incremental Redundancy Data Memory (IRDM) MBED. TADHE. TRAD. Remote power interface: consists of: Power lines for TRED and TREA DC supply On/off control of the power supply Alarm handling for the TREP/TREPS/TREPSH DC input and DC output signals. TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP: three links. part of the UBEL IRDM Controller (IRDMC). Hook for future interface. Base station control bus: used for Remote Inventory (RI) read write and for controlling and supervision of the power supply.1. TAGH.14 .

14 589 / 914 . Used to trace the ECPL. LEDs ETI I2C CUI Front panel LED control. Also used to generate the push button reset (PB_SRST) with fast off/on sequence. PSwitch/Manual front panel power switch: disables the TREP/TREPS/TREPSH for TRE maintenance Reset (security function for actions on RF cables). Debug interface: for TRE (development and validation only). MMI. and configuration/control data between TRED and TREA. USB Table 64: TRED Interface Descriptions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Universal serial bus as known from the personal computer domain. Transfers uplink and downlink TCH data. or access it with a test tool. It is used to channel the tool interfaces ET/ISA. Interface to the TREA EEPROM which stores the calibration and adjustment data. ALFS and Debug which are all targets for communication with a PC.9 Transceiver Equipment MMI/ Debug 1 Debug 2 Debug interface: for TRE (development and validation only).

14 . Block Diagram The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the decoder.5 Signaling and Control Processor The SCP performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 central processing for signaling and O and M functions. The functions performed by the decoder are: Soft-decision bit combining for antenna diversity (TRDH. Layer 2 performs O and M functions using LAPD protocols. USB MMI (only TRAx/TADH) RI LEDs I2CA SCP Microprocessor SDRAM Address & Control Bus Chip Select Data Bus Flash Memory TRED Glue Logic BSII ETA ETI Power Switch/ Reset Only TRGM. and interfaces the TRAU frames to the BSII. Layer 3 performs general traffic management functions for the Air Interface. It provides a parallel interface between the SCP and the other functional blocks in the TRED. The SCP consists of a Power QUICC device.2. On the radio channel side: Channel decoding Speech. TRDM.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. data and signal de-interleaving.2. The hardware consists of a DSP and an SRAM. supported by SDRAM and Flash Memory.1. TRPM) Decryption and decryption process control On the terrestrial link side: Rate adaptation TRAU frame adaptation.1.2. TRDH. The following figure shows a block diagram of the SCP and its peripheral memory and logic devices. TRPM ECPL Figure 302: TRED.6 Decoder The decoder performs uplink channel decoding. SCP Functional Blocks 9. Measurements preprocessing In-band control of the demodulator. TRDM. 9.4 Entity Control Parallel Link The ECPL is the main internal control bus. TRGM.1. 590 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

The DSP decodes and transmits eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16 half-rate) TCHs to the BSII. The interrupt/reset interface sets the boot mode.9 Transceiver Equipment To/From MBED Coded Uplink Data Decoded Uplink Data ECPL DSP and Memory DCOP IRDM ECPL Interrupt/Reset only TRAx/TADH IRDMC UBEL Figure 303: TRED. The ECPL interface is used mostly for booting code during resets. The input to the decoder consists of a serial interface. frame signals and the demodulated data from eight RF timeslots. Each full-rate channel can be replaced by a GPRS channel. The interface carries clock. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. and later provides frame and timeslot interrupts. Decoder Decoder DSP The decoder consists of a DSP and its associated SRAM. via the MBED.14 591 / 914 .

2.14 .9 Transceiver Equipment 9. The IRDMC function is implemented in the UBEL FPGA.2. The inputs to the demodulator consist of two serial interfaces. each of which has its own SRAM.1. 9.1.1. The DCOP function is implemented in the UBEL FPGA. The introduction of the DCOP is linked to the EGPRS feature.2.2. 592 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 9.1. Each DSP demodulates eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16 half-rate) TCHs for one antenna path. 9. Modulated Input from CUL/DRCS Demodulated Output to MBED DSP and Memory DSP and Memory ECPL Interrupt/Reset Figure 304: TRED Demodulator Demodulator DSPs The demodulator consists of two DSPs. frame signals and the data from eight RF timeslots.8 IRDM Controller Hardware and access control function for the IRDM. The functions performed are: Antenna diversity combining (TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP) Radio link measurements on a burst basis Using control information provided by the decoder: Preprocessing Channel demodulation Equalization of the received signals. The interfaces carry clock.7 Incremental Redundancy Data Memory The IRDM is required by the EGPRS feature to store demodulated packet data blocks for incremental redundancy function. Block Diagram The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the demodulator. DC offset compensation.10 Demodulator The demodulator demodulates the uplink channels.9 Decoder Co-processor The DCOP is a slave of the DEC used to enhance signal processing functions which are more efficiently implemented in a FPGA than in a DSP.

The interrupt/reset interface sets the boot mode.11 Multiplexer. It combines and demodulates either access or normal burst for both antenna paths (TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP). CLKI ECPL Timing To Encoder Control Ciphering Encoder Interface BSII Multiplexer Decoder Interface Uplink and Downlink Multiplexer Frequency Hopping Link Block BSII FHL Demodulator Interface To Demodulator To Decoder Figure 305: TRED. Baseband. TRGM. and later provides frame and timeslot interrupts.14 593 / 914 . The functions performed by the MBED are: Multiplexing of baseband data Baseband encryption Baseband decryption Interfacing digital processing functions on the TCH.1. 9. The ECPL interface is used almost exclusively for booting code during resets. Baseband. TRPM). Encryption and Decryption 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the MBED. Multiplexer. Encryption and Decryption The MBED functions are combined in a single FPGA.9 Transceiver Equipment It demodulates either access or normal bursts (TRDH. TRDM.2.

The deciphering bits coming from the ciphering block are added to this data stream. the downlink data is forwarded to the TXP. MBED Functional Entities 594 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. If the FHL is not configured. Table 65: TRE. The Encoder Interface provides the connection to and from the encoder and TXP. It also provides clock and frame signals to the encoder DSP. frame clock and frame number. The Timing block is connected to CLKI which carries the master clock.14 . The main role of the timing block is to: Provide clocks for the DSPs Retrieve the frame number and transfer it to the ECPL. If the FHL is configured and used. the uplink cipher key is forwarded to the ciphering block TCH data from the demodulator is forwarded to the decoder. that is: A5 type Encryption/decryption key Frame number. the data is sent to. The ciphering bits from the ciphering block are sent back to the ENCT The FHL data stream is forwarded to the FHL Interface. BSII Multiplexer The BSII Multiplexer selects between the BSII links for the uplink and downlink directions. Ciphering The Ciphering block performs pattern generation according to the configuration information. The Demodulator Interface provides clock and frame signals for the demodulator DSPs. and the insertion of bits at the correct position in uplink. It contains several status and control registers that are updated via the ECPL interface. It also provides clock and frame signals to the decoder DSP. The configuration information is sent in band from the encoder/decoder. together with the ARFCN The downlink ciphering key is extracted and forwarded to the ciphering block. is done by the DSPs. The Uplink Multiplexer handles two data flows: Data from the decoder. and received from. This means that it is possible to change the A5 algorithm and key on a call-by-call basis. The Downlink Multiplexer splits the data stream coming from the encoder: In-band signaling from the TXP is forwarded to the demodulator. Frequency Hopping Link Block Demodulator Interface Decoder Interface Encoder Interface The Frequency Hopping Link Block provides the interface to the FHL. Additionally. the FHL. The selection of the correct bits to be sent downlink. Timing Uplink and Downlink Multiplexer The Decoder Interface provides the connection to and from the decoder. Control The Control block is the main controlling function of the MBED.9 Transceiver Equipment The following table gives a short description of each block.

2. including transmitter and receiver parts FHL interface management if baseband hopping Encryption and encryption process control. data and signaling interleaving. TRDM. TRPM only. Each full-rate channel can be replaced by a GPRS channel. ciphering configuration and the frequency number for the RF transmission.12 Encoder and Transmitter The ENCT receives the downlink TRAU frames from the BSII. are sent to the MBED.2. This data is received from the MBED. TXP The MBED sends the encoded data to the TXP for transmission on the Air Interface. performs channel encoding on them and transmits them to the TREA block. It also sends the cipher bits coming from the ciphering block.1. The TXP processes the data and extracts all additional information coming from the Encoder or FHL. the CUL adapts the ENCT DSP signals to provide the various data and control lines required for the TREA. The hardware consists of a DSP and an SRAM.1.14 595 / 914 . TRGM.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. The CUL consists of an FPGA and some external drivers and registers. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The functions performed by the ENCT are: On the terrestrial link side: Rate adaptation TRAU frames management Transcoder time alignment. Radio frequency hopping law computation for downlink and uplink TREA control.13 Carrier Unit Logic For TRDH. The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the ENCT. The encoded data. 9. MBED BSII MUX Uplink/Downlink MUX CUL or BBTX DSP Encoder TXP Figure 306: TRED. ENCT Functional Block Encoder The Encoder encodes the data for eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16 half-rate) TCHs. On the radio channel side: Channel coding Speech. The resulting data stream is sent to the CUL or BBTX.

It consists of an EEPROM which is connected to the BCB ASIC.).1. TRPM only. 9.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. 9.2.1.17 Baseband Transmitter Module For TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP only.1.2.18 Diversity Receiver Chip Set For TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP only. serial number. 9.2.1. name. the BBTX adapts ENCT DSP signals to provide various data and control lines required for the TREA.16 TRE Remote Inventory Remote Inventory is used to store information about the TRE module (part number.2. 9. etc. The BBTX consists of a mixed signal ASIC. the ETA device contains its own internal logic and drivers which enables external test equipment to be connected to the ECPL.14 . the Diversity Receiver Chip Set (DRCS) performs IF A/D conversion and digital filtering and decimation for both antenna paths. The stored information is read via the BCB.1.15 External Test Adapter For TRDH.14 Clock Generation Unit The CGU consists of two PLLs: one for the BSII clock and one for the CLKI clock. TRDM.2. It also provides an internal clock distribution function. TRGM. 596 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

medium power TEPAGE for GSM 900. medium power.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. high power TEPADHE for GSM 1800. medium power TREPAGM for GSM 900. enhanced 8-PSK power TEPADH for GSM 1800. medium power TREPAPM for GSM 1900. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. These functions are split between the two functional parts: TRE analog part TREA TRE power amplifier TREPAxx or TEPAxx. Depending on the frequency for the TRE power amplifier.14 597 / 914 . medium power TREPADH for GSM 1800. medium/high power.1. For GSM 1900. there are different variants available: TEPAD for GSM 1800. medium power TEPAP for GSM 1900. high power GMSK and 8-PSK TEPAG for GSM 900. enhanced 8-PSK power TEPAGH for GSM 900. high power TEPAL for GSM 850.3 Analog Functions The TRE analog part performs the analog functions within the TRE. the TRE analog part is called TREAP. medium power TEPADE for GSM 1800. high power. medium power TREPADM for GSM 1800.

IF Synthesizer TX Synthesizer 1 TX Synthesizer 2 TX Power Regulation From ENCT via CUL (CUI) I Baseband Modulator Q TX Driver Amplifier TX Power Amplifier I/Q Modulator & Up−converter IF Filter TX Mixer To Combiner/ Duplexer Clean−up Oscillator RF Loop Loop Coupling TREPAxx Baseband Filter I/Q Demodulator IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RX0 ADC To DEM on TRED via CUL (CUI) ADC RX Synthesizer 1 From Antenna Network RX Synthesizer 2 Baseband Filter I/Q Demodulator IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RX1 TREA Figure 307: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TRDH.14 . TRGM. TRDM. TRDM. It shows the functional blocks and the interfaces to the TRED. TRGM. The shaded areas define the TREA and TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) parts. TRPM The following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardware architecture for the TRDH.1 Analog Architecture -TRDH. TRPM) 598 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TRDM.1. and TRPM. TRGM.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.3.

14 599 / 914 . TRAG. TADHE The following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardware architecture for the TRADE/TADHE/TRAGE/TAGHE. TRAG.3. TRAD. and TRAP. TAGH.2 Analog Architecture -TADH. IF Synthesizer TX Synthesizer 1 TX Synthesizer 2 TX Power Regulation I From ENCT Baseband Modulator Q BBTX Modulator & Up−converter IF Filter Mixer TX Driver Amplifier TX Power Amplifier To combiner Duplexer Transmitter part Reveiver part Clean−up Oscillator RF Loop Loop Coupling TEPAxx ADC IF Filter RX Synth. TRADE. 2 IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RF Mixer LNA RX0 To DEM on TRED DDC DRCS From Antenna Network ADC RX1 TREA Digital part (positioned at analog module) Figure 308: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TADH.TRAGE. TRAD.1.3. TAGH. 1 RX Synth. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It shows the functional blocks and the interfaces to the TRED. TRAG. TAGH. TRAL. TRAL. TRAL. The shaded areas define the TREA and TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) parts. TRAD. TRAP) 9. It shows the functional blocks and the interfaces to the TRED. TRAP The following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardware architecture for the TADH.1. The shaded area defines the digital part positioned on the analog module. TAGHE.3 Analog Architecture .9 Transceiver Equipment 9.

1 RX Synth.9 Transceiver Equipment TX Synthesizer 1 TX Synthesizer 2 TX Power Regulation I From ENCT Baseband Modulator Q BBTX Transmitter part Reveiver part Modulator & Up−converter TX Driver Amplifier TX Power Amplifier To combiner Duplexer Clean−up Oscillator TEPAxx/ TEPADHE ADC IF Filter RX Synth. 2 ADC IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RX1 RF Mixer LNA RX0 To DEM on TRED DDC DRCS From Antenna Network TREA Digital part (positioned at analog module) Figure 309: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE) 600 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

It consists of a preamplifier. The control path consists of a 12-bit DAC. Baseband Modulator The baseband modulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into two baseband signals: I and Q. Transmitter Hopping Synthesizers 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The stages comprise the following three components: TX Driver Amplifier The TX Driver Amplifier stage is located on the TREA. There are two hopping synthesizers working in parallel. It consists of a control path and a multiplexing detection path. Clean-up Oscillator The Clean-up Oscillator provides spectrally pure reference clocks required for synchronization of the transmitters. The Transmitter Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for the transmitter. For TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE. An isolator provides output impedance matching and protection for a low voltage FET on the output Power Regulation The Power Regulation stage is located on the TREA. TX Power Amplifier. The detection path consists of a 12-bit ADC and a low-pass filter. It provides the final amplification stage for the transmit RF signal.4 TRE Analog Functional Entities The following table gives a short description of each of the TRE analog functional entities. The modulation is GSMK modulation or EDGE*. Transmitter Amplifiers The TX amplification stages are physically split between the TREA and TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) sections (see Figure 307 . receivers and synthesizers. * for TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP I/Q Modulator and Up-converter The I/Q baseband signals are fed to the up-converter. An EEPROM is used to store data for calibrating the transmitter output power. and a main amplifier. While one synthesizer is active. (For TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP it is implemented on the BBTX). the I/Q baseband signals are directly transformed into the RF frequency band. the other selects the next transmission frequency.3. The TX Power Amplifier is located on the TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) part of the module. It feeds the amplified RF signal to the AN module.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.14 601 / 914 . Figure308 or Figure 309 ). power control circuitry. They are then transformed into the IF frequency band (211 MHz). as required. from the TREA. These baseband signals are fed to the up-converter.1.

TRAL. TADHE. which contains the RF loop coupling function (see Figure 307 and Figure 308 ). The main functions of the receivers for TADH. which contains the RF loop itself TEPAxx (or TREPAxx).14 . It performs analog self-tests. The RF Loop is removed in case of TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE (see Figure 309 ). TRAG. TAGHE. TRAP are: Low noise amplification Down conversion IF filtering IF sampling Digital I/Q demodulation Digital Baseband filtering Digital Decimation. TRADE. While one synthesizer is active. TRDH. The main functions of the receivers for TRGM. TRDM. The RF Loop circuitry generates a frequency of 45 MHz (GSM 850/GSM 900). or 80 MHz (GSM 1900) and converts the transmitter output signals to the receiver frequency.9 Transceiver Equipment Receivers Two receivers are physically located on the TREA. There are two hopping synthesizers working in parallel. TRAD. The RF Loop functionality is physically split between the: TREA. TRPM are: Low noise amplification Down conversion IF filtering IQ demodulation Baseband filtering Baseband digitizing. RF Loop Table 66: TRE Analog Part Functional Entities 602 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TRAGE. Receiver Synthesizers The Receiver Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for the receiver. The RF Loop provides an analog test loop between the transmitter and receivers. the other selects the next receive frequency. 95 MHz (GSM 1800). mainly for start-up test purposes. TAGH.

25 V 5.4. TRADE.1. In the case of medium-power TREs.4.1 V -5. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 VDC and -72 VDC. the DC input voltage V in can be any value between -38. TREPS.6 V 26. Output Voltage + 3.4 TRE Power Supply The TREP.1 Voltages For normal operational requirements. until the TRE power supply switches off.14 603 / 914 .1. TAGH.64 V -11. If the input voltage falls below -38. the power supply switches off automatically. the power supply switches back on. the power supply contains an additional DC/DC converter which provides a + 26 V supply for the high-power analog circuits.95 V -4. fitted slightly below the front panel’s profile to prevent accidental switching. TRAL. TRAD.4 V 25. TRGM.52 V (1): TRDH.3 V + 5. TRAG. If the input is too low. The following table provides the TRE power supply output voltage parameters.95 V 5.3 ON/OFF Switch The TRE module is equipped with an on/off power switch. It is a rocker type switch.36 V -12. TRDM.46 V 12.4 VDC.25 V -5.14 V 11.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. Value 3. TRPM (2): TADH.4. 9. TREPSH are on-board power supplies.4 V 5. TAGHE.1.2 V 4.1 V + 5. TRAP (3): TRAGE. the power supply consists of one DC/DC converter.48 V Max. TADHE Table 67: Output Voltage Parameters 9.2 Fuse The TRE power supply input is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity (15 A).3 V + 12 V -12 V + 26 V TRE Version (1) X X X X X TRE Version (2) X X X X X X TRE Version (3) X Tolerance +/-3 % +/-3 % +/-3 % +/-3 % +/-3 % +/-5 % +/-2 % Min.1. providing all the necessary voltages and currents for the TRE analog and digital functions. For high-power TREs. Value 3. 9. the output is maintained within the specified values. When the input voltage is restored.

0 V 24.0 V -10. 9.1 V + 5. TADHE Table 68: Low Voltage Alarm Thresholds 604 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 V -5. TRAD.0 V 4.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.3 V + 12 V -12 V + 26 V TRE Version (1) X X X X X TRE Version (2) X X X X X X TRE Version (3) X Threshold Min. TRGM.0 V (1): TRDH. an alarm is raised. The following table gives the minimum and maximum threshold values.1. TAGH.6 V -4.4 Remote Switching The TREPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU. 2. The values are measured across the output connector pins. 3. TRADE. TRAG.0 V Threshold Max. TRDM. Output Voltage + 3.6 V 4. This feature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.4 V 10.7 V 4. via the BCB.2 V -4.14 .4.1.5 Low Voltage Alarms If an output voltage falls below a preset threshold value. TRAL. TAGHE. TRAP (3): TRAGE.3 V + 5. TRPM (2): TADH.4.2 V 4.0 V 22.0 V -11.8 V 11.

TAGH. TRPM) or six LEDs (TADH. TADHE. TRADE. TRE Version (1) X X TRE Version (2) X X - LED RSL Color Yellow Status Description RSL connection status On Blinking Off TX Yellow On Link connected Connecting link Link disconnected Transmission status (not BCCH) Transmitting on SDCCH. TAGHE. TRDM. TRAGE.5 Transceiver Equipment LEDs There are eight LEDs (TRDH. TRGM. TRAP) on the front panel. TRAD.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.1. TRAG.14 605 / 914 . TRAL. CBCH or TCH Emitting (normal operation) Not transmitting TRE operational status Blinking Off OP Yellow On Blinking Off BCCH Yellow On Off FAULT Red X X X X X X Fully operational Initializing Not operational BCCH transmission status Transmitting Not transmitting Alarm status (1): two LEDs connected in parallel (2): one LED On Blinking Off 5 V POWER Green On Fatal alarm Non-fatal alarm No alarm Status of the + 5 V power supply + 5 V present X - - - 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. which provide a visual indication of the operational status of the TRE module (see Figures 310 and 311 ). The following table describes each LED and their various operational states.

14 .9 Transceiver Equipment LED Color Status Off Description + 5 V faulty Status of the + 3. TADHE.3 V faulty Status of the TRE power supply output voltages - X On Off (1): TRDH. TRAG. TRAGE. TRDM. TAGH. TRAL. TRGM. TRAD.3 V present + 3. TAGHE. TRADE. TRPM Output voltages present Output voltages faulty - - (2): TADH. TRAP Table 69: TRE LED Descriptions 606 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 V POWER Green On Off PWR Green + 3.3 V power supply TRE Version (1) X TRE Version (2) - 3.

TRGM.TRDH.1. TRDM.6 Transceiver Equipment Front Panel The following figures show the TRE front panels. TRGM. TRPM) 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. and TRPM Camloc Fasteners Equipment Label POWER On/Off Rocker Switch ENABLE TX Transmitter Connector OFF Test Connector TEST Module Extractor RX 0 RX 1 Receiver Connectors RSL LEDs OP 5V TX BCCH FAULT 3. TRDM.6.3V POWER Figure 310: TRE Front Panel (TRDH. 9.1.14 607 / 914 .9 Transceiver Equipment 9.1 Front Panel .

1. Provides the transmit RF Interface to the AN module.3 Connectors The following table describes the TRE front panel connectors. Connector Test TX RX 0. TRAL. TAGH. TAGHE. TADHE.6.TADH. TRAL. TRAG.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. TRAD.2 Front Panel . Provides two receive RF Interfaces from the AN module. TRAD. TRAGE. TAGH. TAGHE. TRAG. Table 70: TRE Front Panel Connectors 608 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. RX 1 Description Provides an interface to the TRE for factory test purposes. TADHE. TRADE. TRADE.6. TRAP) 9. and TRAP Camloc Fasteners Transmitter Connector TX POWER ENABLE On/Off Rocker Switch OFF USB Test Connector TEST Equipment Labels Module Extractor RX0 Receiver Connectors RX1 RSL LEDs 0P PWR TX BCCH FAULT Figure 311: TRE Front Panel (TADH. TRAGE.14 .1.

2.1 Introduction to TWIN TRA The TWIN TRA combines digital baseband and analog RF functions in one module. TWIN TRA medium power module for GSM 900 TGT18.2 TWIN Transceiver Equipment 9. TGTx TGDAx TGPAMx to AGCx from TRA−D TRA−A TGPAMx to AGCx from TGPS Figure 312: TWIN TRA Basic Architecture The TWIN TRA performs the digital functions interface to the SUM and the analog functions interface to the AN module. The following types of TWIN TRA modules are available for the different 9100 BTS variants: TGT08. The architecture is split into three functional blocks: Digital part TRA-D Analog part TRA-A with two power amplifiers TGPA Power supply TGPS. The TWIN TRA contains its own integrated power supply. The TRA-D and TRA-A are implemented in one submodule TGDA. The TWIN TRA basic architecture is shown in the following figure. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. TWIN TRA medium power module for GSM 1800. TWIN TRA medium power module for GSM 850 TGT09.14 609 / 914 .

enh. To/from LALE IQ MUX Monitoring DRC2 SYS TXP ENC BIAS DAC ECPL HPI DSP1 DEC FPGA DSA SDRAM Figure 313: TRA-D Architecture The TRA-D consists of the following functional entities: Signalling and Control Processor (SCP) Digital Signal Processor 1 (DSP1) Digital Signal Processor 2 (DSP2) Field Programable GateArray (FPGA) Flash Memory SDRAM Glue Logic (CPLD) Diversity Receiver Chip (DRC). EDGE. Module DRC1 DEM CLKI BSII HFFI FHL FPGA SYS ADC DEM HPI DSP2 DEM ctrl.14 .9 Transceiver Equipment 9. EDGE TX Synth.2. Modulator/ Filter / Buffer for GSM. FLASH SDRAM Level & Bias TX DAC Ramping CPLD SDRAM Ramp DAC SCP TX Synth.1 TRA-D Architecture RX Synth.2. 610 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Digital Functions 9.2. Module RX Synth.

Debug interface: for TGTx (development and validation only). Base station internal interface: transfers all TCH-related data (traffic and signaling) and internal O&M data. Manual front panel power switch.14 611 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 TRA-D System Interfaces Interface BCB Description Base station control bus: used for Remote Inventory (RI) read write and for controlling and supervision of the power supply. Proprietary interface used as debug and test interface. 9. Used to set BCB physical BCB terminal address and BSII HDLC address.2.3 Signalling and Control Processor The SCP is responsible for the basic initialization including the boot of the DSPs and signalling processing.2. Remote cabling detection: detects DC voltage variations on the TRA-A receiver inputs. It consists of: Power lines for TGD-A DC supply TGPS ON/OFF control of the power supply Alarm handling for the TGPS DC input and DC output signals. It communicates with the O&M and performs the required actions. Also used to generate the push button reset (PB_SRST) with fast OFF/ON sequence. It disables the TGPS for TRA maintenance (security function for actions on RF cables).2. Hook for future interface.2. Module address: provides a unique address to each module in the BTS.2. is a spare interface and can be used for future extensions. ADR RCD BSII FHL HFFI CLKI TDTI MMI RPI Table 71: TRED Interface Descriptions 9. Frequency hopping link: used for downlink baseband frequency hopping. Clock interface: used to distribute the 9100 BTS master clock and the frame clock multiplexed on the same line with the frame number in a serial format.2.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. ENC and DEM. LEDs PSwitch/ Reset Front panel LED control. Remote power interface.4 Digital Signal Processor 1 The DSP1 performs the telecom Layer 1 functions of the TXP.

RX Synthesizer Module Interface to RX synthesizers.9 CPLD Contains the necessary glue logic for the SCP.8 SDRAM SDRAM dedicated working memory for SCP and DSP.2.2.2.5 Digital Signal Processor 2 The DSP1 performs the telecom Layer 1 functions of the DEC and DEM. 612 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2. 9.2. GTA Module Interface to GTA’s.2.2. filter. 9. Level and BIAS Module BIAC control interface to BIAS DAC. Monitoring Module Receives monitoring data.2.7 Flash Memory Flash Memory is used to store the TWIN TRA origin software and the software packages. gain and offset adjust.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.2.2. TX Synthesizer Module Interface to TX synthesizers.14 .2.2. modulator tables. Ramping Module Ramping control interface to ramping DAC.10 DRC Diversity Receiver Chip integrates the interface between the digital and analog baseband part in the receive direction. 9. 9. Performs demultiplexing and storing of the monitoring data in corresponding registers.6 Field Programable Gate Array The FPGA integrates the following functions: TX Data Module Buffer. Power Switch Module Switches power supply with exact timing. 9.

1 TGTx Analog Architecture TX Synthesizer 1 TX Power Regulation I From ENCT Baseband Modulator Q TX Driver Amplifier TX Power Amplifier TGPAM1 TX Synthesizer 2 TX Power Regulation Modulator & Up−converter To combiner TX1 Duplexer I From ENCT Baseband Modulator Q TX Driver Amplifier Transmitter part Reveiver part Modulator & Up−converter TX Power Amplifier TGPAM2 To combiner TX2 Duplexer DRC X 90 ADC MUX IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RX1_0 To DEM on TRED DDC X X 90 ADC RX Synth. 1 From Antenna Network MUX IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RX1_1 DRC X X 90 ADC Clean−up Oscillator MUX IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RX2_0 To DEM on TRED X DDC X 90 ADC RX Synth.14 613 / 914 . 2 From Antenna Network MUX IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RX2_1 X Figure 314: TGTx Analog Architecture 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.2.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.3.3 Analog Functions 9.

from the TGDAx. The modulation is GSMK modulation or EDGE. A Flash is used to store data for calibrating the transmitter output power. The Transmitter Fast Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for the transmitter.3. TX Power Amplifier. I/Q Modulator and Up-converter Transmitter Amplifiers Transmitter Fast Hopping Synthesizers 614 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The TX Power Amplifier is located on the TGPAMx part of the module. and a main amplifier. The TX amplification stages are physically split between the TGDAx and TGPAMx sections (see Figure 314 ).14 . The I/Q baseband signals are fed to the up-converter.2 TGTx Analog Functional Entities The following table gives a short description of each of the TWIN TRA analog functional entities. It feeds the amplified RF signal to the AN module. It consists of a preamplifier.2. Baseband Modulator The baseband modulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into two baseband signals: I and Q. The stages comprise the following three components: TX Driver Amplifier The TX Driver Amplifier stage is located on the TGDAx. It provides the final amplification stage for the transmit RF signal. These baseband signals are fed to the up-converter. as required. Clean-up Oscillator The Clean-up Oscillator provides spectrally pure reference clocks required for synchronization of the transmitters. They are then transformed into the RF frequency band. receivers and synthesizers. It consists of a control path and a multiplexing detection path. Power Regulation The Power Regulation stage is located on the TGDAx. power control circuitry.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.

The following table provides the TRA power supply output voltage parameters.30 V Tolerance +/-3 % +/-3 % +/-3 % +/-2 % +/-2 % +/-2 % Min.1 Voltages For normal operational requirements.48 V + 30.2.5 V + 24 V +. If the input voltage falls below -38.2 V + 5. the DC input voltage V in can be any value between -38.4 TWIN TRA Power Supply The TGPS is an on-board power supply.9 Transceiver Equipment Receivers The main functions of the receivers are: Low noise amplification Down conversion IF filtering BB sampling Digital I/Q demodulation Digital Baseband filtering Digital Decimation. Output Voltage + 1.14 615 / 914 .52 V + 29. Table 72: TWIN TRA Analog Part Functional Entities 9.4 V + 5.4 VDC. When the input voltage is restored.236 V + 3. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.37 V + 23.2. until the TRA power supply switches off. the power supply switches OFF automatically.6 V Table 73: Output Voltage Parameters 9.4.4 VDC and -72 VDC.63 V + 24. Receiver Synthesizers The Receiver Fast Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for the receiver. providing all the necessary voltages and currents for the TWIN TRA analog and digital functions. the output is maintained within the specified values.3 V + 6.2 V + 3.4 V Max.164 V + 3.2.46 V + 6. If the input is too low.3 V + 5. 9. Value + 1. Value + 1.14 V + 6.4.2 Fuse The TWIN TRA power supply input is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity (25 A). the power supply switches back ON.

The values are measured across the output connector pins.0 V + 4.4 V + 25.4 V + 5. 9. Output Voltage + 1.3 ON/OFF Switch The TWIN TRA module is equipped with an ON/OFF power switch.4.9 V Table 74: Low Voltage Alarm Thresholds 616 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. + 1.9 Transceiver Equipment 9.2. It is a rocker type switch.4. The following table gives the minimum and maximum threshold values.5 Low Voltage Alarms If an output voltage falls below a preset threshold value.2.4 Remote Switching The TGPS can be remotely switched ON and OFF by the OMU.3 V + 20. an alarm is raised.5 V Threshold Max.14 .0 V + 22.5 V + 24 V +30 V Threshold Min.4.116 V + 3. fitted slightly below the front panel’s profile to prevent accidental switching.2 V + 3.3 V + 6.7 V + 4.2.3 V + 5. via the BCB. + 0. 9.8 V + 6.3 V + 27.984 V + 2. This feature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated ON/OFF switch.

5 Transceiver Equipments Front Panel The following figures show the TWIN TRA front panel.2.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. Camloc Fasteners Transmitter Connector TX1 RX10 RX11 ENABLE ON/OFF Rocker Switch POWER OFF TX1 LEDs BCH1 OP1 PWR Module Extractor USB Test Connector TEST TX2 BCH2 OP2 FAULT Equipment Labels Transmitter Connector TX2 Receiver Connectors RX20 RX21 Figure 315: TWIN TRA Front Panel 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 617 / 914 .

the ‘Alarms-in-force-lists’ (AIFL) of both TRX are empty Table 75: TWIN TRA LED Descriptions 618 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. waiting for Telecom-configuration Not operational BCCH transmission status Blinking OFF OP1.6 Transceiver Equipments LEDs There are 8 LEDs on the front panel.2. BCH2 Yellow The TRX (x) is fully operational with telecom parameters The TRX (x) has received the Configure Request. The following table describes the LEDs and their various operational states.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. OP2 Yellow ON OFF PWR Green ON OFF FAULT Red ON Blinking OFF The TRX (x) is configured as BCCH-TRX and emitting the BCCH The TRX (x) is configured as TCH-TRX Status of the TRE power supply output voltages The module is powered ON The module is powered OFF Alarm status The TRA has entered the ‘Out-of-order’ state At least one non-fatal alarm is active All alarms are ‘OFF’. LED TX1. but the TRX (x) may be emitting Dummy Bursts or GPRS-bursts The TRX (x) is not emitting RF for TCH TRE operational status ON Blinking Normal Blinking Fast OFF BCH1. which provide a visual indication of the operational status of the TWIN TRA module (see Figure 315). configuration is ongoing The TRX (x) is O&M operational with RSL established. The green “Power” and the red “FAULT” LED are common for both TRX. TX2 Color Yellow ON Status Description Transmission status (not BCCH) At least one dedicated channel is activated on the TRX (x) (CS-traffic onTCH or signalling on SDCCH) No dedicated channel (TCH/SDCCH) is activated on the TRX (x). each column represents one TRX.14 . For the yellow LEDs.

RX11. Provide two transmit RF Interface to the AN module. RX21 Table 76: TWIN TRA Front Panel Connectors 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Provide two receive RF Interfaces from the AN module via the antenna diversity path.9 Transceiver Equipment 9. RX20 Description Provides an interface to the TRE for factory test purposes.2. Connector Test TX1. Provide two receive RF Interfaces from the AN module via the normal path.14 619 / 914 . TX2 RX10.7 Transceiver Equipments Connectors The following table describes the TWIN TRA front panel connectors.

14 .9 Transceiver Equipment 620 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

It includes a drawing of the physical appearance of the module. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.10 Antenna Networks 10 Antenna Networks This section describes and illustrates the Antenna Networks. showing LED indicators.14 621 / 914 . connectors and controls. including the functional blocks and their interfaces.

10 Antenna Networks 10. at the antenna connector. The following figure shows the ANX in more detail. The shaded areas identify the uplink functions.1 ANX The ANX provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and the antenna. using VSWR techniques. it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers. The following figure shows the basic architecture. allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels. On the uplink. TXA Duplexer ANT A RX0A RX1A Splitter RX1B RX0B Splitter TXB Duplexer ANT B Figure 316: ANX Basic Architecture On the downlink. TXA In Uplink Functions TRE RX0A Out LNA Filter RX1A Out Power Splitter A LEDs Gain Control AN Microprocessor VSWR Receiver BSII Duplexer Directional Coupler ANT A Rotary Switch BCB Interface BCB Remote Switching Power Splitter B RX1B Out LNA TRE RX0B Out Uplink Functions TXB In Directional Coupler Duplexer ANT B DC Feed DC/DC Converter −48 VDC Figure 317: ANX Architecture The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals. the ANX connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. ANX module for GSM 900 ANXD. ANX module for GSM 1900. The following types of ANX modules are available for the different 9100 BTS variants: ANXG.14 . The ANX also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured. 622 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. ANX module for GSM 1800 ANXP.

IN is made by a link on the front panel of the AN.1.1 AN Downlink Functions The following tables lists the components which perform the downlink functions. with remotely-adjustable gain control. Connection between the combiner output TX. Downlink Components 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 10. The downlink path functions of the duplexer are provided by a transmit filter. It monitors the VSWR forward and reflected power at the antenna connector. remote DC feed and power splitters.1.14 623 / 914 . which: Provides a transmitter path to the antenna Suppresses unwanted emissions outside the downlink band. The duplexer provides the coupling function for the transmitted and received RF signals. Therefore. especially emissions that fall into the uplink band Prevents downlink signals from blocking the receiver Prevents noise or spurious emissions in the downlink signal from causing interference in the receive band..OUT and the input to the duplexer TX.. The interface provides the DC supply for the optional Tower Mounted Amplifier 2 2 2 2 ANX ANC 2 ANB AGC 2 Duplexer 2 2 2 2 Bias T - - - 2 Table 77: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. of Components Downlink Component Combiner Description The combiner is used to connect two TX inputs to the single antenna. Directional Coupler The antenna directional coupler comprises a dual directional coupler.10 Antenna Networks The uplink channel comprises amplifiers. The duplexer provides a bi-directional signal path. These values are used to measure the return loss of the antenna (refer also to Antenna Network Controller (Section 10. No.4) for a description of the VSWR receiver). a single antenna can be used for the transmission and reception of both downlink and uplink channels.

The uplink path functions of the duplexer are provided by a receive filter. LNA The LNA amplifies the received RF signals. designed to provide good VSWR values. The LNA consists of a balanced amplifier configuration.14 . a single antenna can be used for the transmission and reception of both downlink and uplink channels. for example. A power splitter distributes the received signals to two separate outputs. It also supports the correct grouping of the connectors. when an ANY module is used. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 ANX 2 ANC 2 ANB 2 AGC 2 Power Splitter 2 2 2 2 Table 78: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. Therefore. The attenuator compensates for any losses in the connecting cables. which: Provides an RF path from the antenna to the receiver Suppresses unwanted signals outside the uplink band Prevents downlink signals from entering the receiver.10 Antenna Networks 10. Remote DC Feed The remote DC feed is used for feeding a + 5 V TTL signal to the receiver output ports. This is used to provide an indication of the status of the antenna cable connections. No. The duplexer provides a bi-directional signal path.1. of Components Uplink Component Duplexer Description The duplexer provides the coupling function for the transmitted and received RF signals. noise compression and good reliability. The LNA contains a digital step-attenuator for controlling the overall gain of the antenna network. which simplifies the external cable interconnections for the 9100 BTS modules. Uplink Components 624 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 AN Uplink Functions The following table lists the components which perform the uplink functions.

The switch position is read via coded address lines.10 Antenna Networks 10. frequency band. Signal RI Description The Remote Inventory stores data such as the RIT name. module type.2) for information about the remote DC feed). BCB Interface 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The switch position is associated with the antenna sector. They are switched with an optically-isolated switch on the power supply. diversity and duplexer type. The BCB Interface delivers a TTL level signal which is used by the remote DC feed.1. as listed in the following table. A circuit in the TRE detects the signal and feeds back a status message to the BCB (refer to AN Uplink Functions (Section 10.3 BTS Control Bus Interface The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. The BCB Interface supports remote on/off switching of the DC/DC converters.14 625 / 914 .1. The BCB Interface is connected to a rotary switch on the ANX front panel. in sectorized configurations. Power Supply Control DC Line Supervision Rotary Switch Table 79: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. It interfaces the data and control signals to the BCB.

4 Antenna Network Controller The ANCON is responsible for maintaining the operation of the ANX. via the BCB Interface Remote power on/off.10 Antenna Networks 10. via front panel LEDs. Flash EEPROM Control Signals SRAM Backplane VSWR Receiver TXA Forward Reverse TXB Forward Reverse Input MUX Local Synthesizer Mixer Baseband ADC Glue Logic BSII Interface AN Microprocessor BSII PLL 2048 MHz LNA 1 LNA Control Signals & Alarms LNA 2 CLKII PLL DC Feed & Rotary Switch RI Alarms To LNAs DC/DC Converter On/Off BCB ASIC Subrack Address CLKI Interface BCB Interface RI EEPROM DC Input −48 VDC Figure 318: ANCON Architecture Refer to the following sections for a description of the ANCON functional entities. via the BCB Interface Status display.1. The following figure shows the ANCON architecture. 626 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The shaded areas represent hardware shared by different functions.14 . Its principal functions are: Setting the LNA gain for the assigned TREA receiver Supervising LNA alarms Measuring antenna VSWR Reporting VSWR alarms Selecting the antenna sector Detecting RF cabling status RI.

a Flash EEPROM and an SRAM. The clock outputs are used for the local synthesizer reference clock.10 Antenna Networks 10. for example.4. The local synthesizer is set to the ARFCN frequency by the AN microprocessor. The clock outputs are used for BSII communications.4. The input MUX provides the RF inputs to the VSWR receiver. The VSWR receiver consists of: A local synthesizer Input MUX.4.2 BSII Frame Clock PLL The BSII frame clock PLL recovers the BSII frame clock from the backplane. a break in the antenna coupling. The microprocessor compares the ADC output with known VSWR values. an alarm is raised (refer to Table ANX LED Descriptions (82) ).14 627 / 914 . CLKII Clock PLL 10. It provides a selective input of the forward and reverse power from transmitters A and B. 10. and control of the status LEDs. If the VSWR exceeds predefined thresholds.1. the AN microprocessor and the PLL lock-detect signal. If the reflected power is very high. BSII Frame Clock PLL 10. A local synthesizer generates a signal which is used to compare the baseband frequency with the ARFCN.4 AN Microprocessor The AN microprocessor performs LNA alarm supervision and gain setting.1.4.1. It also provides an interface to the baseband ADC in the VSWR receiver (see Figure 318 ). The AN microprocessor hardware consists of a QUICC microprocessor supported by two memory devices. the ’start conversion’ signal for the baseband ADC and the CLKII lock-detect signal. BSII Frame CLK PLL Switch Loop Filter VCXO Clock Edge Control Signal Glue Logic BSII Comms Microprocessor BSII PLL Lock Detect Figure 319: ANCON. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. the transmitters are shut down to avoid possible damage to equipment. The input MUX operates under the control of the AN microprocessor. High reflected power can be caused by. The VSWR is measured at the output of the duplexer couplers.1. and fed to an RF MUX in the receiver (see Figure 318 ).3 CLKII Clock PLL The CLKII clock PLL recovers the BSII master clock from the backplane. BSII Master CLK PLL Switch Loop Filter VCXO Clock Edge Control Signal Glue Logic Local Synthesizer Start Conversion CLKII Lock Detect Figure 320: ANCON.1 VSWR Receiver The VSWR receiver is a selective VSWR meter which measures the forward and reflected (reverse) power of the transmitters.

628 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5 Glue Logic Glue logic consists of a number of registers. serial number.4. V out + 5. The Glue logic maintains the following interfaces and/or functions: AN microprocessor to the BSII Board/module address register Baseband ADC LNA error register LNA gain adjustment register. Voltage V in Value -38. name. 10. -72 VDC max.10 Antenna Networks 10. etc.6 Remote Inventory Remote Inventory is used to store information about the ANX module (part number. The Glue logic also controls the BSII frame clock PLL and the CLKII master clock PLL with a clock edge control signal (see Figure 319 and Figure 320 ).5.1 VDC +/-3 % + 12 VDC +/-3 % Table 80: ANPS Input/Output Voltage Parameters Normal operation of V out is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in the range -10o C to 70o C.1 Voltages The following table provides ANPS input/output voltage parameters. implemented on a single CPLD device.5. It also converts 5 V TTL signals to 3.1.1.14 . 10.1.5 AN Power Supply The ANPS is a DC/DC converter.2 Fuse The input of the ANPS is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity (15 A). -48 VDC to -60 VDC nom.3 V. 10.1.). providing all the necessary voltages for the ANX/ANC components. It consists of an EEPROM which is connected to the BCB ASIC.4 VDC min. as required by the Power QUICC microprocessor.1.4. 10. The stored information is read via the BCB Interface.

1.0 V Table 81: ANPS Alarm Thresholds 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. via the BCB.1. 30.6 Low Voltage Alarms Alarms are raised if the voltage level is too low.1. 38. 10.3 Protection The ANPS circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarity inversion on its inputs.4 V 4.5. The following table provides the low voltage threshold tolerances for ANPS alarms.1.5. 10. 10.4 V 4.2 V 10.6 V 11.10 Antenna Networks 10.5 Remote Switching The ANPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU.14 629 / 914 . Voltage Vin 5.5.5. This feature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.0 V Threshold Max.1 V 12 V Threshold Min.4 Grounding Ground continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrack backplane which connect to the bus bar ground.

Status of + 5 V power supply.1 LEDs There are eight LEDs on the front panel. IOM link not established. IOM link operational. VSWR status of Antenna 2. + 5 V faulty.14 . VSWR not supervised. Threshold 1 reached. VSWR not supervised. + 12 V present.10 Antenna Networks 10. Good VSWR. Threshold 2 reached. 630 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. + 5 V present. Status of + 12 V power supply. O and M status.1. 10.1. IOM link not established. Threshold 1 reached. Threshold 2 reached. which provide a visual indication of the operational status of the ANX module. Alarm status (both LEDs are connected in parallel) IOM link operational Non-urgent alarm. + 12 V faulty.6. Good VSWR. The following table describes each LED and their various operational states.6 ANX LEDs and Alarms This section provides information on the ANX’s LEDs and Alarms. LED VSWR A Color Yellow On Slow Blinking Fast Blinking Off VSWR B Yellow On Slow Blinking Fast Blinking Off O and M Yellow On Off ALARM Red On Blinking Off 5V Green On Off 12 V Green On Off Table 82: ANX LED Descriptions Status Description VSWR status of Antenna 1.

There are two amplifier alarms for each LNA. Amplifier DC line supervision Table 83: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB Alarm Conditions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. There is a non-urgent and an urgent alarm for each antenna. via the BCB. The remote + 5 V TTL DC feed signal is used for supervision of the RF cabling continuity. One indicates degraded amplifier performance.10 Antenna Networks 10.6. A circuit in the TREA receiver detects the signal and a message is fed back. and the other indicates a total failure.14 631 / 914 . The values are downloaded from the OMU software.2 Alarms The ANX detects the alarm conditions shown in the following table. VSWR The AN microprocessor can raise four alarms when VSWR values exceed certain preset thresholds.1. A total failure is regarded as performance that is below a usable output.

6 dB <-103 dBm <-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc 50 50 50 50 50 50 632 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Return loss at receive port.1. Isolation between transmit ports (A to B/ 1 to 2). Group delay distortion in transmit band. Return loss at transmit port.6 dB <-103 dBm 0. Table 84: ANX Performance Characteristics GSM 900 925 . 1) For ANX with bridge: >16 dB.1910 MHz 45 W maximum 174 200 kHz > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB 1) > 18 dB ≤ 100 ns 374 200 kHz > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB < 18 dB ≤ 100 ns 299 200 kHz > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB < 18 dB ≤ 100 ns >30 dB >30 dB > 30 dB 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB > 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.14 . Isolation between receive port and antenna port.1785 MHz 63 W maximum GSM 1900 1930 . Insertion loss in transmit pass band.6 dB <-103 dBm 0.1. RF input impedance.10 Antenna Networks 10. Number of channels.3 . Bandwidth for each channel.3 . Isolation between receive ports. RF output impedance. Power for each transmitter channel input. Parameter Transmit band.1990 MHz 1850 . Return loss at coupler port. Receive band.1.1.960 MHz 880 .1880 MHz 1710 .7 ANX Performance Characteristics The following table lists the performance characteristics of the ANXs/ANCs.3 .915 MHz 45 W maximum GSM 1800 1805 . Return loss at antenna port. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 W signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in receive band. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 W signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in transmit band.

8 ANX Front Panel The following figure shows the layout and O and M features of the ANX’s front panel.1.10 Antenna Networks 10. Camloc Fasteners Module Extractors RX0AOUT Transmitter Connectors RX1AOUT TXAIN Antenna Connectors ANTA ANTB Equipment Label TXBIN RX1BOUT Receiver Connectors RX0BOUT Rotary Switch VSWRA O&M LEDs ALARM 5V VSWRB ALARM 12V Figure 321: ANX Front Panel 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 633 / 914 .

Provides the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A and the first TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1. if used. or an ANY module. Provides the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B and the second TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1. ANTA ANTB Table 85: ANX Front Panel Connectors 634 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. if used. or an ANY module. one ANX module can be interfaced to two TRE modules. The following table describes the ANX front panel connectors. or an ANY module.14 . Provides the RF interface to/ from two antennas. Therefore. if used. Connector TXAIN TXBIN RX0AOUT RX1AOUT RX0BOUT RX1BOUT Description Provides the RF transmitter interfaces from two TRE modules. A and B. or an ANY module if used.10 Antenna Networks The ANX has two transmitter input connectors and four receiver output connectors on its front panel.

Not all BSS software releases support GSM 850 . ANY module for GSM 900 ANYGH.10 Antenna Networks 10. which is used to expand the capacity of the ANX/ANC. ANY module for GSM 850 ANYP. ANY module for GSM 900 high power ANYL. contact Alcatel-Lucent support. The following figure shows the logical position of the ANY in relation to the TREs and the ANX. ANY module for GSM 1800 high power ANYG. It also indicates the signal paths. Therefore. it is basically an extension unit to the ANX/ANC module. having neither a controller nor a power supply.2 ANY The ANY is a passive RF module. ANY module for GSM 1900. For more information. ANY module for GSM 1800 ANYDH.14 635 / 914 . TRE Antenna ANX/ ANC ANY TRE TRE Downlink Path TRE Antenna ANX/ ANC ANY TRE TRE TRE TRE Uplink Path Figure 322: ANY Relationships 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It is an optional RF distribution device. The following types of ANY modules are available for the different 9100 BTS variants: ANYD.

They are combined in pairs by RF combiners and fed to two TX output connectors. Uplink path. The two concentrated outputs are coupled to the ANX/ANC inputs.1 ANY Functions The following figure shows the method of combining the transmitter outputs and distributing the receiver inputs. Each of the four RF signals from the ANX/ANC passes through a 1:2 RF splitter. These signals are distributed in four groups to the TREs. Each group provides a path for antenna diversity and non-diversity.14 . via external RF cables. Combiner TXA In1 RX0A Out1 RX1A Out1 TXA Out RX0A In ANX/ ANC TXA In2 Power Divider RX1A In RX0A Out2 RX1A Out2 RF Interfaces to/ from Four TRE Modules ANYRI BCB Interface Combiner TXB In1 RX0B Out1 RX1B Out1 TXB Out RX0B In ANX/ ANC TXB In2 Power Divider RX1B In RX0B Out2 RX1B Out2 Figure 323: ANY Architecture 636 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 10.10 Antenna Networks The ANY performs functions for both the: Downlink path The RF signals coming from the TREs enter the ANY at four TX connectors on the front panel. The ANY performs a 4:2 reduction of the TRE transmitter outputs. via external RF cables.2.

from the ANX module. The outputs are connected. Combiner The Combiner consists of two hybrid devices. The Power Dividers split and distribute the received RF signals. providing diversity and non-diversity paths. The combiner takes the TX outputs from four TREs. which is held in a serial EEPROM. The ANYRI components are powered from a DC supply. The BCB interface is located on the subrack backplane. It interfaces the following ANYRI data to the BCB Bus: Inventory Subrack position of the ANY Subrack number. There are two Power Dividers in each ANY module. to the inputs of the TRE module. ANY Remote Inventory The ANYRI is specifically designed to hold Remote Inventory data for the ANY module. Each device concentrates two transmitter outputs into one. Functional Entities Power Dividers BCB Interface 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. each consisting of two splitters. via external cabling. to four outputs.14 637 / 914 . via external cabling. The inventory data. Table 86: ANY. therefore halving the number of antennas required.10 Antenna Networks The ANY consists of the functional entities shown in the following table. which is present on the backplane. It is functionally and physically separate from the RF part of the ANY. is transferred via the BCB ASIC and the BCB Interface. and feeds them to the TXIN connectors on the ANX/ANC. The ANYRI consists of three components: BCB Interface driver BCB ASIC Serial EEPROM.

849 MHz 880 . Number of channels.2 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB ≤ 90 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB < -108 dBm < -108 dBm < -108 dBm < -108 dBm 638 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Insertion loss at transmit band.894 MHz GSM 900 925 . Isolation between transmit and receive ports.915 MHz Power for each transmitter channel input for: Medium power ANY .0.2 dB 3. GSM 850 869 . Isolation between transmit input ports of same network.1785 MHz 45 W maximum GSM 1900 1930 .0.ANYHx. Isolation between receive ports of different networks.0.3 +/.0. Return loss at receive port.3 +/.0.3 +/.3 +/. Return loss at transmit port.2 dB 3.0.10 Antenna Networks 10.3 +/.3 +/.2. 45 W maximum 45 W maximum 124 200 kHz 3.2 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB ≤ 90 dB 299 200 kHz 3.14 .3 +/.2 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB > 85 dB 63 W maximum 174 200 kHz 3.3 +/. Isolation between transmit input ports of different networks.2 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB > 90 dB 63 W maximum 374 200 kHz 3.ANYx.2 ANY Performance Characteristics The following table shows the performance characteristics of the ANY.1910 MHz 45 W maximum Receive band.2 dB 3.1990 MHz 1850 .0.0. Bandwidth for each channel. 824 .1880 MHz 1710 . Parameter Transmit band.960 MHz GSM 1800 1805 . High power ANY .2 dB 3. Isolation between receive output ports of same coupler. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2 x 40 W (2 x 30 W for GSM 1800 and GSM 1900) signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in receive band. Insertion loss at receive band.

14 639 / 914 .10 Antenna Networks Parameter Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2 x 40 W (2 x 30 W for GSM 1800 and GSM 1900) signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in transmit band. GSM 850 < -75 dBc GSM 900 < -75 dBc GSM 1800 < . RF input impedance.75 dBc 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Table 87: ANY Performance Characteristics 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.75 dBc GSM 1900 < . RF output impedance.

2.14 . Camloc Fasteners Mnemonic or Serial Number Label Module Extractor RX0AIN Receiver Connectors RX1AIN RX0AOUT1 Transmitter Connectors TXAOUT TXAIN1 RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 TXAIN2 RX1AOUT2 RX0BIN TXBOUT RX1BIN RX0BOUT1 TXBIN1 RX1BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 TXBIN2 Mnemonic or Serial Number Label RX1BOUT2 Module Extractor Figure 324: ANY Front Panel 640 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.10 Antenna Networks 10.3 ANY Front Panel The following figure shows the layout of the ANY front panel.

2. Each pair of connectors provides two RF receiver interfaces to the TRE receiver inputs RX0 and RX1. RX1AOUT2 RX0BOUT1.3.14 641 / 914 .2 Receiver Connectors The ANY has four receiver input connectors and eight receiver output connectors on its front panel. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The following table describes the ANY transmitter connectors. RX1BOUT1 RX0BOUT2. Connector TXAOUT TXBOUT TXAIN1. Provide four RF interfaces from four TRE transmitter outputs. RX1BOUT2 Table 89: ANY Receiver Connectors Description Provide two RF receiver interfaces from the ANX/ANC receiver outputs RX0AOUT and RX1AOUT.2. Connector RX0AIN RX1AIN RX0BIN RX1BIN RX0AOUT1.1 Transmitter Connectors The ANY has four transmitter input connectors and two transmitter output connectors on its front panel. RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT2. Table 88: ANY Transmitter Connectors 10. TXBIN2 Description Provide two RF interfaces to the transmitter inputs of an ANX/ANC module. The following table describes the ANY receiver connectors.10 Antenna Networks 10. TXAIN2 TXBIN1. Provide two RF receiver interfaces from the ANX/ANC receiver outputs RX0BOUT and RX1BOUT.3.

TXAIN1 TXAIN2 RX0AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT1 RX1AOUT2 RX0BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 RX1BOUT1 RX1BOUT2 TXBIN1 TXBIN2 Combiner Duplexer ANT A Splitter ANCC Splitter Combiner Duplexer ANT B Figure 325: ANC Basic Architecture 642 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.and RX. where the signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers Allow simultaneous transmission and receiving on antennas (duplexer) Provide filtering for the TX. Its tasks are to: Combine the output signals of up to four transmitters and to connect them to up to two antennas Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end.path Supervise the VSWR of the antennas.14 . 10.1 ANC Basic Architecture The following figure shows the basic architecture.3.10 Antenna Networks 10.3 ANC The ANC provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and the antenna.

14 643 / 914 . TX Combiner A TXAIN1 TXAIN2 TXAOUT External Bridge A TXAIN Directional Coupler A Duplexer A LNA Power Splitter A Filter ANTA Load 60 W*) Uplink Functions TRE RX0AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT1 RX1AOUT2 LEDs ANCC AN Microprocessor Gain Control VSWR Receiver BSII BCB Interface Remote Switching RX1BOUT1 RX1BOUT2 TRE RX0BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 LNA Duplexer B Directional Coupler B Power Splitter B DC Feed BCB DC/DC Converter −48 VDC ANTB Uplink Functions TXBIN External Bridge B TXBOUT TXBIN1 TXBIN2 Load 60 W*) TX Combiner B *) 150 W for ANCD/ANCP Figure 326: ANC Architecture 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3.2 ANC Detailed Architecture The following figure shows the ANC in more detail.10 Antenna Networks 10.

If one transmitter is used in each branch A and B. The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals. with remotely-adjustable gain control. it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers. ANC module for GSM 1800 ANCG.14 . Uplink Components (78) . at the antenna connector. interface. ANC module for GSM 900 ANCGP. ANC module for GSM 850 ANCP. From a functional point of view the ANCC is the same as the ANCON used in the ANX (but without the DC/DC converter). Not all BSS software releases support GSM 850 . As the DC/DC is functionally the same as the one used in the ANX.4) . The uplink functions are performed by the components shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. This coupler is connected by an RF cable bridge. The ANC functions. The ANC also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured. controller and power supply are given below. see Antenna Network Controller (Section 10. Therefore for a description of the ANCC.1. the ANC connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.10 Antenna Networks 10.3. It interfaces the data and control signals to the BCB as listed in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. the RF signals pass the duplexers before feeding the antennas. As part of the ANCC there is a DC/DC converter. ANC module for PGSM 900 ANCL. providing all the necessary voltages for the ANC components. refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10. The uplink channel comprises amplifiers. the coupler will be used in front of the duplexer. Downlink Functions The downlink functions are performed by the components shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. using VSWR techniques.1. The following types of ANC modules are available for the different 9100 BTS variants: ANCD. Downlink Components (77) . BCB Interface (79) .5) for its description. On the uplink. ANC module for GSM 1900. The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. For more information. Uplink Functions BTS Control Bus Interface Antenna Network Controller Power Supply 644 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 ANC Description On the downlink. contact Alcatel-Lucent support. If two transmitters are used in a branch. remote DC feed and power splitters.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3.3. (Only active during startup LED test in case of LNA cabling error) ANC is not operational Alarm status Yellow On Red Blinking Off Red On Normal situation (FS/SW running. no alarms present.3. The following table describes each LED and defines their various operational states.4.1 LEDs There are four LEDs on the front panel.4 ANC LEDs and Alarms This section provides information on the ANC’s LEDs and Alarms. 10. module is powered) Non-fatal alarm present No Power presence or LED failure Fatal alarm for the module or module in out-of-order state Off ALARM Yellow/ Red Table 90: ANC/ANB LED Descriptions 10.14 645 / 914 . LED VSWR A Color Yellow On Slow Blinking Fast Blinking Off VSWR B Yellow On Slow Blinking Fast Blinking Off O and M Yellow / Red Yellow On Red On Status Description VSWR status of Antenna 2 VSWR OK Low threshold reached High threshold reached VSWR not supervised VSWR status of Antenna 1 VSWR OK Low threshold reached High threshold reached VSWR not supervised O and M status ANC is in O and M operational mode Not used. which provide a visual indication of the operational status of the ANC module.2 Alarms The ANC detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB Alarm Conditions (83) .4.10 Antenna Networks 10.

Return loss at receive port. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 W signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in receive band.1785 MHz 1850 .1.14 .3 .3 . Return loss at coupler port.5. Group delay distortion in transmit band.3 . Return loss at transmit port. Isolation between transmit ports (A to B/ 1 to 2).849 MHz 880 . Insertion loss in transmit pass band with combiner.4 .1.915 MHz 890 . Isolation between receive ports.960 MHz Receive band.3 .1880 MHz 1930 .5. Return loss at antenna port.1910 MHz 63 W maximum 174 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB ≤100 ns >30 dB 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.10 Antenna Networks 10.960 MHz 935 . Number of channels.6 dB 3. GSM 850 1) 869 . Insertion loss in transmit pass band without combiner.2 dB <-103 dBm Isolation between receive port >30 dB and antenna port. Bandwidth for each channel.5. Parameter Transmit band.6 dB 3. 63 W maximum 124 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB ≤100 ns 2) 4) 4) GSM 1800 GSM 1900 1805 .4 .6 dB 3.6 dB 3.5.894 MHz GSM 900 925 .2 dB <-103 dBm 63 W maximum 299 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 18 dB ≥ 18 dB ≤ 100 ns > 30 dB > 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.4 .1.3. 824 .3 dB <-103 dBm 3) 63 W maximum 374 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 18 dB ≥ 18 dB ≤ 100 ns >30 dB 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.4 .1. >20 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0. RF input impedance. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 W signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in transmit band.915 MHz Power for each transmitter channel input.1990 MHz 1710 .5 ANC Performance Characteristics The performance characteristics of the ANCs are shown in the following table.3 dB <-101 dBm -75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc 50 50 50 50 646 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

1) Valid for ANCL only. Table 91: ANC Performance Characteristics 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 4) For ANCGP 2) For ANC with bridge: >18 dB. GSM 850 50 1) GSM 900 50 GSM 1800 50 GSM 1900 50 3) For ANC with bridge: >16 dB.10 Antenna Networks Parameter RF output impedance.14 647 / 914 .

10 Antenna Networks 10.3.6 ANC Front Panel The following figures show the layout and O&M features of the three versions of the ANC front panel.3.14 . 10.6.Version 1 Camloc Fasteners Transmitter Input Connectors TXAIN1 RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT1 TXAIN2 RF bridge (if TXAIN1 and/or TXAIN2 used) TXAIN RX1AOUT2 RX0AOUT2 VSWRB ALARM Combined Transmitter Output Connector (TXAIN1 + TXAIN2) High Voltage Warning TXAOUT ANTB TXBOUT Antenna Connector ANTA Module Extractor O&M VSWRA TXBIN2 RX0BOUT2 Receiver Connectors RX1BOUT2 RX0BOUT1 RX1BOUT1 TXBIN LEDs TXBIN1 Figure 327: ANC Front Panel Version 1 648 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 ANC Front Panel .

2 ANC Front Panel .6.14 649 / 914 .Version 2 Camloc Fasteners TXAIN1 Transmitter Input Connectors TXAIN2 RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT1 RX1AOUT2 RX0AOUT2 VSWRB ALARM Combined Transmitter Output Connector (TXAIN1 + TXAIN2) Antenna Connector TXAIN TXAOUT ANTA High Voltage Warning TXBOUT RF bridge (if TXBIN1 and/or TXBIN2 used) Module Extractor O&M VSWRA RX0BOUT2 Receiver Connectors RX1BOUT2 ANTB TXBIN LEDs TXBIN2 TXBIN1 RX0BOUT1 RX1BOUT1 Figure 328: ANC Front Panel Version 2 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3.10 Antenna Networks 10.

10 Antenna Networks 10.3 ANC Front Panel .14 .3.6.Version 3 Camloc Fasteners Combined Transmitter Output Connector (TXAIN1 + TXAIN2) TXAIN TXAOUT RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT1 TXAIN1 RX1AOUT2 RX0AOUT2 VSWRB TXAIN2 ALARM RF bridge (if TXAIN1 and/or TXAIN2 used) Transmitter Input Connectors Antenna Connector ANTA ANTB High Voltage Warning Module Extractor O&M VSWRA RX0BOUT2 TXBIN2 LEDs TXBIN1 Receiver Connectors RX1BOUT2 RX0BOUT1 RX1BOUT1 TXBOUT TXBIN Figure 329: ANC Front Panel Version 3 650 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

TXBOUT RX0AOUT1 RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT2 RX0BOUT1 RX1BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 RX1BOUT2 ANTA ANTB Table 92: ANC Front Panel Connectors The following table describes the front panel connector types. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A and the first TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1. if used. ANTB TXAOUT. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B and the fourth TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1.14 651 / 914 . Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas. one ANC module can be interfaced to four TRE modules or two ANY modules. or a first ANY module. A and B.10 Antenna Networks 10.6. TXBIN2 TXAIN. or a second ANY module. if used. TXAIN2 TXBIN1. Connector TXAIN1.3. Description Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from four TRE modules. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B and the third TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1.4 Connectors The ANC has four transmitter input connectors and eight receiver output connectors on its front panel. TXBOUT All other TXnn All RXnn 7/ 16 N female N female SMB ANC Versions 2 and 3 7/ 16 SMA female N female SMB A bridge between both connectors provides the interface between two combined RF transmitter signals and the duplexer of branch A. A bridge between both connectors provides the interface between two combined RF transmitter signals and the duplexer of branch B. Front Panel Connector Types 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A and the second TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1. The following table describes the ANC front panel connectors. or a second ANY module. or two ANY modules. or a first ANY module. if used. Therefore. if used. Table 93: ANC. TXAOUT TXBIN. if used. if used. ANC Version 1 ANTA.

1 AGC Basic Architecture The following figure shows the basic architecture.10 Antenna Networks 10. 10.4 AGC The AGC provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and the antenna.and RX-path Supervise the VSWR of the antennas.14 . where the signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers Allow simultaneous transmission and receiving on antennas (duplexer) Provide filtering for the TX.4. Its functions are to: Combine the output signals of up to four transmitters and to connect them to up to two antennas Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end. TXAIN1 TXAIN2 RX0AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT1 RX1AOUT2 Combiner Duplexer ANT A Splitter LNA VSWR MUX BiasT UC AGCC+ AGCPS RX0BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 RX1BOUT1 RX1BOUT2 TXBIN1 TXBIN2 Combiner Splitter Duplexer ANT B Figure 330: AGC Basic Architecture 652 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

TX Combiner A TXAIN1 TXAIN2 TXAOUT External Bridge A TXAIN Load 150 W Uplink Functions TRE RX0AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT1 RX1AOUT2 LEDs Duplexer A LNA Power Splitter A Filter Directional Coupler A ANTA AGCC AN Microprocessor Gain Control VSWR Receiver BSII BCB Interface Remote Switching RX1BOUT1 RX1BOUT2 TRE RX0BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 LNA Duplexer B Directional Coupler B Power Splitter B DC Feed BCB DC/DC Converter −48 VDC ANTB Uplink Functions TXBIN External Bridge B TXBOUT TXBIN1 TXBIN2 Load 150 W TX Combiner B Figure 331: AGC Architecture 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4.14 653 / 914 .2 AGC Detailed Architecture The following figure shows the AGC in more detail.10 Antenna Networks 10.

14 . the AGCC is the same as the ANCON used in the ANX (but without the DC/DC converter). If one transmitter is used in each branch A and B. If two transmitters are used in a branch. BCB Interface (79) . The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals. AGC module for GSM 900P AGC18.4. As part of the AGCC.3 AGC Description On the downlink. Downlink Components (77) . the RF signals pass the duplexers before feeding the antennas.10 Antenna Networks 10. controller and power supply are given below. AGC module for GSM 900 AGC9P. interface. Downlink Functions The downlink functions are performed by the components shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. Refer to AGC Power Supply (Section 10. The AGC also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured. On the uplink. at the antenna connector. remote DC feed and power splitters. it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.4) . Uplink Components (78) . providing all the necessary voltages for the AGC components. AGC module for GSM 1800. AGC module for GSM 850 AGC9E. It interfaces the data and control signals to the BCB as listed in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. Uplink Functions BTS Control Bus Interface Antenna Network Controller Power Supply 654 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5) for its description. the AGC connects four TRE transmitters to two antennas. The following types of AGC modules are available for the different 9100 BTS variants: AGC08. The AGC functions. The uplink functions are performed by the components shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB. This coupler is connected by an RF cable bridge.4. there is a DC/DC converter.1. see Antenna Network Controller (Section 10. allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels. using VSWR techniques. For a description of the AGCC. The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. the coupler will be used in front of the duplexer. The uplink channel comprises amplifiers. From a functional point of view. with remotely-adjustable gain control.

10 Antenna Networks 10. via front panel LEDs.14 655 / 914 . Measurement of the antenna output power Reporting the antenna output power Tower mounted amplifier (TMA) current supervision. via the BCB Interface Status display. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. via the BCB Interface Remote power on/off. Its principal functions are: Setting the LNA gain for the assigned TREA receiver Supervising LNA alarms Measuring antenna VSWR Reporting VSWR alarms Selecting the antenna sector Detecting RF cabling status RI.4 Antenna Network Geran Combiner Controller The AGCC is responsible for maintaining the operation of the AGC.4.

656 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The following sections describe the AGCC functional entities.10 Antenna Networks The following figure shows the AGCC architecture. BCB Current Sense + Switch 38−78V Power Module SDRAM FLASH RI 12V 5V 3.14 .3V ADC DEBUG1 DEBUG2 DC Ant A DC Ant B SCP 12V TMA A 12V TMA B BSII0 BSII1 BSII MUX HDLCU IO ANT SEL For Rev RES I2C LNA/RXMUX I2C HFFI HFFI Synthesizer ACU ANLU ADC X Receiver RF Figure 332: AGCC Architecture The AGCC interfaces provides the following interfaces: On the backpanel connector: BCB BSII CLKI DEBUG1 DEBUG2. On the LNA/RXMUX connector: LNAC RCD RF TMAFD.

10 Antenna Networks 10. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 BSII Frame Clock PLL The BSII frame clock PLL recovers the BSII frame clock from the backplane. BSII Frame CLK PLL Switch Loop Filter VCXO Clock Edge Control Signal Glue Logic BSII Comms Microprocessor BSII PLL Lock Detect Figure 333: AGCC.4. The VSWR receiver consists of: A local synthesizer Input MUX. and fed to an RF MUX in the receiver (see Figure 332 ). The input MUX operates under the control of the AN microprocessor. If the VSWR exceeds predefined thresholds. The clock outputs are used for the local synthesizer reference clock.4. It provides a selective input of the forward and reverse power from transmitters A and B. the transmitters are shut down to avoid possible damage to equipment. A local synthesizer generates a signal which is used to compare the baseband frequency with the ARFCN.4. the AN microprocessor and the PLL lock-detect signal. The local synthesizer is set to the ARFCN frequency by the AN microprocessor. and control of the status LEDs.4. 10. The input MUX provides the RF inputs to the VSWR receiver.1 VSWR Receiver The VSWR receiver is a selective VSWR meter which measures the forward and reflected (reverse) power of the transmitters.4. It also provides an interface to the baseband ADC in the VSWR receiver (see Figure 332 ). CLKII Clock PLL 10.14 657 / 914 . The microprocessor compares the ADC output with known VSWR values. If the reflected power is very high.4. the ’start conversion’ signal for the baseband ADC and the CLKII lock-detect signal. BSII Master CLK PLL Switch Loop Filter VCXO Clock Edge Control Signal Glue Logic Local Synthesizer Start Conversion CLKII Lock Detect Figure 334: AGCC. BSII Frame Clock PLL 10. a break in the antenna coupling. an alarm is raised (refer to Table AGC LEDs and Alarms (Section 10.4 Signal Control Processor The SCP performs LNA alarm supervision and gain setting.4. The VSWR is measured at the output of the duplexer couplers. The SCP hardware consists of a microprocessor supported by two memory devices.6) ). High reflected power can be caused by. a Flash EEPROM and an SDRAM. The clock outputs are used for BSII communications.4. for example.3 CLKII Clock PLL The CLKII clock PLL recovers the BSII master clock from the backplane.4.

14 .5 Antenna Network Logic Unit The Antenna Network Logic Unit (ANLU) contains the following blocks: Clock and Reset Control Unit (CRCU) MicroBlaze System HDLC Unit BSII Multiplexer HFFI Unit Register Unit I2C Unit Analog Control Circuit (ACU).4. MikroBlaze System I2C BSII0 BSII1 BSII MUX HDLCU IO IO ACU ACU REGU HFFI HFFI CLK−CLK2x/Fx BSII_CLK40M96 CLK25M6 CLKII_CLK26M CLK_SDRAMIN CRCU CLK_SDRAM DOWN UP CLKII_WIN_PLL BSII_WIN_PLL Figure 335: ANLU Architecture 658 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4.10 Antenna Networks 10.

14 659 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. This latched alarm signal is used to switch off the 12V directly by hardware to prevent a DC/DC converter shutdown. Physical address from backpanel for RI ASIC address setting and for SCP BSII address setting.7 TMA Feeding and Current Supervision The power for the two TMA will be switched on and off by means of an ANLU GPIO signal and a MOSFET. The downconverter can handle receive frequency in the GSM. 10. The data output is serial at a word rate of 270. which includes a direct conversion QPSK demodulator.4. It gives an over current alarm if the current is higher than 300mA. the PLL and synthesizer. DCS or PCS band.8 BCB and RI The main functions are: ISL. The current supervision is done with an Overcurrent Protection Circuit.4. which controls the AGCC power supply and supervises the signals of input and output voltages Radio Cabling Detection (RCD).83kHz for each I and Q. which includes a current sense amplifier. which provides access via BCN on the ISL interface to RI ASIC RI EEPROM. which is a serial EEPROM that stores information about AGCC module Remote Power Interface (RPI). The I/Q baseband output signal of the downconverter is sampled and converted using a dual sigma-delta ADC.4.10 Antenna Networks 10. Control data will be entered by means of an I2C interface.6 Receiver The front-end receiver is realized by one device.4.4. a comparator and an internal voltage reference. The ADC is interfaced by the Analog Control Unit (ACU). The RF signal from the LNA board is fed directly into the downconverter. 10.4. The current sense IC also has a comparator with a latched output. The current sense amplifier output is converted by a 10 bit ADC and the SCP can read the actual current value via the I2C bus. BCB bus powered if DC/DC converter is off or self powered if DC/DC converter is on ADR. which allows automatic uplink RF cabling detection and supervision BCB_Vdd.

-48 VDC to -60 VDC nom. 660 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. as required by the microprocessor. name.10 Remote Inventory Remote Inventory is used to store information about the AGC module (part number.4.14 . Voltage V in Value -38.3 VDC +/-3 % + 5. implemented on a single CPLD device.1 Voltages The following table provides AGCPS input/output voltage parameters. serial number.4.4. 10.).4.9 Glue Logic Glue logic consists of a number of registers. 10. The stored information is read via the BCB Interface. It consists of an EEPROM which is connected to the BCB ASIC.5. -72 VDC max.4.1 VDC +/-3 % + 12 VDC +/-3 % Table 94: AGCPS Input/Output Voltage Parameters Normal operation of V out is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in the o o range 0 C to 70 C. It also converts 5 V TTL signals to 3. V out +3. The Glue logic also controls the BSII frame clock PLL and the CLKII master clock PLL with a clock edge control signal (see Figure 333 and Figure 334 ).3 V. etc. The Glue Logic maintains the following interfaces and/or functions: AN microprocessor to the BSII Board/module address register Baseband ADC LNA error register LNA gain adjustment register. providing all the necessary voltages for the AGC components.4. 10.5 AGC Power Supply The AGCPS is a DC/DC converter.10 Antenna Networks 10.4 VDC min.

5 Remote Switching The AGCPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU.2 Fuse The input of the AGCPS is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity. 10.3 Protection The AGCPS circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarity inversion on its inputs.10 Antenna Networks 10. Voltage Vin 3. via the BCB.3 V 5. The following table provides the low voltage threshold tolerances for AGCPS alarms.0 V Threshold Max. 10.4.7 V 4.4 Grounding Ground continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrack backplane which connect to the bus bar ground.6 Low Voltage Alarms Alarms are raised if the voltage level is too low.4.0 V 4. 10.14 661 / 914 .5.5.4.4 V 3. 10.4. 38.5.1 V 12 V Threshold Min.5.2 V 10.0 V Table 95: AGCPS Alarm Thresholds 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 V 11.4 V 2. 30.5.4. This feature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.

The following table describes each LED and defines their various operational states. 662 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. LED ON Color Green On Off OM / ALARM Yellow/ Red Yellow On Yellow Blinking Red Blinking Red On Table 96: AGC LED Descriptions Status Description Power status Module is switched on Module is switched off Alarm status OM operational status (normal operation) Not defined LNA. TMA or O&M alarm VSWR alarm on port A or B 10. which provide a visual indication of the operational status of the AGC module. 10.2 Alarms The AGC detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB Alarm Conditions (83) .6 AGC LEDs and Alarms This section provides information on the AGC’s LEDs and Alarms.4.4.6.6.14 .10 Antenna Networks 10.1 LEDs There are two LEDs on the front panel.4.

894 MHz 824 .5.4.5.849 MHz 80 W maximum 124 200 kHz GSM 900 P GSM 900 E GSM 1800 1805 . Return loss at antenna port.4 . Bandwidth for each channel.1. Isolation between receive ports.4 . Power for each transmitter channel input.6 dB 3.5. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 28 W signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in receive band.915 MHz 880 . Number of channels. Insertion loss in transmit pass band without combiner.1.10 Antenna Networks 10.1 General Performance Characteristics The performance characteristics of the AGCs are shown in the following table.3 dB <-100 dBm 3. Group delay distortion in transmit band.6 dB Return loss at receive port. Receive band.2 dB <-100 dBm <-36 dBm <-36 dBm <-36 dBm <-36 dBm 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 663 / 914 .960 MHz 925 .4.5. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 28 W signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in transmit band.7 AGC Performance Characteristics 10.1880 MHz 1710 .3 dB <-100 dBm 3. Isolation between receive port and antenna port.3 .3 . > 16 dB Return loss at transmit port.915 MHz 80 W maximum 80 W maximum 80 W maximum 124 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 18 dB ≤100 ns >30 dB >20 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.6 dB 174 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 18 dB ≤100 ns >30 dB >20 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.3 dB <-100 dBm 3.3 . GSM 850 869 .3 .4 .960 MHz 890 .7. Isolation between transmit ports (A to B/ 1 to 2).1785 MHz 935 .4 . Parameter Transmit band. Insertion loss in transmit pass band with combiner.1. > 16 dB > 18 dB ≤100 ns >30 dB >20 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.6 dB 374 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 18 dB ≤ 100 ns >30 dB >20 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.1.

RF output impedance. GSM 850 50 50 GSM 900 P 50 50 GSM 900 E 50 50 GSM 1800 50 50 Table 97: AGC Performance Characteristics 664 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.10 Antenna Networks Parameter RF input impedance.14 .

Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RX gain > 64 Atten (dB) without RX gain > 79 A14 890 915 ANTA -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2 ANTB -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2 No.14 665 / 914 . the variant ’B’ has the following specific values: TX to RX isolation: TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2 TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2 No.10 Antenna Networks TX to RX isolation: TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2 TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2 No. A20 (Out of band rejection) A21 (RX passband) Start Freq (MHz) 816 Stop Freq (MHz) 880 Attenuation (dBc) > 30 890 915 LNA Passband gain 10.7. A20 (Out of band rejection) A21 (RX passband) Start Freq (MHz) 816 Stop Freq (MHz) 888 Attenuation (dBc) > 30 896 915 LNA Passband gain 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RX gain > 64 Atten (dB) without RX gain > 79 A14 896 915 ANTA -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2 ANTB -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2 No.2 Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant ’B’ Compared to general perfomrance characteristics.

7. A20 (Out of band rejection) A21 (RX passband) Start Freq (MHz) 816 Stop Freq (MHz) 888 Attenuation (dBc) > 50 902 915 LNA Passband gain 666 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant ’C’ Compared to general perfomrance characteristics.14 .4. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RX gain > 64 Atten (dB) without RX gain > 79 A14 902 915 ANTA -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2 ANTB -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2 No. the variant ’C’ has the following specific values: TX to RX isolation: TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2 TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2 No.10 Antenna Networks 10.

4.Version 1 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 AGC Front Panel .4.14 667 / 914 .Version 1 Camloc Fasteners Antenna Connector TXAIN1 ANTA RX0AOUT1 RX1AOUT1 TXAIN2 Transmitter Input Connectors TXAIN RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT2 TXAOUT RF bridge (if TXAIN1 and/or TXAIN2 used) Combined Transmitter Output Connector (TXAIN1 + TXAIN2) Hot Surface Warning RX1BOUT2 Module Extractor RX0BOUT2 TXBIN2 Receiver Connectors TXBIN RX1BOUT1 RX0BOUT1 ON TXBIN1 LEDs OM/ALARM TXBOUT High Voltage Warning ANTB Figure 336: AGC Front Panel .8 AGC Front Panel The following figures show the layout and O&M features of the three versions of the AGC front panel.8. 10.10 Antenna Networks 10.

4.14 .2 AGC Front Panel .Version 2 Camloc Fasteners Antenna Connector TXAIN1 ANTA RX0AOUT1 RX1AOUT1 TXAIN2 Hot Surface Warning Transmitter Input Connectors RF bridge (if TXAIN1 and/or TXAIN2 used) Combined Transmitter Output Connector (TXAIN1 + TXAIN2) RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT2 TXAIN RX1BOUT2 RX0BOUT2 TXBIN2 TXBIN TXAOUT Module Extractor Receiver Connectors TXBIN1 RX1BOUT1 RX0BOUT1 ON LEDs OM/ALARM TXBOUT High Voltage Warning ANTB Figure 337: AGC Front Panel .8.10 Antenna Networks 10.Version 2 668 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

10 Antenna Networks

10.4.8.3 Connectors
The AGC has four transmitter input connectors and eight receiver output connectors on its front panel. Therefore, one AGC module can be interfaced to four TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used. The following table describes the AGC front panel connectors. Connector TXAIN1, TXAIN2 TXBIN1, TXBIN2 TXAIN, TXAOUT TXBIN, TXBOUT RX0AOUT1 RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT2 RX0BOUT1 RX1BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 RX1BOUT2 ANTA ANTB Table 98: AGC Front Panel Connectors The following table describes the front panel connector types. Connector ANTA, ANTB TXAOUT, TXBOUT All other TXnn All RXnn Type 7/ 16 female N female or SnapN N female or SnapN SMB male A bridge between both connectors provides the interface between two combined RF transmitter signals and the duplexer of branch A. A bridge between both connectors provides the interface between two combined RF transmitter signals and the duplexer of branch B. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A and the first TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a first ANY module, if used. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A and the second TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a first ANY module, if used. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B and the third TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a second ANY module, if used. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B and the fourth TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a second ANY module, if used. Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas, A and B. Description Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from four TRE modules, or two ANY modules, if used.

Table 99: AGC, Front Panel Connector Types

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

669 / 914

10 Antenna Networks

10.5 ANB
The ANB provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and the antenna. Its tasks are to: Combine the output signals of up to two transmitters and to connect them to up to two antennas Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where the signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers Allow simultaneous transmission and receiving on antennas (duplexer) Provide filtering for the TX- and RX-path Supervise the VSWR of the antennas.

10.5.1 ANB Basic Architecture
The following figure shows the basic architecture.
TXAIN RX0AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT1 RX1AOUT2 RX0BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 RX1BOUT1 RX1BOUT2 TXBIN Duplexer ANT A

Splitter

ANCC

Splitter

Duplexer

ANT B

Figure 338: ANB Basic Architecture

670 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.2 ANB Detailed Architecture
The following figure shows the ANB in more detail.

TXAIN

Uplink Functions
TRE RX0AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT1 RX1AOUT2 LEDs Duplexer A LNA Power Splitter A Filter

Directional Coupler A ANTA

ANCC
AN Microprocessor Gain Control VSWR Receiver BSII

BCB Interface Remote Switching RX1BOUT1 RX1BOUT2 TRE RX0BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 LNA Duplexer B Directional Coupler B Power Splitter B DC Feed

BCB

DC/DC Converter

−48 VDC

ANTB

Uplink Functions
TXBIN

Figure 339: ANB Architecture

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

671 / 914

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.3 ANB Description
On the downlink, the ANB connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. On the uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers. The following types of ANB modules are available for the different 9100 BTS variants: ANBD, ANB module for GSM 1800 ANBG, ANB module for GSM 900. In each branch A and B, the RF signals pass the duplexers before feeding the antennas. The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals, allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels. The ANB also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured, at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques. The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control, remote DC feed and power splitters. The following table describes the downlink and uplink functions, the interface, the controller and the power supply for the ANB. Downlink Functions The downlink functions are performed by the components shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components (77) . The uplink functions are performed by the components shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components (78) . The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. It interfaces the data and control signals to the BCB, as listed in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, BCB Interface (79) . From a functional point of view, the ANCC is the same as the ANCON used in the ANX (but without the DC/DC converter). For a description of the ANCC, see Antenna Network Controller (Section 10.1.4) . As part of the ANCC, there is a DC/DC converter, providing all the necessary voltages for the ANB components. As the DC/DC is functionally the same as the one used in the ANX, refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5) for its description.

Uplink Functions

BTS Control Bus Interface

Antenna Network Controller

Power Supply

672 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.4 ANB LEDs and Alarms
This section provides information on the ANB’s LEDs and Alarms. There are four LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of the operational status of the ANB module. As the LED functionality is the same as in ANC, refer to ANC/ANB LED Descriptions for more information The ANB detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB Alarm Conditions (83) .

10.5.5 ANB Performance Characteristics
The following table shows the performance characteristics of the ANBs. Parameter Transmit band. Receive band. Power for each transmitter channel input. Number of channels. Bandwidth for each channel. Return loss at receive port. Return loss at transmit port. Return loss at antenna port. Return loss at coupler port. Group delay distortion in transmit band. Isolation between receive port and antenna port. Isolation between receive ports. Isolation between transmit ports (A to B/ 1 to 2). Insertion loss in transmit pass band. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 W signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in receive band. Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 W signals at one transmit port and 50 on receive port in transmit band. RF input impedance. RF output impedance. 1) For ANB with bridge: >16 dB. Table 100: ANB Performance Characteristics GSM 900 925 - 960 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 63 W maximum 174 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB 1) > 18 dB ≤100 ns >30 dB >20 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB <-101 dBm GSM 1800 1805 - 1880 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 63 W maximum 374 200 kHz > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB < 18 dB ≤ 100 ns >30 dB >20 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB <-101 dBm

<-75 dBc

<-75 dBc

50 50

50 50

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

673 / 914

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.6 ANB Front Panel
The following figures show the layout and O&M features of the two versions of the ANB front panel.

10.5.6.1 ANB Front Panel - Version 1
Camloc Fasteners

Transmitter Input Connector RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT1

TXAIN VSWRB ALARM

ANTB

High Voltage Warning

Antenna Connector ANTA Module Extractor O&M VSWRA

TXBIN

LEDs

Receiver Connectors

RX0BOUT1 RX1BOUT1

Figure 340: ANB Front Panel Version 1

674 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.6.2 ANB Front Panel - Version 2
Camloc Fasteners

Transmitter Input Connector RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT1

VSWRB ALARM TXAIN

Antenna Connector

ANTA High Voltage Warning

ANTB

Transmitter Input Connector TXBIN

Module Extractor O&M VSWRA

LEDs

Receiver Connectors

RX0BOUT1 RX1BOUT1

Figure 341: ANB Front Panel Version 2

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

675 / 914

10 Antenna Networks

10.5.6.3 Connectors
The ANB has two transmitter input connectors and four receiver output connectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANB module can be interfaced to two TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used. The following table describes the ANB front panel connectors. Connector TXAIN TXBIN RX0AOUT1 RX1AOUT1 RX0AOUT2 RX1AOUT2 RX0BOUT1 RX1BOUT1 RX0BOUT2 RX1BOUT2 ANTA ANTB Description Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from two TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A and the first TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A and the second TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B and the third TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1. Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B and the fourth TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1. Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas, A and B.

Table 101: ANB Front Panel Connectors The following table describes the front panel connector types. ANTA, ANTB TXAIN, TXBIN All RXnnOUT 7/ 16 N female SMB male

Table 102: ANB, Front Panel Connector Types

676 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

10 Antenna Networks

10.6 GSM/UMTS Co-Siting
GSM cabinets and UMTS cabinets can be installed at the same site. Normally all antenna feeder cables between antennas (A and B) and BTSs have to be installed separately for GSM and UMTS, as shown in the following figure.
Separate Antenna Feeders A + B for GSM and UMTS

GSM Antennas A+B

UMTS Antennas A+B

AB

AB

ANCx

ANRU

BTS
GSM 850/900/1800

Node B
UMTS

Figure 342: GSM/UMTS Co-Siting With the help of diplexer filters at both ends of the feeder cables, the GSM (850/900/1800) band and the UMTS band can be decoupled in order to use the same feeder cable for both services. The following figure shows the principle.
Double−Diplexer

Diplexer B Diplexer A Antennas A + B GSM Antennas A + B UMTS

Diplexer Double−Diplexer
AB AB

ANCx

ANRU

Common Antenna Feeders

BTS
GSM 850/900/1800

Node B
UMTS

Figure 343: GSM/UMTS Co-Siting with Diplexers and Common Feeders

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

677 / 914

10 Antenna Networks

10.6.1 Diplexer Functional Description
The following figure shows the block diagram of the diplexer. The base station feeder cable of the GSM and UMTS part is connected to the according BTS port of the diplexer. The signal passes the bandpath filter of the diplexer and is available at the antenna connector.
Antenna

Diplexer

GSM Bandpath

UMTS Bandpath

TMA BIAS Circuit

GSM BTS

UMTS BTS

Figure 344: Diplexer, Block Diagram The insertion losses of the filters are as low as possible to achieve the best noise figures in the uplink and low attenuation in the TX downlink. GSM and UMTS bandpath filters provide following features: Suppression of spurious and noise signals from the transmitter(s) out of band Suppression of intermodulation product(s) Rejection of harmonics of the transmitter(s) Isolation of the UMTS branch (GSM part) or GSM branch (UMTS part). The following table shows the out-of-band attenuations of the diplexer filters. Filter GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 UMTS 824 - 960 >60 dB GSM 850 Band GSM 900 Band UMTS 1710 - 1880 >60 dB GSM 1800 Band Frequency (MHz) 1920 - 2170 Attenuation >60 dB Remark UMTS Band

Table 103: Diplexer Filters Out-of-Band Attenuations

678 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

10 Antenna Networks

The UMTS branch is additionally equipped with a Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA) BIAS circuit. This BIAS circuit allows the DC power supply (12 VDC) of a TMA using the RF feeder cable. The appropriate power distribution unit (PDU) is part of the ANRU module. The GSM part of the diplexer is decoupled from the UMTS BIAS circuit part. If both branches (GSM and UMTS) are equipped with a tower mounted amplifier, this external diplexer cannot be used. In this case, all necessary equipment of a TMA (inclusive of feeders) has to be installed twice.

10.6.2 Diplexer Mechanical Design
The external diplexers are designed for indoor and outdoor applications. They are fully purchased items. Therefore mechanical design, dimensions and weight depend on the selected manufacturer and cannot be described here in detail. Moreover, there are additional differences in dimensions between GSM 850/900/UMTS and GSM 1800/UMTS diplexers, depending on the frequencies used. The following figure shows a GSM 1800 (DCS)/UMTS double-diplexer (for antennas A and B) as an example.

Side View

RF Connector DCS ANT UMTS Ground Connector DCS UMTS Mounting Flanges (with holes)

ANT

Bottom View

Figure 345: Diplexer, Mechanical Design (Example) The diplexer has six RF connectors (7/16 female) for connecting GSM BTS, UMTS BTS and antennas. A ground connector is available to connect the diplexer to ground. Two mounting flanges are used to fix the diplexer to immobile equipment near the BTSs.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

679 / 914

10 Antenna Networks

10.6.3 Environmental Conditions
The external diplexer housings provide the necessary environmental and safety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019 -1-4 class 4.1E. The minimum ambient temperature is -45 C, humidity up to 100 % at + 38 C. Earthquake is according to ETS 300 019 -2-3.

10.6.4 EMC Requirements
The EMC requirements are derived from ETS 300 342-3/phase 2, TS 25.104 and EN 55022.

680 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

11 Temperature Control

11 Temperature Control
This section describes and illustrates temperature control. It also includes illustrations of the FANU and FACB.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

681 / 914

11 Temperature Control

11.1 Cooling System
The 9100 BTS is equipped with a forced-air cooling system. Depending on the 9100 BTS variant, the cooling system can consist of up to three RITs; see the following figure. The three RITs are: FANU FACB TFBP.
TFBP FANU

FACB

Ribbon Cable Connectors Subrack Backplane

FACB FANU

Figure 346: Cooling System Components A FANU consists of a moulded-plastic frame containing two fan blowers (see Figure 348 ). The FANU is connected to the TFBP or subrack backplane. Three FANUs are controlled by one FACB. The FACB monitors the fans and provides power and digital speed control of the FANUs. The FACB is fitted on a TFBP or a subrack backplane, as required. A special case exists where two FANUs are fitted as a pair below the ACSR used in 9100 BTS outdoor configurations. These two FANUs are controlled by the BCU2 contained in the ACSR. The BCU2 monitors the fans and provides power and digital speed control of the FANUs. A feature of the cooling system is its ability to control the front and back rows of fans, independently of each other (see Figure 349 ). This enables the temperature inside the cabinet to be regulated more precisely. It also extends the life of the fans and keeps noise levels to a minimum.

682 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

11 Temperature Control

11.1.1 Fan Units
The FANUs are usually installed in groups of three. The exception is where they are fitted as a pair below the ACSR used in variant 2 of the 9100 BTS outdoor configurations. The FANUs are normally situated below the subracks containing TREs. Additional FANUs can be installed at the top of the equipment rack; see the following figure.
Air Outlet

Top FANUs

TREs

FANUs Air Inlet

ANs

Air Inlet TREs

FANUs Air Inlet

Figure 347: Subrack Air Circulation The fan blowers are driven by electronically-commutated motors. These are protected against reverse polarity and blocking due to an obstruction in the fan blades. Air is taken from the front of the cabinet and forced through the subracks. The fans force the air in an upwards direction to dissipate the heat generated by the subrack modules (mainly the TREs). The FANUs at the top of the rack assist air flow by pulling the air through the rack and expelling it through grills at the top of the cabinet. Dummy panels are used to fill the FANU positions that are not equipped (indoor racks). These provide an air outlet at the back of the subrack.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

683 / 914

11 Temperature Control

11.1.1.1 FANU Appearance
The FANU consists of a moulded-plastic frame for mounting the two fan blowers. The fan blowers are manufactured from fiberglass reinforced plastic. They are fixed in the moulded-plastic frame with a simple snap-in mechanism. The FANUs are inserted in guide rails, at the bottom of the subrack, and locked in position with a latch. The electrical connection is achieved with a connector, fitted to the rear of the FANU, which plugs-in to the subrack backplane. The following figure shows a three-dimensional image of the FANU.
Blowers

Power Connector

Latch

Handle

Guide Rails

Figure 348: FANU

11.1.1.2 Fan Blower Operational Parameters
The following table lists the operational parameters for the fan blowers. Parameter Type: Max. air flow: Acoustic noise: Operating voltage: Description PAPST 4318/2, version 113 170 m / h <45 dB 20 VDC to 40 VDC
3

Table 104: Fan Blower Unit Operating Parameters

684 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

11 Temperature Control

11.1.2 Fan Control
The principal function of the FACB is to control the fan speed of the front and back rows of fans, independently of each other. Each FACB controls three FANUs. The BCU2 performs the functions of the FACB in the special case of a pair of FANUs fitted below the ACSR used in variant 2 of the 9100 BTS outdoor configurations. The FACB has the following functionality: Performs control and supervision of the fans Detects the fan module and its date of manufacture Supplies power to the fans Provides an interface to the BCB. The following figure shows the FACB architecture in block diagram form.
−38 VDC to −72 VDC Fuse Filtering and Surge Limiting DC/DC Converter (Front Row) 20 VDC to 40 VDC

RI EEPROM

Input Voltage Monitoring

Regulator

FANUs BCB Interface FACB Controller Backplane Address

Voltage Monitor and Limiter

Front Row Fans

Back Row Fans

Fan Speed

Regulator

DC/DC Converter (Back Row)

20 VDC to 40 VDC

Figure 349: FACB Architecture The FACB activates the fans within the temperature range: -40 C to + 70 C. However, at very low temperatures, in the range -40 C to -10 C, the fans operate without digital speed control.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

685 / 914

11 Temperature Control

11.1.2.1 FACE Functional Entities
The FACB consists of the functional entities described in the following table. FACB Controller The controller is responsible for the following interfaces: I/O for the BCB Backplane address Date of FANU manufacture Fan speed control output Remote on/off switching RI EEPROM. BCB Interface All OMU messages, such as fan alarms, are communicated via the BCB interface. The BCB also provides an interface to the Remote Inventory EEPROM, via the FACB controller. The Remote Inventory EEPROM stores information about the FACB. The FANU power supply consist of two on-board DC/DC converters. These provide power independently for the front and back rows of fans. The DC/DC converters operate on an input voltage in the range -38 VDC to -72 VDC. This is converted to a variable output in the range + 20 VDC to + 40 VDC. The input to the FACB DC/DC converters is protected from accidental reverse polarity, transient voltages and surges. Fan Speed Control The output of the DC/DC converters is monitored and dynamically regulated by the FACB controller PWM techniques. A square wave output signal from the fans indicates rotational speed of the fans. The PWM signal is used to control the fan speed.

RI EEPROM

Power Supply

Table 105: FACB Functional Entities

11.1.2.2 Fuse
The input of the FACB is protected by a fuse with a high breaking capacity (3.5 A).

11.1.2.3 Date Coding
Three pins on the FANU connector are hard-wired to provide a fixed code for the year of manufacture. The code is read from the FACB controller.

686 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

11 Temperature Control

11.1.2.4 Remote Switching
The front and back row DC/DC converters can be remotely switched on and off, independently of each other. The fan speeds for each row can also be adjusted. This function is implemented by the OMU, via the BCB Interface to the FACB.

11.1.2.5 FACB Appearance
The FACB is a small PCB which is fitted to the STASR backplane between the third and fourth module connectors (see Figure 283 ). The following figure shows the layout of the FACB; only the principle components are marked. The layout is shown so that the FACB can be easily identified.
Connector

Connector

Controller

Figure 350: FACB Component Layout

11.1.2.6 Alarms
Two independent fan alarms, for the front and back rows, can be raised under the control of the FACB. An alarm is raised when a fan-related output voltage is out of tolerance. The following table lists the voltage threshold-tolerances before an alarm is raised. Voltage U Front U Back Threshold Min. 13 V 13 V Threshold Max. 20 V 20 V

Table 106: Alarm Threshold Voltages

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

687 / 914

11 Temperature Control

11.1.3 Top Fan Unit
In some 9100 BTS variants, additional FANUs at the top of the cabinet assist the air circulation. They are connected to the TFBP, which provides the electrical and signaling interface between the FANUs and the FACB. The TFBP is mounted at the top of the cabinet, on the rear wall. It is powered from a -48/ -60 VDC external power source, via the cabinet bus bar. The following figure shows the TFBP connector layout.
FANU Connectors

Connector Identity

X110

X111

X112

Equipment Label

X117 X116

FACB

X113

0V Ribbon Cable Connector
X100

Ground −48 VDC

Pin 1, Row A

Figure 351: TFBP Connector Layout The following table lists and describes the TFBP connectors. Connector X110, X111, X112 X116 X117 Type R 1/3, male Description FANU Connectors

2 x 6-pin Header, male 2 x 16-pin Header, male

The FACB connectors are linked to the FANU connectors via the TFBP printed wiring. Ribbon Cable Power

X100 X113

C 64 M DIN 41612, male 3 x FASTON

Table 107: TFBP Connectors

688 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.11 Temperature Control 11. The fan controller is contained in a control box. all fans operate at maximum speed and an alarm is raised. Air Outlet Temperature Sensor HEX2 Inner Fans Warm Air Inlet Air Outlet Warm Air Inlet HEX2 Heat Sink Cassette HEX2 Mounting on Alternative Cabinet Door Subrack Door Outer Compartment Inner Compartment Subrack FANU Outer Fans Cool Air Outlet Air Inlet Cool Air Outlet FANU HEX2 Control Box Air Inlet Figure 352: HEX2 Main Components HEX2 is a box which is divided into inner and outer compartments by a heat sink cassette. If the temperature sensor fails or is disconnected. the inner fans switch on and operate at minimum speed. As the temperature rises further. fan speed increases for both the inner and outer fans. The following figure shows the main components of HEX2. When the internal temperature reaches 30 C. The airflow within the cabinets is isolated from the outside environment. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and returned to the cabinet as cool air. The outside air is drawn into the outer compartment by the outer fans. It maintains the correct air environment within the cabinets. The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outside environment by the air stream in the outer compartment. It cools the internal air by transferring heat to the outside environment. the outer fans switch on and also operate at minimum speed. When the internal temperature reaches 20 C.2 HEX2 HEX2 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner compartment by the inner fans. HEX2 is mounted on the inside of the compartment door.14 689 / 914 .

It illuminates when there is an alarm Version with four LEDs (version ADBA) There are the following four LEDs on the module: High/Low Temp: Temperature sensor failure.2. where the reason for the alarm is shown in more detail (but only on the module itself): Versions with one LED (versions ADAC. 11.2. inside temperature above 70 C or below -60 C Heater: Heater failure (not used. not correlated to HEAT2) Ext.1 LED(s) There are three versions of HEX2. Fan: Internal fan failure. 690 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 . two with only one LED and another one with four LEDs. ADCA) There is one LED on the front of the control box. Fan: External fan failure Int.2 Alarms HEX2 raises an alarm when: A fan fails The temperature sensor is disconnected The controller is faulty The internal temperature reaches 70 C.11 Temperature Control 11. Note that the alarm raised by HEX2 is only an accumulative alarm.

14 691 / 914 . Alarm out.2. Fan Int.2.3 Appearance The following figure shows the front and the two possible rear views of HEX2. Connector DC Connector Alarm Connector Type 9-pin Sub-D male 9-pin Sub-D female Description 48 VDC power in. Fan Figure 353: HEX2 Appearance 11.4 Connectors The following table describes the HEX2 control box connectors. Equipment Labels Air Outlet Temperature Sensor Connector LEDs: LED Fan Fan Cables Control Box Alarm Connector DC Connector Door Side Rear Side (Version ADCA) *) *) Version ADCA has only the left fan and internal cabling Rear Side (Version ADBA) High/Low Temp Heater Ext.11 Temperature Control 11. Table 108: HEX2 Front Panel Connectors 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

The outside air is drawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and returned to the cabinet as cool air.14 . The core consists of thermal conductive material allowing heat exchange between both circuits. HEX3 is mounted on the inside of the MBOE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat to the outside environment. Fresh air cooling is not allowed in the outdoor BTSs. The following figure shows the main components of HEX3 and HEX4. Temperature Sensor HEX3/4 Air Outlet Inner Fan Warm Air Inlet HEX2 Heat Sink Cassette Door Outer Compartment Subrack Inner Compartment FANU Outer Fan Cool Air Outlet Air Inlet Figure 354: HEX3/HEX4 Main Components HEX3 and HEX4 are boxes which are divided into inner and outer circuits by a heat sink cassette (core). 692 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.11 Temperature Control 11. They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets. The air is circulated by one blower in each circuit. Therefore the airflow within the cabinets is isolated from the outside environment. The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outside environment by the air stream in the outer compartment. HEX4 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1 door.3 HEX3/HEX4 HEX3 and HEX4 are used in Multistandard BTS outdoor versions. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner compartment by the inner fan.

5 Test Port The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator (variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operation depending on the temperature.11 Temperature Control 11. red LED is lit. An alarm is raised when: At least one blower fails Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited The controller is faulty Temperature exceeds 70 C Temperature drops below -60 C (sensor failure).1 Blower Rotation Control The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in a control unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit. the outer fans switch on and also operate at minimum speed.. the blower speed accelerates continuously up to the maximum specified rotation.g. 11. sensor disconnected or short circuited) causes the following response: All blowers are rotating at full specified speed Alarm occurs. Failure of the temperature sensor (e. The red LED is lit in case of an alarm. After switch-on. 11. 11. The control of blowers is an internal function of the heat exchanger.3.2 Temperature Sensor The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inlet of the inner circuit.3.14 693 / 914 . When the internal temperature reaches 20 C. As the temperature rises further. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. When the internal temperature reaches 30 C. The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs.3. The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs. The speed is then regulated down to the specified ramp.3.3.3 Alarm There is one alarm output per heat exchanger. fan speed increases for both the inner and outer fans. The inner and outer blower are independent of each other.4 LED An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located on the lid (inner circuit side). the inner fans switch on and operate at minimum speed. 11.

3 A) Alarm out.11 Temperature Control 11.14 . Door Side Front Side DCand Alarm Connector Fan Air Outlet* LED Test Connector Equipment Labels Air Inlet (Protected with grid) Air Inlet* Water Outlet Air Outlet (Protected with grid if necessary) Fan Guiding tubes for fixing bolts * Grid not necessary Figure 355: HEX3/HEX4 Appearance 11.7 Connectors The following table describes the HEX3/HEX4 connectors. 9-pin Sub-D female Table 109: HEX3/HEX4 Connectors 694 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3. Note that the HEX3 and HEX4 only differ in width and weight.3.6 Appearance The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the HEX3/HEX4. Connector DC and Alarm Connector Test Connector Type 9-pin Sub-D male Description 48 VDC power in (fuse T6. Connection of external temperature simulator.

Parameter Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg) HEX3 1150 450 150 24 HEX4 1150 600 150 28 Table 110: HEX3/HEX4 Mechanical Parameters 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 695 / 914 .11 Temperature Control 11.8 Mechanical Parameters The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX3/HEX4.3.

It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and returned to the cabinet as cool air. It maintains the correct air environment within the cabinets. It cools the internal air by transferring heat to the outside environment. The outside air is drawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan. Therefore the air flow within the cabinets is isolated from the outside environment. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner compartment by the inner fan.4 HEX5 HEX5 is used in Compact BTS Outdoor (CBO) versions. The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outside environment by the air stream in the outer compartment.11 Temperature Control 11. The air is circulated by one blower in each circuit. The core consists of thermal conductive material allowing heat exchange between both circuits. Temperature Sensor HEX5 Air Outlet Inner Fan Warm Air Inlet HEX2 Cooling Core Door Outer Compartment Inner Compartment 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 Subrack FANU Cool Air Outlet Outer Fan Air Inlet Figure 356: HEX5 Main Components HEX5 is a box which is divided into inner and outer circuits by a heat sink cassette (core). Fresh air cooling is not allowed in the outdoor BTSs. HEX5 is mounted on the inside of the CBO door. The following figure shows the main components of HEX5. 696 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

An alarm is raised when: At least one blower fails Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited The controller is faulty Temperature exceeds 70 C Temperature drops below -60 C (sensor failure). sensor disconnected or short circuited) causes the following response: All blowers are rotating at full specified speed Alarm occurs. 11.4 LED An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located on the lid (inner circuit side): The red LED is lit flashing in case of a temperature/temperature sensor alarm The red LED is lit continuously in the case of a fan alarm. red LED is lit flashing.5 Test Port The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator (variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operation. the inner fans switch on and operate at minimum speed. depending on the temperature.4. Then the speed is regulated down to the specified ramp. The inner and outer blower are independent of each other. fan speed increases for both the inner and outer fans. Failure of the temperature sensor (e.4.3 Alarm There is one alarm output per heat exchanger.1 Blower Rotation Control The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained within a control unit which is assembled inside the inner circuit. after the failure occurs. The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds. 11. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. As the temperature rises further. 11.11 Temperature Control 11.14 697 / 914 .4. 11.4.. When the internal temperature reaches 30 C. After switch-on.2 Temperature Sensor The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inlet of inner circuit. When the internal temperature reaches 20 C.g.4. The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds. The control of the blowers is an internal function of the heat exchanger. after the failure occurs. the blower speed accelerates continuously up to the maximum specified rotation. the outer fans switch on and also operate at minimum speed.

11 Temperature Control 11.14 . Connection of external temperature simulator.7 Connectors The following table describes the HEX5 connectors.6 Appearance The following figure shows the front and the rear views of HEX5. Table 111: HEX5 Connectors 698 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4. Connector DC and Alarm Connector Test Connector Type 9-pin Sub-D male 9-pin Sub-D female Description 48 VDC power in (fuse T6.3 A) Alarm out.4. Door Side Rear Side Air Outlet Air Intlet Grill Guard Equipment Labels DC and Alarm Connector Test Connector Air Intlet Air Outlet Water Outlet Figure 357: HEX5 Appearance 11.

14 699 / 914 .11 Temperature Control 11.8 Mechanical Parameters The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX5.4. Parameter Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg) HEX5 800 450 130 13 Table 112: HEX5 Mechanical Parameters 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

14 . Temperature Sensor HEX8/9 Air Outlet Inner Fan Warm Air Inlet HEX2 Heat Sink Cassette Door Outer Compartment Subrack Inner Compartment FANU Outer Fan Cool Air Outlet Air Inlet Figure 358: HEX8/HEX9 Main Components HEX8 and HEX9 are boxes which are divided into inner and outer circuits by a heat sink cassette (core). 700 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets. The air is circulated by one blower in each circuit. HEX9 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1E door. The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outside environment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The core consists of thermal conductive material allowing heat exchange between both circuits. The outside air is drawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan.5 HEX8/HEX9 HEX8 and HEX9 are used in Multistandard BTS Evolution outdoor versions. They cool the internal air by transferring heat to the outside environment. HEX8 is mounted on the inside of the MBOEE door. Therefore the airflow within the cabinets is isolated from the outside environment. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and returned to the cabinet as cool air. The following figure shows the main components of HEX8 and HEX9.11 Temperature Control 11. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner compartment by the inner fan. Fresh air cooling is not allowed in the outdoor BTSs.

When the internal temperature reaches 30 C. As the temperature rises further. the outer fans switch on and also operate at minimum speed. fan speed increases for both the inner and outer fans.5. After switch-on. 11. The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs. Then the speed is regulated down to the specified ramp.3 Alarm There is one alarm output per heat exchanger.. The red LED is lit in case of an alarm. sensor disconnected or short circuited) causes the following response: All blowers are rotating at full specified speed Alarm occurs.5. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Failure of the temperature sensor (e. When the internal temperature reaches 20 C. The inner and outer blower are independent of each other.5.4 LED An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located on the lid (inner circuit side).5.5 Test Port The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator (variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operation. the inner fans switch on and operate at minimum speed.g.1 Blower Rotation Control The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in a control unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit. The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs.11 Temperature Control 11. depending on the temperature. red LED is lit. 11. An alarm is raised when: At least one blower fails Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited The controller is faulty Temperature exceeds 70 C Temperature drops below -60 C (sensor failure). The control of blowers is an internal function of the heat exchanger.2 Temperature Sensor The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inlet of the inner circuit. 11.5. 11. the blower speed accelerates continuously up to the maximum specified rotation.14 701 / 914 .

11 Temperature Control 11.14 .6 Appearance The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the HEX8/HEX9. Connection of external temperature simulator.7 Connectors The following table describes the HEX8/HEX9 connectors.3 A) Alarm out. Note that the HEX8 and HEX9 only differ in width and weight. Connector DC and Alarm Connector Test Connector Type 9-pin Sub-D male Description 48 VDC power in (fuse T6. 9-pin Sub-D female Table 113: HEX8/HEX9 Connectors 702 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Door Side Front Side DCand Alarm Connector Fan Air Outlet* LED Test Connector Equipment Labels Air Inlet (Protected with grid) Air Inlet* Water Outlet Air Outlet (Protected with grid if necessary) Fan Guiding tubes for fixing bolts * Grid not necessary Figure 359: HEX8/HEX9 Appearance 11.5.5.

5.11 Temperature Control 11. Parameter Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg) HEX8 1250 450 150 24 HEX9 1250 600 150 28 Table 114: HEX8/HEX9 Mechanical Parameters 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 703 / 914 .8 Mechanical Parameters The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX3/HEX4.

DAC9 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1E door.14 .11 Temperature Control 11. the DAC system uses fresh air to cool the equipment inside of the cabinet.6 DAC8/DAC9 DAC8 and DAC9 are used in Multistandard BTS Evolution outdoor versions. In these cut-outs filter mats are mounted. The ambient air is drawn by fans through the hydrophobic filter mat and blown into the BTS through cut-outs directly below the subracks. The following figure shows the main components of DAC8 and DAC9. DAC8 is mounted on the inside of the MBOEE door. where the air inside of the cabinet is separated from ambient air. They cool the internal air by transferring heat to the outside environment. 704 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets using fresh air cooling. DAC8/9 Air Outlet Air Outlet with Filter Mat and Grid Subrack FANU FANU Fan Door Air Inlet with Filter Mat Fresh Air Channel Subrack FANU FANU Fan Subrack FANU FANU Air Inlet Figure 360: DAC8/DAC9 Main Components The DAC8 and DAC9 consists of metal boxes with an air inlet and an air outlet in the front side as shown in Figure 360. The air outlet is protected against intrusion of water and insects by a filter mat and an additional fly screen. Compared to HEX system. There it arises to the top of the BTS and leaves it by the air outlet.

The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds after the failure occurs.6.4 Alarm There is one alarm output per cooling unit. Failure of the temperature sensor (e.3 Filter Mats The inlet filter is a cassette consisting of a frame mounted on the door containing a filter mat. 11. An alarm is raised when: At least one blower fails Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited The controller is faulty Temperature exceeds 70 C Temperature drops below -60 C (sensor failure).g.6 Test Port The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator (variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operation depending on the temperature. When the internal temperature reaches 35 C and is below 55  C the fan speed increases linearly up to 2500 rpm. The outlet fleece filter mat is additional protected by a fly screen. The control of blowers is an internal function of the direct air cooling module. When the internal temperature reaches 30 C. sensor disconnected or short circuited) causes the following response: All blowers are rotating at full specified speed Alarm occurs.1 Blower Rotation Control The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in a control unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit.14 705 / 914 .6.2 Temperature Sensor The temperature sensor is mounted on the controller PBA. the fans switch ON and operate at 1500 rpm speed. 11. The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds after the failure occurs.6. The filter mat is made of hydrophobic material but not gas proof. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. fan speed increases up to maximum speed of 2900 rpm. As the temperature rises further.6. 11. 11.11 Temperature Control 11. The red LED is lit in case of an alarm.6. red LED is lit.5 LED An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located on the lid (inner circuit side). 11.6..

Door Side Front Side DC and Alarm Connector RS232 LED Test Connector Air Outlet with Filter Mat and Grid Equipment Labels Air Outlet Fan Air Inlet with Filter Mat Air Outlet Air Barrier Air Outlet Fan Air Outlet Figure 361: DAC8/DAC9 Appearance 706 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6.11 Temperature Control 11.8 Appearance The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the DAC8/DAC9.14 .. 11. Note that the DAC8 and HEX9 only differ in width and weight.6.7 RS232 The RS232 port allows the connection of an external terminal to readout the fan speed.

3 A) Alarm out.6.6. Parameter Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg) DAC8 1229 449 150 18 DAC9 1229 600 150 22 Table 116: DAC8/DAC9 Mechanical Parameters 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 707 / 914 . Connection of external temperature simulator.9 Connectors The following table describes the DAC8/DAC9 connectors.10 Mechanical Parameters The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the DAC8/DAC9.11 Temperature Control 11. 9-pin Sub-D female RJ45 Table 115: DAC8/DAC9 Connectors 11. Connector DC and Alarm Connector Temperature and Test Connector RS232 Type 9-pin Sub-D male Description 48 VDC power in (fuse T6. For readout the fan speed.

From there. another HEAT2 is fitted. its AC supply is provided by the socket which is part of connector X2.7 HEAT2 HEAT2 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. The switch completes the circuit for the AC supply to the heater and fan. HEAT2 is an electro-mechanical assembly fitted to the floor. It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls below a predefined value. it is routed to the heater and fan (via connector X2 in the case of variant AA). The following figure shows the circuit schematic. The fan blows air through the heating elements of the heater. in the case of variant AA. The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10 C.11 Temperature Control 11. The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. If the temperature of the heater assembly exceeds 90 C.14 . the side wall or beneath the HEX4 (MBO1) of each compartment in the outdoor 9100 BTS. the thermostat within the heater assembly opens a switch. 708 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. This breaks the AC circuit to the heater elements. Internal Thermostat External Thermostat 10 AA Variant: 600 W CA Variant: 950 W Heater Fan X1 X2 (Variant AA only) Figure 362: HEAT2 Circuit Schematic The 230 VAC supply enters HEAT2 at connector X1. If.

Heater Assembly External Thermostat Connector X2 Fan Connector X1 Side View Grille Screw Temperature Adjuster Top View Figure 363: HEAT2 Variant AA Appearance 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.7.11 Temperature Control 11.1 Variant AA The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT2 variant AA.1. Each variant is shown separately.14 709 / 914 .1 Appearance The HEAT2 has two variants: variant AA and variant CA.7. 11.

7. optional HEAT2.14 . Table 117: HEAT2 Connectors 710 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Connectors The following table describes the HEAT2 connectors. Connector X1 X2 (Variant AA only) Description Provides the 230 VAC input. Provides the 230 VAC source for a second. Grid Connector X1 Heater Fan Thermostat (Thermostat fixed at 10 oC with safety varnish) Angle Side View Connection Cable L = 800 m Connection Area Label High Voltage DIN/ ISO 3864 (Size 20 mm) Equipment Labels Top View Figure 364: HEAT2 Variant CA 11.7.11 Temperature Control 11.1.2 Variant CA The following figure shows the side and top view of HEAT2 variant CA.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. the thermostat within the heater assembly opens a switch. If the temperature of the heater assembly exceeds 70 C. The switch completes the circuit for the AC supply to the heater. Integral Temperature Limiter External Thermostat 10 °C 500 W Heater X1 L PE N Figure 365: HEAT3 Circuit Schematic The 230 VAC supply enters HEAT3 at connector X1. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.11 Temperature Control 11.8 HEAT3 HEAT3 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS Compact versions. It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls below a predefined value. This breaks the AC circuit to the heater elements. The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10 C. HEAT3 is an electrical assembly fitted between the bottom plate of the Compact BTS Outdoor and the lowest subrack. The heater is protected by an internal thermostat.14 711 / 914 .

2 Connectors The following table describes the HEAT3 connectors.14 . Connector X1 Heater Plate Heating Mat Labels Figure 366: HEAT3 Appearance 11. Table 118: HEAT3 Connectors 712 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.11 Temperature Control 11.8. Connector X1 Description Provides the 230 VAC input.1 Appearance The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT3.8.

The switch completes the circuit for the DC supply to the heater. The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. the thermostat within the heater assembly opens a switch. This breaks the DC circuit to the heater elements. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.11 Temperature Control 11. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.9 HEAT4 HEAT4 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS Compact versions. It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls below a predefined value. The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10 C. If the temperature of the heater assembly exceeds 70 C. Figure 367: HEAT4 Circuit Schematic The -48 VDC supply enters HEAT4 at power connector.14 713 / 914 . HEAT4 is an electrical assembly fitted between the bottom plate of the Compact BTS Outdoor and the lowest subrack.

9.14 .9. Power Connector Heating Mat Heater Plate Labels Figure 368: HEAT4 Appearance 11.11 Temperature Control 11.2 Connectors The following table describes the HEAT4 connectors. 714 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 Appearance The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT4. Connector Power connector Table 119: HEAT4 Connectors Description Provides the -48 VDC input.

It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls below + 10 C.11 Temperature Control 11.10 HEATDC HEAT DC is an electrical air heater used in DC 9100 MBS GSM outdoor versions. HEAT DC is an electro-mechanical assembly fitted to the side wall or beneath the HEX4 (MBO1) of each compartment in the DC 9100 MBS GSM outdoor. the temperature limiter opens a switch. The fan blows air through the heating elements of the heater. The switch completes the circuit for the DC supply to the heater and fan.14 715 / 914 . From there. This breaks the DC circuit to the heater elements. The following figure shows the circuit schematic. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The heater is protected by an internal temperature limiter in the case of fan failure.48 VDC supply enters HEAT2 at connector X1. Figure 369: HEAT DC Circuit Schematic The . The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10 C. it is routed to the heater and fan. If the temperature of the heater assembly exceeds 110 C.

48 VDC input.1 Appearance The following figure shows the side and top views of HEATDC.11 Temperature Control 11.14 .10. Table 120: HEATDC Connectors 716 / 914 Air flow 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2 Connectors The following table describes the HEATDC connectors.10. Connector X1 Description Provides the . Grid Heater Fan Angle Side View Connector X1 Label Hot Surface DIN/ISO 3864 (Size 20 mm) Top View Figure 370: HEATDC Appearance 11.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12 Power Supplies and Distribution This section describes the power supplies and distribution.14 717 / 914 . showing the connectors and controls. It also includes a drawing of the physical appearance of the module. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

The five output connectors provide the AC power source for the PM08s. Output 1 /3 PE N L1/L3 PE N L1/L3 PE N Input 1 /3 L1/L3 L1/L2 L1/L2 Relay PE N L1/L2 PE N L1/L1 −20 Temperature Sensor PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 L1/L1 N PE PE = Permanent Earth Figure 371: ACIB Circuit Schematic The ACIB input connector is connected to the ACSB where provision is made for 1ø or 3ø operation.1 ACIB The ACIB is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It distributes 230 VAC to the five PM08s. L2 or L3. If the cabinet AC supply is: 230 VAC 1ø . L1. When the HEAT2s raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20 C. the relay is activated and the DC supplies are produced. When the temperature is above -20 C. The PM08s connected to the output connectors share the L1. The HEAT2s prevent the internal cabinet temperature from falling to -20 C thereafter. L2 and L3 phases. AC power is available to the HEAT2s. the AC supply to the PM08s is automatically switched off. 400 VAC 3ø .each of the three live wires in the input connector receives a different phase. as shown in the above figure.14 . When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C. However. It distributes its AC input to five output connectors. The AC input is connected to the five AC outputs via a relay which is controlled by a temperature sensor. 718 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The PM08s connected to the output connectors also receive the phase L1. This means that the 0/ -48 VDC supply is not available and the 9100 BTS cannot operate. The ACIB is housed in the SRACDC. single phase L1. there is no AC supply to the PM08s. The following figure shows the circuit schematic. If the temperature is below -20 C when the 9100 BTS is first switched on. the AC input is connected to the five AC output connectors.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. the SUMP switches on the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational.each of the three live wires in the input connector receives the same. If the temperature in the ACIB falls below a predefined level.

Camloc Fastener Warning Label AC In Equipment Labels 5 4 AC Out 3 2 1 Figure 372: ACIB Front Panel 12.5 Description Provides a 230 VAC 1ø or 400 VAC 3ø input.14 719 / 914 .1 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the ACIB.1.1.2 Connectors The following table describes the ACIB front panel connectors. Table 121: ACIB Front Panel Connectors 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Provides 230 VAC 1ø outputs for the five PM08s.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Connector AC In AC Out 1.

2 LPFC The LPFC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor cabinets.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. 720 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Lightning Protectors AC Line Filter AC in Terminals L N PE L N PE Metal Box Bolt M6 Figure 373: LPFC Block Diagram The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet is supplied with 230 VAC 1 ø. The cover of the LPFC has a window which allows checking the lightning protection modules without removing the cover. The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFC.14 . The LPFC is mounted above the cables entry compartment. Its functions are: Connection of AC mains to the BTS Lightning protection of the AC mains In Line filtering.

3 LPFMT The LPFMT is used in multistandard BTS outdoor tropical cabinets. Lightning Protectors AC Line Filter AC in Terminals L L N N PE PE Metal Box Bolt M6 Figure 375: LPFMT Block Diagram The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet is supplied with 230 VAC 1phase.14 721 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Its functions are: Connection of AC mains to the BTS Lightning protection of the AC mains In Line filtering. AC Out to ACUC Recess in cover Equipment Labels Handle LPFC Cover AC Mains In Bolt M8 for GND Figure 374: LPFC Top View 12. The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFMT.12 Power Supplies and Distribution The following figure shows the LPFC top view.

If the cabinet AC supply is: 230 VAC 1 ø . i.14 .12 Power Supplies and Distribution The LPFMT is mounted on the left upper side of the MBO1T cabinet..4 LPFM The LPFM is used in multistandard BTS outdoor cabinets. The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFM. The following figure shows the LPFMT top view. PROTECT. single phase L1. ACout to ACMUT INDICATION LIGHTN.e. Lightning Protectors AC Line Filter AC in Terminals L3 L3 L2 L1 N PE L2 L1 N PE Metal Box Bolt M6 Figure 377: LPFM Block Diagram The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet can be supplied with 230 VAC 1 ø or 400 VAC 3ø.the three AC In terminals are connected by a bridge. 722 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. LPFCT Cover Recess in cover L Bolt M6 for GND Information. Equipment and Warning Lables Figure 376: LPFMT Top View 12. each of the three live wires receives the same. Its functions are: Connection of AC mains to the BTS Lightning protection of the AC mains In Line filtering. The cover of the LPFMT has a window which allows checking the lightning protection modules without removing the cover.

14 723 / 914 .12 Power Supplies and Distribution 400 VAC 3 ø . Equipment and Warning Lables Figure 378: LPFM Top View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.each of the three live wires at the AC In terminals receives a different phase. The LPFM is mounted on the left upper side of the MBO1 cabinet. L2 or L3. The cover of the LPFM has a window which allows checking the lightning protection modules without removing the cover. PROTECT. LPFM Cover L2 L3 ACout to ACMU Recess in cover L1 Bolt M6 for GND Information. INDICATION LIGHTN. The following figure shows the LPFM top view. L1.

5 LPFU The LPFU is used in outdoor 9100 BTS configurations. L2 or L3. Block Diagram The outdoor BTS can be supplied with 230 VAC 1 ø or 400 VAC 3ø. Lightning Protectors AC Line Filter AC in Terminals L3 L3 L2 L1 N PE L2 L1 N PE Metal Box Bolt M6 Figure 379: LPFU Version AA. i.e.. Top View (with Cover Removed) 724 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. If the cabinet AC supply is: 230 VAC 1 ø . The following figure shows the block diagram of version AA (three phases). each of the three live wires receives the same. Glands PE AC in Terminals PG29 PG16 L1 Lightning Protectors AC Filter 3 phases L2 L3 N N 1 2 3 Bolt M6 Figure 380: LPFU Version AA.14 .12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.the three AC In terminals are connected by a bridge. L1.each of the three live wires at the AC In terminals receives a different phase. The following figure shows the LPFU top view with its cover removed. Its functions are: Connection of AC mains to the BTS Lightning protection of the AC mains In Line filtering. single phase L1 400 VAC 3 ø .

L3.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. The ACDUE box is divided in two parts: Filter and OVP function in the bottom AC-distribution and MCB in the top. N. 1 for heaters) 1 x 10 A (for light and service socket) AC power switch thermostat * Closed at temperature above -20 C. open below -20 C. PE) AC line filtering Surge protectors Overcurrent protection devices Thermostat.6 ACDUE The AC Distribution Unit is used for MBO1E cabinets. Related to ACDUE variants. 70 dB at 10 MHz to 1 GHz 4 x 16 A (3 for rectifiers. rated current Line filtering.1 Technical Characteristics Parameter Line filtering. leakage current Line filter attenuation ACDUE 3 x 12 A Max. hysteresis max. 12. only for version 3BK 27266 AAxx.14 725 / 914 . the following option exists: 3BK 27266 AAxx includes Service light 3BK 27266 ABxx without service light. The ACDUE contains: AC cable access in bottom inside the Filter/OVP part 3-phase input (L1. L2. For this version the service light is an optional item.6. 4 mA/phase at 230 V 30 db at 1 MHz. 10 K Overcurrent protection devices * : Available only for ACDUE version 3BK 27266 AAxx 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

2 ACDUE Views Figure 381: ACDUE Version 3BK 27266 AAxx Views Figure 382: ACDUE Version 3BK 27266 ABxx Views 726 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.14 .

When the HEAT2s raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20 C. The HEAT2s prevent the internal cabinet temperature from falling to -20 C thereafter. heaters/air conditioning and Service Lights (with AC power sockets) Switching the AC lines to the connected modules by using circuit breakers.7 ACMU The ACMU is used in multistandard BTS outdoor configurations. N Temperature Sensor N −20 distributed to all modules Circuit Breakers F5 L1 AC Mains In 3 Phase AC−Mains− Connection L2 F3 L3 F2 F4 K1 L1 to PM12/1 L2 to PM12/2 L3 to PM12/3 L2 to Heat2/Airc. there is no AC Supply to the PM12s. AC power is available to the HEAT2. L3 F1 N to Service Light and AC Power Socket PE PE distributed to all modules Figure 383: ACMU Block Diagram The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DC converters via a relay which is controlled by a temperature sensor.14 727 / 914 . The following figure shows the block diagram. Its functions are: Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters. the SUMA switches on the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS become operational. When the temperature is above -20 C. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. If the temperature is below -20 C when the 9100 BTS is first switched on. the AC input is connected to the three AC output connectors. This means that the 0/ -48 V supply is not available and the 9100 BTS cannot operate. When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. However. the relay is activated and the DC supplies are produced.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution The following figure shows the ACMU front panel.8 ACMUT The ACMUT is used in multistandard BTS outdoor tropical configurations. N N AC Mains In 1 Phase AC−Mains− Connection L Circuit Breaker F5 L distributed to all modules up to three PM12/1 PE PE distributed to all modules Figure 385: ACMUT Block Diagram The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DC converters.14 . WARNING: TO ISOLATE THE COMPLETE SYSTEM SWITCH OFF THE AC MAINS AND BATTERY BREAKER L1 F5 Figure 386: ACMUT Front Panel 728 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Warning Label L1 F5 BTS L2 F4 HEATING L3 F3 F2 SERVICE + LIGHT F1 Equipment Label Warning Label Figure 384: ACMU Front Panel 12. Its functions are: Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters and air conditioning Switching the AC line to the connected modules by using circuit breakers. The following figure shows the ACMUT front panel. The following figure shows the block diagram.

However. ASCU Block Diagram The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DC converters via a relay which is controlled by a temperature sensor. the SUMA switches on the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS become operational. When the temperature is above -20 C.14 729 / 914 . N Temperature Sensor N −20 distributed to all modules Circuit Breakers L1 AC Mains In 3 Phase AC−Mains− Connection L2 L2 to PM12/2 L1 to PM12/1 L3 L3 to PM12/3 L1 to Heat2/Airc. Its functions are: Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters. the AC input is connected to the two or three AC output connectors. The following figure shows the block diagram for CODI/CODE/CPT2. When the HEAT2s raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20 C. L3 to Heat2/Airc. When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C. AC power is available to the HEAT2. heaters/air conditioning and Service Lights (with AC power sockets) Switching the AC lines to the connected modules by using circuit breakers.9 ACSU The ACSU is used in outdoor 9100 BTS configurations. This means that the 0/ -48 V supply is not available and the 9100 BTS cannot operate. the relay is activated and the DC supplies are produced. there is no AC Supply to the PM12s. If the temperature is below -20 C when the 9100 BTS is first switched on. The following figure shows the ACSU front panel of CODI/CODE/CPT2. L1 to Service Light and AC Power Socket distributed to all modules PE PE Figure 387: CODI/CODE/CPT2. BTS L1 F7 L2 F6 L3 F5 HEATING L1 F4 L2 F3 L3 F2 F1 SERVICE + LIGHT Warning Label Figure 388: ACSU Front Panel CODI/CODE/CPT2 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. L2 to Heat2/Airc. The HEAT2s prevent the internal cabinet temperature from falling to -20 C thereafter.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.

heaters/air conditioning and AC power socket Switching the AC lines to the connected modules by using circuit breakers. When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C. the AC power is applied to the PM12 modules. The following figure shows the ACUC front panel. When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 10 C.10 ACUC The ACUC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor (CBO) configurations. From -33 C. F4 1 V=10 C 2 PE 1 X1 PE N L N 2 X2 X3 L 3 F1 F2 F3 L N L N L X4 4 X5 PE 5 X6 N 6 X21 N 7 X7 L 8 X8 X9 PE 9 AC Mains In 1 Phase AC Mains Connection L N PE N PE L N PE L N PE L TO PM12 TO HEAT3 Figure 389: ACUC Block Diagram The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the two AC/DC converters. BTS F1 HEATING RCB SERVICE F2 F3 SERVICE SOCKET S1 WARNING: TO ISOLATE THE COPMPLETE SYSTEM SWITCH OFF THE AC−MAINS AND BATTERY BREAKER Figure 390: ACUC Front Panel 730 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. the SUMA switches on the telecommunications modules and the CBO become operational.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. the HEAT3 is switched off. FAN units and to HEAT3. Its functions are: Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters.14 . The following figure shows the block diagram.

The DC supply produced by the PM08s is connected to the remaining modules in the cabinet via the circuit breakers located on the APOD. The APOD is housed in the ASIB. AC Circuit Breaker APOD L Input 1 N PE DC Circuit Breakers INT Subrack 4 Subrack 3 −48 VDC Subrack 2 Subrack 1 EXT 0 VDC PE DC Bus 6 5 4 3 2 1 PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 Figure 391: APOD Circuit Schematic 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It distributes 230 VAC to the five PM08s. The DC output from the PM08s is then distributed to the subracks and other equipment by the APOD. It distributes its AC input to five output connectors.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.14 731 / 914 . as shown in the following figure.11 APOD The APOD is used in indoor 9100 BTS versions that use an AC power supply. The five output connectors provide the AC power source for the PM08s.

Camloc Fastener Warning Label DC Output Circuit Breakers AC Input Circuit Breaker Equipment Labels 5 4 3 AC Output Cables to PM08s 2 1 Figure 392: APOD Front Panel 12.11.14 .1 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the APOD. Connector AC Input INT.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. SR3.11. Provides 230 VAC 1ø outputs for the five PM08s. SR2. SR1. DC Output Circuit Breakers.2 Connectors The following table describes the APOD front panel connectors. EXT AC Out 1.5 Description AC Input Circuit Breaker. SR4. Table 122: APOD Front Panel Connectors 732 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

BCU1 controls the overall output voltage of the PM08s.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.14 733 / 914 . Control PM08 outputs are connected to the SRACDC backplane DC Bus and monitored by BCU1. The following figure shows the arrangement. refer to PM08 Electrical Characteristics (Section 12. The nominal -48 V output is typically -54. For more information on alarms. The alarm is collected by the BCU1. the PM08s automatically compensate for the change.PM08/5) are fitted in parallel to provide n + 1 redundancy. Table 123: BCU1 Functions for PM08 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 12. Five PM08s (PM08/1 . The DC Bus provides DC power to the DCDP and the BU41. AC Input ACIB Control Alarms PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1 0 VDC −48 VDC DC Bus Figure 393: PM08 Load-Sharing The BCU1 performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM08s. with load sharing. When the output voltage changes because of a changed load. via the BACO. During battery testing.12 PM08 PM08 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions.5 V at 20 C. the output voltage can be reduced to -44 V. It is an 800 W AC/DC power supply module which converts 230 VAC to 0/ -48 VDC nom.2) .12. It converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinet equipment. Alarm Collection The PM08 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and power module failure.12.1 PM08 Functional Description PM08 is housed in the SRACDC. During battery charging. BCU1 changes the output voltage within the range -52 V to -57 V.

Input Input voltage Frequency Number of phases Parameter 220 VAC to 230 VAC (+/-15 %) 47 Hz to 63 Hz Single phase Table 124: PM08 Input Voltage Parameters Note: The PM08 can be operated at 110 VAC if the output power is limited to 500 W. Dynamic response.12.2 Fuses Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM08 are protected by fast acting 10 A fuses.12. 734 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Dynamic load regulation.14 . Voltage ripple.2.12. Parameter -54. Static load regulation. the default voltage is produced at all times. Line regulation. output current and protection and alarms. 12. the PM08 produces an output of -52 VDC (+/-0.2. 12. Output Nominal output voltage at 20o C.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.1 Input Voltage The following table shows the PM08 input voltage parameters.5 VDC -50 VDC to -58 VDC U in +/-15 % 5 % of output voltage 0.25 V). The fuses are accessed by removing protective caps on the module’s front panel.12.2 PM08 Electrical Characteristics The electrical characteristics for the PM08 are described in terms of input and output voltages. fuses.2 % 2 ms < 400 mV p-p Table 125: PM08 Output Voltage Parameters Note: If the BCU1 fails or is not fitted. If batteries are not fitted.3 Output Voltage The following table shows the PM08 output voltage parameters.2. Output voltage range. 12.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.6 VDC Minimum I out Maximum I out Current limitation (I max ). 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 735 / 914 . Parameter 15 A 0A 19 A 16 A to 19 A 3 % of I out (at > 60 o C) <10 % of I out (of single module). Shared load current.12.2. Output Nominal I out at -54.5 Protection and Alarms The PM08’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down the PM08 for: Mains power failure Under voltage: output voltage below -40.12.2.4 Output Current The following table shows the PM08 output current parameters. Derating.5 VDC Over voltage: output voltage exceeds -60 VDC Over current: output voltage at 0 V (short circuit) Over temperature: PM08 heat sink temperature in range + 85 C to + 100 C. Table 126: PM08 Output Current Parameters 12.

The following table shows the PM08 part numbers and associated LED states.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. where the 230 VAC input cable from the ACIB is plugged in.3 PM08 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the PM08.12.3.3.12. Fault. Fault. an IEC 320 connector for coded conditions.12. Red Table 127: PM08 LED States 12. 736 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Camloc Fastener AC In Connector Fuses Labels Status LED Handle Figure 394: PM08 Front Panel 12.2 Connectors The only PM08 front panel connector is AC In.14 . PM08 Part Number 3BK 06783 BAAA LED State Green Off 3BK 06783 BBAA Green Orange Description Normal operating conditions.1 PM08 LEDs The PM08 has a single LED on its front panel. Normal operating conditions. The type of LED fitted depends on the part number of the PM08. Power limitation mode (maximum power of 800 W reached).

PM11 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinet equipment.1 PM11 Functional Description The PM11 is housed in the ACSR. the BCU2 changes the output voltage within the range -52 V to -57 V. Table 128: BCU2 Functions for PM11 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. During battery testing. Control PM11 outputs are connected to the ACSR backplane DC Bus and monitored by the BCU2. The DC Bus provides DC power to the BOBU and the BU41 or BU100. 12. the output voltage can be reduced to -44 V.2) . When the output voltage changes because of a changed load.5 V at 20 C. AC Input ACSB Control Alarms PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2 0 VDC −48 VDC DC Bus Figure 395: PM11 Load-Sharing The BCU2 performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM11s. During battery charging. The following figure shows the arrangement. refer to PM11 Electrical Characteristics (Section 12. For more information on alarms.13.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. The alarm is collected by the BCU2.13. The nominal -48 V output is typically -54. via the BAC2. the PM11s automatically compensate for the change. The BCU2 controls the overall output voltage of the PM11s. It is an 1100 W AC/DC power supply module which converts 230 VAC to 0/ -48 VDC nom.13 PM11 The PM11 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions where the ACSR is employed. Four PM11s (PM11/1 PM11/4) are fitted in parallel to provide n + 1 redundancy. with load sharing.14 737 / 914 . Alarm Collection The PM11 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and power module failure.

12. the default voltage is produced at all times.2.6 VDC -50 VDC to -57 VDC U in +/-15 % 5 % of output voltage 0. and protection and alarms.25 V).2.2 PM11 Electrical Characteristics The electrical characteristics of the PM11 are described in terms of input and output voltages.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Dynamic response. 12.13. Voltage ripple. The fuses are accessed by removing protective caps on the module’s front panel.2. 12.1 Input Voltage The following table shows the PM11 input voltage parameters. Output voltage range.13.2 % 2 ms < 400 mV p-p Table 130: PM11 Output Voltage Parameters Note: If the BCU2 fails or is not fitted. fuses. Static load regulation.14 . the PM11 produces an output of -52 VDC (+/-0. output current. Parameter -54.2 Fuses Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM11 are protected by fast acting 10 A fuses. Dynamic load regulation. Output Nominal output voltage at 20o C. Input Input voltage Frequency Number of phases Parameter 220 VAC to 230 VAC (+/-15 %) 47 Hz to 63 Hz Single phase Table 129: PM11 Input Voltage Parameters Note: The PM11 can be operated at 110 VAC if the output power is limited to 500 W.13.3 Output Voltage The following table shows the PM11 output voltage parameters. Line regulation. If batteries are not fitted. 738 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13.

14 739 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.6 VDC Minimum I out Maximum I out Current limitation (I max ) Derating Shared load current Parameter 20 A 0A 24 A 21 A to 24 A 3 % of I out (at > 60 o C) <10 % of I out (of single module) Table 131: PM11 Output Current Parameters 12. Output Nominal I out at -54.4 Output Current The following table shows the PM11 output current parameters.13.13.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.5 Protection and Alarms The PM11’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down the PM11 for: Mains power failure Under voltage: output voltage below -40.5 VDC Over voltage: output voltage exceeds -60 VDC Over current: output voltage at 0 V (short circuit) Over temperature: PM11 heat sink temperature in range + 85 C to + 100 C.2.

4 PM11 LED The PM11 has a single LED on its front panel. Fault.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.13. The following table shows the LED states. LED State Green Off Description Normal operating conditions.13.14 . Camloc Fastener Status LED Handle Labels Fuses Figure 396: PM11 Front Panel 12.3 PM11 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the PM11. Table 132: PM11 LED States 740 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

...70C -40C.PM12/4) are fitted in parallel with load sharing (see Figure 246 or MBO1/MBO2 AC/DC Power Supply System (247) ) controlled by a local sharing bus.14 PM12 The PM12 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinet equipment..187V 187V..29) ) or the OUTC (see Outdoor Control Board CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/ MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/CBO (Section 4.-25C : Available only on PM12 module version 3BK25024 ABxx Table 133: PM12 Output Power Values Two to four PM12s (PM12/1 . 12. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.280V 150V.14. The OMU performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM12s... Batteries fitted to a BTS have a temperature sensor which is controlled by the RIBAT (see RIBAT (Section 12..... Output Power 900W* 1200W 900W* 100W * Input Voltage 150V. PM12 is an AC/DC power supply module which converts 230 VAC to 0/-48 VDC nom.. The OMU reads the stored battery size/charge current and the temperature out of the RIBAT or OUTC and sets the PM12s according to these values. The ADAM/ADAM4 is connected to the DC distribution of the BTS.264V 264V.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.14 741 / 914 .280V Temperature -25C. The PM12 is used in indoor and outdoor 9100 BTS versions where the SUMA is employed. Each PM12 is controlled from the OMU (part of SUMA) via the BCB..70C -25C. as listed in the following table.1 PM12 Functional Description Up to three PM12s and an ADAM or up to four PM12s and an ADAM4 are put together in one-half or two-thirds of a STASR (see Figure 410 or 416 )..70C -25C..5) .. The output power of the PM12 module depends on the input voltage range and temperature range.

OMU controls the overall output voltage of the PM12s. The alarm is collected by the OMU. BU100 or BU101.2-57V.2V. For more information on alarms. Default output voltage without OMU control is 52.12 Power Supplies and Distribution Control PM12 outputs are connected via ADAM/ADAM4 to the STASR backplane DC Bus and monitored by the OMU.14 . When the output voltage changes because of a changed load.2) . The DC Bus provides DC power to the: BOBU/BOMU/BOSU BU41. the PM12s automatically compensate for the change. Table 134: OMU Functions for PM12 742 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. via the ADAM/ADAM4.14. OMU sets the output voltage of PM12 in range 52. Alarm Collection The PM12 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and power module failure. Depending on battery cell voltage set in RIBAT/OUTC. refer to PM12 Electrical Characteristics (Section 12.

14.14. and protections and alarms. 12.3 Output Voltage The following table shows the PM12 output voltage parameters.2 % 2 ms < 400 mV p-p Table 136: PM12 Output Voltage Parameters 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 12.14.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.2.2 Fuses Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM12 are protected by fast acting 10 A fuses.5 VDC (in case of Ucell =2. Input Nominal input voltage Input voltage range Frequency Number of phases Parameter 230/ 240 VAC 187 VAC to 264 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz Single phase Table 135: PM12 Input Voltage Parameters 12.2.14.1 Input Voltage The following table shows the PM12 input voltage parameters.2 PM12 Electrical Characteristics The electrical characteristics of the PM12 are described in terms of input and output voltage.2. fuses. output current. The fuses are accessed by removing the cover of the module.14 743 / 914 .27V) -50 VDC to -57 VDC U in +/-15 % 5 % of output voltage 0. Output Nominal output voltage at 20 C Output voltage range Line regulation Dynamic load regulation Static load regulation Dynamic response Voltage ripple o Parameter -54.

5 VDC Over voltage: output voltage exceeds -60 VDC Over current: output voltage at 0 V (short circuit) Over temperature: PM12 heat sink temperature in range + 85 C to + 100 C. 744 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.6 VDC Minimum I out Maximum I out Current limitation (I max ) Derating Shared load current Parameter 20 A 0A 24 A 21 A to 24 A 3 % of I out (at > 60 C) <10 % of I out (of single module) Table 137: PM12 Output Current Parameters 12.4 Output Current The following table shows the PM12 output current parameters.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.5 Protection and Alarms The PM12’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down the PM12 for: Mains power failure Under voltage: output voltage below -40.14.2. Output Nominal I out at -54.14.14 .

Table 138: PM12 LED States 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Fault.14. Camloc Fastener AC In Connector Status LED ON Handle Equipment Labels Figure 397: PM12 Front Panel 12.14.3 PM12 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the PM12. LED State Green Off Description Normal operating conditions.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. The following table shows the LED states.4 PM12 LED The PM12 has a single LED on its front panel.14 745 / 914 .

Each rectifier has an output power of 1800 W.5 VDC . The PM18C controls the power modules and handles the alarm reporting to the SUMU via XBCB and RS232.1 Performance Characteristics 12. Input Nominal input voltage Input voltage range Frequency Number of phases PM18 230 VAC 150 VAC to 280 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz Single or three phase 12.2 Output Voltage Parameters The following table shows the PM18 output voltage parameters.. The battery management is done by the PM18C internally of the power supply without any control functions of the SUMA. -54VDC -42 . up to 3 rectifier PM18R and a temperature sensor.1.14 . PM18 are used in outdoor BTS or MBS.-57 VDC +/-10 % +/-10 % 50 ms < 200 mV p-p 746 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 Input Voltage Parameters The following table shows the PM18 input voltage parameters.15 PM18 The PM18 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinet equipment..15.15.15..1. It consists of the subrack PM18SR which contains a control unit PM18C.. Output Nominal output voltage at 20 C Output voltage range Line regulation Dynamic load regulation Dynamic response Voltage ripple o PM18 -52.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. 12.

Output Nominal output voltage UN Output voltage range UR Nominal power at UR Maximum I out Output power de-rating PM18 per module 52. LED ON Color Green State ON Description Normal operational conditions.15. The following table shows the LED states for the Cherokee PM18C.2.1 PM18SR The PM18SR from Cherokee has a single LED on it. Monitoring OK Monitoring start-up Monitoring fail Blinking OFF The PM18C from H+S has two LEDs on its front panel.3 Output Power Parameters The following table shows the PM18 output power parameters.54 V 48 . The following table shows the LED states for the H+S PM18C.5 .57 V 1800 W 40 A (limitation mode) 2 % of I out / K (at > 55C) 12.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.1.2.15.15. LED ON Color Green Status ON OFF Description Normal operational conditions Module not operational 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. LED LVD (Low Voltage Disconnection) Color Green State ON OFF Description Battery connected Battery not connected 12.2 PM18C LEDs The PM18C from Cherokee has a single LED on its front panel.14 747 / 914 .2 LEDs 12.15.

LED ON Color Green State ON OFF Fault Red ON OFF Description Normal operational conditions Module not operational Fault Normal operational conditions 748 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. LED AC OK Color Green State ON OFF DC OK Green ON OFF OVP Red ON OFF OTP Red ON OFF Description AC voltage OK Module not operational DC voltage OK Module not operational Output overvoltage Normal operational conditions Excessive temperature Normal operational conditions The H+S PM18R has two LEDs on its front panel.14 . The following table shows the LED states.3 PM18R LEDs The Cherokee PM18R has four LEDs on its front panel.15.12 Power Supplies and Distribution LED Alarm Color Red Status ON OFF Description Fault Normal operational conditions 12.2. The following table shows the LED states.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. PM PM18 Fuses 12.15.15.5 A.5 VDC Over-voltage: Output voltage exceeds -60 VDC Over-current: Output voltage at 0 V (short circuit) Over-temperature: PM12 heat sink temperature in the range of +85C to +100C.4 Protection and Alarms The PM’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down the PM for the following reasons: Mains power failure Under-voltage: Output voltage below -40.3 Fuses Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM18 are protected by fuses.14 749 / 914 . medium delay The fuses are accessed by removing the protective caps on the module’s front panel.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. 12.

Alarm ON RS232 + Temp. which contains a control unit PM18C.14 .5 PM18 Front View The PM18 consists of the subrack PM18SR.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Sensor Battery Connectors Battery Breaker Load Connectors Fault ON XBCB Fault ON Mains Connectors Fault ON Figure 398: PM18 H+S Front View LVD ON Battery Breaker AC Batt − DC OVP OTP Batt + OUT − AC DC OVP OTP AC DC OVP OTP OUT − Mains Connectors Figure 399: PM18 Cherokee Front View 750 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.15. up to 3 rectifiers PM18R and a temperature sensor.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.5 kg 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.15.6 Weight PM PM18 Rectifier PM18 Subrack H+S PM18 Subrack Cherokee Weight 3 kg / module 5 kg 7.14 751 / 914 .

only two of the five PM08s are shown. The functions performed are: PM08 control Alarm supervision Battery management.1. 12.16 BCU1 The BCU1 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. The voltages across the shunt resistors provide the BCU1 with a measurement of the currents drawn. 752 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 PM08 Control The BCU1 controls the PM08 output voltage and collects any alarms that are produced.14 .1 BCU1 Functional Description The BCU1 is housed in the SRACDC. refer to PM08 (Section 12. Each branch provides -48 VDC. For simplicity. The following figure shows the arrangement. For more information on the PM08. BU41 contains up to two battery groups which are referred to as branches. Control Alarms XBCB ACRI PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1 V Shunt DC Bus V Shunt 0 VDC −48 VDC BACO SRACDC BU41 Figure 400: BCU1 Interconnections The BCU1 connects to the PM08s. ACRI and BACO via the SRACDC backplane. 12.16. It performs control functions for the batteries and some of the modules within the SRACDC.16. It controls the DC output voltage and battery operation.12) .

Deep Discharge Protection During normal operation. the BCU1/BCU2 disconnects the batteries by deactivating relays in the BACO/BAC2.1. A temperature sensor. BCU1/BCU2 regulates the charging current so that battery life is not shortened. The charging voltage. Table 139: BCU1/BCU2 Battery Management Functions 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. If the output voltage falls below -42 VDC (+/-0. is typically -54. a trickle charge current ensures that the batteries remain fully charged.3 Battery Management The BCU1 provides the battery management functions described in the following table. For more details of the alarm information. Charging Current Regulation When charging the batteries. refer to BCU1 LEDs.16. the PM08/PM11 output voltage is set to -52 VDC. This prevents deep discharge of the batteries. 12.2 Alarm Supervision The BCU1 collects alarms and reports them to the ACRI. If the temperature sensor fails. For more information concerning the charging current limits.2) . depending on battery type and the number of battery branches.6 VDC. When an AC mains failure occurs. Alarms and Buttons (Section 12. This discharges the batteries.1. at an ambient temperature of o 20 C. or is not fitted. the batteries supply DC power to the 9100 BTS. Adjusts the charging current to avoid overheating the batteries. is connected to BCU1 via the BACO. which shortens their life. fitted to one battery branch.16.24) and BU100 (Section 12.16. causing their output voltage to fall. Charging current is adjusted by changing the PM08/PM11 output voltages. The alarms are: AC power failure PM08 failure Battery malfunction BCU1 fault. Charging current regulation: Limits the maximum charging current.14 753 / 914 . LCD. refer to BU41 (Section 12.25) .5 V).12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.

Table 141: BCU1 Alarms 754 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Alarms and Buttons The following sections describe the different LEDs. Alarm Type BCU1 Fault PM08 Failure AC Failure Battery Malfunction Description The internal reference voltage used by the BCU1 has failed.16.16. The AC mains supply has failed or been switched off. buttons and the special menu for the BCU1. 12. 12.2 BCU1 LEDs. Normal state. LED On Color Green State On Off Bat. BCU1 faulty. The LCD provides two rows of alphanumeric information where each row consists of eight characters.2. the LCD.16.1 LEDs The following table describes the front panel LEDs.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. alarms.2. A battery malfunction occurs if: The battery was automatically disconnected because of a malfunction during charging Deep discharge protection occurred. LCD. The alarm information specifies the identity number of the failed module and the number of modules fitted. Information is viewed using the front panel [ Function ] and [ Status ] buttons to scroll through several display options. The identity number of the battery branch that failed is reported.2 LCD The BCU1 has an LCD on its front panel (see Figure 401 ).BCU1 internal reference voltage is available.16. Battery backup in operation (battery discharging) or battery malfunction.14 . Red On Off Test Yellow On Off Table 140: BCU1 LED Descriptions Description Normal state .3 Alarms The BCU1 collects alarms and reports them to the ACRI. n/a Normal state. The following table describes the alarms. The first row displays a message and the second row displays associated parameters or choices. 12.2.

12.5 Status Button The [ Status ] button displays the following information: Alarm type.2. represented by a five-character sequence. Battery type and number of battery branches.PM08 serviceable. where: + = charging . for five seconds.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Selections in the special menu are then made using the [ Function ] and [ Status ] buttons individually.16.16.= discharging. Each character position represents a physical PM08 slot position. Battery temperature. Refer to the 9100 BTS/9110 Micro BTS Corrective Maintenance Handbook for more information about how to use the special menu facility.2. where: N .2. The special menu provides access to the following tasks: Set battery type Set number of branches in use.6 Special Menu The special menu is activated by pressing the [ Function ] and [ Status ] buttons simultaneously. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 755 / 914 .slot not occupied F . where the character: V represents BCU1 failure R represents a rectifier (PM08) failure M represents an AC mains failure B represents a battery malfunction.16. Status of the PM08s. 12.PM08 failed Y .4 Function Button The [ Function ] button displays the following information: PM08s output voltage (Uload) Battery voltage (Ubatt) Output current (Iload) Battery current (Ibatt).

It: Controls the DC output voltage and battery operation Collects alarms from the ACSR modules Controls the ACSR FANUs Provides the interface to the BTS Remote Inventory function.3 BCU1 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the BCU1. 12. It performs control functions for the batteries and some of the modules within the ACSR. For simplicity. Camloc Fastener Labels Status LEDs On Test Bat.17 BCU2 The BCU2 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions where the ACSR is employed.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. only two of the four PM11s are shown.17.16.) Handle Figure 401: BCU1 Front Panel 12. LCD Display Control Buttons Function Status RS−232 Connector RS−232 (For factory service and test only.1 BCU2 Functional Description The BCU2 is housed in the ACSR. The following figure shows the arrangement.14 . Control Alarms XBCB PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2 V Shunt DC Bus V Shunt BAC2 0 VDC −48 VDC ACSR BU41 or BU100 Figure 402: BCU2 Interconnections 756 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

1.17.2) . 12.17. For more information on the PM11. ANPS The BCU2 contains an ANPS which converts the -48 VDC input supply to the DC voltages required by the other components.13) . 12. 12.2) .1.4 ACRI System Functions The ACRI system implemented on the BCU2 consists of the functions listed in the following table. Modified FACB 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. These battery groups are referred to as branches. refer to BCU2 LEDs. For more information on the FACB and FANUs. 12. Alarms and Buttons (Section 12. The voltages across the shunt resistors provide BCU2 with a measurement of the currents drawn.1 PM11 Control The BCU2 controls the PM11 output voltage and collects any alarms that are produced. For more alarm information.12 Power Supplies and Distribution BCU2 connects to the PM11s and BAC2 via the ACSR backplane.1. The alarms are: AC power failure PM11 failure Battery malfunction BCU2 fault. refer to PM11 (Section 12.17.1. For more information on the ANPS.5) .17.17. The functions performed are: PM11 control Alarm supervision Battery management ACRI system functions.1.1.14 757 / 914 . LCD. BU41 contains up to two battery groups and BU100 contains one battery group.3 Battery Management The BCU2 provides the battery management functions described in Table BCU1/BCU2 Battery Management Functions (139) . refer to Fan Control (Section 11.2 Alarm Supervision The BCU2 collects alarms and reports them to the OMU on the SUMP. Each branch provides -48 VDC. refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10. The BCU2 contains a modified FACB which reports fan faults and controls the two FANUs that cool the ACSR modules.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution XBCB The BCU2 contains a BCB ASIC that transfers information to the OMU in the SUMP via the XBCB. This consists of: Alarms from modified FACB Alarms internal to the BCU2 Alarms from the battery and PM11s Remote Inventory information.14 .). name. RI The BCU2 contains a Remote Inventory that is used to store information about the module (part number. It consists of an EEPROM which is connected to the BCB ASIC. etc. Table 142: BCU2. ACRI System Functions 758 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. serial number.

n/a Normal state. The AC mains supply has failed or been switched off.BCU2 internal reference voltage is available.2 BCU2 LEDs. Red ON OFF Test Yellow ON OFF Power ON ON Description Normal state . The alarm information specifies the identity number of the failed module and the number of modules fitted. the LCD. The alarms are described in the following table.17.2 LCD The BCU2 has an LCD on its front panel (see Figure 403 ).12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Alarms and Buttons The following sections describe the different LEDs. PM11 Failure AC Failure 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. BCU2 faulty. OFF Table 143: BCU2 LED Description 12.2. Information is viewed using the front panel [ Function ] and [ Status ] buttons to scroll through several display options. LCD.2.3 Alarms The BCU2 collects alarms and reports them to the OMU on the SUMP. 12.17. The LCD provides one row of alphanumeric information where the row consists of eight characters.2.1 LEDs The following table describes the front panel LEDs. Battery backup in operation (battery discharging) or battery malfunction.17. Alarm Type BCU2 Fault Description The internal reference voltage used by the BCU2 has failed. Otherwise. buttons and the special menu for the BCU2.17. alarms. Normal state. When XBCB bus is connected and OK and internal power supply (48V/5V converter) is operational.14 759 / 914 . 12. LED On Color Green State ON OFF Bat.

Battery temperature.4 Function Button The [ Function ] button displays the following information: PM11s output voltage (Uload) Battery voltage (Ubatt) Output current (Iload) Battery current (Ibatt).17. where: + = charging . A battery malfunction occurs if: The battery was automatically disconnected because of a malfunction during charging Deep discharge protection occurred. The identity number of the battery branch that failed is reported. Table 144: BCU2 Alarms 12.2. 760 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.12 Power Supplies and Distribution Alarm Type Fan Status Battery Malfunction Description The status of the two FANUs located below the ACSR.= discharging.14 .

Each character position represents a physical PM11 slot position.slot not occupied F .5 Status Button The [ Status ] button displays the following information: Alarm type.PM11 failed.14 761 / 914 . where the character: V represents BCU2 failure R represents a rectifier (PM11) failure M represents an AC mains failure B represents a battery malfunction.6 Special Menu The special menu is activated by pressing the [ Function ] and [ Status ] buttons simultaneously. Status of the PM11s.17. represented by a four-character sequence. for five seconds. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. where: N .17. Battery type and number of battery branches. 12. Selections in the special menu are then made using the [ Function ] and [ Status ] buttons individually.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.2.PM11 serviceable. The special menu provides access to the following tasks: Set battery type Set number of branches in use. Y . Refer to the 9100 BTS/9110 Micro BTS Corrective Maintenance Handbook for more information about how to use the special menu facility.2.

Table 145: BCU2 Front Panel Connectors XBCB 762 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Camloc Fastener Labels Status LEDs On Test Bat.17. Provides a: + 5 VDC signal to enable ANPS Serial interface for the transfer of alarms and Remote Inventory information to the OMU. LCD Display Control Buttons Function Status RS−232 Handle Power ON XBCB Connector Temperature Connector Figure 403: BCU2 Front Panel 12.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.4 Connectors The following table describes the BCU2 front panel connectors.17.14 . Connector Temperature Description For connection of temperature sensor from BU41 or BU100.3 BCU2 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the BCU2.

18 BACO The BACO is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. During battery testing. BCU1 deactivates the relays to isolate the batteries. controlled by the BCU1. The following figure shows the circuit schematic. During an AC mains failure. It interconnects the batteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s. It interconnects up to two battery branches to the SRACDC backplane DC bus. The BACO is housed in the SRACDC. K2 To BCU1 Branch 2 RELBATT2 Sensor Signals Temperature Sensor DC Bus Shunt BACO SRACDC Backplane Figure 404: BACO Circuit Schematic Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the batteries during battery maintenance.14 763 / 914 . The battery branches must be of the same type and capacity.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. BU41 provides battery power to the DC bus via relays K1 and K2. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. During battery charging and discharging. respectively. BU41 Circuit Breakers BATOUT+ 48 VDC nom. the circuit breakers trip automatically when the current drawn exceeds 60 A. The BACO contains: Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the batteries Relays for automatic isolation of the batteries. they operate independently. If the battery discharge becomes excessive. When in use. Relays K1 and K2 are controlled by the signals RELBATT1 and RELBATT2. and a shunt resistor. K1 BATOUT− Branch 1 RELBATT1 UBATT− 48 VDC nom. the relays operate simultaneously.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.18.1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the BACO.
Camloc Fastener

Equipment Labels

Warning Label

Battery Connection Cables

Figure 405: BACO Front Panel

12.18.2 Connectors
The following table describes the BACO connectors. Connector X200 Description Connects battery temperature sensor signals to SRACDC backplane. Connects to battery terminals. There are two cables for each branch.

Battery Connectors

Table 146: BACO Front Panel Connectors

764 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.19 BAC2
The BAC2 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It interconnects the batteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s or PM11s. The BAC2 contains: Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the batteries Relays for automatic isolation of the batteries, controlled by the BCU2. The BAC2 is housed in the ACSR. It interconnects up to two battery branches to the ACSR backplane DC bus. The battery branches must be of the same type and capacity. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
BU41 or BU100 Circuit Breakers BATOUT+ 48 VDC nom. K1 BATOUT− Branch 1 RELBATT1 UBATT− 48 VDC nom. K2 To BCU2 DC Bus Shunt

BAC2

ACSR Backplane

Branch 2 (BU41 only)

RELBATT2

Sensor Signals Temperature Sensor

Figure 406: BAC2 Circuit Schematic Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the batteries during battery maintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically when the current drawn exceeds 60 A. During an AC mains failure, BU41 or BU100 provides battery power to the DC bus via relays K1 and K2, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge becomes excessive, BCU2 deactivates the relays to isolate the batteries. Relays K1 and K2 are controlled by the signals RELBATT1 and RELBATT2, respectively. During battery charging and discharging, the relays operate simultaneously. During battery testing, they operate independently.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

765 / 914

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.19.1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the BAC2.
Camloc Fastener

AC Mains and Battery Breakers

Equipment Labels

Battery Connection Cables

Figure 407: BAC2 Front Panel

12.19.2 Connectors
The following table describes the BAC2 connectors. Connector Battery Connectors Description Connects to battery terminals. There are two cables for each branch.

Table 147: BAC2 Front Panel Connectors

766 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.20 ABAC
The ABAC is used in indoor 9100 BTS versions that use an AC power supply. It interconnects the batteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s. The ABAC contains: Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the battery Relays for automatic isolation of the battery, controlled by the BCU1. The ABAC is housed in the ASIB. It interconnects a maximum of one battery branch to the ASIB backplane DC bus. The battery branch can be BU41 or BU100. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
BU41 or BU100 Circuit Breakers BATOUT+ 48 VDC nom. K1 BATOUT− Branch 1 RELBATT1 UBATT− To BCU1 Sensor Signals Temperature Sensor DC Bus Shunt

ABAC

ASIB Backplane

Figure 408: ABAC Circuit Schematic Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the battery branch during battery maintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically when the current drawn exceeds 60 A. During an AC mains failure, BU41 or BU100 provides battery power to the DC bus via relay K1, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge becomes excessive, the BCU1 deactivates the relay to isolate the battery branch. Relay K1 is controlled by the signal RELBATT1.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

767 / 914

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.20.1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the ABAC.
Camloc Fastener

+
Equipment Labels

Battery Connection Cables

Figure 409: ABAC Front Panel

12.20.2 Connectors
The following table describes the ABAC connectors. Connector X200 Description Connects battery temperature sensor signals to the ASIB backplane. Connects to battery terminals. There are two cables only (one branch).

Battery Connectors

Table 148: ABAC Front Panel Connectors

768 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.21 ADAM
ADAM is used in the AC/DC power supply of 9100 BTS configurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and the power distribution inside the BTS. ADAM consists of: An air permeable metal frame, mounted in one-half of a STASR above the PM12s (see the following figure) A small backpanel with the connectors for three PM12s and a terminal for the wiring of the BTS. In addition, the ADAM contains on its backpanel: The relay for battery protection The relay control A shunt for measuring the battery current. The following figure shows the position of ADAM in the STASR.
ADAM

PM12

Figure 410: ADAM, Position in the STASR

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

769 / 914

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.21.1 Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram.
ADAM Backpanel Frontpanel

−48 VDC Subracks 0VDC −48 VDC Battery OMU (SUMA)

−48 VDC Subracks 0VDC −48 VDC Battery

Relay Control PM12/1

Battery Shunt

PM12/2 Signals

PM12/3

Figure 411: ADAM Block Diagram The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches the lower limit, the relay separates the -48 VDC line of the battery. The relay has its own control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.

770 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.21.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM.

Figure 412: ADAM Front Side View

12.21.3 Connectors
On the backpanel there are three connectors for the PM12s. Each of them contains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC and one for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals. On the front panel there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks (via BOBU/BOMU/BOSU) and the back-up battery.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

771 / 914

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.22 ADAM2
ADAM2 is used in the AC/DC power supply of Compact BTS Outdoor configurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and the power distribution inside the BTS. ADAM2 consists of: An air permeable metal frame, mounted in one-third of a STASR above the PM12s (see the following figure) A small backpanel with the connectors for two PM12s and terminal for the wiring of the BTS. In addition, the ADAM2 contains on its backpanel: The relay for battery protection The relay control A shunt for measuring the battery current. The following figure shows the position of ADAM2 in the STASR.
ADAM2

PM12

Figure 413: ADAM2, Position in the STASR

772 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.22.1 Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram.
ADAM Backpanel Frontpanel

−48 VDC Subracks 0VDC −48 VDC Battery OMU (SUMA)

−48 VDC Subracks 0VDC −48 VDC Battery

Relay Control

Battery Shunt

PM12/1 Signals

PM12/2

Figure 414: ADAM2 Block Diagram The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches the lower limit (42 V), the relay separates the DC line of the battery. The relay has its own control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

773 / 914

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.22.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM2.

0V BATT. − 48V − 48V

Figure 415: ADAM2 Front Side View

12.22.3 Connectors
On the backpanel there are two connectors for the PM12s. Each of them contains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC and one for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals. On the front panel, there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks (via DCUC) and the back-up battery.

774 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.23 ADAM4
ADAM4 is used in the AC/DC power supply of 9100 BTS MBO1/MBO2 configurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and the power distribution inside the BTS. ADAM4 is installed in combination with two to four PM12s. If less than four PM12s are installed, the empty PM12 slot is covered by a dummy panel. ADAM4 consists of: An air permeable metal frame, mounted in two third of a STASR above the PM12s (see the following figure) A small backpanel with the connectors for four PM12s and terminal for the wiring of the BTS. In addition, ADAM4 contains on its backpanel: The relay for battery protection The relay control A shunt for measuring the battery current. The following figure shows the position of ADAM4 in the STASR.

ADAM4

PM12

Figure 416: ADAM4 Position in the STASR

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

775 / 914

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.23.1 Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram.
ADAM4 Backpanel Frontpanel

−48 VDC Subracks 0VDC 0VDC Battery −48 VDC OMU (SUMA)

−48 VDC Subracks 0VDC 0VDC Battery −48 VDC

Relay Control PM12/1

Battery Shunt

PM12/2 Signals

PM12/3

PM12/4

Figure 417: ADAM4 Block Diagram The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches the lower limit, the relay separates the -48 VDC line of the battery. The relay has its own control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.

776 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.23.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM4.

Figure 418: ADAM4 Front Side View

12.23.3 Connectors
On the backpanel, there are two connectors for the PM12s. Each of them contains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC and one for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals. On the front panel, there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks (via BOMU) and the back-up battery.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

777 / 914

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.24 BU41
The BU41 is an optional feature used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mains supply failure. The principal components of BU41 are four high performance, sealed, lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They connect in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch. Optionally, a second branch of four sealed lead-acid batteries can be fitted to double the backup period. Each battery branch is independently connected to the BACO or BAC2. Note however, that only one battery branch can be connected to an ABAC or ADAM. When two battery branches are used, both branches must consist of batteries of the same type and capacity. This is required because the charging and testing circuits assume both branches are the same. Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. This monitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by the BCU1/SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating. Each battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge to the external environment the gasses produced during battery charging.

778 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.24.1 Charging
The BU41 charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging) standard. The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit for the number of battery branches in use. Battery Type 40 Ah One Branch 6A Two Branches 12 A

Table 149: BU41 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus battery temperature. Temperature 0 C 5 C 10 C 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C Voltage Per Cell 2.3773 2.3484 2.3215 2.2966 2.2737 2.2528 2.2339 2.2170 2.2021 2.1892 2.1783 Total Voltage (+/- 1%) 57.05 56.36 55.72 55.12 54.57 54.07 53.61 53.21 52.85 52.54 52.29

Table 150: BU41 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of 2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20 C.

12.24.2 Discharging and Storage
Discharging below 1.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries. Batteries can be stored without recharging only for a restricted time. Therefore manufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

779 / 914

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.24.3 Front and Top View
The following figure shows the front and top views of BU41.
Supplier’s Information Label Equipment Labels Vent Tube

Front View

Top View

Figure 419: BU41 Front and Top Views

780 / 914

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

12 Power Supplies and Distribution

12.24.4 BU41 Mounted in MBO
The MBO offers a specific battery box. The batteries are arranged as shown in the following figure. The battery box is covered with a plate to secure the batteries.
Exhausting Nipple Exhausting Tube Equipment Lables − −

Upper Block

Warning Lables

Internal Battery Cable + +

Supplier Information Lable

Battery Box (Part of BTS)

Lower Block

+

+

Front View

Figure 420: BU41 in MBO - Front View

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14

781 / 914

They connect in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. The output from the sensor is used by the BCU1. ABAC or ADAM as appropriate. referred to as a branch. This monitors the battery temperature. It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mains supply failure. The battery branch is connected to the BACO. The principal components of the BU100 are four high performance. BCU2 or SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. power source. The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes.25 BU100 The BU100 is an optional feature used in all outdoor 9100 BTS versions and in indoor versions that use an AC power supply. sealed. Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. 782 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. BAC2. lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard.14 . The venting tubes discharge the gasses produced during battery charging to the external environment.

07 53.61 53.2737 2.3484 2.29 Table 152: BU100 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of 2.21 52.14 783 / 914 .2021 2.05 56.25.1%) 57.57 54.1892 2.1 Charging The BU100 charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging) standard.2966 2.85 52.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.54 52.72 55. Temperature 0 C 5 C 10 C 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C Voltage Per Cell 2.2170 2.12 54.36 55.3215 2.1783 Total Voltage (+/.2528 2. Battery Type 100 Ah Limit 12 A Table 151: BU100 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus battery temperature.40 V total) at 20 C.3773 2.35 V per cell (56.2339 2.

Batteries can be stored without recharging only for a restricted time.2 Discharging and Storage Discharging below 1.25.25.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries. Front View Battery Retainer Top View Vent Tube Figure 421: BU100 Front and Top Views 784 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 . Therefore manufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.3 Front and Top View The following figure shows the front and top views of BU100. 12.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.

lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes.14 785 / 914 . Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. They are connected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. This monitors the battery temperature. referred to as a branch. The venting tubes discharge the gases produced during battery charging to the external environment. The output from the sensor is used by the SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.26 BU101 The BU101 is an optional feature used in Multistandard Outdoor BTS Cabinets. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mains supply failure. power source. sealed. The battery branch is connected to ADAM or ADAM4. The principal components of the BU101 are four high performance.

14 .12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.3773 2.72 55.1783 Total Voltage (+/.1892 2.2170 2. Battery Type 100 Ah Limit 12 A Table 153: BU101 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus battery temperature.07 53.2966 2.1%) 57.2021 2. 786 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.21 52.36 55.2339 2.40 V total) at 20 C.26.12 54.85 52.2737 2.3215 2.05 56.2528 2.61 53.54 52.3484 2.1 Charging The BU101 charging characteristics conform to the IEC 896-2 standard. Temperature 0 C 5 C 10 C 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C Voltage Per Cell 2.29 Table 154: BU101 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of 2.57 54.35 V per cell (56. The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.

2 Discharging and Storage Discharging below 1.26. Therefore manufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed. The battery box is covered with a plate to secure the batteries.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries.26. To Circuit Breaker Exhausting Nipple Exhausting Tube Battery Battery Connection Cable Upper Block Equipment Lables To Circuit Breaker Temperature Sensor Jumper Battery Box (Part of BTS) Battery Battery Jumper Lower Block Warning Lables Exhausting Tube Supplier Information Lable Front View Top View Figure 422: BU101 Front and Top View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 12.3 Front and Top View The following figure shows the front and top view of the BU101.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time.14 787 / 914 .

1%) 57. It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mains supply failure.21 Total Voltage (+/.06 53. power source.2525 2.125 56.55 53.38 2.3587 2. sealed. The venting tubes divert the gases produced during battery charging to the external environment.04 Table 156: BU102 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature 788 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2737 2.1 Charging The BU102 charging characteristics conform to the IEC 896-2 standard. The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. gel batteries.59 55. Battery Type 90 Ah Limit 8 A for one battery branch 16 A for more than one battery branch Table 155: BU102 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit The following table shows the charging voltage versus battery temperature in the case of default setting 2.27 BU102 The BU102 is an optional feature used in External Battery Cabinets Outdoor. 12.29 V/ cell.2312 2.57 54. The principal components of the BU102 are four high performance. The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit. The battery branch is connected to ADAM4 in a BTS cabinet.14 .616 56. The output from the sensor is used by the SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.3370 2. Temperature 0 C 5 C 10 C 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Voltage Per Cell 2. A temperature sensor is connected to one of the 0 V battery terminal. referred to as a branch. They are connected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom.1 55. This monitors the battery temperature.27.3162 2.08 54.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.295 2.

1 RX Synth. Therefore manufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed. The battery box is covered with a plate to secure the batteries.27.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time.14 789 / 914 .75 V per cell (42 V total) in order to avoid damaging the batteries. TX Synthesizer 1 TX Synthesizer 2 TX Power Regulation I From ENCT Baseband Modulator Q BBTX Transmitter part Reveiver part Modulator & Up−converter TX Driver Amplifier TX Power Amplifier To combiner Duplexer Clean−up Oscillator TEPAxx/ TEPADHE ADC IF Filter RX Synth. 2 ADC IF Filter RF Mixer LNA RX1 RF Mixer LNA RX0 To DEM on TRED DDC DRCS From Antenna Network TREA Digital part (positioned at analog module) Figure 423: BU102 Front and Top View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.27.2 Discharging and Storage Discharging is interrupted at 1. 12.3 Front and Top View The following figure shows the front and top view of BU102.

It is used in indoor cabinets. It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mains supply failure. The principal components of BATS are four high performance.28. It contains: A block of four batteries Printed board RIBATs Temperature sensor Battery breaker. The following figure shows the block diagram.1 Batteries The batteries are connected in series and have nominal 48 V and a capacity of 8 Ah. The DC clamps of the module are connected to the battery clamps on the front side of ADAM. power source.28 BATS The small battery BATS is a plug-in unit for the subrack STASR with a width of 28 TE. sealed. + SBS8 − + SBS8 − + − + − SBS8 SBS8 Batteries Circuit Breaker Temperature Sensor RIBATS Feed Through Clamps − + 48 V to ADAM to BCB Figure 424: BATS Block Diagram 12. lead-acid batteries that conform to the IEC 896-2 standard.14 . 790 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. referred to as a branch. They are connected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. A BATS can be plugged in any unused subrack position.

12 54.07 53. The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit. Temperature 0 C 5 C 10 C 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C Voltage Per Cell 2.3 Discharging and Storage Discharging below 1.14 791 / 914 . Batteries can be stored without recharging only for a restricted time.29 Table 158: BATS Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature Note: In order to avoid excessive battery gas leakage from the battery. 12.85 52.61 53.40 V total) at 20 C.2170 2.2528 2.2966 2.28.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.3484 2. the charging voltage must not exceed 2. Storage of discharged batteries is not allowed.72 55.2737 2.1892 2.05 56.3215 2.2 Charging The BATS charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging) standard.35 V per cell (56.1783 Total Voltage (+/.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries. Therefore manufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed. Battery Type 8 Ah Charging Current Limit 2A Table 157: BATS Battery Type and Charging Current Limit The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus battery temperature.1%) 57.2021 2.36 55.2339 2.54 52.3773 2.57 54.21 52. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.28.

5 Temperature Sensor A temperature sensor is connected to one of the battery terminals.28. It is directly connected to a backplane connector of the STASR. 12.28. The output from the sensor is used by the SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.4 RIBATS The RIBATS is a small PCB mounted on the BATS frame. It collects the value of the temperature sensor and transfers this information to the OMU via the BCB. Cicuit Breaker DC Clamps Alcatel Product Identification Serial Number Identification Module Extractor Figure 425: BATS Front View 792 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.6 Battery Breaker A battery breaker is mounted on the front side of BATS: 2 x 60 A.28.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. The battery breaker disconnects the connection between the batteries and ADAM.7 Front and Top View The following figure shows the front view of the BATS.28. 12. 80 V. not from the batteries. This monitors the battery temperature. 12. The RIBATS is supplied from the BTS via the BCB.14 .

different interfaces are used: the BCB/EBCB. Depending on the configuration.14 793 / 914 .12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. not from the batteries. Knowledge of the temperature value is necessary for charging. Loop BCB IF to cascaded RIBAT A RI EEPROM XBCB Out Temperature Sensor Figure 426: RIBAT Block Diagram 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.29.29 RIBAT The RIBAT board is part of the battery. The power consumption is about 100 mA.1 Block Diagram The connection and addressing differs for different configurations. Remote Supply Voltage Input detect BCB/ EBCB Con nection BCB/ EBCB Internal Addressing External Addressing NGTSL Control Logic D XBCB IN RS 485 TTL Line term. The following figure shows the RIBAT block diagram. The board contains a BCB interface to transfer the information. 12. XBCB. The RIBAT is supplied from the BTS. Its task is to measure the battery temperature and to provide the OMU with the temperature value and the battery Remote Inventory information which includes the information about the battery type.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. The battery temperature range which can be measured is between -10 C and 70 C. If the addressing is switched to external. the BCB/EBCB connection is detected. addressing is switched to internal and the XBCB interface is disabled by the control logic. The analog part includes signal conditioning and an ADC to digitize the temperature value. In this case. XBCB interfaces. In order to differ between internal or external addressing and internal or external connection. The measurement resolution is 0. The BCB/EBCB connection is true if the battery is located inside the BTS cabinet.2 Functional Description The board consists of: An NGTSL. The RIBAT is connected to the EBCB via a flat band cable like it is done with a backplane. Values above 70 C mean a not-connected or interrupted sensor. the XBCB interface is active. If there is no other terminal or RIBAT connected to XBCB Out. Power supply is provided remotely either from inside the BTS or via the XBCB connection. This range is extended against the operating temperature range of the batteries (0 C to 50 C) and the minimum operating temperature range of the RIBAT to submit high or low temperature alarms. The internal battery of the outdoor BTS is located inside a side compartment. slot 2) to address them. which is the terminal for the ISL data link The Remote Inventory EEPROM including the Remote Inventory information The analog part for temperature measuring Address switching the BCB/EBCB. it has to be terminated with a line termination plug.14 . Values below -10 C mean a short cut at the temperature sensor. One wire of the flat band cable is used for this purpose. the EBCB is fed to the side compartment.5 C. In this case addressing is switched to internal and the battery gets subrack number 0 (due to wire cutting on the flat band cable).29. The ADC outputs are connected directly to the NGTSL alarm inputs. Two cascaded batteries are possible by using different slot numbers (slot 1. An external PT100 temperature sensor is connected to the analog part. 794 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. For this.

In case of cascaded RIBATs.29. On the BTS side. The termination plug consists of an 15-pin Sub-D male connector and a small PCB (50 mm x 30 mm) with termination and pull up/pull down resistors on it.4 XBCB Bus Termination Because the XBCB is an RS-485 bus. this is done by a termination plug. it has to be terminated at the end of the line. XBCB Connectors used in case of external batteries EBCB Connector used in case of internal batteries Connector for Temperature Sensor Figure 427: RIBAT Top View 12. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. On the RIBAT side. The plug is connected to the XBCB Out at the RIBAT.14 795 / 914 . this is already done on the COAR. the plug is connected to the remaining XBCB Out.29. The temperature sensor is mounted on one pole of the batteries to give a good thermal contact. The following figure shows the top view.3 Appearance The RIBAT is a small board with a C96 connector for the flat band cable. a Sub-D 9 connector for the temperature sensor and two Sub-D 15 connectors for the XBCB input and output.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.

0 V Input −48V Input Line Load X1 F1 15 A F2 15 A F3 25 A F4 25 A F5 25 A F6 25 A F7 25 A F8 25 A XIOB Optional Equipment Optional Equipment Optional Equipment Spare X1 1 6 X2 1 6 X3 X4 1 1 6 6 X5 1 6 Heat Exchanger 1 X6 Heat Exchanger 2 X7 Heat Exchanger 3 X8 Subrack 1/1 X9 Subrack 1/2 Spare or Subrack 1/3 X10 X11 Subrack 2/1 X12 Subrack 2/2 X13 Subrack 2/3 X14 Figure 428: DCDP Circuit Schematic 796 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The circuit breakers are reset manually.14 . The following figure shows the circuit schematic. The DCDP is housed in BTS compartment 1 above the top STASR.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.30 DCDP The DCDP is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. Each DC output is over-current protected by its own circuit breaker. It distributes -48 VDC to the equipment modules.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution The DCDP 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output connectors. which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers 25 A for F3 . which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optional equipment (such as microwave or termination of network line equipment) 15 A for F2.14 797 / 914 .30. 12. The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCDP and connected to each output connector.F8. which supply the connectors for the STASRs. via six circuit breakers. The circuit breaker trip currents are: 15 A for F1.1 Front and Top View The following figure shows the front and top views of the DCDP. X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X6 X7 X8 Front View Equipment Labels Red 0 V Blue −48 V Top View Figure 429: DCDP Front and Top View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

Table 160: DCDP Rear Panel Connectors 798 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Provides the 0 VDC input.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Provides the ground connection for the unit.X8 X9 . Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the STASRs.2 Front Panel Connectors The following table describes the DCDP front panel connectors.3 Rear Panel Connectors The following table describes the DCDP rear panel connectors. X5 X6 .14 .X14 Table 159: DCDP Front Panel Connectors 12. Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the heat exchanger controllers.30.30. if fitted. Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the microwave equipment.X4 Description Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB. Spare. Connector X1 X2 . Connector -48 V IN 0 V IN Ground Description Provides the -48 VDC input.

15 A for F4. via six circuit breakers. which supplies the complete BTS and is the main breaker 25 A for F2 and F3. The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCUC and connected to each output connector. The following figure shows the circuit schematic. which supply the connectors for the STASRs.14 799 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.31 DCDU The DCDU is used in Compact BTS Outdoor DC versions.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. The circuit breakers are reset manually. which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers 15 A for F6. It distributes -48 VDC to the equipment modules. 0V Rail −48V Rail Figure 430: DCDU Circuit Schematic The DCDU 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output connectors. The circuit breaker trip currents are: 70 A for F1. which supplies the connectors for the heater. The DCUC is housed in the BTS compartment above the cable entry. Each DC output is over-current protected by its own circuit breaker. which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optional equipment (such as microwave or termination of network lines equipment) 15 A for F5.

1 Front and Side View The following figures show the front and side views of the DCDU.31.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. 0V −48V 0V −48V 0V −48V X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 OPTIONS HEX XIOB SR1 SR2 OPT HEX HEAT BTS 70 A Equipment Labels Figure 431: DCDU Front View Figure 432: DCDU Side View 800 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

14 801 / 914 . X10 Description Provides 0 VDC for the optional equipment. Connector X1 . Table 161: DCDU Front Panel Connectors 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.31. Provides -48 VDC for the optional equipment. Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the Heat Exchanger.2 Front Panel Connectors The following table describes the DCDU front panel connectors.X3 X4 . X8 X9.X6 X7. Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB.

which supply the heaters. 802 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. which supplies the complete BTS 15 A for F2. It distributes -48 VDC to the equipment modules. Figure 433: DCDUE Circuit Schematic The DCDUE 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output connectors. via four circuit breakers.32 DCDUE The DCDUE is used in DC 9100 MBS GSM Evolution Outdoor versions. The DCDUE is housed in the left side of the BTS compartment. The circuit breakers are reset manually. The circuit breaker trip currents are: 100 A for F1. The following figure shows the circuit schematic. which supplies the Service Light 15 A for F3 and F4.14 . Each DC output is over-current protected by its own circuit breaker.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.

33 DCMU The DCMU is used in DC 9100 MBS GSM Outdoor versions. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. It distributes -48 VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by its own circuit breaker. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.12 Power Supplies and Distribution The following figure shows the DCDUE. The circuit breakers are reset manually. Figure 434: DCDUE View 12.14 803 / 914 . The DCMU is housed in the left side of the BTS compartment.

14 15A . which supplies the complete BTS 15 A for F2.12 Power Supplies and Distribution EXTERNAL DC IN −48V 0V MBO ROOF 0V BOLT C1 0V BOLT 0V BUSBAR CONNECTION X9 −48V F1 F2 F3 15A F4 70A 15A K1 −48V −48V −48V 0V 0V 0V DC IN / 48V K2 DC IN / 48V F5 DC OUT / 48V 1 X20 Main ground X2 X3 X1 2 X6 X4 X7 X8 X5 _ + 1 2 _ DC OUT / 48V X21 + _ + 1 2 _ + −48V 0V −48V 0V −48V 0V −48V 0V LIGHT 1 LIGHT 2 HEATDC 1 HEATDC 2 Figure 435: DCMU Circuit Schematic The DCMU 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output connectors. via four circuit breakers. The circuit breaker trip currents are: 75 A for F1. which supplies the Service Light 15 A for F3 and F4. 804 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. which supply the heat exchangers.

12 Power Supplies and Distribution The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCMU. 70A 15A 15A 15A Equipment Labels BTS SERVICE LIGHT HEATING 1 HEATING 2 F1 F2 F3 F4 Front View Side View Figure 436: DCMU Front and Side View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 805 / 914 .

14 . via four circuit breakers. The DCUC is housed in the BTS compartment above the ACUC. 15 A for F3. 806 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The circuit breakers are reset manually. It distributes -48 VDC to the equipment modules. which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCUC and connected to each output connector. 0V Rail 0V Input − 48 V Rail −48V Input 25A 25A 15A 15A F1 SR1 F2 SR2 F3 F4 OPT HEX 0V −48V X20 X21 0V 0V −48V −48V X1 0V NU GND −48V 0V NU GND −48V X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 SR 1 SR 2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT HEX 5 XIOB Figure 437: DCUC Circuit Schematic The DCUC 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output connectors. The circuit breaker trip currents are: 25 A for F1 and F2. which supply the connectors for the STASRs. which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optional equipment (such as microwave or termination of network lines equipment) 15 A for F4.34 DCUC The DCUC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor versions. Each DC output is over-current protected by its own circuit breaker. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.

34.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12.1 Front and Side View The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCUC. 0V X1 X2 X3 X4 −48V X5 X6 0V −48V 0V −48V X7 X8 X9 X10 OPTIONS HEX XIOB SR1 0V −48V SR2 OPT HEX Equipment labels Front View Black 0V Blue − 48V GND Side View Figure 438: DCUC Front and Side View 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 807 / 914 .

34.2 Front Panel Connectors The following table describes the DCUC front panel connectors.X3 X4 . X8 X9. X10 Description Provides 0 VDC for the optional equipment.X6 X7.12 Power Supplies and Distribution 12. Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the Heat Exchanger.14 . Table 162: DCUC Front Panel Connectors 808 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB. Provides -48 VDC for the optional equipment. Connector X1 .

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. showing the functional blocks and their interfaces. A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included.14 809 / 914 .13 ACRI 13 ACRI This section describes and illustrates the ACRI. showing the connectors and controls.

The ACRI: Collects alarms from the SRACDC modules Controls the SRACDC FANUs.14 . The ACRI is housed in the SRACDC.13 ACRI 13. There are two functionally identical variants. The following figure shows the functional block diagram. The sole difference is that the indoor variant has the BCB interface available on the backplane connector.1 ACRI Functional Description The ACRI is used in indoor and outdoor 9100 BTS versions. ANPS DC/DC Converter −48 VDC Input Supply Output Voltages FACB FANUs Fan Alarms BCB ASIC Power Alarms XBCB RI EEPROM Figure 439: ACRI Block Diagram 810 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

name.2 ACRI LEDs and Alarms The two LEDs on the front panel are connected in parallel. the information is transferred via the BCB. serial number. FACB XBCB Table 163: ACRI Functional Entities 13.14 811 / 914 .5) . It consists of an EEPROM which is connected to the BCB ASIC.2) . respectively. available on the backplane. ANPS The ANPS which the -48 VDC input supply to the DC voltages required by the other components.1. RI The Remote Inventory is used to store information about the module (part number.). 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1) and Fan Control (Section 11. etc. They indicate the state of the + 5 VDC output of the ANPS. the information is transferred via the XBCB connector on the front panel. This information consists of: Alarms from the FACB Alarms from the battery. The FACB reports fan faults and controls the FANUs that cool the SRACDC modules.13 ACRI The ACRI consists of the functional entities described in the following table. refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10. The alarm information consists of: Fan status Number of PM08s fitted Number of PM08s that are serviceable Battery malfunction BCU1 failure. refer to Fan Units (Section 11. For more information on the ANPS. For more information on the FANUs and FACB.1. PM08s and BCU1 Remote Inventory information. For the indoor variant.1. The way in which the BCB ASIC transfers information to the OMU in the SUMP depends on the ACRI variant. For the outdoor variant.

13 ACRI 13. Camloc Fastener LEDs POWER ON Connector Handle Figure 440: ACRI Front Panel The ACRI XBCB connector provides a: + 5 VDC signal to enable ANPS Serial interface for the transfer of alarms and Remote Inventory information to the OMU. 812 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 ACRI Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the ACRI.14 .

14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors 14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors This section describes and illustrates the antenna connector lightning protectors. A drawing of the physical appearance of the modules is also included which shows the connectors. showing the functional blocks and their interfaces.14 813 / 914 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

1. These differences allow a lightning strike to be suppressed.14 .1 Operating Principles Lightning strikes and induced pulses have characteristics which are very different from the desired RF signals transmitted and received by the 9100 BTS.1 Lightning Protector Functional Description Antenna connector lightning protectors are used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. differing only in dimensions and appearance.1. The 9100 BTS lightning protectors are based on a ’quarter-wavelength shorting stub’. LPQP. They protect the RF inputs and outputs from the effects of nearby or direct lightning strikes. Type LPQG LPQD LPQP LPQM Variant Product Numbers 3BK 05817 AAAA 3BK 05818 AAAA 3BK 08691 AAAA 3BK 25444 AAAA Table 164: Antenna Connector Lightning Protector Types and Variants The AAAA variants are functionally identical. 814 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. and LPQM types can have different suppliers. LPQD. The following table lists the product numbers.2 Types Even though the LPQG. but effectively shorting any lightning voltage spikes to the cabinet’s chassis ground.14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors 14. 14. 14. The protectors can be used in both the transmit and receive signal paths. This has the effect of passing all operational RF signals. the product numbers are always identical. They are installed to form part of the cabinet’s external RF connections. The lightning protectors are described in the sections: Operating principles Types.

14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors 14. yet rejects the low frequencies generated by lightning.1. The antenna connector lightning protectors perform this function using the quarter-wavelength shorting stub. The following figure shows the power spectrum of a typical lightning strike. a band-pass protection filter can be used. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 815 / 914 .3 Lightning Power Spectrum Quarter-wave stub lightning protectors remove lightning current on a frequency selection basis. Amplitude Density (V/m/Hz) 0 2 100 Frequency (kHz) Figure 441: Lightning Strike Power Spectrum As lightning has a power spectrum with very little energy above 100 kHz. This passes the frequencies of interest (which are much above 100 kHz).

1. The other part continues along the straight-through path. The following figure shows the equivalent circuit of the antenna connector lightning protectors.14 . thus changing its phase by 90. It then travels back along the stub and is again shifted by 90 by the time it reaches the junction. Signal Conductor Signal Path Signal Split Signal Summed Shield/ Chassis Ground 100 % Reflection (180 Delay) Shorting Stub = l /4 (+ 90 Delay for Signals of F = 1/l) Short Circuit Figure 442: Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors Equivalent Circuit During normal operation.14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors 14. At the short. they have a negligible shift when travelling down the stub. The signals are summed at the junction. One part travels along the matched quarter-wavelength stub. where it is split. the RF transmission signal arrives at the input of the shorting stub. Apart from negligible jitter. effectively. 816 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Its components are. shorted to ground (as they are shifted completely out of phase by the short). One end is connected to the through path and the other end is simply shorted. the much lower frequency lightning spectrum is not matched to the stub. In contrast to the high frequency transmission signals. the signal is reflected and hence shifted by a further 180. At the same time.4 Quarter-Wave Stub The quarter-wave stub is a coaxial line exactly one quarter-wavelength long. The reflected and straight-through signals are therefore exactly one cycle out of phase at the junction. the resulting signal is identical to the original signal.

Each protector consists of a coaxial through-connection with the protection mechanism located below the plinth.1 dB ≤1.1900 MHz LPQP 1800 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1 dB ≤ 1.14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors 14.14 817 / 914 . The following figure shows the appearance of the antenna connector lightning protector with shorting stub.2 Lightning Protector Electrical Characteristics The following table shows the electrical characteristics.1 dB ≤1.1 50 ≤0.2000 MHz LPQM 870 .1 50 ≤0.1 50 ≤0.3 Lightning Protector Appearance Lightning protectors can be designed with an internal filter or with a shorting stub (depending on the manufacturer).2200 MHz ≤ 0.970 MHz LPQD 1700 .1 dB ≤1.1 50 Insertion loss: VSWR: Impedance: Table 165: Lightning Protector Electrical Characteristics 14. 7/16 female coaxial RF Cable Connector V−Shaped Grounding Washers Plinth Sealing Washers Quarter Wavelength Shorting Stub 7/16 female coaxial RF Cable Connector Figure 443: Lightning Protector Appearance with Shorting Stub The protectors are mounted in the plinth at the bottom of the cabinet. The lightning protectors have little effect on system performance during normal operation. Characteristic Usable frequency range: LPQG 870 .970 MHz and 1700 .

14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors 818 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier The Tower-Mounted Amplifier (TMA) is designed to compensate the feeder losses which significantly impact the density of sites to be implemented over the service area of GSM networks.14 819 / 914 .

in a balanced uplink/downlink situation. In fact. The TMA solution can be used in GSM 900 or GSM 1800 indoor and outdoor configurations. Two benefits can be obtained in this case: Lower output favorably impacts the standby time of every mobile station Lower output power contributes to minimizing the electromagnetic pollution within the service area. so as to compensate for all losses incurred by received signals. The smallest available path loss determines the range. On the other hand.1 Introduction to TMA A significant part of the benefits brought by the outstanding sensitivity of the 9100 BTS can be lost if the losses incurred by signals along the feeder cable between the receiving antenna and the antenna coupling module (ANxx) are too high. tower-mounted amplification can be beneficial in those cases where system performance is limited by a weaker uplink budget. the noise factor of the system is degraded by an amount depending on the feeder loss. In this respect.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. the introduction of tower-mounted amplification can be an efficient means to reduce the output power level of all mobile stations. However. 820 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 . both uplink and downlink power budgets must be considered for the calculation of the coverage ranges. The basic idea of tower-mounted amplification is to implement a low-noise amplifier as close as possible to the antenna (see figure below). The uplink power control mechanism provided at each base station will force all mobiles to reduce their emission level. Antennas Duplexer Duplexer TMAs Duplexer Duplexer Feeders Mobile Unit BTS Antenna Network combining: ANCx TRE TRE Figure 444: Principles of Tower-Mounted Amplification Tower-mounted amplification appears as an efficient sensitivity enhancement technique.

The attention of Operators is drawn to the fact that. in such a case. the site equipment might not fully comply with ETSI requirements settled in GSM rec 05. GSM 1800 or GSM 1900 with a coupling constraint of a of one TRX/TRE maximum to each antenna. For practical reasons. The TMA is designed to minimize BTS and system impacts.05. The system impact concerns the handling of these new external alarms at the OMC-R level. the decision to exploit tower-mounted amplification can be influenced by system design considerations but also result from the application of the Operator’s internal policy.14 821 / 914 . The counterpart of getting better sensitivity by means of a tower-mounted amplifier is the risk of degrading the blocking and intermodulation characteristics of the base station if the value of the amplification gain greatly exceeds the value of the feeder losses.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier In summary. Supervision is minimal. Cross-polarized antennas can still be used. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. respecting this constraint. The TMA can be used with a wide variety of 9100 BTS indoor and outdoor configurations in GSM 900. The BTS has no knowledge of the TMA presence and is not involved in its configuration. It only involves external alarms to the BTS and there is no recovery mechanism. configurations are limited to a maximum of six TREs per BTS site assuming a 3x2 configuration.

For outdoor BTS configurations. and GSM 1900. installed close to the antenna. The Bias T module is suited for GSM 900. For indoor BTS installations.e. GSM 1800. Antennas Duplexer Duplexer Tower Mounted Amplifiers Duplexer . Bias T .1 Tower Mounted Amplifier with External Solution The TMA with external solution is basically composed of three modules (see figure below): A Tower-Mounted Amplifier (TMA).. . . the PDU has no frequency notation). 822 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. . . and GSM 1900 A Power Distribution Unit (PDU).15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. the same PDU equipment can be used with the TMA of GSM 900. installed in the BTS cabinet or close to the BTS. it is possible to install the PDU inside the BTS cabinet. used to insert the DC voltage in the RF antenna cable to feed the TMA. the PDU can be installed on the wall or in a separate transmission cabinet (if available) and be powered by the BTS power supply.14 . Duplexer Feeders BTS Bias T . . In fact. The PDU is also powered by the BTS power supply.2. providing DC power to remotely feed the masthead amplification module through the antenna feeder and collect the alarm signals. External Alarms Power Distribution Unit 48 V DC Figure 445: TMA with External Solution Architecture The PDU is designed to supply and to monitor up to six TMAs (typical BTS configuration of 3x2 TRXs/TREs).2 Architecture For TMA usage two solutions are available: Tower Mounted Amplifier with external solution Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC support. GSM 1800. featuring the transmit signal bypassed to the antenna and the receive signal amplified by a low-noise amplifier A Bias T module. 15. independently of their frequency band (i. .

Switching and Supervision Figure 446: TMA with AGC Support Architecture 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. TMA Duplexer Fixed TMA Rx Gain Duplexer BTS AGC TRE Bias Bias TMA Duplexer Duplexer Bias TRE Adjustable AGC Rx Gain Bias Feeder Cable Loss AGC Power Supply. featuring the transmit signal bypassed to the antenna and the receive signal amplified by a low-noise amplifier An Antenna Network module (AGC) containing the Bias T module used to insert the DC voltage in the RF antenna cable to feed the TMA and the power supply providing the DC power to remotely feed the masthead amplification module through the antenna feeder. installed close to the antenna.2 Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support The TMA withAGC support is basically composed of two modules (see figure below): A Tower-Mounted Amplifier (TMA).14 823 / 914 .

15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. 15. the appearance of TMAs can differ. Top View Side View Connectors 7/16 female on the bottom face of the box Ground terminal screw M6 Front View BTS ANT Figure 447: Tower-Mounted Amplifier for GSM 900 824 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. as shown in the following example figures. Amplifiers for GSM 900 and GSM 1800/ GSM 1900 are offered by different manufacturers.1 Appearance The tower-mounted amplifier includes a low noise amplifier for the receive path and a double duplexer TX/RX for one antenna port. It is designed for outdoor installation on a tubular mounted support below the antenna.14 .3 Tower-Mounted Amplifier The tower-mounted amplifier is available for GSM 900. GSM 1800 and GSM 1900. Therefore.3.

1785 MHz GSM 1900 1850 . Parameter Frequency range RX Frequency range TX GSM 900 925 .1990 MHz Table 166: Frequency Ranges of the Tower-Mounted Amplifiers Other RF specifications depend on which TMA version of a specific manufacturer is used.1910 MHz 880 . 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. the current position of the BTS.2 Frequency Range The following table lists the RX and TX frequency ranges of the tower-mounted amplifiers.1880 MHz 1930 .915 MHz 1805 . the TMA.14 825 / 914 .960 MHz GSM 1800 1710 .3.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier Side View Antenna Mast Front View Ground terminal screw M6 Stainless steel attachment collar Bottom View Connectors 7/16 female on the bottom face of the box ANT BTS Figure 448: Tower-Mounted Amplifier for GSM 1800/ GSM 1900 15. and the antenna onsite and the corresponding cable lengths.

two at the tower-mounted amplifier. i. There are two 7/ 16 female connectors marked BTS and ANT on the front (lower side down).5 x 168 x 112 mm 6 kg GSM 1800 265 x 158 x 95 mm 2. The connectors on the jumpers are insulated at both ends. The equipment is guaranteed to be watertight when the equipment is installed with the connectors downwards and the two coaxial cables (jumpers) connected to the equipment.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. and one at the feeder head.3.5 kg GSM 1900 265 x 158 x 95 mm 2.14 .3 Mechanical Characteristics The overall dimensions and weights of the examples shown above are listed in the following table.e. Weight and Dimensions The back side of the tower-mounted amplifier is so formed that it can be easily attached on the same vertical tubular support as the antenna using one (GSM 1800/ GSM 1900) or two (GSM 900) stainless steel attachment collars provided as close as possible to the antenna.. Parameter Dimensions GSM 900 357. The BTS connector is connected to the transmission/reception coaxial cable going down to the BTS by an RF jumper. one at the antenna connector.5 kg Weight Table 167: Tower-Mounted Amplifiers. depending on the installation. 826 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The tower-mounted amplifier is fitted with an M6 threaded rod for grounding via a black 16 mm² ground cable (in the installation kit) connected to the pylon or building ground. The antenna connector is connected to the antenna by an RF jumper.

or an connection error of the various parts of cables and equipment. a malfunction of the tower-mounted amplifier. either wall-mounted close to the BTS in an indoor site or integrated inside the BTS cabinet in an outdoor BTS. It is located at the BTS site.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. Serial no. 19" installation: part number 3BK 08456 ABAA) provides power supply and an alarm interface for up to six tower-mounted amplifiers. Wall Version for BTS Indoor 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. each providing two tower-mounted amplifiers with DC power. The secondary voltages are + 12 VDC and are fed to the six tower-mounted amplifiers via Bias tees which are not integrated parts of the module.4 Power Distribution Unit The Power Distribution Unit (wall installation: part number 3BK 08456 AAAA. The Power Distribution Unit includes three separate DC/DC converters. The BTS is informed by an alarm indication if there is a defective DC/DC converter.4.1 Appearance The following figures show the Power Distribution Units. label Fixing hole LEDs Reset button Power switch 1 2 1 14 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Terminal blocks (secondary power connection) Main power supply cable Terminal block (for alarm cable) Ground braid collars Ground connector (M6) Top View Side View Figure 449: Power Distribution Unit. The power consumption for the Power Distribution Unit is 30 W. The primary voltage of the Power Distribution Unit is -48 VDC. 15.14 827 / 914 .

19" Version for BTS Outdoor 828 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier Ground braid collars 1 2 1 14 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Power supply cable Ground connector (M6) Top View Front View Figure 450: Power Distribution Unit.14 .

The six red LEDs (for channel 1 to channel 6) indicate when the tower-mounted amplifier alarms come on. 15. 15. 15.14 829 / 914 . Three green LEDs indicate the presence of the secondary voltage for two channels each (1 + 2.5 PDU LEDs LEDs are provided on the top (wall installation) or on the side (19" installation) of the Power Distribution Unit to indicate the status and the alarms.4 Switching On Before switching on the power supply at the PDU input. LED -48 VDC Color Orange LED On Main power available Secondary power available Secondary power available Secondary power available TMA malfunction or connection errors (alarm) LED Off No main power available DC/DC converter is faulty (alarm) DC/DC converter is faulty (alarm) DC/DC converter is faulty (alarm) No fault POWER TMA 1 and 2 Green POWER TMA 3 and 4 Green POWER TMA 5 and 6 Green TMA 1 to TMA 6 Red Table 168: Power Distribution Unit LEDs 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. The output channels can be separately switched on/off. all switches have to be in the OFF position (all LEDs are also OFF).4. 3 + 4. while the three green LEDs indicate that the secondary power for all separate channels is available.2 Switches and LEDs There is a main power switch used to switch the main power on or off. After switching on the separate channel switches and pressing the reset buttons.4. 5 + 6).4. the corresponding tower-mounted amplifiers are supplied and the red LEDs are OFF. If pressed for at least two seconds. The corresponding orange LED indicates the presence of -48 V primary voltage. When the main power is switched on.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. The PDU is also fitted with a main reset button to reset all channels used in a single action. the concerned red LED goes out. The following table describes each LED and provides a definition of their operational states. the orange LED ’main power’ indicates the presence of primary voltage.3 Reset Button Each channel has a separate reset button. A corresponding red LED indicates the presence of + 12 VDC secondary voltage.4.

7/16 Male connector to TMA Ground Terminal Screw M6 ANT BTS Male Connector to PDU 7/16 Female connector to BTS Figure 451: Bias T.14 . The outdoor version is normally combined with a 90 bend. Two Bias T versions are available: Bias T for indoor BTS-RF connectors 7/ 16 male/ side TMA.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. female/ side BTS Bias T for outdoor BTS-RF connectors 7/ 16 female/ side TMA. Indoor Version 830 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. male/ side BTS. The following figures show the Bias T units.5 Bias T The Bias T unit (part number 3BK 08453 ABAA or 3BK 08454 ABAA) is a power supply injector to transport the + 12 VDC power supply energy to the tower-mounted amplifier through the coaxial cable between the antenna and the BTS. Both indoor and outdoor versions are combined with a surge arrestor. The injector is designed for indoor and outdoor installation between the BTS and the coaxial transmission-reception cable.

14 831 / 914 . Outdoor Version Figure 453: Surge Arrestor 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 7/16 Female connector to TMA Ground Terminal Screw M6 ANT BTS 7/16 Male connector to BTS Male Connector to PDU Figure 452: Bias T.

6 Installation 15. ANTENNA TMA ANT BTS GND connection Ground bar RF jumper RF jumper Feeder Surge Arrestor RF jumper Bias T for BTS Indoor Bias T Injector Cable Wall Installation Alarm cable PDU BTS indoor DC cable to power supply GND connection Figure 454: Indoor Installation 832 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. the distance between the BTS.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15.1 Indoor Installation Depending on the installation. the Power Distribution Unit. Therefore the RF jumper cables are defined to cover this flexibility. The following figure shows an indoor installation. The PDU and Bias T are installed outside the BTS.6.14 . and the Tower-Mounted Amplifier can be variable.

The PDU has a 19" version which is installed in a subrack. including 90 bend and surge arrestor. are installed in the bottom or top of the cabinet. ANTENNA TMA ANT BTS GND connection Ground bar RF jumper RF jumper Feeder Ground cable BTS Outdoor PDU 19" subrack 19’’ subrack DC cable to power supply COAR Bus bar ’Octopus’ cable fitted with 6 cables Alarm cable Cable gland ANx Surge Arrestor Bias T with 90 RF jumper Figure 455: Principle Outdoor Installation for 9100 BTS 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 833 / 914 . The Bias T.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. in an outdoor installation the PDU and Bias T are installed inside the BTS.2 Outdoor Installation Contrary to indoor installation. The following figures show the principle outdoor installations for BTS versions with a Bias T installation on the bottom.6.

14 .15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier ANTENNA TMA ANT BTS GND connection Ground bar RF jumper RF jumper Feeder Ground cable Bus bar DC cable to power supply 19’’ subrack BTS Outdoor PDU 19" subrack Alarm cable ANx OUTC ’Octopus’ cable fitted with 6 cables Surge Arrestor Bias T with 90 RF jumper Figure 456: Principle Outdoor Installation for 9100 BTS Evolution 834 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

1.1.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15.1 TMA Ground Cable The following figure shows the TMA ground cable (part number 3BK 08452 ABAA). Figure 458: Jumper Cable 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.7.7 TMA Cables 15. Variant ’xxxx’ represents cable lengths. The following figure shows the jumper cable.2 Jumper Cable For indoor and outdoor installation of the tower-mounted amplifier.7. Ring tongue M6 Shrink sheath Ring tongue M8 Figure 457: Ground Cable for Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. 15.1 Indoor/Outdoor BTS Cables This section describes the cables for both indoor and outdoor BTS installation of the TMA.7. there are several jumper cables with different cable lengths (part numbers 3BK 05360 xxxx or 3BK 07965 xxxx).14 835 / 914 .

7. Bias T side PDU side Figure 459: Bias T Cable 15. 15.7. braid overturned Figure 460: Indoor DC Cable Lug M6 30 mm shrink sheath Figure 461: Indoor Ground Cable FM2A armored cable Figure 462: Indoor Alarm Cable 836 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. and an alarm cable.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15. there is a specific cable set (part number 3BK 25484 AAAA) containing a ground cable. The following figures show all cables.2.2. a DC power supply cable.2 Indoor Cable Set For indoor installation.2 Indoor BTS Cables The following sections describe the Bias T cable and the cable set used for indoor BTS installations.14 .1 Bias T Cable The following figure shows the Bias T cable (part number 3BK 25482 AAAA).7.

The following figures show all cables.7.7.14 837 / 914 .2 Outdoor Cable Set For outdoor installation there is a specific cable set (part number 3BK 25485 AAAA) containing a ground cable.15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 15.3 Outdoor BTS Cables The following sections describe the cable and cable set used for outdoor BTS installations. −48 V Not used 0V braid overturned Mate N lock 3 male Figure 464: Outdoor DC Cable 30 mm shrink sheath Figure 465: Outdoor Ground Cable Figure 466: Outdoor Alarm Cable 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3.1 Octopus Cable The following figure shows the ’Octopus’ cable (part number 3BK 25483 AAAA) is fitted with six cables. Straight cable plug Bulkhead feedthrough cable jack Spacer Female connectors Figure 463: ’Octopus’ Cable 15.3. 15. and an alarm cable. a DC power supply cable.7.

15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 838 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

16 Cable Descriptions 16 Cable Descriptions This section describes the internal and external cables. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 839 / 914 . the pin-to-pin interconnections between cable connectors are illustrated in diagrams. Where appropriate.

straight.1 ANCO The following figure shows the ANCO (part number 3BK 26151) connections. Lightning Protector Shield AN Type 7/16. right angle. right angle.1. ANT Cabinet Connector Shield AN Type 7/16.2 ANIC The following figure shows the ANIC (part number 3BK 07921) connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16. male Figure 468: ANIC Connections 840 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 16.1 Internal Cables The following sections provide the physical and electrical characteristics for the indoor and outdoor internal cables.14 . male Type 7/16.1. straight. male Figure 467: ANCO Connections 16. female M3 Thread Type 7/16.

4 ANOC The following figure shows the ANOC (part number 3BK 07965) connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16.1. male Figure 470: ANOC Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Lightning Protector Shield AN Type 7/16.14 841 / 914 .3 ANLC The following figure shows the ANLC (part number 3BK 26349) connections. male Type 7/16. Male Type 7/16.1. Male Figure 469: ANLC Connections 16. Straight. Right Angle. Lightning Protector Shield AN Type 7/16. right angle. right angle.

5.16 Cable Descriptions 16.1 Variant AA Appearance The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOBU (part number 3BK08742) Variant AA.14 .5 BOBU This section describes both Variant AA and Variant CA of the BOBU.1.1. 16. P1 P13 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P20 P21 P22 P19 P14 P9 P23 P24 P25 P26 P15 P27 P16 P17 P10 P11 P18 P28 P12 Figure 471: BOBU Variant AA Appearance 842 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

16 Cable Descriptions 16. Top P1 P19 P2 P3 P4 Service Light Smoke Alarm.1.5. +24 V / 0 V PDU3 (STASR 6) P7 PDU2 (STASR 4) P8 PDU1 (STASR 1) XIOB and Options P5 P6 Supply Option X1 Supply Option X2 Supply Option X3 Supply Option X4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P20 P21 P22 XIOB Supply Light Filter Heater Filter P14 STASR 6 STASR 3 P13 COAR Alarms P9 STASR 3 P23 P24 P25 P26 −48 V Filter 0 V Bolt Ground Bolt STASR 2 STASR 2 P27 STASR 1 P15 STASR 5 STASR 6 STASR 5 STASR 1 P16 STASR 4 P17 P18 HEX2 (BTS 2) or Loop HEX2 P10 STASR 4 HEX2 (BTS 1) P28 Door 1 and 2 Switches HEAT Bottom 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P11 Water P12 Layer: 1 2 3 Signal: WATER HEX2−1 HEX2−2 Layer: 4T/B 5T/B 6 Signal: SMOKE / DOOR1 24V / DOOR2 XGND Layer: 7 8T/B 9 Signal: −48VG −48V0 / −48VG GND−0V Layer: 10 11 12 T / B Signal: GND−0V NF1 LIF1 / LIF2 Figure 472: BOBU Variant AA Circuit Schematic 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 843 / 914 .2 Variant AA Circuit Schematic The following figure shows the BOBU Variant AA connections.

Mate-N-Lock. male with female contacts. female with female contacts. unisex. P24 P25 P26 P27 Type Wieland GST 1813 S. P11 P9. female contacts. P8. 8 mm. Anderson Powerpole. male with female contacts.5 mm 2 Mate-N-Lock. female. ring. 9-pin Sub-D. FASTON 6. female with female contacts. female with female contacts. P17 P13 P18 P19 P20. P7. Mate-N-Lock. female with female contacts. P22 P23. Triple FASTON. Mate-N-Lock. P4 P5. P12 P2.16 Cable Descriptions 16. crimp. P16 P10. male with female contacts. ring.14 . P28 P21. P6. P14. Lug. DIN wire ferrules 2. Connector P1. crimp. Mate-N-Lock. 6 mm. P3.3 Variant AA Connectors The following table lists the connectors of the BOBU.3. P15. Lug. Triple FASTON.5. Table 169: BOBU Variant AA Connectors 844 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. male with male contacts.1.

4 Variant CA Appearance The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOBU (part number 3BK 08742) Variant CA.16 Cable Descriptions 16.5.14 845 / 914 . Figure 473: BOBU Variant CA Appearance 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.

14 .16 Cable Descriptions 16. ELECTRICAL GENERAL SCHEME CONNECTORS TECHNOLOGIES Figure 474: BOBU Variant CA Circuit Schematic 846 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.5.5 Variant CA Circuit Schematic The following figure shows the BOBU Variant CA connections.1.

16.16 Cable Descriptions 16.1.1 Appearance The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOMU (part number 3BK 25672). Figure 475: BOMU Appearance 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.6.14 847 / 914 .6 BOMU Diagrams illustrate both the BOMU’s appearance and its circuit schematics.

2 Circuit Schematic The following figure shows the BOMU connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16.14 .1.6. Figure 476: BOMU Circuit Schematic 848 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

16 Cable Descriptions 16.7 BOMUE This section uses diagrams to illustrate both the BOMU’s appearance and its circuit schematics.1.1. Figure 477: BOMUE Appearance 16. 16.7.2 Circuit Schematic The following figure shows the BOMUE connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 849 / 914 .7.1 Appearance The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOMUE (part number 3BK 27262).1.

14 .16 Cable Descriptions Figure 478: BOMUE Circuit Schematic 850 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

16.14 851 / 914 .1 Appearance The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOMUT (part number 3BK 27143).1. Figure 479: BOMUT Appearance 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8 BOMUT Diagrams illustrate both the BOMUT’s appearance and its circuit schematics.8.16 Cable Descriptions 16.1.

14 .16 Cable Descriptions 16. Figure 480: BOMUT Circuit Schematic 852 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8.2 Circuit Schematic The following figure shows the BOMUT connections.1.

14 853 / 914 . 16. P1 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P2 P10 P11 P12 P3 Figure 481: BOSU Variant AA Appearance 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.9.1.1 Variant AA Appearance The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOSU (part number 3BK 08741) Variant AA.1.9 BOSU The following sections describe the BOSU variants.16 Cable Descriptions 16. in terms of appearance and connections. AA and CA.

unisex DIN wire ferrules 2. ring. P10: P12: 1 2 3 4 5 6 P3 Wieland GST 1813 S. crimp. female with female contacts Anderson Powerpole. male with female contacts Tripple Faston. male with male contacts Figure 482: BOSU Variant AA Circuit Schematic 854 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 6 mm Matenlock. Top P1 Service Light 1 2 3 4 5 6 P4 Service Filter P5 ACSB/ASCU Layer: 1 2 3 4 5 6T/B Signal: XGND DOOR HEX2 GND NF1 LIF1 / LIF2 P6 Heater Filter P7 COAR Alarms P8 Keyswitch P9 P10 Ground Bolt −48 VDC Input 0 VDC Input P2 HEX2 Alarm P12 (or loop) P11 Door Switch Heater Module HEAT2 Bottom P1.2 Variant AA Circuit Schematic The following figure shows the BOSU Variant AA connections. 8 mm Lug.16 Cable Descriptions 16.1. crimp. ring. P3: P2: P4:.5 mm 9−pin Sub−D female Lug.9. P11: P7: P8: P9.14 . P6: P5.

16 Cable Descriptions 16.14 855 / 914 .3 Variant CA Appearance The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOSU (part number 3BK 08741) Variant CA. Figure 483: BOSU Variant CA Appearance 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.9.

1.14 .16 Cable Descriptions 16.4 Variant CA Circuit Schematic The following figure shows the BOSU Variant CA connections.9. ELECTRICAL GENERAL SCHEME CONNECTORS TECHNOLOGIES Figure 484: BOSU Variant CA Circuit Schematic 856 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

STASR 1 BTSRI 1 1 STASR 2 STASR 3 TFBP 44 45 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Break in wire for coding purposes P1: P2 − P4: P5: Non−removable. rows A and C only. self cutting.11 BTSRI5 The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRI5 (part number 3BK 25974). female Flat cable connector. 50 pins. 50 pins DIN 41612. 64 pins. 64 pins. 50 pins.1.10 BTSRI3 The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRI3I (part number 3BK 25973). rows A and C only. STASR 1 BTSRI 1 1 STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 TFBP 44 45 46 47 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Break in wire for coding purposes P1: P2 − P6: P7: Non−removable. self cutting.16 Cable Descriptions 16. 50 pins DIN 41612. female Figure 485: BTSRI3 Connections 16. female Figure 486: BTSRI5 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. female Flat cable connector.14 857 / 914 .

female Figure 487: BTSRIMA Connections 16. P3: P4: Non−removable. 64 pins. female Figure 488: BTSRIMI Connections 858 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 BTSRIMI The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRIMI (part number 3BK 07720). STASR 1 BTSRI 1 1 STASR 2 TFBP 44 P1 P2 P3 P4 Break in wire for coding purposes P1: P2.16 Cable Descriptions 16. 50 pins. rows A and C only. 50 pins. 50 pins DIN 41612. female Flat cable connector. self cutting. 50 pins DIN 41612.1. 64 pins.1. STASR 1 BTSRI 1 1 STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 TFBP 44 45 46 47 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Break in wire for coding purposes P1: P2 − P6: P7: Non−removable.12 BTSRIMA The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRIMA (part number 3BK 07720).14 . self cutting. female Flat cable connector. rows A and C only.

64 pins.1. 50 pins DIN 41612. rows A and C only. self cutting. P4: Non−removable.14 859 / 914 .16 Cable Descriptions 16. Variant CA Variant AA STASR 1 BTSRI 1 STASR 2 1 STASR 3 1 44 P1 P2 P3 P4 Break in wire for coding purposes P1: P2. female Figure 489: BTSRIOUT Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. P3.14 BTSRIOUT The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRIOUT (part number 3BK 08126).

14 . Black) Subrack 3 P8 x3 (Red. male. M8 hole Spade. open tongue. Blue. female Triple Faston. Black) GND x7 (Black) x3 (Red. Black) Subrack 4 P7 x3 (Red. female Figure 490: BUMA Connections 860 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Blue. Black) Subrack 2 P9 x3 (Red. Blue.16 Cable Descriptions 16. Black) x3 (Red. Black) Subrack 1 P10 GND Bolt GND Filter 0V Breakers −48 V 1 2 3 XIOB −48 V Subrack 1 − 5 and Top Fan Backplane GND −48 V 0V 4 3 P5 to P10 1 4 1 1 GND 0V P4 x7 P1 P1: P2: P3: P4: P5 − P10: P2 P3 3 Spade. Blue. Blue. Blue. male. male. Black) Subrack 5 P6 Top Fan Backplane P5 Breakers x3 (Red. M5 Matenlock.1. Blue. x7 (Red) P1 P2 Filter x7 (Blue) P3 P4 XIOB x3 (Red.15 BUMA The following figure shows the BUMA (part number 3BK 07762) cableform connections. M6 hole Spade.

16 BUMI The following figure shows the BUMI (part number 3BK 07763) cableform connections. open tongue. Blue. Black) GND x4 (Black) x3 (Red. Blue. Black) Subrack 2 P6 Top Fan Backplane P5 Breakers x3 (Red. x4 (Red) P1 P2 Filter x4 (Blue) P3 P4 XIOB x3 (Red.14 861 / 914 . male. M8 hole Spade. female Triple Faston.16 Cable Descriptions 16. male. Blue. 2 and Top Fan Backplane GND −48 V 0V 4 3 P5 to P7 1 4 1 1 −48 V GND 0V GND 0V −48 V 1 2 3 P4 x4 3 P1 P2 P3 P1: P2: P3: P4: P5 − P7: Spade. Black) Subrack 1 P7 GND Bolt Filter Breakers XIOB Subrack 1. Black) x3 (Red. Blue. female Figure 491: BUMI Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. male. M5 Matenlock. M6 hole Spade.

1.16 Cable Descriptions 16. female Figure 492: CA12 Connections 16. 64 pins. STASR 3 1 STASR 4 1 STASR5 BTSRIOUT Connector 45 46 47 P1 P2 P3 P4 Break in wire for coding purposes P1: P2 − P4: Flat cable connector. 50 pins.1. COAR 7 6 1 Black Transparent Screen Microwave UL 2 7 1 3 8 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 Screen Transparent Black 5 9 4 9−pin Sub−D female 1 5 6 9 6 9 Figure 493: CA-2MMC2 Connections 862 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.18 CA-2MMC2 The following figure shows the CA-2MMC2 (part number 3BK 08289) connections.14 . row A and C only.17 CA12 The following figure shows the connections for the CA12 (part number 3BK 08086). female DIN 41612.

SUM side 1 Shield BTSCA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D female 5 1 6 9 9 6 Figure 494: CA-ABIS Connections 16.19 CA-ABIS The following figure shows the CA-ABIS (part number 3BK 07922) connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16.20 CA-ACB2 The following figure shows the CA-ACB2 (part number 3BK 08091) cable connections.14 863 / 914 . BTS Compartment 2 COAR 1 P2 2 5 P1 6 4 5 P1 1 5 5 P3 1 6 P1: P2: P3: 9 9 6 9−pin Sub−D male Receptacle Faston 4.8 x 0.5 9−pin Sub−D female Figure 495: CA-ACB2 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.1.

CA-ADABP Connections 864 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. CA-ADABP The following figure shows the CA-ADABM (part number 3BK 25139) connections and the CA-ADABP (part number 3BK 25138) connections. ring crimp.14 .21 CA-ACSC The following figure shows the CA-ACSC (part number 3BK 08078) cable connections. Battery Breaker CA−ADABM: CA−ADABP: Blue Black ADAM Lug.1.5 DIN wire ferrules Figure 496: CA-ACSC Connections 16.8 x 0.1.16 Cable Descriptions 16. Side Compartment COAR 1 P2 2 4 P3 5 5 P1 6 6 7 P1 1 5 1 P4 5 6 P1 − P4: P2: P3: 9 6 9 9−pin Sub−D male Receptacle Faston 4. M6 DIN wire ferrule Figure 497: CA-ADABM.22 CA-ADABM.

CA-ADACP Connections 16.1.16 Cable Descriptions 16.5/16−STF−3.81 Figure 499: CA-ADCO Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. ADAM CA−ADACM: CA−ADACP: Blue Black Battery Interconnection DIN wire ferrule DIN wire ferrule Figure 498: CA-ADACM. Phoenix FK−MPC 1.14 865 / 914 .23 CA-ADACM. CA-ADACP The following figure shows the CA-ADACM (part number 3BK 25248) connections and the CA -ADACP (part number 3BK 25247) connections.24 CA-ADCO The following figure shows the CA-ADCO (part number 3BK 07953) cable connections.1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Clamp strip.

P5 9−Pin Sub−D Female Wire Ferrules 9−Pin Sub−D Male Twin Wire Ferrules 6 7 4 5 P4 To DCUC X8 P5 To DCUC X7 Figure 501: CA-ALPC Circuit Schematic 866 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 9−Pin Sub−D Male 9−Pin Sub−D Female Figure 500: CA-ALPC Appearance 1 2 Alarm − P2 To Door Switch Alarm + 9 Alarm − 5 Alarm + − 48 V 6 − 48 V 7 P3 OUTC 0V 2 0V 3 P1 HEX5 P1 P2 P3 P4.14 .25 CA-ALPC The following figures show the CA-ALPC (part number 3BK 26348) cable connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16.1.

5 9−pin Sub−D female Figure 502: CA-APC2 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. P4: P3: P5: 9 15 9 9−pin Sub−D male DIN wire ferrules Receptagle Faston 4.1. BTS Compartment 1 COAR 1 2 P4 3 4 6 P3 7 11 P2 12 5 P1 6 P1 1 5 8 P5 14 15 1 6 P1: P2.26 CA-APC2 The following figure shows the CA-APC2 (part number 3BK 08215) cable connections.8x0.14 867 / 914 .16 Cable Descriptions 16.

CA-BABRP The following figure shows the CA-BABRM (part number 3BK 25141) connections and the CA-BABRP (part number 2BK 25140) connections.29 CA-BRCM.28 CA-BABRM.5 mm 2 Figure 503: CA-ASMC Connections 16. 5 mm DIN wire ferrules 2. ring.14 . M6 Figure 504: CA-BABRM. female.8 Lug. crimp.3x0.16 Cable Descriptions 16. CA-BRCP Connections 868 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. CA-BABRP Connections 16. ring crimp. Battery CA−BRCM: CA−BRCP: Blue Black DIN wire ferrule Angled Crimp Connector for M6 Battery Breaker Figure 505: CA-BRCM. Battery Breaker CA−BABRM: CA−BABRP: Blue Black Interconnection Area Lug.1.1. CA-BRCP The following figure shows the CA-BRCM (part number 3BK 25246) connections and the CA-BRCP (part number 3BK 25245) connections. M6 Lug. 6.27 CA-ASMC The following figure shows the CA-ASMC (part number 3BK 08807) connections. ACIB 1 2 3 4 P1 Yellow/Green P2 4 P1 1 P2 P3 ACSB Black 2 Black 1 Blue Brown P1: P2: P3: Quardruple Faston. ring crimp.

row A and C only. 64 pins. 50 pins. female Figure 507: CA-CSTR Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. SUM side 1 1 BTSCA 37−pin Sub−D male 37−pin Sub−D female Figure 506: CA-BTSCA Connections 16.16 Cable Descriptions 16.30 CA-BTSCA The following figure shows the CA-BTSCA (part number 3BK 07923) connections. STASR 7 1 RIBAT2 RIBAT1 1 COAR BTSRIOUT Connector 45 50 P1 P2 P3 P4 Break in wire for coding purposes P1 − P3: P4: DIN 41612.14 869 / 914 .1.31 CA-CSTR The following figure shows the connections for the CA-CSTR (part number 3BK 25178). female Flat cable connector.

SUM Microwave UX 1 20 Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3 Pair 4 Rx Blue Pair 5 Pair 6 Pair 7 Pair 8 P1 10 29 Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3 Pair 4 TX Red Pair 5 Pair 6 Pair 7 Pair 8 11 30 12 31 13 32 14 33 15 34 16 35 17 36 18 37 P2 P3 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 1 19 2 21 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 25 7 26 8 27 9 28 20 P1: P2: P3: Pouyet.16 Cable Descriptions 16.14 . P44920−CA blue Pouyet.32 CA-DFUX The following figure shows the CA-DFUX (part number 3BK 08503) cable connections. P44920−CA red 37−pin Sub−D male 37 Figure 508: CA-DFUX Connections 870 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.

M6 Lug. SRACDC ACSB Yellow/Green Lug. ring.1.34 CA-Ground The following figure shows the CA-Ground (part number 3BK 25182) connections. ring crimp.8 Figure 509: CA-GCMW Connections 16.1. M8 Figure 510: CA-Ground Connections 16. Faston 5.14 871 / 914 .3 x 0. ring crimp.16 Cable Descriptions 16. ring crimp. crimp Receptacle. LPFU CA−BABRM: CA−BABRP: Blue Black Bottom Plate Lug. 8 mm DIN wire ferrule Figure 511: CA-Ground1 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.35 CA-Ground1 The following figure shows the CA-Ground1 (part number 3BK 08118) connections. Ground Yellow/Green Microwave Equipment Lug.33 CA-GCMW The following figure shows the CA-GCMW (part number 3BK 07934) connections.1.

crimp.36 CA-Ground2 The following figure shows the CA-Ground2 (part number 3BK 08177) connections. 8 mm Lug. crimp. ring.1.37 CA-H2PC1 The following figure shows the CA-H2PC1 (part number 3BK 08077) connections. ring. SRACDC ACSB Yellow/Green Lug. 8 mm Figure 512: CA-Ground2 Connections 16.16 Cable Descriptions 16. HEX2 1 DCDP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D female 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 9 6 6 9 Figure 513: CA-H2PC1 Connections 872 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .1.

1.38 CA-H2PC2 The following figure shows the CA-H2PC2 (part number 08092) connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16. COAR 1 DCDP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D female 1 5 9−pin Sub−D male 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 9 6 9 Figure 514: CA-H2PC2 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 873 / 914 .

male 4 1 6 9 Figure 516: CA-HOAP Connections 874 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .1.16 Cable Descriptions 16.1.40 CA-HOAP The following figure shows the CA-HOAP (part number 3BK 25820) connections.39 CA-H2PC3 The following figure shows the CA-H2PC3 (part number 3BK 08093) connections. HEX2 1 COAR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D female 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D female 5 1 9 6 9 6 Figure 515: CA-H2PC3 Connections 16. HEX3 5 9 BOMU 4 3 2 2 3 6 1 7 9−pin Sub−D female 1 5 Matenlock.

16 Cable Descriptions 16.42 CA-MXBP The following figure shows the CA-MXBP (part number 3BK 08886) connections. male 2 1 BOBU 2 5 1 Figure 517: CA-MLBP Connections 16.1. Microwave UX 1 2 3 Sub−D size A for three HP contacts.14 875 / 914 . male and female 2 Matenlock. Microwave UL 1 3 5 Plug for three female contacts 1 Matenlock.41 CA-MLBP The following figure shows the CA-MLBP (part number 3BK 08886) connections.1. male 2 1 BOBU 1 3 1 Figure 518: CA-MXBP Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

16 Cable Descriptions 16. male 4 1 BOSU or BOBU 1 2 6 9 Figure 519: CA-OHAC Connections 876 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.43 CA-OHAC The following figure shows the CA-OHAC (part number 3BK 08810) connections.1. HEX2 1 9 9−pin Sub−D male HEX2 2 3 3 6 4 7 9−pin Sub−D female 1 5 Matenlock.14 .

male 2 1 9−pin Sub−D male 6 7 COAR/ABIS1 P3 6 7 8 9 BOBU P4 2 1 P5 Figure 520: CA-ONCCx Type 1 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. P4 9 6 9 5 P1. P3.1 Type 1 Connections The following figure shows the CA-ONCCx type 1 connections.14 877 / 914 .16 Cable Descriptions 16. Each type is illustrated in a separate diagram.1.1.44 CA-ONCCx The CA-ONCCx cable has three connection types.44. BOBU 2 1 COAR/ABIS2 P1 6 7 8 9 SUM P2 4 5 3 1 Customer Equipment 2 1 8 P2. P5 Matenlock. 16.

44.16 Cable Descriptions 16. DCDP 1 6 COAR/ABIS2 P1 6 7 8 9 SUM P2 4 5 3 1 1 Customer Equipment 2 P1 to P5 8 9 6 9 5 9−pin Sub−D male 6 7 COAR/ABIS1 P3 6 7 8 9 DCDP P4 1 6 P5 Figure 521: CA-ONCCx Type 2 Connections 878 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .2 Type 2 Connections The following figure shows the CA-ONCCx type 2 connections.1.

16 Cable Descriptions 16.14 879 / 914 .3 Type 3 Connections The following figure shows the CA-ONCCx type 3 connections.1.44. COAR/ABIS2 6 7 8 9 SUM P1 4 5 3 1 2 P1. P2. P3 8 9 6 9 1 5 Customer Equipment 9−pin Sub−D male 6 7 COAR/ABIS1 P2 6 7 8 9 P3 Figure 522: CA-ONCCx Type 3 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

16 Cable Descriptions 16.1. Side Compartment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D female 1 5 6 9 Figure 523: CA-OSCP1 Connections 880 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .45 CA-OSCP1 The following figure shows the CA-OSCP1 (part number 3BK 08095) cable connections.

CBO 15− Pin Sub−D Female Figure 525: CA-OSCP3 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 881 / 914 .1.46 CA-OSCP2 The following figure shows the CA-OSCP2 (part number 3BK 08096) cable connections.47 CA-OSCP3 The following figure shows the CA-OSCP3 (part number 3BK 25548) cable connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16. BTS Compartment 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D female 1 5 6 9 Figure 524: CA-OSCP2 Connections 16.1.

female DCDP 1 2 3 Sub−D size A for three HP contacts 3 1 Figure 526: CA-OSPC Connections 16. DCBREAK CA−PCAN: CA−PCAP: Blue Black ADAM Lug.1. male 3 1 Figure 528: CA-PCOS Connections 882 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.8. M6 DIN wire ferrule Figure 527: CA-PCAN.49 CA-PCAN.14 .8x0. STASR 1 3 4 Triple Faston. ring crimp.1.16 Cable Descriptions 16.50 CA-PCOS The following figure shows the CA-PCOS (part number 3BK 08809) connections. STASR −48 V GND 0V Three Faston 6. CA-PCAP The following figure shows the CA-PCAN (part number 3BK 25115) and the CA-PCAP (part number 3BK 25114) connections.1. CA-PCAP Connections 16.48 CA-OSPC The following figure shows the CA-OSPC (part number 3BK 08079) connections. female 4 1 BOBU 3 2 1 Triple Faston.

row A and only. 50 pins. female Figure 530: CA-RFMW Connections 16.52 CA-RFMW The following figure shows the CA-RFMW (part number 3BK 07931) connections.1.16 Cable Descriptions 16.51 CA-PDCM.14 883 / 914 . female DIN 41612.1. CA-PDCP The following figure shows the CA-PDCM (part number 3BK 25232) connections and the CA-PDCP (part number 3BK 25231) connections. male N type. female Figure 531: CA-RIBCO Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. ADAM CA−PDCM: CA−PDCP: Blue Black Battery Interconnection DIN wire ferrule DIN wire ferrule Figure 529: CA-PDCM. 64 pins.53 CA-RIBCO The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RIBCO (part number 3BK 26347). STASR 1 OUTC Flat Cable Connector Side Compart− ment 44* STASR 2 P1 *: P1 : P2/P3 : P2 P3 Break wire for coding purposes Flat cable connector. CA-PDCP Connections 16. Connection Area Shield Microwave Equipment N type.

STASR 4 OUTC Flat Cable Connector Side Compart− ment 1 1 STASR 5 STASR 6 1 44 45 46 47 48 P1 P2 P3 P4 P1 : P2/P4 : Break wire for coding purposes Flat cable connector.1. female Figure 532: CA-RICPT1 Connections 16. STASR 2 OUTC Flat Cable Connector Side Compart− ment STASR 3 1 44 45 P1 P2 P3 P1 : P2/P3 : Break wire for coding purposes Flat cable connector. female Figure 533: CA-RICPT2 Connections 884 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1. 64 pins. 50 pins. female DIN 41612.54 CA-RICPT1 The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RICPT1 (part number 3BK 25537).14 .55 CA-RICPT2 The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RICPT2 (part number 3BK 25538). row A and C only. 50 pins.16 Cable Descriptions 16. row A and only. 64 pins. female DIN 41612.

female DIN 41612.1.57 CA-RIMO2 The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RIMO2 (part number 3BK 25823). 45. 46* P1 *: P1 : P2/P5 : P2 47* 48* 44. 64 pins. STASR 1 OUTC Flat Cable Connector Side Compart− ment 44* 45* 44. row A and only. 46. female Figure 534: CA-RIMO1 Connections 16. 48* P4 P5 STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 7 P1 *: P1 : P2/P5 : P2 P3 Break wire for coding purposes Flat cable connector.1. 45* STASR 5 STASR 6 STASR 0 P3 P4 P5 Break wire for coding purposes Flat cable connector. female Figure 535: CA-RIMO2 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.16 Cable Descriptions 16. row A and only. female DIN 41612. STASR 4 OUTC Flat Cable Connector BTS Compart− ment 1 44. 64 pins. 45.56 CA-RIMO1 The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RIMO1 (part number 3BK 25822). 50 pins. 47.14 885 / 914 . 50 pins.

ACRI 15 15 COAR 15−pin Sub−D male 15−pin Sub−D male Figure 537: CA-XBCBO Connections 886 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.58 CA-SENSP The following figure shows the CA-SENSP (part number 3BK 26147) connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16.1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Resistor 105 Ohm 1% 9−Pin Sub−D Female Figure 536: CA-SENSP Connections 16.59 CA-XBCBO The following figure shows the CA-XBCBO (part number 3BK 08205) connections.14 .

16 Cable Descriptions 16.60 CA-XIOC The following figure shows the CA-XIOC (part number 3BK 26353) connections. DCDP 1 2 3 4 5 XIOB 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 1 2 3 Matenlock. XIOB To DCUC X10 To DCUC X9 DIN Wire Ferrules 1 − 48V (Blue) 2 Not Used 3 0V (Black) Mate−N Lock. Male 3 1 Figure 538: CA-XIOC Connections 16.14 887 / 914 .1. female 3 1 6 9 Figure 539: CA-XIOPC Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.1.61 CA-XIOPC The following figure shows the CA-XIOPC (part number 3BK 08087) connections.

M6 hole Spade. male. M8 hole Spade. Blue. Blue. Black) P10 Subrack 1 Bus Bar GND Bolt Filter Breakers XIOB Subrack 1 − 5 and Top Fan Backplane GND −48 V 0V 4 3 P5 − P10 1 4 1 1 −48 V GND 0V GND 0V −48 V 1 2 3 P4 x7 P1 P1: P2: P3: P4: P5 − P10: P2 P3 Spade.16 Cable Descriptions 16. Black) P7 Subrack 4 x3 (Red. Blue. Blue. Black) P9 Subrack 2 x3 (Red. female 3 Figure 540: CIMA Bus Bar Connections 888 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. x7 (Red) x7 (Blue) x7 (Black) P2 x3 (Red. made. Blue. Blue. female Triple Faston.62 CIMA Bus Bar The following figure shows the CIMA (part number 3BK 07762) bus bar connections. Black) P4 P5 Top Fan Backplane x3 (Red.1.14 . Black) P6 Subrack 5 Fixing Holes x3 (Red. open tongue. Blue. M5 Matenlock. male. Black) XIOB 0 VDC Filter P1 Ground (M8 bolt) P3 Circuit Breakers Fixing Rail x3 (Red. Black) P8 Subrack 3 x3 (Red.

2 and Top Fan Backplane GND 0V 4 P4 x4 P1 P1: P2: P3: P4: P5 − P7: P2 Spade. M6 hole Spade. x4 (Red) x4 (Blue) x4 (Black) P2 x3 (Red. female Triple Faston.16 Cable Descriptions 16.63 CIMI Bus Bar The following figure shows the CIMI (part number 3BK 07763) bus bar connections. M8 hole Spade. made. Black) Fixing Holes XIOB 0 VDC Filter P1 Ground (M8 bolt) P3 Circuit Breakers x3 (Red. Blue. male. Black) P7 Subrack 1 Bus Bar GND Bolt GND Filter 0V Breakers −48 V 1 2 3 XIOB GND −48 V 0V −48 V Subrack 1. Black) P6 Subrack 2 Fixing Rail x3 (Red. male. Blue. Black) P4 P5 Top Fan Backplane x3 (Red. Blue. female P3 3 1 4 3 P5 − P7 1 1 Figure 541: CIMI Bus Bar Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. Blue. M5 Matenlock. open tongue.14 889 / 914 .1.

64 RXRC The following figure shows the RXRC (part number 3BK 07920) connections.14 . female Figure 542: RXRC Connections 16.65 TXRC The following figure shows the TXRC (part number 3BK 07919) connections. straight. P2: Subminiature connectors. TRE/AN Shield Alignment Hole AN P1 Note: For ANS modules only one RXRC line is fitted P2 P1. 50 series N Figure 543: TXRC Connections 890 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. TRE/AN Shield AN Coaxial connector.16 Cable Descriptions 16. 50 series N Coaxial connector.1.1. 50 series SMB.

1 CA01 The following figure shows the CA01 (part number 3BK 07594) Abis cable connections.2. 16.14 891 / 914 . BTS A9100 side 1 Customer’s Distribution Board 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 Customer dependent Shield 6 9 Figure 544: CA01 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.16 Cable Descriptions 16.2 External Cables The following sections provide the physical and electrical characteristics for the indoor and outdoor external cables.

BTS A9100 side 1 Customer’s Distribution Board 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 Customer dependent Shield 6 9 Figure 545: CA02 Connections 16.3 CA03 The following figure shows the CA03 (part number 3BK 07596) Abis cable connections.2.2 CA02 The following figure shows the CA02 (part number 3BK 07595) Abis cable connections. TX Shield RX Figure 546: CA03 Connections 892 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.16 Cable Descriptions 16.14 .2.

14 893 / 914 . Shield Figure 547: CA04 Connections 16.2.5 CA-CBTE The following figure shows the CA-CBTE (part number 3BK 07951) cable connections.2.16 Cable Descriptions 16.4 CA04 The following figure shows the CA04 (part number 3BK 07597) Abis cable connections. SUM Shield 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9−pin Sub−D female 5 1 BTS Terminal 6 9 9 6 Figure 548: CA-CBTE Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

crimp.8 mm 1 2 3 4 Figure 551: CA-PC2W16 Connections 894 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.2. 5. 9 mm Figure 549: CA-GC35 Connections 16. BTS A9100 Black Wire 0 V 1 Customer’s −48/0 VDC Source Black Wire 0 V 3 Blue Wire −48 V 2 Lug.8 mm Blue Wire −48 V 4 Lug.2. ring. crimp.7 CA-GND The following figure shows the CA-GND (part number 3BK 25349) cable connection.2.6 CA-GC35 The following figure shows the CA-GC35 (part number 3BK 08031) cable connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16. Ring M8 Figure 550: CA-GND Connection 16. ring. Lug. 5.8 CA-PC2W16 The following figure shows the CA-PC2W16 (part number 3BK 08029) cable connections. BTS A9100 Customer’s Ground Point Lug. crimp.14 . Ring M8 Lug. ring.

5.2. ring. 5.14 895 / 914 . BTS A9100 Blue Wire −48 V Customer’s −48 VDC Source Blue Wire −48 V Lug. Ring M6 Shrinking Sleeve Lug.2. ring. ring.11 CA-PCEBM The following figure shows the CA-PCEBM (part number 3BK 25260) cable connection. 5. crimp. Lug.8 mm Lug. ring.16 Cable Descriptions 16.8 mm Lug.9 CA-PC35BK The following figure shows the CA-PC35BL (part number 3BK 08032) cable connections. 5.2.10 CA-PC35BL The following figure shows the CA-PC35BL (part number 3BK 08032) cable connections. BTS A9100 Black Wire 0 V Customer’s 0 VDC Source Black Wire 0 V Lug.8 mm Figure 552: CA-PC35BK Connections 16. crimp.8 mm Figure 553: CA-PC35BL Connections 16. crimp. crimp. Pin Figure 554: CA-PCEBM Connection 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.

7/15 15 15 1 9 I II III iV 1 9 Figure 556: CA-RIBEB Connections 896 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 8 3/11.13 CA-RIBEB The following figure shows the CA-RIBEB (part number 3BK 25258) cable connections. Lug. 6/14 5/13. Ring M6 Shrinking Sleeve Lug.2. 8 3/11. 2/10 4/12. 2/10 4/12.12 CA-PCEBP The following figure shows the CA-PCEBP (part number 3BK 25259) cable connection.2.16 Cable Descriptions 16. 7/15 Quad Number COAR/OUTC Side P1/male 1/9.14 . 15 pin male connector 15 pin female connector 123 123 123 8 Wiring list 123 123 123 8 External Battery Side P2/female 1/9. 6/14 5/13. Pin Figure 555: CA-PCEBP Connection 16.

14 CA-RIBEO The following figure shows the CA-RIBEO (part number 3BK 26138) cable connections. 7/15 1234 1234 1234 8 Quad Number 15 1 9 1/9. 6/14 5/13. 2/10 4/12. assembling on site after guiding through cable gland) 15 pin male connector (to OUTC at BTS ) 1234 1234 1234 8 15 Wiring list COAR/OUTC Side P1/male External Battery Side P2/female 1/9. 15 pin female connector (to first RIBAT at external Battery Cabinet outdoor.14 897 / 914 . 7/15 I II III iV 1 9 Figure 557: CA-RIBEO Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 8 3/11. 2/10 4/12. 8 3/11.2. 6/14 5/13.16 Cable Descriptions 16.

BTS A9100 1 5 Shield G2 BTS 1 5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 Shield Solder Point 6 9 6 9 Figure 558: OCC23 Connections 898 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .2.15 OCC23 The following figure shows the OCC23 (part number 3BK 08303) cable connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16.

2. BTS A9100 1 5 Shield BTS A9100 1 5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 Shield Solder Point 6 9 6 9 Figure 559: OCC33 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 899 / 914 .16 Cable Descriptions 16.16 OCC33 The following figure shows the OCC33 (part number 3BK 08304) cable connections.

17 SCG2/3 The following figure shows the SCG2/3 (part number 3BK 08101) cable connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16.2. G2 BTS 1 5 Shield BTS A9100 1 5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 9−pin Sub−D male 9 6 Shield Solder Point 5 1 6 9 Figure 560: SCG2/3 Connections 900 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

COAR of First BTS A9100 1 2 Shield COAR of Second BTS A9100 1 2 6 3 7 4 8 5 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 6 3 7 4 8 5 9 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 6 9 6 9 Figure 561: SCG3 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.16 Cable Descriptions 16.14 901 / 914 .18 SCG3 The following figure shows the SCG3 (part number 3BK 07950) cable connections.2.

16 Cable Descriptions 16.14 . BTS A9100 1 5 9 P3 4 8 3 7 2 6 P1 9 P3 5 9 P1 5 P1. P2.2. P3: 9−pin Sub−D male 1 6 Shield Solder Point P2 6 9 1 1 5 P2 6 6 2 7 3 8 4 Shield G1 BTS Mark1 1 9 5 Figure 562: SCM1/3 Connections 902 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.19 SCM1/3 The following figure shows the SCM1/3 (part number 3BK 08102) cable connections.

20 SCM2/3 The following figure shows the SCM2/3 (part number 3BK 08103) cable connections.16 Cable Descriptions 16.2. G1 BTS Mark2 1 5 Shield BTS A9100 1 5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 9−pin Sub−D male 1 5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 9−pin Sub−D male 9 6 Shield Solder Point 5 1 6 9 Figure 563: SCM2/3 Connections 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 903 / 914 .

16 Cable Descriptions 904 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.14 .

where necessary. and provide data tables. when appropriate.14 905 / 914 . References to the relevant European and International standards are also given. 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.17 Environment 17 Environment The following sections describe the environment.

17.2 Operational Conditions Operational conditions are specified in accordance with Class 3. ETS 300 019-1-3.1 Environmental Requirements The 9100 BTS equipment housings provide the necessary environmental and safety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019.17 Environment 17.14 .1E. Type Climatic Condition Low temperature High temperature Low relative humidity High relative humidity Low absolute humidity High absolute humidity Rate of change of temperature Low air pressure High air pressure Mechanical (Vibration) Shock Displacement amplitude in Frequency Range 2-9 Hz Acceleration amplitude in Frequency Range 9-200 Hz Limit -5 C +45 C 5% 90 % 1 g/ m3 25 g/ m3 0.1 Indoor Climatic and Mechanical Conditions This section describes the climatic and mechanical conditions required for the safe and efficient operation of indoor 9100 BTS equipment. 17. for indoor equipment. as shown in the following table.5 C/ min 70 kPa 106 kPa 0.1. It includes information on the following: Environmental requirements Operational conditions Transportation conditions Storage conditions.1 m/ s2 40 m/ s 2 Table 170: Environmental Conditions for Indoor Operation 906 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 mm p-p 0.1.

17 Environment 17.1.5 mm 10 m/ s 2 3 15 m/ s2 100 mm 20 m/ s 5 kPa 2 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3 Transportation Conditions Transportation conditions are specified in accordance with Class2. ETS 300 019 -1-2. Type Climatic Condition Low temperature High temperature High relative humidity High absolute humidity Low air pressure Mechanical Displacement amplitude (frequency 2.9 Hz) Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9-200 Hz) Acceleration amplitude (frequency 200-500 Hz) Free Fall Steady State Acceleration Static Load Table 171: Environmental Conditions for Transportation Limit -40 C +70 C 95 % 60 g/ m 70 kPa 3. as shown in the following table.14 907 / 914 .2.

Type Climatic Condition Low temperature High temperature Low relative humidity High relative humidity Low absolute humidity High absolute humidity Low air pressure High air pressure Mechanical Displacement amplitude (frequency 2 .17 Environment 17.5 mm 5 m/ s 2 3 40 m/ s2 5 kPa 908 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.9 Hz) Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9 .1.4 Storage Conditions Storage conditions are specified in accordance with Class 1.2.5 g/ m3 29 g/ m 70 kPa 106 kPa 1. ETS 300 019-1 -1.14 .200 Hz) Steady State Acceleration Static Load Table 172: Environmental Conditions for Storage Limit -25 C +55 C 10 % 100 % 0. as shown in the following table.

2. Type Climatic Condition Low temperature High temperature Low relative humidity High relative humidity Low absolute humidity High absolute humidity Rate of change of temperature Low air pressure High air pressure Mechanical (Vibration) Shock Displacement amplitude in Frequency Range 2-9 Hz Acceleration amplitude in Frequency Range 9-200 Hz Limit -45 C +45 C 8% 100 % 0.2 Operational Conditions Operational conditions are specified in accordance with Class 4.2 Outdoor Climatic and Mechanical Conditions This section describes the climatic and mechanical conditions required for the safe and efficient operation of outdoor 9100 BTS equipment.2.17 Environment 17.5 mm p-p 5 m/ s 2 3 70 m/ s2 Table 173: Environmental Conditions for Outdoor Operation 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. 17. as shown in the following table.26 g/ m 30 g/ m3 0.1E.1 Environmental Requirements The 9100 BTS equipment housings provide the necessary environmental and safety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019. for outdoor equipment. ETS 300 019-1 -4. It includes information on the following: Environmental requirements Operational conditions Transportation conditions Storage conditions. 17.14 909 / 914 .5 C/ min 70 kPa 106 kPa 1.

14 . as shown in the following table. ETS 300 019 -1-2.5 mm 10 m/ s 2 3 15 m/ s2 100 mm 20 m/ s 5 kPa 2 910 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.17 Environment 17.2.9 Hz) Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9-200 Hz) Acceleration amplitude (frequency 200-500 Hz) Free Fall Steady State Acceleration Static Load Table 174: Environmental Conditions for Transportation Limit -40 C +70 C 95 % 60 g/ m 70 kPa 3.2. Type Climatic Condition Low temperature High temperature High relative humidity High absolute humidity Low air pressure Mechanical Displacement amplitude (frequency 2 .3 Transportation Conditions Transportation conditions are specified in accordance with Class2.

2.9 Hz) Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9 .5 g/ m3 29 g/ m 70 kPa 106 kPa 1. Type Climatic Condition Low temperature High temperature Low relative humidity High relative humidity Low absolute humidity High absolute humidity Low air pressure High air pressure Mechanical Displacement amplitude (frequency 2 .14 911 / 914 .2.17 Environment 17.200 Hz) Steady State Acceleration Static Load Table 175: Environmental Conditions for Storage Limit -25 C +55 C 10 % 100 % 0. as shown in the following table.5 mm 5 m/ s 2 3 40 m/ s2 5 kPa 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.4 Storage Conditions Storage conditions are specified in accordance with Class 1. ETS 300 019-1 -1.

It provides information on the following: EMC immunity Transient bursts Spurious emissions. 80 MHz to 1 GHz (+ 1. Note that all outdoor 9100 BTS external lines have better surge protection characteristics than that defined in IEC 1000-4-5.8 GHz excepted reception band).3 Electromagnetic Compatibility This section describes the EMC compatibility of 9100 BTS equipment.17 Environment 17.1 EMC Immunity This section contains information on EMC immunity. 17. Parameter Electrostatic Discharge RF Common Mode Radiated Fields Transient Pulse Immunity Standard IEC 1000-4-2: Levels 2 and 3. Surges (on AC lines) IEC 1000-4-5: level 500 V at differential mode. IEC 1000-4-4: Levels 2 and 3 (see Table Permitted Transient Bursts (177) ). ETS 300 342-2. EMC immunity ensures the normal operation of 9100 BTS equipment when subjected to the conditions specified in the following table. 9100 BTS equipment complies with the following EMC standards: European Directive 89/336/EEC ETS 300 342 Part 2. Table 176: EMC Immunity (TM) 912 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.3. IEC 1000-4-6: 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz. IEC 1000-4-3: 3 V/ m. and Draft ETSI EN 300 342 Part 2. level 1 kV at common mode.14 .

4 GHz Frequency Range 150 kHz .21 30 MHz .3 Spurious Emissions The following table shows potential EMC emissions of 9100 BTS equipment (unintentionally produced).3.3.14 913 / 914 . Type Conducted Emissions on Power Lines: Radiated Emissions from Enclosure: Table 178: EMC Emissions Standard EN 55022 Class B (AC powered BTS) EN 55022 Class A (DC powered BTS) GSM 11.17 Environment 17. Peak Amplitude +/-2000 V +/-1000 V +/-500 V Level 3 2 2 Line Type AC power lines DC power lines Signal lines (including RF) Table 177: Permitted Transient Bursts Note: The amplitudes shown in the above table must not exceed 50 ns duration or have a rise time of less than 5 ns. 17.2 Transient Bursts The following table shows the IEC 1000-4-4 Levels 2 and 3 transient voltage bursts.30 MHz 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed. These are the voltage bursts that the different types of lines can withstand without causing permanent defects to the equipment.

Safety Requirements for Radio Transmitting Equipment EN60950 . The acoustic noise generated by the equipment is measured according to ISO 7779 and ISO 9296.Safety of Information Technology Equipment EN41003 .17 Environment 17. 914 / 914 3BK 21242 AAAA TQZZA Ed.22 and ETS 300 753.5 Safety Requirements Safety standards offer protection against: Electric shock Skin burns Radio frequency radiation hazards Fire hazards Mechanical hazards Energy hazards Chemical hazards.Safety of Information Technology Equipment.4 Acoustic Noise This section describes the acoustic noise parameters which apply to 9100 BTS equipment. The indoor and outdoor BTS are compliant with the following safety standards: Indoor BTS EN60215 .14 .Safety Colors and Safety Signs.Safety Requirements for Apparatus for Connection to Telecommunications Networks ISO 3864 . Noise limits for the measurements are in accordance with GSM 11.Safety Requirements for Radio Transmitting Equipment EN60950 . respectively. Outdoor BTS EN60215 . 17.